2 - AA Electric

® 

General catalog 

2007-2008 

Control solutions 

for industry 

PC01 US/CD 09 06 

2007-2008 USA CAN 

® 

electric 

100% electricity 

Sold by AA Electric 1-800-237-8274 • Lakeland, FL • Lawrenceville, GA • East Rutherford, NJ 

Web : www.A-Aelectric.com Email: njsales@a-aelectric.com

In the U.S.A. 

In Canada 

Sales & Technical Support 

Tel (757) 545-4700 Tel (450) 681-9200 

Fax (757) 545-2900 Fax (450) 681-9884 

E-mail info@LovatoUsa.com 

E-mail info@Lovato.ca 

at the customer’s 

service 

On line information 

www.LovatoUsa.com 

www.Lovato.ca 

Business Address 

LOVATO Electric Inc. 

LOVATO Electric Corp. 

124 Robert Hall Court 109 3200 Avenue Jacques Bureau 

CHESAPEAKE, VA 23324 

LAVAL, QC H7P 0A9 

USA 

Canada 

This catalog is for information purposes 

only and is subject to change without 

notice. Catalog descriptions, technical and 

operational data as well as other details 

herein specified do not have any contractual 

value so must be considered only as 

indication. The products, illustrated in this 

publication, are also subject to change or 

improvement at any moment and without 

prior notice so LOVATO ELECTRIC assume 

no responsibility for the effects of such 

changes. The products, given in this catalog, 

should be installed and used by qualified 

personnel and in compliance with the 

regulations in force for electric systems in 

order to avoid damages and safety hazards. 

The products, described in this catalog, 

do have a variety of uses; those 

responsible for the application and use of 

this control equipment must satisfy themselves 

that all necessary actions have been 

taken to ensure that each application and 

use meet all performance and safety 

requirements, including any applicable 

laws, regulations, codes and standards. 



WI THDRAW 

A01LOW BATERY VOLTAG 

A02HI BATERY VOLTAG GH 

A03LINE 1SWI TCH FAUL 

AT 

O 

OF 

TRI 

O 

LINE 

AUTOMATICTRANSFER SWI TCH CONTROLE 

A04LINE 2SWI TCH FAUL 

A05LINE PHASE SEQ 1WRONG 

A06LINE 2WRONG PHASE SEQ 

LOA 

LINE 

A07LOADNOT T.OU POWERED 

A08GENERATOR READ NOT 

A09EMERGENCY STO 

O 

WI THDRAW 

TRI 

O 

OF 

ALAR 

TES 

TES 

AU 

MA 

OF 

RESE 

Planet 

1 – Manual motor starters and protectors 

SWITCH 

2–Disconnect switches 

3–IEC style contactors 

4–Definite purpose contactors 

5–IEC style overload relays 

6–IEC style starters 

7–Push buttons and pilot devices, 22mm 

8–Limit, micro and foot switches 

9–Rotary cam switches 

our 

products 

Planet 

10 – Timers 

LOGIC DIN 

Planet 

L L L H 

L L L H 

11 – Protection relays 

12 – Liquid level control relays 

13 – Digital metering instruments and current transformers 

14 – Soft starters 

15 – Automatic power factor controllers 

16 – Automatic transfer switch controllers 

17 – Programmable logic relays 



newest 

products 

Motor starting and power control 

• Manual motor starters and protectors Page 1-2 

• IEC style contactors Page 3-2 

• IEC style overload relays Page 4-2 

• IEC style starters Page 5-2 

Digital measuring instruments 

• Modular Pages 13-2 and 13-3 

• Flush-mount Pages 13-4 and 13-5 

Add-on block with 

4 contacts for BF 

contactors 

Page 3-18 

12VAC/DC 

LED-integrated 

pilot lights 

Page 7-16 

Maintained illuminated 

mushroom-head 

operator plastic series 

Page 7-14 

Bi-directional 

limit switch 

Pages 8-6 8-7 

8-8 8-11 

Phase sequence 

and loss relay 

Page 11-2 

Liquid level 

control relay 

Page 11-2 

Start-up priority 

change relay 

Page 12-5 



Limit and micro switches 

• Prewired limit switches Page 8-18 

• Micro switches Page 8-26 

newest 

products 

Programmable logic relays 

• Master modules with 10, 12 or 10 

Inputs/Outputs, 24VDC-24VAC-110/240VAC Page 17-2 

• Expansion and communications modules Page 17-2 

Modular protection relays 

• Voltage monitoring at 600V Page 11-2 

• Current monitoring Page 11-4 

• Phase shift relays Page 11-5 

Soft starters 

up to 40HP at 600V 

Page 14-2 

Automatic transfer 

switch controllers 

Page 16-2 



COMPANY 

About us 

How to reach 

Quality 

PRODUCTS 

Our products 

News 

OnLine news 

FAQ 

INFORMATION 

Library-Download 

Fairs-Events 

Sales Organisation 

Contact us 

our internet 

site 

Our products 

The entire range of LOVATO 

Electric products with 

photographs, part numbers, 

characteristics and technical 

descriptions. 

News 

Up to date information and data 

of new products. 

Library-Download 

All available pubblications for our 

products. 

Software up-grades for our electronic 

products. 

Catalogs, brochures, technical 

instructions and data, software 

downloads, advertizing, etc., are 

available in English, Italian, Czech, 

French, Spanish, German, Polish, 

Portuguese and Russian. 

Fairs-Events 

The presence of LOVATO Electric at 

the main fair exhibitions during the 

current year, with handy links and 

indications. 

Calendars of LOVATO Electric 

initiatives: Meetings, training courses 

for entire production or dedicated 

sectors. 

Sponsorships and sports events. 

www.Lovato.ca (for Canada) 

www.LovatoUsa.com (for USA) 



LOVATO Electric, solid tradition with 85 years 

of on-going activity, is leader in 

electromechanical and automation product 

manufacturing field for industry. 

Equipment of early 

LOVATO Electric 

production. 

The presence of Lovato Electric in the most 

important world markets is the result of the 

company’s constant international strategy. 

Lovato Electric Italy, together with the ten 

foreign branches and official sales affiliates, 

represent the reference point for the 

distribution of the Lovato Electric products 

in over 80 countries. 

tradition and 

innovation 

LOVATO Electric in the world: 

LOVATO ELECTRIC S.P.A. (Italy) 

LOVATO ELECTRIC INC. (USA) 

LOVATO ELECTRIC CORP. (Canada) 

LOVATO ASIA (LTD (Hong Kong - China) 

LOVATO (U.K.) LTD (England) 

LOVATO DELTEC GMBH (Germany) 

LOVATO ELECTRIC SL (Spain) 

LOVATO ELECTRIC SP. Z O.O. (Poland) 

LOVATO SRO (Czech Republic) 

LOVATO REZ LTD (Latvia) 

LOVATO ELECTRIC DE MEXICO SA (Mexico) 

Modern technology for research, 

development, design and manufacture 

consent LOVATO Electric to offer products 

and solutions to enhance efficiency, 

reliability and safety in industrial and 

electrical systems. 

Manual motor starters, contactors, push 

buttons and selectors, digital multimeters, 

soft starters, automatic power factor 

controllers are just a few of the products 

entirely designed, developed and made by 

LOVATO Electric. 

Our products comply with major 

international standard requirements. 

LOVATO Electric, among the first in Italy, in 

1992, to hold the certification of the 

company’s quality management system, in 

compliance with ISO 9001 standards, has 

obtained the ISO 14001 certification for the 

environment management system as well. 

The company’s laboratories are, in addition, 

qualified and certified to conduct type 

testing, under ACAE direct control, for the 

emission of ACAE/LOVAG certifications. 



solutions and products 

Contactors for 

power factor 

correction 

Automatic 

power factor 

controllers 

Programmable logic 

relays 

Automatic transfer 

switch controllers 

Manual 

motor 

starters 

Disconnect 

switches 

Manual 

motor 

starters 

Timers 

Push buttons 

and selectors 

Contactors 

Contactors 

Voltage 

and 

current 

relays 

Contactors 

Overload 

relays 

Limit switches 

Micro 

switches 



for industrial automation 

Digital 

multimeters 

Digital 

multimeters 

Current 

transformers 

3-phase combined 

voltmeter, ammeter and 

wattmeter 

Disconnect 

switches 

IEC 

starters 

Soft sarters 

Rotary cam 

switches 


IEC starters 

Liquid level 

control relays 

Foot switches 




PAGE 1-2 

SM1B 

• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-32A 

(15 choices). 

PAGE 1-3 

SM2A 

• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 22-50A 

(4 choices). 

PAGE 1-3 

SM3A 

• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 45-100A 

(4 choices). 

PAGE 1-10 

LMS25 

• Thermal trip adjustment ranges 0.1-25A 

(13 choices) 



1 

MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS AND PROTECTORS 

Complete range from 0.1 to 

100 Amps 

Control and protection for 

individual or group motor 

applications 

Adjustable, single phase sensitive 

internal overload thermal trip 

class 10 

Short circuit protection 

Single lever circuit breaker type 

handle for SM types 

Terminals are IP20 touch-safe 

design 

Separate trip indicator/reset and 

test button 

Extensive assortment of 

accessories available 

RoHS compliant products available 

PLANET -SWITCH 

With thermal and magnetic trip releases 

SEC. PAGE 

Manual starters SM1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 2 

Manual starters SM2A and SM3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3 

Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4 

Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 8 

Manual starters LMS25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 10 

Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 11 

Short-circuit tripping indicator, standard supplied 

on all SM1B starters. 

Reset the indicator, as illustrated, to restore the 

manual starter. 



Lovato 

L 

TEST 

1-2 

Manual motor starters and protectors 

electric 

1 

Manual motor 

starters SM1B 

up to 32A 

11 SM1B 

L 

Lovato 

TEST 

Setting range UL maximum horsepower ratings Catalog number Price 

of thermal trip ❶ Single-phase ❷ Three-phase 

120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V 

[A] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] $ each 

0.1-0.16 – – – – – – 11 SM1B 00 95.00 

0.16-0.25 – – – – – – 11 SM1B 04 95.00 

0.25-0.4 – – – – – – 11 SM1B 08 95.00 

0.4-0.63 – – – – – – 11 SM1B 12 100.00 

0.63-1 – – – – 1 

/2 

1 

/2 11 SM1B 16 100.00 

1-1.6 – 1 

/10 – – 3 

/4 1 11 SM1B 20 100.00 

1.6-2.5 – 1 

/6 – 1 

/2 1 1 1 /2 11 SM1B 24 100.00 

2.5-4 1 

/8 

1 

/3 

1 

/2 

3 

/4 2 3 11 SM1B 28 100.00 

4-6.5 1 

/4 

1 

/2 

3 

/4 1 1 /2 3 5 11 SM1B 32 100.00 

6.3-10 1 

/2 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 7 1 /2 11 SM1B 36 118.00 

9-14 3 

/4 2 2 3 10 10 11 SM1B 40 118.00 

13-18 1 3 5 5 10 15 11 SM1B 44 122.00 

17-23 1 1 /2 3 5 7 1 /2 15 20 11 SM1B 48 129.00 

20-25 2 3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 11 SM1B 52 147.00 

24-32 2 5 10 10 20 30 11 SM1B 56 195.00 

❶ The appropriate thermal trip range of the manual starter should be selected on 

the basis of the motor nameplate full-load current since the horsepower 

General characteristics 

ratings given in the table are for reference only. 

❷ Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series; The SM1B series is a new generation of manual starters 

see wiring scheme on page W-2.. 

with thermal and magnetic trip releases. Motor control 

and protection, up to 20HP at 460V, are possible by the 

choice of suitable adjustment range, 0.1 to 32A. 

A magnetic trip indicator integrated on the SM1B 

starters avoids dangerous closing operations during 

short-circuit conditions, previously disconnected by the 

starter. 

The SM1B types are suitable for isolation. 

Operational characteristics 

– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V 

– Rated impulse voltage: 6kV 

– Rated frequency: 50/60Hz 

– Maximum rated current: 32A 

– Number of adjustment ranges: 15 (0.1 to 32A) 

– Power dissipation per phase: 2.2-9.7W 

– Magnetic tripping: 12 In max 

– Thermal tripping time class: 10A 

– Single-phase sensitive 

– Mechanical life: 100,000 cycles 

– Electrical life 32A (AC3): 100,000 cycles 

– Utilization category: A 

– Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 

– Mounting position: any 

– Degree of protection: IP20. 

Certifications and compliance 

UL listed, for USA and Canada, file E93602. 

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, 

IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

2.3Nm or 

20in lb max 

1Nm or 

9in lb max 

1Nm or 

9in lb max 

NOTE: When more than one starter are mounted, side by side, without 

leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the 

starter sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip 

adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated 

motor current. 

Add-on blocks/Accessories 

pages 1-4 to 7 

Dimensions 

page D-2 

Wiring diagrams 

page W-2 


Web : www.A-Aelectric.com Email: njsales@a-aelectric.com 

Technical characteristics 

page TC-2

electric 


1-3 

Manual motor 

starters SM2A-SM3A 

up to 100A 

11 SM2A 

11 SM3A 

Setting range UL maximum horsepower ratings Maximum short Catalog number Price 

of thermal trip ❶ Three-phase ciruit current 

rating 

200V 240V 480V 600V 480V 600V 

[A] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [kA] [kA] $ each 

22-32 10 10 25 30 50 10 11 SM2A 64 340.00 

28-40 10 15 30 40 50 10 11 SM2A 68 365.00 

36-45 15 15 30 40 50 10 11 SM2A 72 429.00 

40-50 15 20 40 50 50 10 11 SM2A 76 429.00 

45-63 20 25 50 60 50 10 11 SM3A 84 454.00 

57-75 25 30 60 75 50 10 11 SM3A 88 518.00 

70-90 30 30 75 100 50 10 11 SM3A 92 544.00 

80-100 30 40 75 100 50 10 11 SM3A 96 608.00 





NOTE: These types can be used as components in Group Installation as per NEC The SM2 and SM3 types are manual motor starters with 

430.53 (C). This means that multiple manual starters can be installed a wide adjustment range, 22 to 100A, in only two frame 

below one circuit breaker, with each manual starter controlling and 

protecting its own motor. 

sizes enabling motor control and protection up to 60HP 

at 460V. 

A magnetic trip indicator and padlockable operating 

handle are integrated on the SM2 and SM3 starters. 

Both are suitable for isolation. 

Their high breaking capacity consents to exclude 

protection fuses on the majority of the installations. 





– Maximum rated current: 50A (SM2A) and 

100A (SM3A) 

– Number od adjustment ranges: 

SM2A: 4 (22 to 50A) 

SM3A: 4 (45 to 100A) 

– Power dissipation per phase 

SM2A: 7.1-20W 

SM3A: 10-38W 


– Thermal tripping time class: 10 


– Life (cycles): Mechanical Electrical (Ie AC3) 

SM2A 50,000 25,000 

SM3A 50,000 25,000 


– Mounting: 

SM2A - screw fixing or on 35mm DIN rail 

(IEC/EN 60715) 

SM3A - screw fixing or on DIN rail 35mm 

(IEC/EN 60715) or 75mm (IEC/EN 60715) 

– Mounting position: Any 



UL listed, for USA and Canada, file E155982; 

CSA certified, file LR 73212. 


IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

1 

NOTE: When more than one starter are mounted, side by side, without 

leaving space between each to consent free air circulation on the 

starter sides, and have simultaneous operation, the thermal trip 

adjuster must be positioned at a value 15% higher than the rated 

motor current. 


page 1-8 and 9 

Dimensions 

page D-3 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

1-4 


Add-on blocks and accessories for SM1B types 

electric 

1 

11 SMX11... 11 SMX12... 

11 SMX13 11 

11 SMX15 11 SMX16 

11 SMX18 10 

11 SMX90 3 

11 SMX90 4 

11 SMX14 

11 SMX90 50 11 SMX90 31 

Characteristics Catalog Price 

number 

$ each 

Add-on auxiliary contacts. 

Front mount 2NO 11 SMX11 20 23.00 

Front mount 1NO+1NC 11 SMX11 11 23.00 

Side mount 1NO+1NC 11 SMX12 11 23.00 

Side mount 2NO 11 SMX12 20 23.00 

Side mount 2NC 11 SMX12 02 23.00 

Side mount indicator contacts 11 SMX13 11 34.00 

1NO+1NC for thermal and 

magnetic tripping ❶ 

Undervoltage trip releases. 

110-127VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX14 BC 57.00 

220-240VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX14 CL 57.00 

380-400VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX14 EA 57.00 

220-240VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX15 CL 72.00 

with early-make contacts 

380-400VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX15 EA 72.00 


Shunt trip releases. 

24VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX16 AF 57.00 

110-127VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX16 BC 57.00 

220-240VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX16 CL 57.00 

400-480VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX16 EA 57.00 

Padlockable attachment for operating lever. 

3 padlocks max 11 SMX18 10 10.00 

Adjuster anti-tamper. 

For all types 11 SMX18 12 8.00 

Padlockable door interlock rotary operators. 

3 padlocks max.Red-yellow color 11 SMX18 14 95.00 

3 padlocks max. Black color 11 SMX18 15 95.00 

Terminal block for busbar supply. 


Three-phase connection busbars 13/4in (45mm) spacing. 

For 2 breakers without 11 SMX90 32 18.00 

side-mount contacts 







Safety cover. 

For unused busbar terminals 11 SMX 90 31 4.00 

Three-phase connection busbars 21/8in (54mm) spacing. 

For 2 breakers complete with 11 SMX90 42 18.00 








Screw fixing adapter. 

Universal base for starter screw BFX89 01 3.00 

fixing 

❶ Tripping is viewed by the flag indicator on front. 

General and operational characteristics 

ADD-ON AUXILIARY BLOCKS 

– Snap on to the front or the right side of the starter 

– Maximum combination: 6 auxiliary contacts of which 

2 on front and 4 on the side (2 normal contacts and 

2 indicators) 

– Rated thermal current Ith: 6A (2.5A for SMX11...) 

– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (250V for SMX11...) 

– UL designation: C600 Q600 (C300 R300 for SMX11...); 

see details on page TC-3. 

– Conductor cross section connectable (1 or 2 wires) 

min/max: 0.75/2.5 mm 2 or AWG 18/14. 

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASE 

– Connectable to the left side of the starter 

– Consumption in-rush/holding: 12/3.5VA 

– Drop-out voltage: 0.35-0.7 Us 

– Pick-up voltage: 0.85-1.1 Us 


min/max: 0.75/2.5mm 2 or AWG 18/14. 

SHUNT TRIP RELEASE 

– Connectable to the left side of the starter 

– Inrush consumption: 20VA 

– Operating voltage: 0.7-1.1 Us 


min/max: 0.75/2.5mm 2 or AWG 18/14. 

THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBAR 

– Imax 63A 

– SMX90 3... 45mm spacing to reduce the width to the 

minimum 

– SMX90 4... 54mm spacing to consent to fit one 

side-mount auxiliary contact block on the starter 

– Conductor cross section connectable to terminal 

block for busbar supply min/max: 4/25mm 2 or 

AWG 10/4. 

TERMINAL BLOCK FOR BUSBAR SUPPLY 

– Imax 63A 

– Conductor cross section connectable min/max: 

4/25mm 2 or AWG 10/4. 


UL listed, for USA and Canada, file E93602 (contacts, 

releases and padlockable attachment). 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

BFX89 01 

Dimensions 

page D-2 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

electric 



1-5 

11 SMX90 03 

11 SMX17 10 

11 SMX17 11 

11 SMX31 41 

11 SMX32 41 

11 SMX90 10 11 SMX90 12 

11 SMX90 14 

11 SMX17 20 


number 

$ each 

Rigid starter contactor connections. 

For SM1B starter with BG 11 SMX90 03 11.00 

mini-contactor. 

For SM1B starter with BF09A, SMX31 41 ❶ 15.00 

BF12A, BF18A or BF25A contactor. 

Complete with cover 

For SM1B starter with BF26A, SMX32 41 ❶ 23.00 

BF32A or BF38A contactor. 

Complete with cover 

Adapter plate for full-voltage 11 SMX90 10 14.00 

starter with SM1B starter and BG 

or BF09A - BF38A contactor 

Adapter plate for reversing 11 SMX90 12 24.00 

contactor assembly with SM1B 

starter and BG or BF9-BF25 

or BF09A - BF38A contactors 

Adapter plate for wye-delta 11 SMX90 14 28.00 

starter with SM1B starter and 

45mm wide contactors 

(BF09A-BF38A-BF9C-BF25C) 

DIN rail for wire 11 SMX90 18 3.80 

bypass of contactor used 

with SMX90 14 plate 

DIN rail extension 11 SMX90 19 2.00 

for 55mm wide contactors 

Surface mount enclosures. 

IP40, 4in (100mm) wide 11 SMX17 10 38.00 

IP40 ❷, 3.3in (85mm) wide 11 SMX17 11 32.00 

Flush mount enclosure. 

IP40, 4in (100mm) wide 11 SMX17 20 24.00 

Accessories for enclosures. 

Padlockable rotary operators. 

IP65. Grey/Black color. 11 SMX17 30❷ 12.00 

For SMX17 10 and 

SMX17 20 enclosures 

IP65. Red-yellow color. 11 SMX17 35❷ 12.00 

For SMX17 10 and 


Operator with emergency stop button. 

IP65. For SMX17 11 and 11 SMX17 40❷ 33.00 


IP65 membrane complete with rim. 

For SMX17 11 enclosure 11 SMX17 45 12.00 

Neutral connection. 

For SMX17 10 and SMX17 20 11 SMX17 50 6.00 

Pilot lights. 

Green 23 NEONV❸V 18.00 

Red 23 NEONR❸V 18.00 

PG adapters for enclosures. 

Metal, for PG16 to 1 /2” NPT G616 3.00 

Plastic, for PG16 to 1 /2” NPT G617 9.00 

❶ To obtain IP65 degree of protection, mount the 11 SMX17 45 membrane. 

❷ The device obtained with this operator is not suitable for isolation per 

IEC/EN 60947-2 standards. 

❸ Complete with required voltage as follows: 24, 110 for 110/120, or 230VAC. 


SM1 - CONTACTOR CONNECTION 

The SMX90 03, SMX31 41 and SMX32 41 rigid 

connections electrically fasten the breaker together with 

the contactor forming a single-unit starter for quick 

installation on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715). 

STARTER ASSEMBLY ADAPTER PLATES 

The elements consent to preassemble starters and to 

form trim and compact single-unit equipment for quick 

and easy installation. 

The starter adapter plates install on 35mm DIN rail 

(IEC/EN 60715). 

SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURE 

– Top or bottom entry 

• PG16 thread for SMX17 10; 

• 22.5mm knockout for SMX17 11 

– Rear entry 

• 22.5mm knockout 

– Holds a SM1B starter equipped with one side-mount 

contact block (100mm wide version only), one frontmount 

block and either one shunt or undervoltage 

release 

– Ground terminal included. 

FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURE 

– Use with starter, complete with 1 front-mount and 

1 side-mount blocks and one shunt or undervoltage 

release 

– Ground terminal included 

– Cut-out size, 4.02x5.62in (102x142.8mm). 

PADLOCKABLE ROTARY ACTUATOR 

– Suitable for SMX17 10 and SMX17 20 enclosures 

– Raises the degree of protection of the enclosure to 

IP65 

– 3 padlocks maximum. 

ACTUATOR WITH EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON 

– Suitable for SMX17 11 enclosures 

– Raises the degree of protection of the enclosure to 

IP65. 


UL listing for USA and Canada pending for SMX90 03, 

SMX31 41 and SMX32 41 connections. 

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1. 

1 

11 SMX17 35 

11 SMX17 40 

11 SMX17 45 

Dimensions 

page D-2 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

® 

® 

® 

® 

® 

® 

TEST 

® 

® 

1-6 



electric 

1 

Combinations 

Front-mount contacts. 

Side-mount contacts. 

Undervoltage trip release. 

Shunt trip release. 

Side-mount contacts. 

Undervoltage trip release with auxiliary contacts. 

SMX14❶ 

SMX16❶ 

SMX15 

SMX1311❷ 

SMX12❷ 

SMX1311❷ 

SMX12❷ 

SMX11 

❶ Only one add-on block can be fitted on the left side of the breaker. 

❷ One of the following combinations can be mounted on the right side of the breaker: 

– One each of SMX13 11 and SMX12 

or one only SMX13 11 

or one only SMX12 

Three-phase connection busbars 

SMX90 50 

SMX90 35 

SMX90 31 

SMX90 34 

SMX90 32 

SMX90 33 

® ® 

® ® 

® ® 

® ® 

TEST TEST 

TEST TEST TEST 

TEST TEST TEST TEST 

TEST 

Three-phase connection busbar, 

1 3 /4 (45mm) spacing (starters 

without add-on blocks). 

SMX90 45 

SMX90 50 

SMX90 31 

SMX90 42 

SMX90 44 

SMX90 43 

® ® 

TEST TEST 

TEST 

TEST 

TEST 

TEST 

TEST 

® ® 

TEST TEST TEST 

Three-phase connection 

busbar, 2 1 /8 (54mm) 

spacing (starters with 

add-on blocks). 

Dimensions 

page D-2 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

® 

® 

® 

® 

® 

L 

® 

electric 



1-7 

Combinations 

Rigid starter-contactor connection and protection cover 

1 

TEST 

SM1B 

TEST 

SM1B 

TEST 

SM1B 

SMX31 41 

SMX32 41 

SMX90 03 

BG 

BF09A-BF25A 

BF26A-BF38A 

Padlockable attachment for 

operating lever 

Adjuster sealing kit 

Padlockable door interlock handle 

SMX18 14 

SMX18 15 

Lovato 

SMX18 10 

SMX18 12 

Surface mount enclosure SMX17 10 or SMX17 11 

Surface mount enclosure SMX17 11 complete with 

emergency stop button SMX17 40. 

❶ 

SMX12... 

TEST 

SMX13... 

SMX15... 

SMX11... 

SMX17 40 

SMX16... 

Flush mount enclosure SMX17 20 

SMX14... 

❶ Only one contact block can be fitted on 

the right and on front and one release 

on the left. 

SMX17 11 

Dimensions 

page D-2 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

1-8 


Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A types 

electric 

1 

11 SMX20 11 

11 SMX21 11 

11 SMX22 

11 SMX23 11 


number 

$ each 

Add-on auxiliary contacts. 

Front mount 1 double throw 11 SMX20 11 23.00 

Front mount 1NO+1NC 11 SMX21 11 23.00 

Side mount 1NO+1NC 11 SMX22 11 23.00 

Side mount 2NO 11 SMX22 20 23.00 

Side mount 2NC 11 SMX22 02 23.00 

Side mount indicator 11 SMX23 11 34.00 

contacts (1NO+1NC) for 

thermal trip and (1NO+1NC) 

for magnetic trip ❶ 

Undervoltage trip releases. 

110-127VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX24 BC 57.00 

220-240VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX24 CL 57.00 

380-400VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX24 EA 57.00 

220-240VAC (50/60Hz) 11 SMX25 CL 72.00 


380-400VAC (50/60Hz) 11 SMX25 EA 72.00 


Shunt trip releases. 

24VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX26 AF 57.00 

110-127VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX26 BC 57.00 

220-240VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX26 CL 57.00 

400-480VAC 50/60Hz 11 SMX26 EA 57.00 

Padlockable door interlock rotary operator. 

3 padlocks max, black 11 SMX28 05 99.00 

3 padlocks max, red/yellow 11 SMX28 10 99.00 


ADD-ON AUXILIARY BLOCKS 

– Snap on to the front or the left side of the starter 

– Maximum combination: 8 auxiliary contacts of which 

2 on front and 6 on the side (2 normal contacts and 

4 indicators) 

– Rated thermal current Ith: 10A (2.5A for SMX21 11) 

– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 690V (250V for SMX20 

and SMX22) 

– UL designation: A600 Q300 (C300 R300 for SMX20 

and SMX21); see page TC-3 for details. 


min/max: 0.5/2.5mm 2 and AWG 18/14. 

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP RELEASE 

– Snap on to the right side of the starter 

– Consumption inrush/holding: 20.2/7.2 VA; 13/2.4 W 

– Dropout voltage: 0.35-0.7 Us 

– Pickup voltage: 0.85-1.1 Us 



SHUNT TRIP RELEASE 

– Snap on to the right side of the starter 

– Inrush consumption: 20.2VA; 13W 

– Operating voltage: 0.7-1.1 Us 




For contacts and releases, UL listed, for USA and 

Canada, file E93601, CSA certified, file LR 703212. 

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

❶ See diagram on page W-2 for the exact operation. 

11 SMX24 

11 SMX25 

11 SMX26 

Dimensions 

page D-3 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

electric 


Add-on blocks and accessories for SM2A and SM3A types 

1-9 

Mounting position 

1 

SMX24 

SMX25 

SMX26 

L 

Lovato 

SMX23 11 

SMX22 

SMX20 11 

SMX21 11 

Padlockable door interlock rotary operator SMX28 05 - SMX28 10 

L 

Lovato 

max. 

max ¿ 8 Ø mm 0.32in (8mm) 

Dimensions 

page D-3 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

1-10 


Manual motor starter LMS25 up to 25A 

electric 

1 

Manual motor 

starter LMS25 

up to 25A 

11 LMS 25 

Setting range UL maximum horsepower ratings Catalog number Price 

of thermal trip ❶ Single-phase ❷ Three-phase 

120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V 

[A] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] $ each 

0.1-0.16 – – – – – – 11 LMS25 016T 85.00 

0.16-0.25 – – – – – – 11 LMS25 025T 85.00 

0.25-0.4 – – – – – – 11 LMS25 04T 85.00 

0.4-0.63 – – – – – – 11 LMS25 063T 85.00 

0.63-1 – – – – – 1 

/2 11 LMS25 1T 85.00 

1-1.6 – – – – 3 

/4 

3 

/4 11 LMS25 1V6T 85.00 

1.6-2.5 – 1 

/6 

1 

/2 

1 

/2 1 1 1 /2 11 LMS25 2V5T 85.00 

2.5-4 1 

/8 

1 

/4 

3 

/4 1 2 3 11 LMS25 4T 85.00 

4-6.3 1 

/4 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 11 LMS25 6V3T 85.00 

6.3-10 1 

/2 1 2 3 5 7 1 /2 11 LMS25 10T 100.00 

10-16 1 2 3 5 10 10 11 LMS25 16T 100.00 

16-20 1 3 5 5 10 15 11 LMS25 20T 102.00 

20-25 2 3 5 7 1 /2 15 20 11 LMS25 25T 132.00 




❷ Single-phase horsepower ratings are based on wiring the three poles in series. 


The LMS25 manual motor starter is particularly suitable for 

controlling small operating machines. 

Releases and auxiliary contacts make it also suitable for 

more complex uses. 

Wall and flush-mount enclosures allow to install the LMS25 

starter in the most disparate environmental conditions 

(dust, humidity, aggressive environmental agents, etc.). 





– Maximum rated current: 25A 

– Number of adjustment ranges: 13 (0.1 to 25A) 

– Power dissipation per phase: 2-15W 


– Thermal tripping time class: 10 



– Trip free 


– Electrical life 25A (AC3): 100,000 cycles 

– Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) or screw 

fixing 

– Mounting position: Any 



UL listed for USA and Canada, file E155982. 

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-2, 

IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

Dimensions 

page D-3 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

electric 


Add-on blocks and accessories for LMS25 types 

1-11 

11 LMH 11 LMU - 11 LMA 

11 SMX90 32 

11 SMX90 50 

11 LMZ111 - 11 LMZ112 

11 LMZ113 - 11 LMZ114 

11 LMZ105 11 LMZ106 

Description Catalog Price 

number 

$ each 

Add-on auxiliary contacts. Side mount. 

1NO + 1NC 11 LMH 11 5.00 

2NO 11 LMH 20 5.00 

1NO 11 LMH 10 5.00 

1NC 11 LMH 01 5.00 

Undervoltage trip release. 

To fit inside starter 11 LMU❶ 41.00 

Shunt trip release. 

To fit inside starter 11 LMA❶ 41.00 

Terminal block for busbar supply. 


Three-phase connection busbars 1 3 /4in (45mm) spacing. 









Three-phase connection busbars 2 1 /8in (54mm) spacing. 









Surface mount enclosures. 

IP41. 3.1in (80mm) wide 11 LMZ 112 22.00 


Flush mount enclosures. 



Accessories for enclosures. 

Locking mechanism. 

3 padlocks maximum 11 LMZ 105 14.00 

Emergency stop button. 

For all types 11 LMZ 106 32.00 

Neutral connection. 

For all types 11 LMN PE 14.00 

Pilot light. 

Green 23 NEONV❷V 7.00 

Red 23 NEONR❷V 7.00 

Spare IP55 membrane complete with rim. 

For all types 11 LMM 4.00 

Adapter for PG16 to M25 entry. 

For LMZ111 and LMZ112 11 LM M25PG16 4.00 

❶ Complete with required voltage and frequency. Available voltages: 

24, 48, 110, 220 for 220/240, 380 for 380/415, 440 for 440/460, 480, 575VAC. 

➋ Indicate required voltage value as follows: 

24, 110 for 110/120 or 230VAC. 


ADD-ON AUXILIARY CONTACTS 

– Connectable to right or left side of starter 

– Maximum combination: 4 auxiliary contacts 


– Rated thermal current Ith: 6A 

– Operational current AC15: 3.5A 230V; 2A 400V 

– Protection fuse (gL or gG): 6A max 


min/max: 0.75-2.5mm 2 or AWG 18/14 

– Width of the auxiliary contacts LMH equal to 0.5 

standard DIN43880 modules. 

UNDERVOLTAGE AND SHUNT TRIP RELEASES 

– Must be fitted inside the motor starter. 

Undervoltage Shunt 

Rated frequency 50 or 60Hz 50 or 60Hz 

Release range 0.35-0.7 Us –– 

Operating range 0.85-1.1 Us 0.7-1.1 Us 

On-load factor 100% –– 

THREE-PHASE CONNECTION BUSBAR 

– Imax 63A 

– SMX90 3... 1 3 /4in (45mm) spacing to reduce the width to 

the minimum 

– SMX90 4... 2 1 /8in (54mm) spacing to consent to fit one 

side-mount auxiliary contact block on the starter 

– Conductor cross section connectable to terminal block 

for busbar supply min/max: 4/25mm 2 or AWG 10/4. 

TERMINAL BLOCK FOR BAR SUPPLY 

– Imax 63A 

– Conductor cross section connectable min/max: 4/25mm 2 

or AWG 10/4. 

SURFACE MOUNT ENCLOSURE 

– Top or bottom entry: 

• M25 threaded knockouts 

– Rear entry: 

• 0.6in (15.5mm) knockouts 

– Up to two auxiliary contact blocks may be mounted 


FLUSH MOUNT ENCLOSURE 

– Window size 2.8x4.5in (70x115mm) 

– Up to two auxiliary contact blocks may be mounted 


ACCESSORIES FOR ENCLOSURES 

Locking mechanism: 

– Prevents closing operation; 3 padlocks maximum. 

Emergency stop button: 

– Turn to release 

– Red push-button Ø 1.4in (35mm) 

NOTE: Once mounted on the enclosure, these accessories 

raise the degree of protection from IP41 to IP55. 


UL listed for USA and Canada, file E155982 for contacts 

and releases. 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

1 

11 LMNPE 

23 NEON...V 

Dimensions 

page D-3 


page W-2 




pages TC-2 and 3

PAGE 2-2 

PANEL MOUNTING PLATE VERSION 

• 30A to 100A ratings 

• To complete with extension and handle. 

ACCESSORIES 

• Padlockable IP65 handles 

• Door interlock extensions. 

PAGE 2-3 



2 

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 

30, 40, 60, 80 and 100 Amp ratings 

Suitable for motor disconnect 

Three-pole door interlock version 

Modular and compact size 

Door mounting kit 


Disconnect switches 

SEC. PAGE 

Three pole switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 2 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 3 



2-2 


electric 

2 

Three-pole 

switches 

GUS040A 

General AC23A Description Catalog Price 

purpose rating 

number 

400V 

[A] [kW] $ each 

For panel plate or DIN rail mounting. To be completed with 

extension and handle. Suitable to break all lines. 

30 10 3-pole switch body GUS030A 50.00 





HORSEPOWER RATINGS 

Rated voltage 1 phase 2 or 3 phase 

[VAC] 

GUS030A motor ratings. 

110-120 2 2 

200-208 

230-240 

3 7 1 /2 

265-277 3 7 1 /2 

380-415 5 10 

440-480 7 1 /2 15 

550-600 10 20 


110-120 2 2 

200-208 

230-240 

3 7 1 /2 


– Suitable as motor disconnect and motor controller 

– Use with design B, C, D motors 

– Fixing on panel mounting plate 

– Mounting on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 

– Padlockable in 0 position with no tools 

Opertional characteristics 


– Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 8kV 

– Rated short-time withstand current (1s) Icw: 1260A 

– Tightening torque: 35 inlb/4Nm 

– Maximum voltage for motors, general use and 

resistive loads 

• 600V for GUS30, GUS40 and GUS80 

• 480V for GUS60 and GUS100 

– Conductor cross section (1 wire) min/max: 

2.5/16mm 2 or AWG 14/4 if stranded; 2.5/6mm 2 or 

AWG 14/10 if solid. 


UL listed for USA and Canada, File E155982. 


IEC/EN 60947-3 and UL508. 

265-277 3 7 1 /2 

380-415 5 10 

440-480 7 1 /2 20 

550-600 10 25 


110-120 2 2 

200-208 5 10 

230-240 5 10 

265-277 5 10 

380-415 7 1 /2 15 

440-480 10 25 


110-120 3 2 

200-208 7 1 /2 15 

230-240 10 20 

265-277 10 20 

380-415 15 30 

440-480 20 40 

550-600 30 50 


110-120 5 2 

200-208 10 20 

230-240 15 25 

265 15 25 

277 15 30 

380-415 20 40 

440-480 30 50 

Accessories 

page 2-3 

Dimensions 

page D-4 



OFF 

electric 

Disconnect switches 2-3 

Accessories 

GUSH2 


number 

$ each 

Handles. 

Black padlockable IP65 handle GUSH2 15.20 

Red/yellow padlockable IP65 handle GUSH3 15.20 

Door interlock extensions. 

3 1 /2in (90mm) long GUSS090 4.70 

6in (150mm) long GUSS150 5.50 

8in (200mm) long GUSS200 6.30 

12in (300mm) long GUSS300 8.00 

Front mounting adapter. 

Kit complete with shaft GUS00C 17.00 


The handle is supplied complete with: 

– Front plate (bezel) 

– Shaft guide collar 

– 3 plastic-threading screws, one of which to attach the 

front plate to the panel and the other two to attach the 

collar to the front plate 

– Rotary knob with gasket. 




IEC/EN 60947-3 and UL508. 

2 

ON 

GUSS150 

Dimensions 

page D-4 



PAGE 3-4 

THREE-POLE CONTACTORS 

• Ith ratings in AC1 duty at ≤40°C: 16A to 1600A 

• Ie ratings in AC3 440V duty: 6A to 630A 

• Power ratings in AC3 400V duty: 2.2kW to 

335kW 

• AC or DC control coil. 

PAGE 3-6 

FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS 


• Power ratings in AC3 400V duty: 14kW to 

950kW 


PAGE 3-8 

CONTACTORS FOR POWER FACTOR CORRECTION 

• With limiting resistors included 

• Power ratings at 400V: 8kvar to 60kvar 

• AC control coil. 

PAGE 3-9 

FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS WITH 2NO+2NC AND 4NC 

MAIN POLES 



PAGE 3-9 


WITH 4NC MAIN POWER POLES 

• Ith ratings in AC1 duty at ≤40°C: 25 to 40A 


PAGE 3-10 

CONTROL RELAYS 

• AC, DC or low consumption supply coil 

• Screw or Faston termination 

• 4, 8 or 11 auxiliary contact composition. 



3 

IEC STYLE CONTACTORS 

IEC style contactors - long 

electrical and mechanical life 

Complete range from 

mini-contactors to 630 Amp 

inductive AC3 ratings 

Wide range coils +10% to -20% 

Finger safe terminals 

Four-pole versions available 

2NO + 2NC and 4NC power pole 

versions available 

Extensive assortment of add-on 

blocks and accessories 


SEC. PAGE 

Contactors 

Three-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 4 

Four-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 6 

For power factor correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8 

Special four-pole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 9 

Control relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 10 

Add-on blocks and accessories 

For BG series mini-contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12 

For BF series contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 14 

For B series contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 22 

Positively guided contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 24 

Spare parts 

AC coils for contactors BF00A and BF09A-BF38A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 26 

AC coils for contactors BF50-BF110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 27 

DC coils for contactors BF...C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 28 

AC/DC coils for contactors B115-B1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 29 

Main contacts for BF series contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 30 

Main contacts and arc chutes for B series contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 31 



3-2 

IEC style contactors 

General information - IEC contactors 

electric 

Lovato Electric comprehensive line of contactors can be divided in to three basic configurations. Each of these have 

unique features but all are designed for long life and have finger-safe protection. Lovato Electric facilities, where these 

contactors are manufactured, work under ISO 9001 quality conditions, per IQNet certification since 1992 and constantly 

maintained by passing yearly quality assurance audits. The design and manufacture of the contactors and accessories 

have taken into consideration the most demanding international standards requirements. 

3 

BG series 

6A/3HP - 12A/7.5HP 

• Highly conductive auxiliary contacts with four contact points 

• AC and DC versions of same size 

• Quick connect - snap on accessory mounting 

• Distinct contact status indication 

• Up to four auxiliary contacts can be mounted 

• Mechanical interlock only 5mm deep 

• Low DC consumption interface version 

• Positively guided contacts (mechanically-linked per IEC) 

3 poles 4 poles 

Ie (AC3) AC DC Ith (AC1) AC DC 

BG06 6A ● ● –– –– –– 

BG09 9A ● ● 20A ● ● 

BGF09 9A ● ● 20A ● ● 

BGP09 9A ● ● 20A ● ● 

BG12 12A ● ● –– –– –– 

BF series 

9A/5HP - 110A/75HP 

• 4 different contactor frame sizes up to 75HP 

• Anti-shock magnetic core design 

• Straight through wiring 

• Captive raised terminal screws to reduce wiring time 

• Wide coil operating range 

• Coil removable without disconnecting power wiring 

• Oversized main contacts 

• Easy contact inspection and replacement 

• Special main pole configurations 

• Specific version for power factor correction systems 




BF09 9A ● ● 25A ● ● 

BF12 12A ● ● 28A ● –– 

BF16 16A –– ● 25A –– ● 

BF18 18A ● –– 32A ● –– 

BF20 20A –– ● –– –– –– 

BF25 25A ● ● 32A –– ● 

BF26 26A ● –– 45A ● –– 

BF32 32A ● ● –– –– –– 

BF38 38A ● –– 56A ● –– 

BF40 40A –– ● 60A –– ● 

BF50 50A ● ● 90A ● –– 

BF65 65A ● ● 110A ● ● 

BF80 80A ● ● 125A ● ● 

BF95 95A ● ● –– –– –– 

BF110 110A ● ● –– –– –– 

B series 

110A/75HP - 

630A/500HP 

• 3 frame sizes offering 11 different contactors 

• Coil operate indifferently on AC or DC supply voltage 

• Coil with low in-rush and holding 

• Coil removable without disconnecting power wiring 

• Red indicator when contactor is energized 

• Unique right-angle magnet design - limits contact bounce 

• Safety feature prevents contactor to be energized without arc chute in 

place and locked 

• Convertible auxiliary contact block (2NO + 1NC or 1NO + 2NC), 

maximum of 4 blocks per contactor for a total of 12 contacts 

• Contactor terminals furnished with bolt, washer and nut 

• Simple horizontal or vertical interlock 




B115 110A ● ● 160A ● ● 

B145 150A ● ● 250A ● ● 

B180 185A ● ● 275A ● ● 

B250 265A ● ● 350A ● ● 

B310 320A ● ● 450A ● ● 

B400 420A ● ● 550A ● ● 

B500 520A ● ● 700A ● ● 

B630 630A ● ● 800A ● ● 

B630 1000 ❶ ● ● 1000A ● ● 

B1250 ❶ ● –– 1250A ● –– 

B1600 ❶ ● –– 1600A ● –– 

❶ For AC1 duty only. 

Non-reversing and 

reversing IEC 

starters 

Contactors can be combined with either manual motor starters of the SM series, providing thermal and magnetic protection up to 100A, or 

single or three-pole thermal bimetallic overload relays, with or without single-phase protection up to 420A, to obtain non-reversing or 

reversing starters. Equipment can be assembled together or independently mounted through the use of specifically designed accessories. 

Non-reversing starter Non-reversing starter Reversing starter 



electric 


Contactors BF00, BF09A-BF38A 

3-3 

Simplicity 

4-TERMINAL COIL 

Connecting cables can be coupled to 

the coil both on the line and load ends 

of the contactor. 

SIDE ADD-ON FOURTH POLE 

For the 45A and 55A AC1 ratings, a side-mount 

fourth power pole can be snapped on the threepole 

contactor. 

This solution helps to optimize Inventory. 

. 

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK 

Smaller contactors, 9 to 25A in AC3, can be 

mechanically and electrically interlocked with 

larger contactors, 26 to 38A AC3. 

The new BFX50 02 mechanical interlock includes 

two built-in NC auxiliary contacts to make the 

electrical interlock as well. 

A1 

A1 

A2 

A2 

STARTER ASSEMBLY 

The assembly and wiring of 

electromechanical starters is 

extremely fast and reliable. 

Versatile electrical and 

mechanical connecting 

systems provide easy and 

foolproof assembly of 

compact starters. 

EFFORTLESS THERMAL 

OVERLOAD RELAY LINK 

During the connection of the 

thermal overload relay to the 

contactor, its auxiliary contact 

is simultaneously linked to the 

contactor coil terminal rigid 

connector. 

The complete overload relay 

fixing is obtained with one 

single operation and without 

other connections. 

TERMINAL ADAPTABILITY 

Terminals are suitable for every type of cable: flexible, rigid, 

according to AWG standards and interlocked with any type 

of cable terminal. 

Power pole, auxiliary and coil screws can be tightened using 

one single type of screwdriver. 

3 

35MM DIN RAIL MOUNTING AND FIXING 

Contactor mounting on and removal from a 35mm DIN rail 

are tool less operations and are done by simply applying 

pressure on the contactor. 

SNAP-ON INSTALLATION 

Mounting and removal of the add-on auxiliary contacts and 

accessories, along with contactor coil replacement are quick 

and easy operations and are done with no tools. 

Safety 

FRONT PROTECTION COVER FOR 

MANUAL STARTERS - CONTACTOR 

CONNECTIONS 

The front cover, fixed between manual 

starters and contactor, provide protection 

to the connections. 

RUBBER PAD INSERT FOR NO DIN 

RAIL SLIDING 

A rubber insert prevents the 

contactors from sliding on the 

35mm DIN rail even when out of 

tolerance or mounted vertically. 

CONNECTION SECURITY - 

IP20 

The ease of terminal access 

and space is combined with 

IP20 finger safety, to prevent 

touching of live parts. 



3-4 


Three-pole non-reversing contactors with operating coil in AC 

electric 

3 

BG06A-BG09A- 

BG12A 

BF09A-BF12A- 

BF18A-BF25A 

BF26A-BF32A- 

BF38A 

BF50-BF65-BF80 

BF95-BF110 

Maximum horsepower ratings UL UL Maximum current 

Single phase Three phase Amp resistive Inductive Resistive 

120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V rating Amps AC3 AC1 

[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A] [A] [A] [A] 

1 

/3 1 1 1 /2 2 3 3 16 –– 6 16 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5❷ –– 20 –– 9 20 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 20 –– 12 20 

3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 25 –– 9 25 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 28 –– 12 28 

1 3 5 5 10 15 32 –– 18 32 

2 3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 15 32 –– 25 32 

2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 45 –– 26 45 

3 7 1 /2 10 10 20 25 55 –– 32 56 

3 7 1 /2 10 15 30 30 55 –– 38 56 

5 10 10 15 30 40 90 –– 50 90 

–– –– 20 25 50 60 110 –– 65 110 

–– –– 25 30 60 75 125 –– 80 125 

–– –– 30 30 60 75 125 –– 95 125 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 125 –– 110 125 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 110 160 110 160 

–– –– 50 50 100 125 150 220 150 250 

–– –– 60 75 150 150 180 260 185 275 

–– –– 75 100 200 250 250 350 265 350 

–– –– 100 125 250 300 315 400 320 450 

–– –– 125 150 350 400 400 450 420 550 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL 520 700 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL 630 800 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL None 1000 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL None 1250 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL None 1600 

B115-B145-B180-B250 

B310-B400-B500-B630 

B1250-B1600 

Incorporated Type of Catalog number Price 

auxiliary termination 

contacts 

AC coil 

NO NC $ each 

1❺ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG06 10 A ❶ 49.00 

0 1❺ 11 BG06 01 A ❶ 49.00 

1❺ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG09 10 A ❶❻ 60.00 

0 1❺ 11 BG09 01 A ❶❻ 60.00 

1❺ 0 Faston 11 BGF09 10 A ❶ 70.00 

0 1❺ 11 BGF09 01 A ❶ 70.00 

1❺ 0 Rear PCB solder pin 11 BGP09 10 A ❶❷ 70.00 

0 1❺ 11 BGP09 01 A ❶❷ 70.00 

1❺ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG12 10 A ❶ 76.00 

0 1❺ 11 BG12 01 A ❶ 76.00 

1❺ 0 Clamp-screw BF09 10A ❶ 81.00 

0 1❺ BF09 01A ❶ 81.00 


0 1❺ BF12 01A ❶ 102.00 


0 1❺ BF18 01A ❶ 117.00 


0 1❺ BF25 01A ❶ 130.00 

–– –– Clamp-screw BF26 00A ❶ 150.00 



–– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF50 00 ❶ 238.00 

–– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF65 00 ❶ 308.00 

–– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF80 00 ❶ 362.00 

–– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF95 00 ❶ 388.00 

–– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF110 00 ❶ 424.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B115 00 ❸ 541.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B145 00 ❸ 770.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B180 00 ❸ 1080.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B250 00 ❸ 1318.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B310 00 ❸ 1859.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B400 00 ❸ 2318.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B500 00 ❸ 4522.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B630 00 ❸ 6390.00 

–– –– Screw-nut 11 B630 1000 00 ❸ 7056.00 

2 4 Screw-nut 11 B1250 24 ❹ ❹ 

2 4 Screw-nut 11 B1600 24 ❹ ❹ 

❶ Complete catalog number with coil digit per following table. 

AC coil digit Voltage range 

02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 

Other coil voltage and frequency values are available on request. 

NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible for BG types. 

❷ Limited to 300V UL rating only. For other type suitable up to 

600V UL rating, contact Sales & Technical Support for details and 

pricing. 

❸ Complete catalog number with coil digit per following table. 

Voltage range 

Coil digit 

AC/DC 

024 24V 

110 110-125V 

220 220-240V 

460 440-480V 

Other coil voltage values are available on request. 

24V type is not possible for B500-B1600 contactors. 

❹ Complete catalog number with coil digit 110 for 110-125VAC, 220 

for 220-240VAC or 460 for 440-480VAC only. Contact Sales & 

Technical Support for pricing. 

❺ Highly conductive auxiliary contact. 

Positively guided contacts 

See page 3-24 or TC-26 for contactors with NC contacts. 

See page 3-25 or TC-27 for add-on auxiliary contacts. 


BG mini-contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, 

file E93602 except for BFP09 which is UL Recognized for 

USA and Canada, file E93602, with 300V rating maximum. 

BF contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, file E93602. 

BF50-BF95 types are also CSA certified, file LR 54332-1 

and LR 54332-26. 

B115-B400 contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, file 

E93602; CSA certified, file LR 54332-1 and LR 54332-26. 

B500-B600 contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada 

pending completion. 


IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 



Spare parts 


Dimensions 

pages D-4 to 10 


page W-2 




pages TC-4 to 31

electric 


Three-pole non-reversing contactors with operating coil in DC 

3-5 

BG06D-BG09D BF9C-BF12C BF20C-BF25C BF32C-BF40C BF50C-BF65C-BF80C B115-B145-B180-B250 

BG12D 

BF16C BF95C-BF110C B310-B400-B500-B630 

B630 1000 

Maximum horsepower ratings UL UL Maximum current Incorporated Type of Catalog number Price 

Single phase Three phase Amp resistive Inductive Resistive auxiliary termination 

120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V rating Amps AC3 AC1 contacts 

AC coil 

[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A] [A] [A] [A] NO NC $ each 

1 

/3 1 1 1 /2 2 3 3 16 –– 6 16 1❹ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG06 10 D ❶ 65.00 

0 1❹ 11 BG06 01 D ❶ 65.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 1❹ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG09 10 D ❶ 80.00 

0 1❹ 11 BG09 01 D ❶ 80.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 1❹ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG09 10 L ❷ 96.00 

0 1❹ 11 BG09 01 L ❷ 96.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 1❹ 0 Faston 11 BGF09 10 D ❶ 95.00 

0 1❹ 11 BGF09 01 D ❶ 95.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 1❹ 0 Faston 11 BGF09 10 L ❷ 105.00 

0 1❹ 11 BGF09 01 L ❷ 105.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5❺ –– 20 –– 9 20 1❹ 0 Rear PCB solder pin 11 BGP09 10 D ❶❺ 93.00 

0 1❹ 11 BGP09 01 D ❶❺ 93.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 20 –– 12 20 1❹ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BG12 10 D ❶ 93.00 

0 1❹ 11 BG12 01 D ❶ 93.00 

3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 22 –– 12 25 1❹ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BF9C 10 ❶ 106.00 

0 1❹ 11 BF9C 01 ❶ 106.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 12 25 1❹ 0 Clamp-screw 11 BF12C 10 ❶ 131.00 

0 1❹ 11 BF12C 01 ❶ 131.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 12 25 1 0 Clamp-screw 11 BF16C 10 ❶ 139.00 

0 1 11 BF16C 01 ❶ 139.00 

1 1 /2 3 5 5 10 15 32 –– 20 40 1 0 Clamp-screw 11 BF20C 10 ❶ 147.00 

0 1 11 BF20C 01 ❶ 147.00 

2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 40 –– 25 40 –– –– Clamp-screw 11 BF25C 00 ❶ 165.00 

–– –– 11 BF25C 00 ❶ 165.00 

3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 10 20 25 52 –– 32 55 –– –– Clamp-screw 11 BF32C 00 ❶ 198.00 

3 7 1 /2 10 15 30 30 52 –– 40 60 –– –– Clamp-screw 11 BF40C 00 ❶ 237.00 

5 10 10 15 30 40 90 –– 50 90 –– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF50C 00 ❶ 276.00 

–– –– 20 25 50 60 110 –– 65 110 –– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF65C 00 ❶ 347.00 

–– –– 25 30 60 75 125 –– 80 125 –– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF80C 00 ❶ 405.00 

–– –– 30 30 60 75 125 –– 95 125 –– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF95C 00 ❶ 451.00 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 125 –– 110 125 –– –– Lug-clamp 11 BF110C 00 ❶ 491.00 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 110 160 110 160 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B115 00 ❸ 541.00 

–– –– 50 50 100 125 150 220 150 250 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B145 00 ❸ 770.00 

–– –– 60 75 150 150 180 260 185 275 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B180 00 ❸ 1008.00 

–– –– 75 100 200 250 250 350 265 350 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B250 00 ❸ 1318.00 

–– –– 100 125 250 300 315 400 320 450 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B310 00 ❸ 1859.00 

–– –– 125 150 350 400 400 450 420 550 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B400 00 ❸ 2318.00 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL 520 700 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B500 00 ❸ 4522.00 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL 630 800 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B630 00 ❸ 6390.00 

–– –– –– –– –– –– No UL No UL None 1000 –– –– Screw-nut 11 B630 1000 00 ❸ 7056.00 

❶ Complete the catalog number with coil digit. 


Standard voltages (coil digit) are: 024-110V. 


Voltage range 


Coil digit 


AC/DC 

NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible for BG 

024 24V 


mini-contactors. 

110 110-125V 

USA and Canada, file E93602, with 300V rating maximum. 

❷ Low-consumption version. 

220 220-240V 

BF contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, file E93602. 

No additional auxiliary contacts or the mechanical interlock 

460 440-480V 

BF50-BF95 types are also CSA certified, file LR 54332-1 

BGX50 00 can be mounted. 


and LR 54332-26. 

Complete the catalog number with coil digit. 

24V type is not possible for B500-B630 1000 contactors. 


❹ Highly conductive auxiliary contact. 

B115-B400 contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, file 

NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible. 

❺ Limited to 300V UL rating only. For other type suitable up to 600V E93602; CSA certified, file LR 54332-1 and LR 54332-26. 

UL rating, contact Sales & Technical Support for details and pricing. B500-B600 contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada 



See page 3-24 or TC-26 for contactors with NC contacts. 


Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

3 



Spare parts 


Dimensions 



page W-2 




pages TC-4 to 31

3-6 


Four-pole non-reversing contactors with operating coil in AC 

electric 

3 

BG09 T4A 

BF09 T4A 

BF12A T4A 

BF18 T4A 

BF26 T4A 

BF38 T4A 

BF50 40 

BF65 40 

BF80 40 

B115 4 - B145 4 - B180 4 

B250 4 - B310 4 - B400 4 

B500 4 - B630 4 

B1250-B1600 4 

UL UL Maximum current Operating current (AC1) Type of Catalog number Price 

Amp resistive Inductive Resistive ≤55°C ≤70°C termination 

rating Amps AC3 AC1 (131°F) (158°F) 

[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] $ each 

20 –– 9 20 18 15 Clamp-screw 11 BG09 T4A ❶ 62.00 

20 –– 9 20 18 15 Faston 11 BGF09 T4A ❶ 70.00 

20 –– 9 20 18 15 PCB solder pin 11 BGP09 T4A ❶❷ 68.00 

25 –– 9 25 20 18 Clamp-screw BF09 T4A ❶ 90.00 





90 –– 50 90 80 65 Lug-clamp 11 BF50 40 ❶ 297.00 

110 –– 65 110 90 70 Lug-clamp 11 BF65 40 ❶ 398.00 

125 –– 80 125 100 80 Lug-clamp 11 BF80 40 ❶ 463.00 

110 160 110 160 150 110 Screw-nut 11 B115 4 00 ❸ 682.00 

150 220 150 250 235 190 Screw-nut 11 B145 4 00 ❸ 911.00 

180 260 185 275 250 200 Screw-nut 11 B180 4 00 ❸ 1398.00 

250 350 265 350 300 250 Screw-nut 11 B250 4 00 ❸ 1682.00 

315 400 320 450 370 300 Screw-nut 11 B310 4 00 ❸ 2467.00 

400 450 420 550 430 360 Screw-nut 11 B400 4 00 ❸ 2841.00 

No UL No UL 520 780 550 500 Screw-nut 11 B500 4 00 ❸ 5208.00 

No UL No UL 630 800 640 540 Screw-nut 11 B630 4 00 ❸ 7098.00 

No UL No UL None 1000 850 700 Screw-nut 11 B630 1000 4 00 ❸ 7957.00 

No UL No UL None 1250 1050 880 Screw-nut 11 B1250 4 24 ❹ ❹ 

No UL No UL None 1600 1360 1120 Screw-nut 11 B1600 4 24 ❹ ❹ 



02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 


NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible for BG types. 

❷ Limited to 300V UL rating only. For other type suitable up to 

600V UL rating, contact Sales & Technical Support for details 

and pricing. 


Coil digit 

Voltage range 

AC/DC 

024 24V 

110 110-125V 

220 220-240V 

460 440-480V 



❹ Complete catalog number with coil digit 110 for 110-125VAC, 

220 for 220-240VAC or 460 for 440-480VAC only. Contact Sales 

& Technical Support for pricing. 






USA and Canada, file E93602, with 300V rating 

maximum. 

BF contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, 

file E93602. BF50-BF95 types are also CSA certified, 

file LR 54332-1 and LR 54332-26. 

B115-B400 contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, 

file E93602; CSA certified, file LR 54332-1 and 

LR 54332-26. 




IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 



Spare parts 


Dimensions 



page W-2 




pages TC-4 to 31

electric 


Four-pole non-reversing contactors with operating coil in DC 

3-7 

BG09 T4D BF9C 40 

BF25C 40 BF40C 40 

BF50C 40-BF65C 40 B115 4-B145 4-B180 4 

BF16C 40 

BF80C 40 

B250 4-B310 4-B400 4 B630 1000 4 

B500 4-B630 4 

UL UL Maximum current Operating current (AC1) Type of Catalog number Price 

Amp resistive Inductive Resistive ≤55°C ≤70°C termination 

rating Amps AC3 AC1 (131°F) (158°F) 

[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] $ each 

20 –– 9 20 18 15 Clamp-screw 11 BG09 T4 D ❶ 82.00 

20 –– 9 20 18 15 Faston 11 BGF09 T4 D ❶ 98.00 

20 –– 9 20 18 15 PCB solder pin 11 BGP09 T4 D ❶❸ 95.00 

22 –– 9 25 20 18 Clamp-screw 11 BF9C 40 ❶ 114.00 




110 –– 65 110 90 70 Lug-clamp 11 BF65C 40 ❶ 456.00 

125 –– 80 125 100 80 Lug-clamp 11 BF80C 40 ❶ 512.00 

110 160 110 160 150 110 Screw-nut 11 B115 4 00 ❷ 682.00 

150 220 150 250 235 190 Screw-nut 11 B145 4 00 ❷ 911.00 

180 260 185 275 250 200 Screw-nut 11 B180 4 00 ❷ 1398.00 

250 350 265 350 300 250 Screw-nut 11 B250 4 00 ❷ 1682.00 

315 400 320 450 370 300 Screw-nut 11 B310 4 00 ❷ 2467.00 

400 450 420 550 430 360 Screw-nut 11 B400 4 00 ❷ 2841.00 

No UL No UL 520 780 550 500 Screw-nut 11 B500 4 00 ❷ 5208.00 

No UL No UL 630 800 640 540 Screw-nut 11 B630 4 00 ❷ 7098.00 

No UL No UL None 1000 850 700 Screw-nut 11 B630 1000 4 00 ❷ 7957.00 

3 

❶ Complete the catalog number with coil digit. 



❷ Complete catalog number with coil digit per following table. 

Coil digit 

Voltage range 

AC/DC 

024 24V 

110 110-125V 

220 220-240V 

460 440-480V 



❸ Limited to 300V UL rating only. For other type suitable up to 

600V UL rating, contact Sales & Technical Support for details 

and pricing. 






USA and Canada, file E93602, with 300V rating 

maximum. 

BF contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, 

file E93602. BF50-BF95 types are also CSA certified, 

file LR 54332-1 and LR 54332-26. 

B115-B400 contactors: UL listed for USA and Canada, 

file E93602; CSA certified, file LR 54332-1 and 

LR 54332-26. 




IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 



Spare parts 


Dimensions 



page W-2 




pages TC-4 to 31

3-8 


Special contactors for power factor correction with AC coil 

electric 

3 

BFK contactors 

(including limiting 

resistors) 

11 BFK 

Maximum UL operating Catalog number Price 

power ❸ at 

240V 480V 600V ❷ 

[kvar] [kvar] [kvar] NO $ each 

AC coil. 

4.5 8 10 1 BFK09 10A ❶ 134.00 

7 14 16 1 BFK12 10A ❶ 155.00 

9 17 20 1 BFK18 10A ❶ 175.00 

11 22 37.6 – BFK26 00A ❶ 188.00 

15 27.5 32 – BFK32 00A ❶ 220.00 

17 33 36 – BFK38 00A ❶ 256.00 

22 41 46 – 11 BF50K 00 ❶ 315.00 

26 50 56 – 11 BF65K 00 ❶ 385.00 

30 60 65 – 11 BF70K 00 ❶ 400.00 

34 65 70 – 11 BF80K 00 ❶ 430.00 



02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 


❷ One normally open (NO) auxiliary contact incorporated. 

❸ Consult Sales & Technical Support for the use at contactors to switch with delta 

connection. 

Refer to page TC-13 for IEC ratings. 


Type Rated Fuse 

current Sc/gG 

[A] [A] 

BFK09 12 16 

BFK12 16 25 

BFK20 22 40 

BFK26 26.5 40 

BFK32 36 63 

BFK38 40 63 

BF50K 58 80 

BF65K 68 100 

BF70K 72 125 

BF80K 78 125 

Ambient operating temperature: ≤120°F (50°C). 

For ambient temperatures higher than 50°C (120°F) and up 

to 160°F (70°C), the maximum operating power values 

indicated in the table must be reduced by a percentage 

equal to the difference between the operating ambient 

temperature and 120°F (50°C). 

E.g.: Using a BF25K 00 contactor at the ambient 

temperature of 140°F (60°C), the maximum operating 

power (at 400V) of the contactor will be equal to 

20 kvar – 10% = 18 kvar. 

Operating cycle: ≤120 cycles/h 

Electrical life: ≥200,000 cycles. 



Compliant with standards:IEC/EN 60947-1, 

IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

Kits to assemble 

BFK contactors 

For contactor Catalog number Price 

$ each 

BF09 10A - BF12 10A - BF18 10A 11 G460 49.00 

BF26 00A - BF32 00A 

BF38 00A 

BF50 00 - BF65 00 - BF80 00 11 G464 68.00 

To optimise contactor stock management, a kit is available 

to transform normal three-pole contactors into BF..K 

types for power factor correction. The table to the left 

indicates which kits to purchase depending on the standard 

contactor in stock. 

11 G460 - 11 G464 


page 3-14 

Spare parts 

pages 3-26, 27 and 30 

Dimensions 

page D-11 


page W-2 




pages TC-4 to 31

electric 


Four-pole non-reversing contactors with operating coil in AC and DC 

3-9 

Special 

configurations of 

power poles 

(2NO+2NC and 4NC) 

11 BG09 T2 A 

UL Maximum current Power pole Catalog number Price 

Amp Inductive Resistive arrangement 

rating AC3 AC1 

[A] [A] [A] NO NC $ each 

AC COIL. With terminals: Clamp-screw. 

Mini-contactors. 

20 9 20 2 2 11 BG09 T2 A ❶ 71.00 

Contactors. 

25 9 25 2 2 BF09 T2A ❶ 90.00 

32 18 32 2 2 BF18 T2A ❶ 120.00 

45 26 45 2 2 BF26 T2A ❶ 175.00 

56 38 56 2 2 BF38 T2A ❶ 280.00 

32 18 32 0 4 BF18 T0A ❶ 120.00 

DC COIL. With terminals: Clamp-screw. 

Mini-contactors. 

20 9 20 2 2 11 BG09 T2 D ❷ 86.00 

Contactors. 

24 16 40 2 2 11 BF16C 22 ❷ 151.00 

40 25 40 2 2 11 BF25C 22 ❷ 212.00 

52 40 60 2 2 11 BF40C 22 ❷❸ 344.00 

24 16 40 0 4 11 BF16C 04 ❷ 151.00 

40 25 40 0 4 11 BF25C 04 ❷ 212.00 

3 

BF09 T2A 



02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 


NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible for BG contactor. 

❷ Complete the catalog number with coil digit. 



NOTE: No coil change or replacement is possible for BG mini-contactors. 

❸ No side-mount auxiliary contacts can be added.. 




UL listing for USA and Canada, file E93602. 


IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

BF18 T0 



Spare parts 

pages 3-27, 28 and 30 

Dimensions 



pages W-3 and 4 




pages TC-4 to 31

3-10 


Control relays 

electric 

3 

Control relay 

BG type 

11 BG00 

11 BGF00 

Number Configuration Catalog number Price 

of contacts ❹ 

NO NC $ each 

AC COIL. Terminals: clamp-screw. 

4 4 0 11 BG00 40 A❶ 45.00 

4 3 1 11 BG00 31 A❶ 45.00 

4 2 2 11 BG00 22 A❶ 45.00 

Terminals: Faston 

4 4 0 11 BGF00 40 A❶ 50.00 

4 3 1 11 BGF00 31 A❶ 50.00 

4 2 2 11 BGF00 22 A❶ 50.00 

DC COIL. Terminals: clamp-screw. 

4 4 0 11 BG00 40 D❷ 59.00 

4 3 1 11 BG00 31 D❷ 59.00 

4 2 2 11 BG00 22 D❷ 59.00 


4 4 0 11 BGF00 40 D❷ 65.00 

4 3 1 11 BGF00 31 D❷ 65.00 

4 2 2 11 BGF00 22 D❷ 65.00 

LOW-CONSUMPTION DC COIL. Terminals: clamp-screw. 

4 4 0 11 BG00 40 L❸ 72.00 

4 3 1 11 BG00 31 L❸ 72.00 

4 2 2 11 BG00 22 L❸ 72.00 


4 4 0 11 BGF00 40 L❸ 77.00 

4 3 1 11 BGF00 31 L❸ 77.00 

4 2 2 11 BGF00 22 L❸ 77.00 


– Rated insulation voltage Ui 690V 

– Rated thermal current Ith 10A 

– UL designation: A600-Q600; see page TC-25 for details 

– Low-consumption version available. 


See page 3-24 or TC-27 for control relays with NC contacts. 





IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 



02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 


❷ Complete the catalog number with coil digit. 



❸ Low-consumption version. 

No additional auxiliary contacts or the mechanical interlock BGX50 00 can be 

mounted. 

Complete the catalog number with coil digit. 


❹ Highly conductive contacts. 



page 3-12 and 13 

Dimensions 

page D-4 


page W-3 




pages TC-4 to 27

electric 


Control relays 

3-11 

Control relay 

BF type 

BF00A 

Number of Configuration Catalog number Price 

auxiliary ❷ 

contacts 

NO NC $ each 

AC COIL 

Terminals: clamp-screw. 

4 4 0 BF00 40A ❶ 56.00 

4 3 1 BF00 31A ❶ 56.00 

4 2 2 BF00 22A ❶ 56.00 

4 0 4 BF00 04A ❶ 56.00 



02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 


❷ Highly conductive contacts. 


– Rated insulation voltage Ui 690V 

– Rated thermal current Ith 10A 

– UL designation: A600-P600; see page TC-25 for details. 


See page 3-24 or TC-27 for control relays with NC contacts. 





IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

3 



Spare parts 

page 3-28 

Dimensions 

page D-4 


page W-3 




pages TC-4 to 27

3-12 


Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors 

electric 

3 

Add-on blocks 

11 BGX10... (20-11-02) 

11 BGX10... (40-31-22-13-04) 

11 BGXF... 

Accessories 

Characteristics Max Catalog number Price 

number 

per 

contactor 

n° $ each 

Auxiliary contacts with screw terminals. 

2NC 1 11 BGX10 02 13.80 

1NO + 1NC 1 11 BGX10 11 13.80 

2NO 1 11 BGX10 20 13.80 

4NC❷ 1 11 BGX10 04❷ 24.00 

1NO + 3NC❷ 1 11 BGX10 13❷ 24.00 

2NO + 2NC 1 11 BGX10 22 24.00 

3NO + 1NC 1 11 BGX10 31 24.00 

4NO 1 11 BGX10 40 24.00 

Auxiliary contacts with Faston terminals. 

2NC 1 11 BGXF10 02 16.00 

1NO + 1NC 1 11 BGXF10 11 16.00 

2NO 1 11 BGXF10 20 16.00 

4NC❷ 1 11 BGXF10 04❷ 27.00 

1NO + 3NC❷ 1 11 BGXF10 13❷ 27.00 

2NO + 2NC 1 11 BGXF10 22❷ 27.00 

3NO + 1NC 1 11 BGXF10 31 27.00 

4NO 1 11 BGXF10 40 27.00 

Mechanical interlock. 

All types 1 11 BGX50 00 12.00 

Quick connect surge suppressors. 

Varistor ≤48VAC/DC 11 BGX77 048 15.00 

48-125VAC/DC 11 BGX77 125 15.00 

125-240VAC/DC 11 BGX77 240 15.00 

Diode ≤225VDC 11 BGX78 225 15.00 

assembly 

RC-element ≤48VAC 11 BGX79 048 15.00 

(Resistor- 48-125VAC 11 BGX79 125 15.00 

condenser) 125-240VAC 11 BGX79 240 15.00 

Operational characteristics for add-on auxiliary contacts 

Type 

BGX 

Rated thermal current Ith A 10 

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 

Terminals Screw M 3 

Width mm 6.9 (0.2 in) 

Faston mm 1-6.3 

2-2.8 

Conductor section 

maximum with 1 or 2 wires 

flexible without lug mm 2 2.5 

flexible with lug mm 2 2.5 

AWG n° 14 

UL designation ❶ AC A600 

DC Q600 

Mechanical life (in millions) cycles 20 


See page 3-25 or TC-28 for blocks with both NO and NC 

auxiliary contacts. 

SM1 manual starter - mini-contactor connecting kits 

See page 1-5. 


BGX contacts, BGX50 00 interlock and all surge 

suppressors: UL listed for USA and Canada, file E93602 

SMX90 21 and SMX90 22:UL Recognized, file E197069. 

Auxiliary contacts comply with following standards: 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1; all others with IEC/EN 60947-1. 

11 BGX50 00 

11 BGX77 - 

11 BGX78 225 - 

11 BGX79 

240-415VAC 11 BGX79 415 15.00 

Modular cover❸. 

All types 1 11 BGX80 00 3.50 

Paralleling links. Clamp-screw terminals. 

For 2 poles 11 G323❹ 6.90 

11 G324 6.90 

For 4 poles 11 G325❹ 7.90 

11 G326 7.90 

Rigid connecting kits. 

Rigid connection kit for wye-delta 11 SMX90 21 21.00 

starter with combination 

of 3 BG mini-contactors 

Rigid connecting kit for reversing 11 SMX90 22 16.00 

contactor assembly with two 

BG contactors ❺❻ 

11 SMX90 22 

❶ See page TC-25 for details. 

❷ Cannot be used with BG contactors with DC coil. 

❸ The cover can be used with BG types with screw termination only 

and with no auxiliary contacts, surge suppressor or mechanical 

interlock mounted. 

❹ Cannot be used with BGX80 00 cover. 

❺ Normally used with contactors having 1NC auxiliary contact 

(BG...01). 

❻ The RF9 relay cannot be directly mounted on the contactor. Use the 

RF38 or RF25 type and the RFX38 04 or G230 independent 

mounting base respectively. 

Dimensions 

page D-11 


page W-3 




pages TC-4 to 27

electric 


Add-on blocks and accessories for BG series mini-contactors 

3-13 

Combinations 


G325 

G326 

G323 

G324 

BGX77... 

BGX78 225 

BGX79... 

3 

BGX80 00❶ 

BG... 

BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40 

BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31 

BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22 

BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13 

BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04 

BGX10 10 - BGXF10 10 

BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11 

BGX10 01 - BGXF10 01 

❶ Suitable for screw-termination contactors without BGX auxiliaries, BGX50 00 interlock or BGX7 surge suppressor. 

BGX77... 

BGX78 225 

BGX79... 

BG... 

BGX50 00 

BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40 

BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31 

BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22 

BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13 

BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04 

BGX10 40 - BGXF10 40 

BGX10 31 - BGXF10 31 

BGX10 22 - BGXF10 22 

BGX10 13 - BGXF10 13 

BGX10 04 - BGXF10 04 

BGX77... 

BGX78 225 

BGX79... 

BGX10 10 - BGXF10 10 

BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11 

BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02 

BGX10 10 - BGXF10 10 

BGX10 11 - BGXF10 11 

BGX10 02 - BGXF10 02 

Connections for reversing contactor 

assembly 

Connections for wye-delta assembly 

SMX90 22 

SMX90 21 

BGX50 00 

BG 

BG 

SMX90 21 

SMX90 22 

Dimensions 

page D-11 


page W-3 




pages TC-3 to 27

3-14 


Add-on blocks and accessories for BF series contactors 

electric 

3 

Add-on blocks 

BFX10 (02-11-20) 

11 G484 

(03-12-21-30) 

BFX10 

(04-13-22-31-40) 

11 G418 

11 G481 

11 G482 

11 G485 - 11 G486 

11 G487 

11 G218 

11 G428 (01-01D-10-10A) 

Characteristics Maximum Catalog Price 

number per number 

contactor 

$ each 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with front center mounting. 

Screw terminals. 

2NC 1 BFX10 02 ❶ 14.00 

1NO + 1NC 1 BFX10 11 ❶ 14.00 

2NO 1 BFX10 20 ❶ 14.00 

4NC 1 BFX10 04 ❷ 28.00 

1NO + 3NC 1 BFX10 13 ❷ 28.00 

2NO + 2NC 1 BFX10 22 ❷ 28.00 

3NO + 1NC 1 BFX10 31 ❷ 28.00 

4NO 1 BFX10 40 ❷ 28.00 

3NC 1 11 G484 03 ❶ 22.00 

1NO + 2NC 1 11 G484 12 ❶ 22.00 

2NO + 1 NC 1 11 G484 21 ❶ 22.00 

3NO 1 11 G484 30 ❶ 22.00 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with front lateral mounting. 


1NO 2 11 G418 10 13.20 

1EM early make 2 11 G418 10A 13.20 

1NC 2 11 G418 01 13.20 

1LB late break 2 11 G418 01D 13.20 

Faston terminals. 

1NO or 1NC reversible 2 11 G218 12.20 

2NO 2 11 G481 20 16.50 

1NO + 1NC 2 11 G481 11 16.50 

2NC 2 11 G481 02 16.50 

Double-throw❸ 2 11 G482❹ 30.80 

Side mount adapters. 

For G218 2 11 G280 3.50 

For G481 and G482 2 11 G483 4.60 

Auxiliary contacts for side mounting, duly fitted on side-mount 

adapter. Screw terminals. 

1NC 2 11 G428 01 17.40 


1NO 2 11 G428 10 17.40 

1EM early make 2 11 G428 10E 17.40 

Delayed auxiliary contacts 1NO + 1NC (pneumatic operation) 

on energization ❶. Screw terminals. 

3 seconds 1 11 G485 3 112.00 

6 seconds 1 11 G485 6 112.00 

15 seconds 1 11 G485 15 112.00 

30 seconds 1 11 G485 30 112.00 

60 seconds 1 11 G485 60 112.00 

120 seconds 1 11 G485 120 112.00 


on de-energization ❶. Screw terminals. 

3 seconds 1 11 G486 3 112.00 

6 seconds 1 11 G486 6 112.00 

15 seconds 1 11 G486 15 112.00 

30 seconds 1 11 G486 30 112.00 

60 seconds 1 11 G486 60 112.00 

120 seconds 1 11 G486 120 112.00 

70 milliseconds 1 11 G487 112.00 


Type G418 BFX10 G218 G482❻ 

G428 G484 G481 

G485❺ 

G486❺ 

G487❺ 

Rated current Ith A 10 10 10 0.1❼ 

Rated insulation V 690 690 690 690 

voltage Ui 

Terminals: Screw M 3.5 M 3 –– –– 

Width mm 7 6.9 –– –– 

(0.2in) (0.2in) 

Faston mm –– –– 1-6.35 1-6.35 

2-2.8 2-2.8 


maximum with 1 

or 2 wires 

flexible w/o lug mm 2 2.5 2.5 –– –– 

flexible c/w lug mm 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 

AWG n° 14 14 14 14 

Terminal protection IP20❽ IP20 IP20❿ IP20❿ 

according to 

IEC/EN 60529 

UL AC A600 A600 A600 –– 

designation❹ DC P600❾ Q600 P600 –– 

Mechanical life cycles 10 11 10 10 10 

(in millions) 

❹ See page TC-25 for details. 

❺ For particularly severe ambient conditions, contact Sales & Technical 

Support. 

❻ Gold-plated contacts inside tight enclosure for use in pollutant 

environments. 

❼ Referred to 125VAC and 30VDC. 

❽ Finger safe IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with 

0.75mm 2 /18 AWG minimum conductor section for G418 or G428 

and 1mm 2 /18 AWG minimum for G480, G485, G486 and G487 

types. 

❾ Q600 for G418... 

❿ Finger safe IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with 

insulated Faston terminals. 

11 3 million cycles for G485, G486, G487. 




SM1 manual starter - contactor connecting kits 

See page 1-5. 


BFX contacts: UL Listed for USA and Canada, file 

E93601; pending for BFX10 04, BFX10 13, BFX10 22, 

BFX10 31, BFX10 40. 

All others: UL Recognized for USA, file E93601 and CSA 

certified, file LR 54332-15. 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

Maximum assembly combination of add-on blocks 

See page TC-28. 

❶ Highly conductive contacts. The contacts can 

also be fitted on B type contactors using the 

adapter G358. See pages 3-24 and 3-25. 

❷ Available during 2007; contact Sales & Technical 

Support for details. 

❸ Highly conductive contact. 

Dimensions 

page D-11 and 12 






pages TC-4 to 29

electric 



3-15 

Add-on blocks and 

accessories 

BFX42 

BFX50 00 BFX50 01 

BFX50 02 

11 G223 

11 G222 

11 G272 

BFX50 03 

11 G269 1 

11 G269 2 



contactor 

$ each 

Fourth pole. 

For BF26A-BF32A 1 BFX42 72.00 

and BF38A 


Side mount for 1 BFX50 00 ❶ 25.00 

BF00A, BF09A-BF38A 

Side mount with 2NC 1 BFX50 01 ❶ 36.00 

contacts for BF00A, 

BF09A-BF38A 

Front mount low profile for 1 BFX50 02 10.00 


Front mount for 1 BFX50 03 30.00 


Front mount for BF9C-BF40C 1 11 G223 8.00 

(BF40C three-pole only) 1 11 G269 1 24.00 

Front mount for BF40C 40, 1 11 G269 2 24.00 

BF50-BF110 

Mechanical latch. 

For BF00A, 1 11 G222 ❷ 74.00 

BF09A-BF38A, 

BF9C-BF40C (BF40C 

three-pole type only) 

For BF40C four pole, 11 G272 ❷ 74.00 

BF50-BF110 

Quick-connect surge suppressors for BF...A contactors, 

top mount. 

Varistor ≤48VAC BFX77 048 17.00 

48-125VAC BFX77 125 17.00 

125-240VAC BFX77 240 17.00 

Resistor- ≤48VAC BFX79 048 21.00 

Condenser 48-125VAC BFX79 125 21.00 

125-240VAC BFX79 240 21.00 

240-415VAC BFX79 415 21.00 

Surge suppressors for BC...C or BF50-B110 contactors, 

front mount, Faston terminals. 

Varistor ≤48VAC 11 G318 48 22.00 

48-125VAC 11 G318 125 22.00 

125-240VAC 11 G318 240 22.00 

240-415VAC/DC 11 G315 415 22.00 

Diode ≤225VDC 11 G319 225 22.00 

RC-element ≤48VAC 11 G319 225 22.00 

(resistor- 48-240VAC 11 G322 220 22.00 

condenser) 

240-415VAC 11 G322 380 22.00 

Suppressor holder. 

For 35 mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 11 RE244 4.00 

Operational characteristics for mechanical latch 

Type BFX42 BFX50 01 

Conventinal free air A 55 10 

thermal Current Ith 

Rated insulation 

voltage Ui V 690 690 

Terminals: Screw M4 M3 

Width mm 12.5 7 


Maximum with 

1 or 2 cables 

flexible w/o lug mm 2 16 2.5 

flexible c/w lug mm 2 16 2.5 

AWG n° 6 14 

Terminal protection IP20❸ IP20 

per IEC/EN60529 

UL designation ❹ AC –– A600 

DC –– Q600 

Mechanical life (in millions) cycles 10 10 

Type G222 G272 

Control circuit 

voltage AC (50/60 Hz) V 12-380 12-380 

DC V 12-220 12-220 

Power consumption 

with control AC VA 40 40 

DC W 70 70 

Minimum energising 

drop-out ms 10 10 

pick-up ms 50 100 

❸ See pages CT-18 to 20 to warrant finger-safe IP20 protection. 

❹ See page TC-25 for details. 




BFX42 fourth pole, BFX50 interlocks, BFX77 and BFX79 

suppressors: UL listings for USA and Canada, pending 

completion. 

G223 and G269 interlocks, G222 and G272 latches: UL 

Recognized for USA, file E93601 and CSA certified for 

Canada, file LR 54332-15. 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

3 

❶ Different sized contactors can be interlocked. 

Example: BF09A-BF25A with BF26A-BF38A. 

❷ Complete catalog number with voltage digit per following table. 

BFX77 

BFX79 

Voltage digit Voltage range 

AC type 

50/60Hz 

024 24V 

110 110/125V 

220 200/240V 

DC type 

DC 

C024 

24V 

C110 110/125V 

C220 

220V 


11 G318 

11 G319 225 

11 G322 

11 RE244 

Dimensions 

pages D-11 and 12 






pages TC-4 to 27

3-16 



electric 

3 

Accessories 

BFX31... 

BFX32... 

BFX 80 


number 

$ each 

Rigid connecting kits for three-pole reversing contactor 

assembly. 

For contactors BFX31 01❶ 24.00 

BF09A - BF25A side by side 

For contactors BFX32 01❷ 58.00 

BF26A - BF38A side by side 

Rigid connecting kits for wye-delta starters. 

For contactors BF09A-BF25A BFX31 31 36.00 

(line-wye-delta) 


(line-wye-delta) 


(line-delta) and 

BF09A-BF25A (wye) 

Sealing cover. 

For contactors BFX80 5.00 


Screw fixing adapters for contactors. 

Universal base to screw fix BFX89 01 4.00 

BF09A-BF38A contactors 

Screw fixing brackets for BFX89 02 3.00 

BF09A-BF38A contactors 

❶ Mechanical interlock BFX50 02 or BFX50 03 can be used only. 

❷ Any type of BFX50 mechanical interlock can be used. 


BFX31 and BFX32 rigid kits: UL Recognized for USA and 

Canada, pending completion. 


BFX89 01 

BFX89 02 

Dimensions 

page D-12 


page W-4 




pages TC-4 to 28

electric 



3-17 

Accessories 


number 

$ each 

Power terminal cover ❶. 

11 G265 

11 BA135 

11 BA235 

11 G231 

11 G232 

11 BA435 

11 G285 

Finger safe IP20 protection for 3-pole 11 G265 6.50 

BF50-BF110 

Paralleling links. 

2-pole configuration (BF09A-BF25A and 11 BA135 3.00 

BF9-BF16) 

2-pole configuration (BF26A-BF38A and 11 BA235 4.00 

BF20-BF40) 

3-pole configuration (BF50-BF110) 11 BA435 6,70 

Enlarged terminals, single pole. 

1-6 mm 2 /10 AWG for BF09-BF25A and 11 G231 5.50 

BF9-BF16) 

1-10 mm 2 /8 AWG for BF26A-BF38A and 11 G232 6.50 

BF20-BF25) 

Enlarged terminals, three poles. 

1-35 mm 2 /3 AWG for BF32-BF40 11 G281 25.00 

1-50 mm 2 /1/0 AWG for BF50-BF110 11 G271 35.00 

Enlarged terminals, four poles. 

1-50 mm 2 /1/0 AWG for BF50-BF110 11 G288 65.00 

Auxiliary terminal. 

For BF50-BF95 11 G285 6.50 

Marking element for BF00A, BF09A-B110 contactors 

Blank label for writing BFX30 2.00 

Marking element for BF...C and BF50-BF110 contactors. 

Blank label for writing 11 BA126 2 1.00 

3 

11 G281 

❶ For 3-pole contactors, BF50-BF110 types only. 

NOTE: Two pieces are required per contactor. 

11 G271 

G288 

11 BA126 2 

Dimensions 

pagesD-12 


pages TC-4 to 28 



3-18 



electric 

Combinations 

Mounting position on BF contactors 

without mechanical latch mounted 

3 

BFX10 

G485 

G486 

G487 

G222❷ 

G272 

G484 

BFX10 

G418 

BFX77 

BFX79 

(for contactors 

BF...A) 

BFX50 00 

BFX50 01 

(for contactors BF00A, BF09A-BF38A only) 

BF 

G218 

G481 

G482 

G419❶ 

G280❶ 

❶ 

G318 

G319 

G322 

BFX50 02 

(for contactors BF00A, BF09A-BF38A) 

G223 

(for contactors BF9C-BF40C) 

G418❶ 

G483❶ 

G428...❶ 

BFX50 03 

(for contactors BF00A, BF09A-BF38A) 

G269 1 

(for contactors BF9C-BF40C) 

G218❶ 

G481❶ 

G482❶ 

G269 2 

(for contactors BF40C 40, BF50-BF110) 

❶ Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts or mechanical interlock BFX50 00 or BFX50 01 are mounted. 

❷ If the G222 latch is mounted, no front lateral contacts can be fitted. 

Dimensions 



page W-3 and 4 



electric 



3-19 

Combinations 


with mechanical latch G222 mounted. 

Control relay 

BF00A 

Contactors 

BF09A-BF38A 

BF9C-BF40C 

G484 

BFX10 

G48 

G486 

G487 

3 

BFX10 

BF00A 

BF09A-BF38A 

BF9C-BF40C 

BFX77 

BFX79 

(for contactors 

BF...A) 

G222 

Combinations 


with mechanical latch G272 mounted. 

Contactors 

BF50-BF110 

BF40C 40 

BF40C 22 

BFX10 

G484 

BFX10 

G485 

G486 

G487 

BF50-BF110 

BF40C 40 

BF40C 22❷ 

G418 

G419❶ 

G280❶ 

❶ 

G272 

G218 

G481 

G482 

G318 

G319 

G322 

G483❶ 

G418 

G428❶ 

G269 2 

G218 

G481 

G482 

❶ Mounting not possible if front lateral contacts are mounted. 

❷ No side-mount contacts can be fitted on BF40C 22. 

Dimensions 







pages TC-4 to 28

3-20 



electric 

Combinations 

Accessories 

Wire 

6-50mm 2 / 

1/0AWG 

Plate 

2.5x9mm (max) 

0.1x0.35in (max) 

3 

G271 

BA435 

G265 

G285 

BF50-BF110 contactors 

G281 

G232 

BA235 

G231 

BA135 

BF50-BF110 

BF32C - BF40C 

BF00A 

BF09A-BF25A 

BF9C-BF16C 

BF26A-BF38A 

BF20C - BF25C 

BA126 2 

(except BF...A types) 

BFX80 

(for contactors BF...A) 

Dimensions 

page D-12 






pages TC-4 to 28

electric 



3-21 

Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF09A-BF25A types 

Rigid reversing contactor assembly connecting kits for BF26A-BF38A types 

BFX50 02 

BFX31 01 

BFX50 02 

BFX32 01 

BFX50 02 

BFX50 02 

BFX50 03 

3 

BFX50 03 

BFX31 01 

RF38 

BFX32 01 

RF38 

BFX50 00 

BFX50 01 

RF38 thermal overload relay can be mounted only on left side contactor. 

Rigid wye-delta starter connecting kits for BF09A-BF25A types 

RF38 thermal overload relay can be mounted only on left side contactor. 

Rigid wye-delta starter connecting kits for BF26A-BF38A types 

BFX31 31 

BFX32 31 

BFX31 31 

RF38 

RF38 

BFX32 31 

Rigid wye-delta starter connecting kits with BF26A-BF38A (line-delta) and BF09A-BF25A (wye) contactors 

BFX32 32 

BFX32 32 

RF38 

Dimensions 



page W-4 




pages TC-4 to 28

3-22 


Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors 

electric 

3 


accessories 

11 G350 - 11 G354 

11 G358 

11 G360 - 11 G361 - 11 G363 

11 G527 - 11 G528 

11 G529 - 11 G530 

11 G370 

Characteristics Max. number Catalog Price 

per 

number 

contactor 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts. 

$ each 

2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC 4❶ 11 G350❶ 42.00 

reversible 

1NO+1NC 4❶ 11 G354❶ 34.00 

Contact block adapter. 

To fit auxiliary contacts 4 11 G358 25.00 

BFX10 with 2 contacts, 

G484, G485, G486 and 

G487 types, on 

B115-B630 contactors; 

see page 3-14. 

Mechanical interlocks. 

Side by side 11 G355❷ 47.00 

One on top of other 11 G356 1❷ 96.00 





One on top of other 11 G356 6❷❸ 96.00 

Power terminal covers. 

For contactor B115 11 G360❹ 12.00 

For contactors B145-B180 11 G361❹ 15.00 

For contactors B250-B310-B400 11 G363❹ 28.00 

For contactors B500 11 G527 122.00 

For contactors B500 4 11 G528 139.00 

For contactors B630 11 G529 127.00 

For contactors B630 4 11 G530 144.00 

3 pole wye connecting bars. 

For B115-B145-B180 11 BA1595 18.00 

For B250-B310-B400 11 BA1721 22.00 

For B500-B630 11 BA1846 28.00 

2 pole bars for parallel configuration. 

For B115-B145-B180 11 BA1594 24.00 

For B250-B310-B400 11 BA1720 38.00 

For B500-B630 11 BA1845 54.00 

Terminal adapters. 

To individually transform 11 G370 4.00 

Faston terminals of auxiliary 

contacts and coils into screw 

terminals 

To transform both coil Faston 11 G371 14.00 

terminals into screw terminals 

Marking element. 

Label for writing 11 BA126 2 1.00 

❶ Only one piece can be mounted on B1250 or B1600 type. 

❷ For choice and allowed distances see page TC-30. One piece must be used to 

interlock two contactors of B115-B630 type. 

❸ Two pieces are needed to interlock B1250 or B1600 type. 

❹ Provided for one pole terminal only. Example: For three-pole contactors, purchase 

3 pieces for the upper terminals only or 6 pieces for all upper and lower terminals. 

Operational characteristics of auxiliary contacts 

Type 

G350 

G354 

Rated thermal current Ith A 16 


Terminals Faston 1-6.35 

2-2.8 

Max cross section connectable 

with 1 or 2 conductors 

flexible c/w lug mm 2 2.5 

AWG n° 14 

UL designation ❺ AC A600 

DC P600 

Mechanical life (in millions) cycles 5 

❺ See page TC-25 for details. 




Maximum assembly combination 

See pages TC-27 to TC-28. 


G350 and G354 contacts, all interlocks, G360-G361-G363 

power terminal covers: UL Recognized for USA, file 

E93601; CSA certified for Canada, file LR 54332-15. 

G270 adapter:CSA certfified for Canada, file LR 54332-15. 

Add-on auxiliary contacts comply with the following 

standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

11 G371 

Dimensions 



page W-4 




pages TC-24 to 31

F 

E 

G 

D 

C 

A 

B 

electric 


Add-on blocks and accessories for B series contactors 

3-23 

Combination 


G527 (per B500 00) 

G528 (per B500 4 00) 

G529 (per B630 00) 

G530 (per B630 4 00) 

3 

G370 

G356... 

G371 

G363 (per B310-B400) 

G355 

G350 

G354 

M 8 

G360 (per B115) 

G361 (per B145-B180) 

M 6 

BA1846 

B500 

B630 

BA1845 

BA1720 

B250 

B310 

B400 

BA1721 

BA1595 

BA1594 

BA126 2 

BFX10 

B115 

B145 

B180 

G484 

G485 

G486 

G487 

G371 

G358 

G358 

G358 

G358 

NB. Also refer to combinations given on page TC-29. 

Dimensions 







pages TC-24 to 31

3-24 



electric 

3 

Positively guided 

contacts for types 

with incorporated 

auxiliary contacts 

Positively guided contacts are a requirement in safety circuits 

to correctly monitor the status of normally open contacts. 

Guided contacts imply that Normally Open (NO) and Normally 

Closed (NC) will operate together reciprocally but can never be 

simultaneously closed, even in case of NO contacts weld. This 

requirement is obtained by particular constructional details, 

such as reduced gap tolerance through which the mobile 

contact travels and the points of actuation are closer to the 

actual contact position. 

Positively Guided Contacts are also called positively safety 

contacts, forced contacts, linked contacts, force or positive 

guided or positively driven contacts. 

The positively guided contacts assume different meanings and 

terminologies in compliance with the product standards which 

are given below. 

IEC 60947-4-1/A1 ed. 2 - Annex F 

In this case, positively guided contacts are called auxiliary 

contacts linked with power contacts (mirror contact). 

The requirement is that when power poles weld, the auxiliary 

NC contacts remain open. 

This requirement is standard supplied on all our contactors 

having an integrated NC auxiliary contacts: 

BG..01, BF09 01A, BF12 01A, BF18 01A, BF25 01A, BF9C..01, 

BF12C..01, BF16C..01, BF20C..01 or BF25C..01 types. 

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MIRROR CONTACT 

MIRROR CONTACT 

CONVENTIONAL 

NC CONTACT 

DE-ENERGIZED 

NC 

mirror contact 

NO 

power contacts 

NC NO 

contact power contacts 

(monitoring) 

ENERGIZED 

NC 


(monitoring) 

NO 


NC NO 


(monitoring) 

DE-ENERGIZED 

WELD 

WELD 

NC 


(monitoring) 

WILL 

REMAIN 

OPEN 

NO 


NC 

contact 

(monitoring) 

WILL 

CLOSE 

NO 


IEC 60947-5-1/A2 ed. 2 - Annex L 

In this case, positively guided contacts are called 

mechanically linked contacts. 

The requirement is that NO and NC contacts can never be 

simultaneously closed, even if the NO contact or NC contact 

welds in closed position. 

This requirement applies to auxiliary safety contacts included 

in control circuit devices where the actuating positively is 

provided internally; therefore, this does not apply to push 

buttons or limit switches. 

Lovato control relays, such as BG00 and BF00, which have at 

least one NO and one NC contact, fall into this category. 

(See Physical properties of mechanically linked contacts on 

page 3-29). 

Note: 

Control circuit devices, operated externally (e.g. push-button or limit-switches) can not have mechanically linked contact elements. 

Such devices, in safety applications, generally have contacts with Direct Opening Actuation. 



Spare parts 


Dimensions 



pages W-2 to 4 




pages TC-3 to 31

electric 



3-25 


contacts for add-on 

auxiliary contact 

blocks 

IEC 60947-5-1/A2 ed. 2 - Annex L 

In this case, positively guided contacts are called mechanically 

linked contacts. 







PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MECHANICAL LINKED CONTACTS 


Several auxiliary contact blocks, which have at least one NO 

and one NC contact, fall into this category. These blocks 

include: 

BGX10 11, BGX10 31, BGX10 22, BGX10 13, BFX10 02, 

BFX10 11, BFX10 13, BFX10 22, BFX10 31, BGXF10 11, 

BGXF10 31, BGXF10 22, BGXF10 13, G350, G354, G481 11, 

G484 12 and G484 21. 

3 

MECHANICALLY 

LINKED CONTACT 

CONVENTIONAL CONTACT 

DE-ENERGIZED 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

ENERGIZED 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

DE-ENERGIZED 

WELD 

WELD 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

WILL 

REMAIN 

OPEN 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

WILL 

CLOSE 

NO 

contacts 



Spare parts 


Dimensions 







pages TC-3 to 31

3-26 


Spare parts 

electric 

3 

AC coils for 

contactors BF00A 

and BF09A-BF25A 

(standard voltages) 

Rated Catalog number Price 

frequency 

and voltage 

[Hz] [V] $ each 

For contactors BF00A-BF09A-BF12A-BF18A-BF25A 

60 24 BFX91A 024 60❶ 27.00 

120 BFX91A 120 60❶ 27.00 

230 BFX91A 230 60❶ 27.00 

460 BFX91A 460 60❶ 27.00 

575 BFX91A 575 60❶ 27.00 

❶ Four-terminal coil. 


AC control 

Rated voltage from V 12 

at 60Hz to V 600 

Operating limits from % Us 80 

pick up 

to % Us 110 

drop out 

from % Us 20 

to % Us 55 

Consumption 

in-rush VA 70 

60Hz 

holding VA 6.5 

Dissipation W 2.5 

Materials 

Class F enamelled copper wire. 

11 BFX91A.. 

Special versions 

For coils with non standard voltages, contact Sales & 

Technical Support. 

AC coils for 

contactors BF26A, 

BF32A and BF38A 



frequency 

and voltage 


For contactors BF26A-BF32A-BF38A. 

60 24 BFX92A 024 60❶ 33.00 

120 BFX92A 120 60❶ 33.00 

230 BFX92A 230 60❶ 33.00 

460 BFX92A 460 60❶ 33.00 

575 BFX92A 575 60❶ 33.00 

❶ Four-terminal coil. 


AC control 

Rated voltage from V 12 

at 60Hz: to V 600 

Operating limits from % Us 80 

pick up 

to % Us 110 

drop out 

from % Us 20 

to % Us 55 

Consumption 

in-rush VA 70 

60Hz 


Dissipation W 2.5 

Materials 



For coils with non standard voltages, contact Sales & 


11 BFX92A 



electric 


Spare parts 

3-27 

AC coils for BF 

contactors 


11 BA705 


frequency 

and voltage 


For contactors BF50 to BF110. 

60 24 11 BA705 024 60 46.00 

120 11 BA705 120 60 46.00 

200-240 11 BA705 230 60 46.00 

440-480 11 BA705 460 60 46.00 

575 11 BA705 575 60 46.00 

NOTE. Other coil voltage and frequency values are available on request. 

Contact Sales & Technical Support. 


AC control 

Rated voltage at 60Hz: V 12 - 600 

Operating limits pick up % Us 80 - 110 

at 60Hz drop out % Us 40 - 55 

Consumption 

in-rush VA 252 

60Hz 


Dissipation W 6 

Materials 


3 



3-28 


Spare parts 

electric 

3 

DC coils for BF…C 

contactors 



voltage 

[V] 

$ each 

For BF9C-BF12C-BF16C-BF20C-BF25C-BF32C-BF40C contactors. 

24 11 BA904 024 49.00 

110 11 BA904 110 49.00 

NOTE. Other coil voltage values are available on request. 



DC control 

Rated voltage V 12 - 660 

Operating limits pick-up % Us 80 - 110 

drop-out % Us 10 - 25 

Average consumption W 9 

Materials 


11 BA904 


voltage 

[V] 

$ each 

For BF40C 40-BF50C-BF65C-BF80C-BF95C-BF110C contactors. 

24 11 BA911 024 74.00 

110 11 BA911 110 74.00 

NOTE. Other coil voltage values are available on request. 



DC control 

Rated voltage V 12 - 660 

Operating limits pick-up % Us 80 - 110 

drop-out % Us 10 - 25 

Average consumption W 15 

Materials 


11 BA911 



electric 


Spare parts 

3-29 

Coils for 

B115-B630 

contactors 

Bridge rectifier 

Coil protection 

Coil assembly 


§ each 

Bridge rectifier (Faston terminals). 

B115-B145-B180 11 BA1575 1 81.00 

B250-B310-B400 11 BA1700 1 95.00 

B500-B630-B630 1000 11 BA1799 172.00 

B1250-B1600 

Coil protection. 

B115-B145-B180 11 BA1553 25.00 

B250-B310-B400 11 BA1678 45.00 

B500-B630-B630 1000 11 BA1803 97.00 

B1250-B1600 

Coil assembly (Coil, rectifier and coil protection). 

B115-B145-B180 11 BA1546 ❶ 234.00 

B250-B310-B400 11 BA1671 ❶ 378.00 

B500-B630-B630 1000 11 BA1796 ❷ 670.00 

B1250-B1600 


Coil digit 

Voltage range 

AC/DC 

024 24V 

110 110/125V 

220 220/240V 

460 440/480V 



Coil digit 

Voltage range 

AC/DC 

110 110/125V 

220 220/240V 

460 440/480V 



AC and DC control 

For contactor type 

B115 - B145 - B180 

Supply voltage 

AC and DC 

Rated control voltage V 24-480 

Operating limits pick-up % Us 80-110 

drop-out % Us 30-60 

Consumption in-rush VA/W 300 

holding VA/W 10 



B250 - B310 - B400 


AC and DC 








B500 - B630 

B630 1000 


AC and DC 







3 

AC control 


B1250 - B1600 


in AC 

Rated control voltage V 110-240-480 






Operating limits for ambient temperatures up to 

105°F (40°C) are 0.8 to 1.1 times rated voltage. 

NOTE: For use at ambient temperatures exceeding 130°F 

(55°C), contact Sales & Technical Support. 

Materials 


Coil assembly 

Comprises the coil, bridge rectifier, fixed magnetic core, coil 

protection, cross piece and fixing screws. 



3-30 


Spare parts 

electric 

3 

Main contacts and 

arc chutes 

11 G234 - 11 G235 - 11 G236 

11 G237 - 11 G470 

11 G273 - 11 G279 

11 G274 - 11 G275 

11 G276 - 11 G475 


$ each 

Main contacts❶. 

3 or 4 pole set complete with screws. 

BF9C 11 G234 18.00 

BF9C 40 11 G234 4 24.00 

BF12C 11 G235 22.00 

BF16C 11 G470 26.00 

BF16C 40 11 G470 4 34.00 

BF20C 11 G236 31.00 

BF20C 40 11 G236 4 41.00 

BF25C 11 G237 35.00 

BF25C 40 11 G237 4 46.00 

BF26A BFX99 026T 46.00 

BF26A T4A BFX99 026F 61.00 

BF32A BFX99 032T 84.00 

BF32C 11 G273 63.00 

BF38A BFX99 038T 113.00 

BF38 T4A BFX99 038F 150.00 

BF40C 11 G279 85.00 

BF40C 40 11 G279 4 113.00 

BF50 11 G274 122.00 

BF50 40 11 G274 4 161.00 

BF65 11 G275 155.00 

BF65 40 11 G275 4 206.00 

BF80 11 G276 192.00 

BF80 40 11 G276 4 254.00 

BF95 11 G475 241.00 

BF110 11 G476 297.00 


For non standard spare contact configurations, contact 

Sales & Technical Support. 

❶ Proper selection requires date code of contactor. Contact Sales & Technical 

Support for assistance. 



electric 


Spare parts 

3-31 

Main contacts and 

arc chutes 

11 G380 - 11 G381 - 11 G382 

11 G383 - 11 G384 - 11 G385 

11 G525 - 11 G526 

Arc chute 


$ each 

Main contacts. 

3 or 4 pole set complete with Allen screws and key for 

contact replacement. 

B115 11 G380 226.00 

B115 4 11 G380 4 278.00 

B145 11 G381 330.00 

B145 4 11 G381 4 395.00 

B180 11 G382 356.00 

B180 4 11 G382 4 466.00 

B250 11 G383 598.00 

B250 4 11 G383 4 808.00 

B310 11 G385 728.00 

B310 4 11 G385 4 998.00 

B400 11 G384 911.00 

B400 4 11 G384 4 1231.00 

B500 11 G525 1414.00 

B500 4 11 G525 4 2206.00 

B630 11 G526 2376.00 

B630 4 11 G526 4 3141.00 

B630 1000 11 G537 2727.00 

B630 1000 4 11 G537 4 3510.00 

B1250 11 G538 2877.00 

B1250 4 11 G538 4 3839.00 

B1600 11 G539 4752.00 

B1600 4 11 G539 4 6338.00 

Arc chutes. 

B115-B145-B180 11 BA1588 96.00 

B115 4-B145 4-B180 4 11 BA1589 126.00 

B250-B310-B400 11 BA1713 268.00 

B250 4-B310 4-B400 4 11 BA1714 308.00 

B500-B630 11 BA1838 349.00 

B630 1000 

B500 4-B630 4 11 BA1839 572.00 

B630 1000 4 


For non standard spare contact configurations, contact 


For B1250 and B1600 contactor spares, contact Sales & 

Technical Support for details. 

3 



THREE-POLE DP CONTACTORS 

• Up to 50A motor FLA 

• Up to 55A resistive loads 

• Low coil consumption. 

PAGE 4-2 

FOUR-POLE DP CONTACTORS 

• Up to 50A motor FLA 

• Up to 55A resistive loads 

• Low coil consumption. 

PAGE 4-2 

ACCESSORIES 

• Auxiliary contacts blocks 

• Surge suppressors 

• Mechanical interlocks 

• Fourth pole. 

PAGE 4-3 



4 

DEFINITE PURPOSE CONTACTORS 

Ideal contactors for air 

conditioning, heating, 

refrigeration, ventilation 

Wide range coils +10% to -20% 

Finger safe terminals 

Four-pole versions available 

Extensive assortment of add-on 

blocks and accessories 

Compact design 


SEC. PAGE 

Definite purpose contactors 

Three-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 2 

Four-pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 2 

Add-on blocks and accessories 

For DPBG types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3 

For DPBF...A types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4 



4-2 


Three-pole and four-pole non-reversing DP contactors 600VAC 

® 

electric 

MINI-CONTACTORS 

CONTACTORS 

4 

DPBG12 

DPBF09 T4 

DPBF12 T4 

DPBF09A 

DPBF12A 

DPBF18A 

DPBF26A 

DPBF26 T4 

DPBF32A 

Motor Locked Rotor Resistive Maximum Horsepower Incorporated Type of Catalog Number Price 

Full auxiliary termination 

Load 1 Phase 3 Phase contacts 

600V 240V 480V 600V 600V 120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V 

[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] NO NC $ each 

THREE POWER POLES 

14 84 84 84 20 3 

/4 2 3 3 10 10 0 1 Clamp-screw DPBG12 01 A❶ 76.00 

1 0 DPBG12 10 A❶ 76.00 

20 120 120 100 30 1 1 /2 3 5 5 10 10 0 1 Clamp-screw DPBF09 01 A❶ 81.00 

1 0 DPBF09 10 A❶ 81.00 

25 150 150 125 30 2 3 5 5 10 15 0 1 Clamp-screw DPBF12 01 A❶ 102.00 

1 0 DPBF12 10 A❶ 102.00 

30 180 180 150 32 2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 0 1 Clamp-screw DPBF18 01 A❶ 117.00 

1 0 DPBF18 10 A❶ 117.00 

40 240 240 200 50 3 7 1 /2 10 10 30 30 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBF26 00 A❶ 150.00 

50 300 300 250 55 3 10 15 15 30 40 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBF32 00 A❶ 154.00 

FOUR POWER POLES ❷ 

14 84 84 84 20 3 

/4 2 3 3 10 10 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBG12 T4 A❶ 79.00 

20 120 120 100 30 1 1 /2 3 5 5 10 10 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBF09 T4 A❶ 90.00 

25 150 150 125 30 2 3 5 5 10 15 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBF12 T4 A❶ 111.00 

30 180 180 150 32 2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBF18 T4 A❶ 142.00 

40 240 240 200 50 3 7 1 /2 10 10 30 30 0 0 Clamp-screw DPBF26 T4 A❶ 162.00 

❶ Complete catalog number with coil code as follow: 

Code 

Voltage range 

024 60 24VAC 60Hz 

120 60 120VAC 60Hz 

230 60 230VAC 60Hz 

460 60 460VAC 60Hz 

575 60 575VAC 60Hz 

Complete starter can be assembled using overload relays 

indicated in Section 5. 

❷ The DPBF32A 3-pole type can be retrofitted with fourth pole, catalog 

number BFX42. Refer to page 4-5. 


See page TC-26 for details. 



Compliant with standards: UL508. 


page 4-3 to 5 

Dimensions 

page D-4 


pags W-2 and 3 




pages TC-4 to 28

® 

electric 


Add-on blocks and accessories for DPBG12 contactors 

4-3 

11 BGX10 11 

11 BGX11 11 

11 BGX10 31 

11 BGX77 

11 BGX78 225 

11 BGX79 


qty per number 

contactor 

$ each 

Auxiliary contacts with screw terminals. 

2NC 1 11 BGX10 02 13.80 

1NO + 1NC 1 11 BGX10 11 13.80 

2NO 1 11 BGX10 20 13.80 

4NC ❶ 1 11 BGX10 04❶ 24.00 

1NO + 3NC ❶ 1 11 BGX10 13❶ 24.00 

2NO + 2NC 1 11 BGX10 22 24.00 

3NO + 1NC 1 11 BGX10 31 24.00 

4NO 1 11 BGX10 40 24.00 


For both DPBG types 1 11 BGX50 00 12.00 

Quick connect surge suppressors (Faston terminals). 

≤48VAC/DC (Varistor) 11 BGX77 048 15.00 

48-125VAC/DC (Varistor) 11 BGX77 125 15.00 

125-240VAC/DC (Varistor) 11 BGX77 240 15.00 

≤225VDC (Diode) 11 BGX78 225 15.00 

≤48VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 11 BGX79 048 15.00 

48-125VAC (Resistor-Capacitor) 11 BGX79 125 15.00 



Modular cover ❷. 

For both DPBG types 1 11 BGX80 00 3.50 

❶ Connot be used with DPBG with DC coil. 

❷ Connot be fitted if other accessories are mounted. 


Type 

BGX10... 

BGX11... 

Rated conventional free air A 10 

thermal current Ith 


voltage Ui 

Terminals Screw M3 

Width mm 6.9 


maximum with 1 or 2 cables 

flexible without lug mm 2 2.5 

flexible with lug mm 2 2.5 

AWG n° 14 

UL designation ❸ AC A600 

DC Q600 

Mechanical life cycles 20 

(in millions) 

❸ See page TC-25 for details. 


See page TC-27 with both NO and NC auxiliary contacts. 


UL listed for USA and Canada file E93602 for auxiliary 

contacts. 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

4 

11 BGX50 00 

Dimensions 

page D-11 


page W-3 




pages TC-25 to 27

4-4 


Add-on blocks and accessories for DPBF series contactors 

® 

electric 

4 

Add-on blocks 

BFX10 (02-11-20) 

11 G484 

(03-12-21-30) 

BFX10 

(04-13-22-31-40) 

11 G418 

11 G481 

11 G482 

11 G218 

11 G428... (01-01D-10-10A) 



contactor 

$ each 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with front center mounting. 


2NC 1 BFX10 02 ❶ 14.00 

1NO + 1NC 1 BFX10 11 ❶ 14.00 

2NO 1 BFX10 20 ❶ 14.00 

4NC 1 BFX10 04 ❶❷ 28.20 

1NO + 3NC 1 BFX10 13 ❶❷ 28.20 

2NO + 2NC 1 BFX10 22 ❶❷ 28.20 

3NO + 1NC 1 BFX10 31 ❶❷ 28.20 

4NO 1 BFX10 40 ❶❷ 28.20 

3NC 1 11 G484 03 ❶ 22.00 

1NO + 2NC 1 11 G484 12 ❶ 22.00 

2NO + 1 NC 1 11 G484 21 ❶ 22.00 

3NO 1 11 G484 30 ❶ 22.00 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts with front lateral mounting. 


1NO 2 11 G418 10 12.00 

1EM early make 2 11 G418 10A 12.00 

1NC 2 11 G418 01 12.00 


Faston terminals. 

1NO or 1NC reversible 2 11 G218 11.00 

2NO 2 11 G481 20 15.00 

1NO + 1NC 2 11 G481 11 15.00 

2NC 2 11 G481 02 15.00 

Double-throw❸ 2 11 G482❸ 28.00 

Side mount adapters. 

For G218 2 11 G280 3.20 

For G481 and G482 2 11 G483 4.20 

Auxiliary contacts for side mounting, duly fitted on side-mount 

adapter. Screw terminals. 

1NC 2 11 G428 01 17.40 


1NO 2 11 G428 10 17.40 

1EM early make 2 11 G428 10E 17.40 


on energization ❶. Screw terminals. 

3 seconds 1 11 G485 3 102.00 

6 seconds 1 11 G485 6 102.00 

15 seconds 1 11 G485 15 102.00 

30 seconds 1 11 G485 30 102.00 

60 seconds 1 11 G485 60 102.00 

120 seconds 1 11 G485 120 102.00 


on de-energization ❶. Screw terminals. 

3 seconds 1 11 G486 3 102.00 

6 seconds 1 11 G486 6 102.00 

15 seconds 1 11 G486 15 102.00 

30 seconds 1 11 G486 30 102.00 

60 seconds 1 11 G486 60 102.00 

120 seconds 1 11 G486 120 102.00 

70 milliseconds 1 11 G487 102.00 


Type G418 BFX10 G218 G482❻ 

G428 G484 G481 

G485❺ 

G486❺ 

G487❺ 

Rated current Ith A 10 10 10 0.1❼ 

Rated insulation V 690 690 690 690 

voltage Ui 

Terminals: Screw M 3.5 M 3 –– –– 

Width mm 7 6.9 –– –– 

(0.2in) (0.2in) 

Faston mm –– –– 1-6.35 1-6.35 

2-2.8 2-2.8 


maximum with 1 

or 2 wires 

flexible w/o lug mm 2 2.5 2.5 –– –– 

flexible c/w lug mm 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 

AWG n° 14 14 14 14 

Terminal protection IP20❽ IP20 IP20❿ IP20❿ 

according to 

IEC/EN 60529 

UL AC A600 A600 A600 –– 

designation❹ DC P600❾ Q600 P600 –– 

Mechanical life cycles 10 11 10 10 10 

(in millions) 

❹ See TC-25 for details. 

❺ For particularly severe ambient conditions, contact Sales & Technical 

Support. 

❻ Gold-plated contacts inside tight enclosure for use in pollutant environments. 

❼ Referred to 125VAC and 30VDC. 

❽ Finger safe IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with 

0.75mm 2 /18 AWG minimum conductor section for G418 or G428 

and 1mm 2 /18 AWG minimum for G480, G485, G486 and G487 

types. 

❾ Q600 for G418. 

❿ Finger safe IP20 protection is warranted to equipment wired with 

11 insulated Faston terminals. 

12 3 million cycles for G485, G486, G487. 


See page TC-27 for blocks with both NO and NC auxiliary 

contacts. 


BFX contacts: UL Listed for USA and Canada, file 

E93601; pending for BFX10 04, BFX10 13, BFX10 22, 

BFX10 31, BFX10 40. 

All others: UL Recognized for USA, file E93601 and CSA 

certified, file LR 54332-15. 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 



11 G485 - 11 G486 

11 G487 

❶ Highly conductive contacts. 

❷ Available during 2007; contact Sales & Technical Support for availability. 

❸ Highly conductive contact. 


page 4-3 to 5 

Dimensions 

page D-12 






pages TC-25 to 28

® 

electric 


Add-on blocks and accessories for DPBF series contactors 

4-5 


accessories 

BFX42 

BFX50 00 BFX50 01 



contactor 

$ each 

Fourth pole 

For DPBF26A and 1 BFX42 72.00 

DPBF32A 

Mechanical interlock for all DPBF types. 

Side mount 1 BFX50 00 ❶ 25.00 

Side mount with 2NC 1 BFX50 01 ❶ 36.00 

contacts 

Front mount 1 BFX50 02 10.00 

low profile 

Front mount 1 BFX50 03 30.00 

Quick-connect surge suppressors top mount for all DPBF types. 

Varistor ≤48VAC BFX77 048 17.00 

48-125VAC BFX77 125 17.00 

125-240VAC BFX77 240 17.00 

Resistor- ≤48VAC BFX79 048 21.00 

Condenser 48-125VAC BFX79 125 21.00 

125-240VAC BFX79 240 21.00 

240-415VAC BFX79 415 21.00 

Sealing cover. 

For DPBF contactors BFX80 5.00 

Screw fixing adapters. 

Universal base to screw fix DPBF contactors BFX89 01 4.00 

Screw fixing brackets for DPBF contactors BFX89 02 3.00 

Marking element for all DPBF contactors. 

Blank label for writing BFX30 2.00 

Operational characteristics for mechanical latch 

Type BFX42 BFX50 01 

Conventinal free air A 55 10 

thermal Current Ith 

Rated insulation 

voltage Ui V 690 690 

Terminals: Screw M4 M3 

Width mm 12.5 7 


Maximum with 

1 or 2 cables 

flexible w/o lug mm 2 16 2.5 

flexible c/w lug mm 2 16 2.5 

AWG n° 6 14 

Terminal protection IP20❷ IP20 

per IEC/EN60529 

UL designation ❸ AC A600 –– 

DC –– Q600 

Mechanical life (in millions) cycles 10 10 

Type G222 G272 

Control circuit 

voltage AC (50/60 Hz) V 12-380 12-380 

DC V 12-220 12-220 


with control AC VA 40 40 

DC W 70 70 

Minimum energising 

drop-out ms 10 10 

pick-up ms 50 100 

4 

❶ Different sized contactors can be interlocked. 

Example: DPBF09A-DPBF18A with DPBF26A-BF38A. 

❷ See pages TC-18 and 19 to warrant finger-safe IP20 protection. 

❸ See page TC-25 for details. 

BFX50 02 BFX50 03 




UL listing for USA and Canada, pending completion. 

Compliant with standards: IEC 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

BFX77 

BFX79 

BFX 80 

BFX89 01 

BFX89 02 

Dimensions 

page D-12 






pages TC-25 to 28

PAGE 5-2 

FOR BG SERIES MINI-CONTACTORS 

• Type RF9, single phase sensitive, three poles, 

manual reset 

• Type RFA9, single phase sensitive, three poles, 

automatic reset 

• Type RFS9, single phase sensitive, two poles, 

manual reset 

• Type RFSA9, single phase sensitive, two poles, 

automatic reset. 

PAGE 5-4 

FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS 

• Type RF38, single phase sensitive, three poles, 

manual or automatic reset 

• Types RF25 and RF95, single phase sensitive, 

three poles, manual reset 

• Types RFA25 and RFA95, single phase sensitive, 

three poles, automatic reset 

• Types RFS25 and RFS95, single phase sensitive, 

two poles, manual reset 

• Types RFSA25 and RFSA95, single phase 

sensitive, two poles, automatic reset. 

PAGE 5-8 

FOR B SERIES CONTACTORS 

• Type RF200 and RF420, single phase sensitive, 

three poles, manual or automatic reset. 

RF38 features 

FRONT PROTECTION COVER OF 

THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

A sealable protection cover is 

available. When fitted on to the 

relay front, it precludes all 

possible adjuster tampering and 

involuntary activation of the 

“Reset” and “Stop” buttons of the 

thermal overload relay. 

CLEAR IDENTIFICATION OF THERMAL OVERLOAD 

RELAY MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESET 

The RF38 thermal 

overload relay is supplied 

configured for manual 

resetting. By breaking 

the two tabs, the “Reset” 

button can be rotated to automatic resetting. 

The broken tabs and the index indicator provides 

for immediate and distinct identification of the 

selected configuration. 

FIXING EASE OF THE THERMAL 

OVERLOAD RELAY 

While the thermal overload 

relay is being linked to the 

contactor, its auxiliary contact 

fits on and connects to the coil 

terminal by rigid terminal. 

Complete relay fixing is done in 

a single operation, without the 

need of other connections. 

SEALABLE RELAY COVER 

A handy closing flap 

feature excludes any 

tampering with the thermal 

overload relay adjuster. 



5 

IEC STYLE OVERLOAD RELAYS 

IEC style adjustable bimetallic 

overload relays 

Class 10A thermal overload relays 

for motor currents 0.14 to 630A 

Ambient compensated 

Three phase (3-pole) and single 

phase (2-pole) types 

Three phase units are single phase 

sensitive for better motor 

protection 

Automatic and/or manual reset 

Direct mount to contactor or 

separate mount 


SEC. PAGE 

IEC style overload relays 

With BG series mini-contactors 

For three-phase starters, RF9 and RFA9 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 2 

For single-phase starters, RFS9 and RFSA9 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3 

With BF series contactors 

For three-phase starters, RF38 - RF25 - RF95 - RFA25 - RFA95 types . . . . . . . . 5- 4 

For single-phase starters, RFS38 - RFS25 - RFSA25 - RFSA95 types . . . . . . . . 5- 6 

With B series contactors 

For three-phase starters, RF200 and RF420 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 8 

Accessories for all versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 9 



5-2 


For three-phase starters with BG series mini-contactors 

electric 

5 

Three poles, single 

phase sensitive 

(three phase) 

11 RF9 

11 RFA9 

Adjustment Catalog number Price 

range 

[A] 

$ each 

MANUAL RESET. 

For direct mounting on BG06-BG09 and BG12 mini-contactors ❶. 

0.14 - 0.23 11 RF9 023 55.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RF9 033 55.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RF9 05 55.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RF9 075 55.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RF9 1 55.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RF9 1V5 55.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RF9 2V3 55.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RF9 33 55.00 

3 - 5 11 RF9 5 55.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RF9 75 55.00 

6 - 10 11 RF9 10 55.00 

9 - 15 11 RF9 15 55.00 

AUTOMATIC RESET. 

For direct mounting on BG06-BG09 and BG12 mini-contactors ❶. 

0.14 - 0.23 11 RFA9 023 60.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RFA9 033 60.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RFA9 05 60.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RFA9 075 60.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RFA9 1 60.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RFA9 1V5 60.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RFA9 2V3 60.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RFA9 33 60.00 

3 - 5 11 RFA9 5 60.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RFA9 75 60.00 

6 - 10 11 RFA9 10 60.00 

9 - 15 11 RFA9 15 60.00 


– Tripping class: 10A 

– Normal operating limits: -4...+130°F (-20...+55°C); 

compensation from 5°F (-15°C) 

– Storage temperature: -65...+160°F (-55...+70°C) 

– Maximum altitude: 9800ft (3000m) 

– Mounting position: normally on vertical plane, 

±30° admissible 

– Fixed to contactor 

– Includes: test button and trip indicator 

– Auxiliary contacts: 1NO + 1NC. 

Version without single-phase sensitivity is available on 

request. Contact Sales & Technical Support for the relative 

catalog numbers and pricing. 

The appropriate adjustment range of the overload relay 

should be selected on the basis of the motor nameplate 

full-load current when across the line starting is considered. 

NOTE: To facilitate connection between the auxiliary NC 

contact of the thermal relay RF9 or RFA9 and terminal A2 of 

the contactor, insert the wire lead into the appropriate 

conduit as shown. 

Certification and compliance 


CSA certified, file LR 054332_0_000, class 3211-03. 


❶ Suitable for definite-purpose contactor DPBG12. 

Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 

page D-4 


page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

electric 


For single-phase starters with BG series mini-contactors 

5-3 

Two poles 

(single phase) 

11 RFS9 


range 

[A] 

$ each 

MANUAL RESET. 

Direct mounting on BG06-BG09 and BG12 mini-contactors ❶. 

0.14 - 0.23 11 RFS9 023 50.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RFS9 033 50.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RFS9 05 50.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RFS9 075 50.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RFS9 1 50.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RFS9 1V5 50.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RFS9 2V3 50.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RFS9 33 50.00 

3 - 5 11 RFS9 5 50.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RFS9 75 50.00 

6 - 10 11 RFS9 10 50.00 

9 - 15 11 RFS9 15 50.00 
















contact of the thermal relay RFS9 and terminal A2 of the 

contactor, insert the wire lead into the appropriate conduit 

as shown. 

5 

❶ Suitable for definite-purpose contactor DPBG12. 





Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 

page D-4 


page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

5-4 


For three-phase starters with BF series contactors 

electric 

5 



(three phase) 

RF38 

11 RF25 

11 RF95 

❶ Also suitable for earlier BF9-BF40 types with AC 

coil and definite-purpose contactors. 

❷ Also suitable for earlier BF20 10-BF20 01- 

BF20 40- BF25 10-BF25 01-BF25 40 types. 

For overload relay 11RF95 0 23, suitable for 

BF20 00-BF25 00 types and defnite-purpose 

contactor DPBF26A, contact Sales & Technical 

Support for pricing and details 

❸ Also suitable for earlier BF32-BF40 types with 

AC coil and definite-purpose contactor 

DPBF32A. 

❹ To use with the G270 base, remove the mounted 

links and assemble the ones supplied with the 

G270. 


range 

[A] 

$ each 

MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC RESET. 

Direct mounting on BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A - BF26A - 

BF32A - BF38A contactors ❶. 

Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base. 

0.1-0.16 RF38 0016 55.00 

0.16-0.25 RF38 0025 55.00 

0.25-0.4 RF38 0040 55.00 

0.4-0.63 RF38 0063 55.00 

0.63-1 RF38 0100 55.00 

1-1.6 RF38 0160 55.00 

1.6-2.5 RF38 0250 55.00 

2.5-4 RF38 0400 55.00 

4-6.5 RF38 0650 55.00 

6.3-10 RF38 1000 55.00 

9-14 RF38 1400 55.00 

13-18 RF38 1800 63.00 

17-23 RF38 2300 63.00 

20-25 RF38 2500 63.00 

24-32 RF38 3200 98.00 

32-38 RF38 3800 98.00 

MANUAL RESET. 

Direct mounting on BF9C-BF12C-BF16C-BF20C-BF25C-BF32C- 

BF40C contactors ❶. 

Independent mounting with G230 base. 

0.14 - 0.23 11 RF25 023 55.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RF25 033 55.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RF25 05 55.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RF25 075 55.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RF25 1 55.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RF25 1V5 55.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RF25 2V3 55.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RF25 33 55.00 

3 - 5 11 RF25 5 55.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RF25 75 55.00 

6 - 10 11 RF25 10 55.00 

9 - 15 11 RF25 15 55.00 

14 - 23 11 RF25 23 63.00 

17 - 26 11 RF25 26 73.00 

Direct mounting on BF20C-BF25C contactors ❷. 

Complete with G291 links. 

Independent mounting with G270 base ❹. 

20 - 33 11 RF95 1 33 130.00 

28 - 42 11 RF95 1 42 145.00 

Direct mounting on BF32C-BF40C contactors ❸. 

Complete with G260 links. Independent mounting with G270 base ❹. 

20 - 33 11 RF95 2 33 130.00 

28 - 42 11 RF95 2 42 145.00 

35 - 50 11 RF95 2 50 151.00 

46 - 65 11 RF95 2 65 170.00 

Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 and BF50C-BF110C 

contactors. Complete with G261 links. 


20 - 33 11 RF95 3 33 130.00 

28 - 42 11 RF95 3 42 145.00 

35 - 50 11 RF95 3 50 151.00 

46 - 65 11 RF95 3 65 170.00 

60 - 82 11 RF95 3 82 186.00 

70 - 95 11 RF95 3 95 203.00 

90 - 110 11 RF95 3 110 227.00 



















contact of the thermal relay RF25 or RF95 and terminal A2 

of the contactor, insert the wire lead into the appropriate 




CSA certified, file LR 054332_0_000, class 3211-03 except 

for RF38. 


Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 



page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

electric 


For three-phase starters with BF series contactors 

5-5 



(three phase) 

11 RFA25 

11 RFA95 


range 

[A] 

$ each 





0.14 - 0.23 11 RFA25 023 60.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RFA25 033 60.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RFA25 05 60.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RFA25 075 60.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RFA25 1 60.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RFA25 1V5 60.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RFA25 2V3 60.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RFA25 33 60.00 

3 - 5 11 RFA25 5 60.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RFA25 75 60.00 

6 - 10 11 RFA25 10 60.00 

9 - 15 11 RFA25 15 60.00 

14 - 23 11 RFA25 23 70.00 

17 - 26 11 RFA25 26 81.00 

Direct mounting on BF20C-BF25C contactors. 

Complete with G291 links ❷. 


20 - 33 11 RFA95 1 33 135.00 

28 - 42 11 RFA95 1 42 150.00 

Direct mounting on BF32C-BF40C. 

Complete with G260 links ❸. 


20 - 33 11 RFA95 2 33 135.00 

28 - 42 11 RFA95 2 42 150.00 

35 - 50 11 RFA95 2 50 156.00 

46 - 65 11 RFA95 2 65 175.00 

Direct mounting on BF50-BF110 and BF50C-BF110C 

contactors. 



20 - 33 11 RFA95 3 33 139.00 

28 - 42 11 RFA95 3 42 150.00 

35 - 50 11 RFA95 3 50 156.00 

46 - 65 11 RFA95 3 65 175.00 

60 - 82 11 RFA95 3 82 191.00 

70 - 95 11 RFA95 3 95 208.00 

90 - 110 11 RFA95 3 110 232.00 

❶ Also suitable for earlier BF9-BF40 types with AC coil and definite-purpose 

contactors. 

❷ Also suitable for earlier BF20 10-BF20 01-BF20 40- BF25 10-BF25 01-BF25 40 

types. 

For overload relay 11RFA95, suitable for BF20 00-BF25 00 types and 

definite-purpose contactor, DPBF26A contact Sales & Technical Support for 

pricing and details. 

❸ Also suitable for earlier BF32-BF40 types with AC coil and definite-purpose 

contactor DPBF32A. 

❹ To use with the G270 base, remove the mounted links and assemble the ones 

supplied with the G270. 









– Fixed to contactor or independent mounting 







contact of the thermal relay RFA25 or RFA95 and terminal 

A2 of the contactor, insert the wire lead into the appropriate 






IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

5 

Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 



page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

5-6 


For single-phase starters with BF series contactors 

electric 

5 

Two poles 


RFS38 

11 RFS25 

11 RFS95 


range 

[A] 

$ each 


Direct mounting on BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A - BF26A - 

BF32A - BF38A contactors ❶. 

Independent mounting with RFX38 04 base. 

0.1-0.16 RFS38 0016 50.00 

0.16-0.25 RFS38 0025 50.00 

0.25-0.4 RFS38 0040 50.00 

0.4-0.63 RFS38 0063 50.00 

0.63-1 RFS38 0100 50.00 

1-1.6 RFS38 0160 50.00 

1.6-2.5 RFS38 0250 50.00 

2.5-4 RFS38 0400 50.00 

4-6.5 RFS38 0650 50.00 

6.3-10 RFS38 1000 50.00 

9-14 RFS38 1400 50.00 

13-18 RFS38 1800 58.00 

17-23 RFS38 2300 58.00 

20-25 RFS38 2500 58.00 

24-32 RFS38 3200 93.00 

32-38 RFS38 3800 93.00 

MANUAL RESETTING. 




0.14 - 0.23 11 RFS25 023 50.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RFS25 033 50.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RFS25 05 50.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RFS25 075 50.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RFS25 1 50.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RFS25 1V5 50.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RFS25 2V3 50.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RFS25 33 50.00 

3 - 5 11 RFS25 5 50.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RFS25 75 50.00 

6 - 10 11 RFS25 10 50.00 

9 - 15 11 RFS25 15 50.00 

14 - 23 11 RFS25 23 58.00 

17 - 26 11 RFS25 26 68.00 

Direct mounting on BF20C-BF25C contactors. 

Complete with G291 links ❷. 


20 - 33 11 RFS95 1 33 115.00 

28 - 42 11 RFS95 1 42 130.00 

Direct mounting on BF32C-BF40C contactors ❸. 



20 - 33 11 RFS95 2 33 115.00 

28 - 42 11 RFS95 2 42 130.00 












The appropriate adjustment range of the thermal overload 

relay should be selected on the basis of the motor 

nameplate full-load current when direct starting is 

considered. 


contact of the thermal relay RFS25 or RFS95 and terminal 

A2 of the contactor, insert the wire lead into the appropriate 




CSA certified, file LR 054332_0_000, class 3211-03 except 

for RFS38. 



contactors. 

❷ Also suitable for earlier BF20 10-BF20 01-BF20 40- BF25 10-BF25 01-BF25 40 

types. 

❸ Also suitable for earlier BF32-BF40 types with AC coil and definite-purpose 

contactor DPBF32A. 

❹ To use with the G270 base, remove the mounted links and assemble the ones 

supplied with the G270. 

Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 



page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

electric 


For single-phase starters with BF series contactors 

5-7 

Two poles 


11 RFSA25 


range 

[A] 

$ each 





0.14 - 0.23 11 RFSA25 023 55.00 

0.2 - 0.33 11 RFSA25 033 55.00 

0.3 - 0.5 11 RFSA25 05 55.00 

0.45 - 0.75 11 RFSA25 075 55.00 

0.6 - 1 11 RFSA25 1 55.00 

0.9 - 1.5 11 RFSA25 1V5 55.00 

1.4 - 2.3 11 RFSA25 2V3 55.00 

2 - 3.3 11 RFSA25 33 55.00 

3 - 5 11 RFSA25 5 55.00 

4.5 - 7.5 11 RFSA25 75 55.00 

6 - 10 11 RFSA25 10 55.00 

9 - 15 11 RFSA25 15 55.00 

14 - 23 11 RFSA25 23 65.00 

17 - 26 11 RFSA25 26 76.00 
















contact of the thermal relay RFSA25 and terminal A2 of the 

contactor, insert the wire lead into the appropriate conduit 

as shown. 

5 


contactors. 





Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 

page D-4 


page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

5-8 


For three-phase starters 

electric 

5 

Three-pole, single 


(three phase) 

RF200 - RF420 


range 

[A] 

$ each 


Separate mounting ❶. 

60 - 100 11 RF200 100 400.00 

75 - 125 11 RF200 125 400.00 

90 - 150 11 RF200 150 400.00 

120 - 200 11 RF200 200 400.00 

Separate mounting ❶. 

150 - 250 11 RF420 250 500.00 

180 - 300 11 RF420 300 500.00 

250 - 420 11 RF420 420 500.00 

❶ Connecting links between contactor and relay are not included. 

Direct mounting on contactor is possible with the following links: 

G372 to fix RF200 on B115-B145-B180 

G373 to fix RF200 on B250-B310-B400 

G375 to fix RF420 on B145-B180 

G376 to fix RF420 on B250-B310-B400. 

See page 5-9 for connecting link details. 

NOTE: Contact Sales & Technical Support for overload relays to be used with 

B500-B630 contactors. 





















Combinations 

G258 

(for RF...95 2) 

G262 

(for RF...95 3) 

G372 

G373 

G375 

G376 

G270 

G361 

G363 

RF...200 

RF...420 

G230 

RFX38 04 

RF...95 1 

RF...95 2 

RF...95 3 

G233 

G228 

RF...9 

RF...25 

G244 

RF...38 

RB6 

RFX38 01 

Accessories 

page 5-9 

Dimensions 



page W-5 




pages TC-32 and 33

electric 


Accessories for overload relays 

5-9 

RFX38 02 

Description Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Set of links for direct contactor mounting. 

RF..95 on BF20 00-BF25 00 11 G430 ❶ 8.00 

contactor: BF20 10-BF20 01 11 G291 8.00 

BF25 10-BF25 01 

BF20 40-BF25 40 

AC and DC types 

BF32-BF40 11 G260 ❷ 8.00 


BF50-BF110 11 G261 11.00 


RF...200 on B115-B145-B180 11 G372 29.00 

contactor: B250-B310-B400 11 G373 44.00 

Remote reset (G228) operational characteristics 

Control circuit voltage 

AC (50/60Hz) V 12 - 550 

Power consumption in AC VA 300 

Minimum reset time ms 20 

NOTE: Coil can remain supplied for a maximum interval of 

500ms; 3 consecutive operations are allowed, followed by a 

5 minute interval. 

It is recommended to use the wiring diagram on page W-5. 


UL recognition listed, for USA and Canada, file E93601. 

CSA certified, file LR 054332_0_000, class 3211-02 for 

links and G361 and G363 protections.. 


RFX38 03 

11 G258 

11 G262 

RF...420 on B145-B180 11 G375 39.00 

contactor: B250-B310-B400 11 G376 46.00 

Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly. 

RF38 on contactor BF09A - BF12A - RFX38 02 4.00 

BF18A - BF25A ❸ 

RF38 on contactor BF26A - BF32A - RFX38 03 4.00 

BF38A ❸ 

Finger protection for power terminals. 

RF...95 2 11 G258 ❹ 4.50 

RF...95 3 11 G262 ❹ 4.50 

RF...200 11 G361 17.00 

RF...420 11 G363 33.00 

Independent mounting. 

Screw fixing or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting. 

RF...38 RFX38 04 12.50 

RF25 11 G230 11.50 

RF95 11 G270❺ 42.00 

Remote reset. 

All types 11 G228❻ 46.00 

Anti-tamper shield. 

RF...38 BFX38 01 5.00 

All types 11 G233 2.50 

Electric button with 1NO contact. 

RF...9 - RF...25 - RF...95 11 G244 7.00 

Marking element. 

RF...9 - RF...25 - RF...95 11 RB6 3.20 

5 

11 G230 

RFX38 04 

Protection cover for thermal overload relay-contactor assembly 

BF09A-BF25A 

BF26A-BF38A 

11 G228 

11 G244 

❶ G430 can be used for connection between RF...95 

and definite purpose contactor DPBF26A. 

❷ G260 can also be used for connection between 

RF...95 and definite-purpose contactor DPBF32A. 

❸ Suitable con definite-purpose contactors 

DPBF...A too. 

❹ Front finger protection IP20 is warranted to 

contactor-thermal relay connections. 

❺ To use with the G270 base, remove the mounted 

links and assemble the ones supplied with the 

G270. 

❻ Replace with voltage digits. 

Indicate: 024 for 24V, 120 for 110-125V and 230 

for 200-240V. 

All are suitable for 50/60Hz. 

Other voltage values are available on request. 

Contact Sales & Technical Support for details. 

RF...38 

RFX38 02 

RF...38 

RFX38 03 

Dimensions 

page D-15 


page W-5 



PAGE 6-2 

ENCLOSED COMPACT STARTERS 

WITH OVERLOAD RELAY 

• Single and three-phase motor ratings, 1A to 95A 

• With reset button or with start-stop/reset 

buttons. 

PAGE 6-4 

EMPTY NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES 

• Versions without pushbuttons, with reset button 

only or with start-stop/reset buttons 

• Suitable to contain BG mini-contactors or BF09A 

to BF95 contactors, up to 95A rating. 

REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

• Unwired and wired versions 

• Single and three-phase motor ratings, 

6A to 185A 


PAGE 6-8 



6 

IEC STYLE STARTERS 

Compact, economical IEC style 

starters, full voltage 

non-reversing 

Non-metallic enclosures 

Available with RESET or 

START/STOP push buttons in cover 

Enclosures available separately for 

customer assembly 

Reversing contactor assemblies 


SEC. PAGE 

Full-voltage - accross the line - starters 

Non-reversing - three phase 

Enclosed compact starter with overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 2 

Empty non-metallic enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4 

Reversing - three poles 

With operating coil in AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 8 

With operating coil in DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 9 



6-2 

IEC style starters 

Full-voltage - across the line - non reversing - three-phase type 

electric 

M0 R M0 P M1 R M1 P M2 R M2 P 

Maximum horsepower ratings Catalog number Price 

Single Phase ❶ Three Phase ❶ ❷ ❸ ❹ 

120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V $ each 

M0 ENCLOSURE 

Reset button only 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 M0 R009 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 163.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 M0 R012 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 179.00 

6 

Start - Stop/Reset Pushbuttons 

1 

/2 1 2 3 5 5 M0 P009 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 177.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 M0 P012 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 193.00 

M1 ENCLOSURE 


3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 M1 R009 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 194.00 

1 3 5 5 10 15 M1 R018 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 221.00 


3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 M1 P009 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 208.00 

1 3 5 5 10 15 M1 P018 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 235.00 

M2 ENCLOSURE 


2 3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 15 M2 R025 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 270.00 

3 7 1 /2 10 10 20 25 M2 R032 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 344.00 


2 3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 15 M2 P025 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 284.00 

3 7 1 /2 10 10 20 25 M2 P032 12 ❶ ❷ ❸ 358.00 

M3 ENCLOSURE 


5 10 10 15 30 40 11 M3 BRF R50 ❶ ❷ ❸ 481.00 

–– –– 20 25 50 60 11 M3 BRF R65 ❶ ❷ ❸ 570.00 

–– –– 25 30 60 75 11 M3 BRF R80 ❶ ❷ ❸ 672.00 

–– –– 30 30 60 75 11 M3 BRF R95 ❶ ❷ ❸ 696.00 


5 10 10 15 30 40 11 M3 BRF P50 ❶ ❷ ❸ 496.00 

–– –– 20 25 50 60 11 M3 BRF P65 ❶ ❷ ❸ 585.00 

–– –– 25 30 60 75 11 M3 BRF P65 ❶ ❷ ❸ 585.00 

–– –– 30 30 60 75 11 M3 BRF P95 ❶ ❷ ❸ 711.00 

Accessories 

page 6-4 

Dimensions 



page W-6 



electric 


Full-voltage - across the line - non reversing - three-phase type 

6-3 

11 M3 BRF R 11 M3 BRF P 

Contactor 

included 

Enclosure 

Size Size Degree of protection 

BG09 10A M0 RA IP65 

BG12 10A M0 RA IP65 

BG09 10A M0 PA IP65 

BG12 10A M0 PA IP65 

BF09 10A M1 RA IP65 


BF09 10A M1 PA IP65 

BF18 10A M1 PA IP65 





BF50 00 M3 IP54 

BF65 00 M3 IP54 

BF80 00 M3 IP54 

BF95 00 M3 IP54 

BF50 00 M3 IP54 

BF65 00 M3 IP54 

BF80 00 M3 IP54 

BF95 00 M3 IP54 


Full-voltage starters in non-metallic enclosure are 

supplied complete with three-pole single-phase sensitive 

thermal overload relay. 

The enclosure has knockout entries. The M0 and M1 

versions have all entries with diameter 0.8in / 21mm 

while the M2, diameter 0.8/1in - 21/26mm and M3, 

diameter 1.5in / 37mm. Entries are located on upper and 

lower surfaces and must be completed with adequate wire 

conduits to maintain the enclosure degree of protection. 

Protection fuses are to be mounted externally by the user. 

Electrical life 

500,000 cycles at the maximum rate of 600 cycles/hour. 


UL listings for USA and Canada pending for M0 - M1 - 

M2 types only. 


IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508. 

Coil codes ❶❷ 

Voltage range 60Hz 

Coil Code 

24V 02460 

120V 12060 

220-240V 23060 

440-480V 46060 

575V 57560 

Overload relay codes ❶❸ 

For M0 types 

For M1-M2 types 

Amp Range Relay code Amp Range Relay code 

0.14 - 0.23 023 0.1-0.16 A0 

0.2 - 0.33 033 0.16-0.25 A1 

0.3 - 0.5 05 0.25-0.4 A2 

0.45 - 0.75 075 0.4-0.63 A3 

0.6 - 1 1 0.63-1 A4 

0.9 - 1.5 1V5 1-1.6 A5 

1.4 - 2.3 2V3 1.6-2.5 A6 

2 - 3.3 33 2.5-4 A7 

3 - 5 5 4-6.5 A8 

4.5 - 7.5 75 6.3-10 A9 

6 - 10 10 9-14 B0 

9 - 15 15 13-18 B1 

For M3 types 17-23 B2 

14 - 23 23 20-25 B3 

20 - 33 33 24-32 B4 

28 - 42 42 32-38 B5 

35 - 50 50 

46 - 65 65 

60 - 82 82 

70 - 95 95 

❶ For a starter without overload relay, replace “12” of the catalog 

number with “10” and complete with a coil code only. Consult Sales 

& Technical Support for pricing. Example: M1 P009 10 02460. 

For single phase starter, replace “12” of the catalog number with 

“13” and complete with coil and relay codes as mentioned below. 

For a M0 starter with automatic reset relay, replace “12” of the 

catalog number with “15 and complete with coil and relay codes as 

mentioned below. 

❷ Select the coil voltage required from the coil codes table and add 

the coil code to the catalog number. 

❸ After adding the coil code, select the Amp range required from the 

Overload relay codes tables, depending on the enclosure type, and 

add the relay code to the catalog number. 

For single phase starters, refer to note ❶ above. 

Three-phase starters can be used on single phase provided they are 

wired properly, refer to wiring diagrams on page W-6 or see the 

instructions leaflet with the starter. 

Examples of complete catalog numbers: 

M1 P009 12 12060 A9 

M2 R032 13 23060 B4 

M1 enclosure, Start-Stop/Reset buttons, 

BF09A contactor, 6.3-10A overload, 3 phase, 

and 120VAC coil 

M2 enclosure, Reset only, BF32A contactor, 

24-32A overload, single phase, and 

230VAC coil. 

❹ See page 6-5 for main starter components. Contact Sales & 

Technical Support for catalog numbers and pricing not listed. 

6 

Accessories 

page 6-4 

Dimensions 



page W-6 



6-4 


Full-voltage - across the line - starters - Accessories 

electric 

6 

Empty non-metallic 

enclosures 

M...N 

M...PA 

M...RA 

Accessories and 

spare parts 

MX 00 

Contactor type Overload Degree Catalog Price 

❶ relay of number 

❷ protect. ❸ 

$ each 

Enlcosures without external push-buttons. 

BG06, BG09, RFA9 IP65 M0N 25.00 

BG12 

BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 M1N 28.00 

BF18A 

BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 M2N 47.00 

BF32A❹ 

BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP54 11 M3 172.00 

BF80, BF95 

Enclosures with Start-Stop/Reset buttons. 

BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 M0PA 45.00 

BG12 

BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 M1PA 48.00 

BF18A 

BF25A, BF26A, RF38 IP65 M2PA 67.00 

BF32A❹ 

BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP54 11 M3P 196.00 

BF80, BF95 

Enclosures with Reset button. 

BG06, BG09, RF9 IP65 M0RA 31.00 

BG12 

BF09A, BF12A, RF38 IP65 M1RA 34.00 

BF18A 

BF25A, BF26A RF38 IP65 M2RA 53.00 

BF32A❹ 

BF50, BF65, RF95 3 IP54 11 M3R 185.00 

BF80, BF95 

❶ To be purchased separately; refer to page 3-4 for contactor choice. 

❷ To be purchased separately; refer to pages 4-2 to 4-6 for thermal overload 

relay choice. 

❸ Contact Sales & Technical Support also for catalog number not listed. 

❹ Reversing contactor assemblies can be fitted as well. Refer to illustrations on 

page 6-7. 


number 

$ each 

Button actuator fixing adapter MX 00 4.50 

for M0, M1 and M2 enclosures 

Stop/Reset button extension MX 10 1.50 

rod for M0 enclosure 





Mounting base for 8LM2T C... MX 20 3.00 

contact on M0 enclosure 

Mounting base for 8LM2T C... MX 21 3.00 

contact on M1 or M2 enclosure 

Enclosure 

type 

A 

M0 12 

M1 18 

M2 32 

M3 95 

Maximum operating current 

(≤440V) 


Enclosures are supplied with the following accessories: 

Enclosure M0 RA M1 RA M2 RA M0 PA M1 PA M2 PA 

Mounting MX 20 1 

base MX 21 1 1 

Stop/Reset 

button 

8 LP2T B1176 1 1 1 

8 LP2T B2104 1 1 1 

Start button 

8 LP2T B1113 1 1 1 

Contact element 

for Start button 

8 LM2T E10 1 1 1 

Operator mounting 

adapter MX 00 1 1 1 2 2 2 

Start/Reset button 

extension rod 

MX 10 1 1 

MX 11 1 1 

MX 12 1 1 

Threaded plug for 

unused holes 

8 LM2T A129 1 1 1 

M3 P and M3 R type enclosures are equipped with the 

following accessories:: 

– Enclsoure with Reset button: Earth terminal and 2 

G285 auxiliary terminals 

– Enclosure with Start and Stop/Reset buttons: N/O 

contact for start function, earth terminal and 2 G285 

auxiliary terminals. 

NOTE: Enclosures can house the following contactors with 

the relative overload relay: 

M0 = BG 

M1 = BF09A-BF18A 

M2 = BF25A-BF32A❹ 

M3 = BF50-BF95 


UL listing for USA and Canada for M0 - M1 - M2 types 

only is pending completion. 


IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

MX 20 

MX 21 

Dimensions 



page W-6 



electric 


Full-voltage - across the line - non reversing - accessories 

6-5 

M0 R009 12 M0 P0012 12 

M1 R009 12 M1 P018 12 

Composition of complete starters or components to be assembled by the customer. 

The customer can choose to purchase the various components as per list below. 

The three columns in boldface indicate components for full-voltage starters consenting the customer to assemble different 

contactor-relay combinations. The column on the extreme right indicates the completely-assembled types given on page 6-2 and 6-3. 

For catalog numbers of each component, refer to the relevant section; e.g. for contactors, see section 3. 

Enclosure Protection Push Contactor Overload Auxiliary Complete 

degree buttons Relay Contacts ❶ Starter available 

3-Phase 1-Phase 

M0RA IP65 RESET BG06 10A RF9 RFS9 1 NO –– 

BG09 10A RF9 RFS9 1 NO M0 R009 

BG12 10A RF9 RFS9 1 NO M0 R012 

M0PA IP65 START and BG06 10A RF9 RFS9 1 NO –– 

STOP/RESET BG09 10A RF9 RFS9 1 NO M0 P009 

BG12 10A RF9 RFS9 1 NO M0 P012 

M1RA IP65 RESET BF09 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO M1 R009 

BF12 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO –– 

BF18 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO M1 R018 

M1PA IP65 START and BF09 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO M1 P009 

STOP/RESET BF12 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO –– 

BF18 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO M1 R018 

M2RA IP65 RESET BF25 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO M2 R025 

BF26 00A RF38 RFS38 –– –– 

BF32 00A RF38 RFS38 –– M2 R032 

M2PA IP65 START and BF25 10A RF38 RFS38 1 NO M2 P025 

STOP/RESET BF26 00A RF38 RFS38 –– –– 

BF32 00A RF38 RFS38 –– M2 P032 

M3R IP54 RESET BF50 00 RF95 3 RFS95 –– M3BRF R50 

BF65 00 RF95 3 –– –– M3BRF R65 

BF80 00 RF95 3 –– –– M3BRF R80 

BF95 00 RF95 3 –– –– M3BRF R95 

M3P IP54 START and BF50 00 RF95 3 RFS95 –– M3BRF P50 

STOP/RESET BF65 00 RF95 3 –– –– M3BRF P65 

BF80 00 RF95 3 –– –– M3BRF P80 

BF95 00 RF95 3 –– –– M3BRF P95 

❶ All versions are suitable for mounting other NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) auxiliary contacts. Contact Sales & Technical Support for information 

about possible configurations. 

NOTE: These starters have an electric life rating of 500,000 cycles, at the maximum rate of 600 cycles per hour. 

6 

Dimensions 



page W-6 



6-6 


Full-voltage - across the line - starters - Composition 

electric 

M0 P009 12... 

M0 P012 12... 

M0 P009 10... 

M0 P012 10... 

M0PA 

M0 R009 12... 

M0 R012 12... 

M0 R009 10... 

M0 R012 10... 

M0RA 

M0N 

6 

M1 P009 12... 

M1 P018 12... 

M1 P009 10... 

M1 P018 10... 

M1PA 

M1 R009 12... 

M1 R018 12... 

M1 R009 10... 

M1 R018 10... 

M1RA 

M1N 

M2 P02512... 

M2 P032 12... 

M2 P025 10... 

M2 P032 10... 

M2PA 

M2 R025 12... 

M2 R032 12... 

M2 R025 10... 

M2 R032 10... 

M2RA 

M2N 

Dimensions 




electric 


Full-voltage - across the line - starters - Composition 

6-7 

The starter enclosures are designed to facilitate 

numerous circuit and assembly variations. 

Inside the enclosure, in addition to the starter, 

composed by a contactor and thermal overload 

relay, timers, level control and protection relays of 

the Modulo series can be fitted. These devices can 

be the 1-module type for the M0 and M1 

enclosures or 2-module type for the M2. 

The enclosure covers can be equipped with 

various type of actuators and pilot lights, per the 

following details. 

1) Upper position 1: The cover must be drilled in 

this position, with a 0.89in (22.5mm) diameter, 

by the user; 8LM2TIL10 or 8LP2TIL pilot light 

can be fitted. 

To fit the 8LM2TIL pilot light, the MX 00 fixing 

adapter and the mounting base, type 

MX 20 for M0, or type MX 21 for M1 and M2, 

must also be purchased. The lamp holder is 

snapped on to this mounting base. 

2) Middle position 2: Based on the enclosure 

type, in this position, the user finds either the 

Start button or a plug in the 0.89in (22.5mm) 

hole. 

Various actuators can be fitted in this position, 

such as flush or extended push buttons, 

selectors or pilot lights, as illustrated in the 

drawing. To fit the actuators, the MX 00 fixing 

adapter, not required for LP2TIL pilot lights, 

and the mounting base, type MX 20 for M0, or 

type MX 21 for M1 and M2, must also be 

purchased. The contact or lamp holder 

elements are snapped on to this mounting 

base. 

3) Lower position 3: The Stop/Reset button is 

mounted in this position, except for the 

enclosure without buttons. This button 

activates the thermal overload relay via a 

mechanical operator. In eventual applications 

without thermal overload relay, this button can 

be removed and the hole stopped up by the 

threaded plug 8 LM2T A129. 

8 LM2T C 

8 LM2T L 

8 LM2T EL400 

8 LM2T ZL230 

❶ 

MX 00 

8 LM2T C 

MX 20 (M0) 

MX 21 (M1 - M2) 

1 

2 

3 

8 LM2T A140 

8 LM2T A140 

8 LM2T IL10 

8 LP2T IL 

8 L...2T BL 

8 L...2T B1 

8 L...2T B2 

6 

❶ 0.69in. 

1.4in/35.8mm for M2 enclosure only. 

8 L...2T S3 

8 L...2T S 

8 L...2T B71... 

8 L...2T B72... 

8 L...2T BL71... 

8 L...2T BL72... 

8 L...2T B73... 

N. 2 BF09A 

BG 

BF09A 

BF18A 

BF25A 

BF32A 

N. 2 BF25A 

BFX50 02 

RF9 

RF38 

RF38 

RF38 

Dimensions 



page W-6 



6-8 


Three-pole reversing contactors with operating coil in AC 

electric 

UL maximum horsepower ratings UL UL Maximum current Auxiliary Catalog number Price 

Single phase Three phase Amp resistive Inductive Resistive contacts 

115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V rating Amps AC3 AC1 (per contactor) 

[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A] [A] [A] NO NC $ each 

Unwired version - AC coil 

Reversing mini-contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked. Terminals: clamp screw. 

1 

/3 1 1 1 /2 2 3 3 16 –– 6 16 1 0 11 BGU06 10 A ❶ 147.00 

0 1 11 BGU06 01 A ❶ 147.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 1 0 11 BGU09 10 A ❶ 177.00 

6 

11 BGU09 01A 

BFU...A 

11 BGR09 01A 

0 1 11 BGU09 01 A ❶ 177.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 20 –– 12 20 1 0 11 BGU12 10 A ❶ 203.00 

0 1 11 BGU12 01 A ❶ 203.00 

Reversing contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked. 

Terminals: clamp screw for BFU09-BFU40; lug clamp for BFU50-BFU110. 

3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 25 –– 9 25 1 0 BFU09 10A ❶ 180.00 

0 1 BFU09 01A ❶ 180.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 28 –– 12 25 1 0 BFU12 10A ❶ 222.00 

0 1 BFU12 01A ❶ 222.00 

1 3 5 5 102 15 32 –– 18 32 1 0 BFU18 10A ❶ 238.00 

0 1 BFU18 01A ❶ 238.00 

2 3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 15 32 –– 25 32 1 0 BFU25 10A ❶ 266.00 

0 1 BFU25 01A ❶ 266.00 

2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 45 –– 26 45 0 0 BFU26 00A ❶ 278.00 

3 7 1 /2 10 10 20 25 55 –– 32 56 0 0 BFU32 00A ❶ 326.00 

3 7 1 /2 10 15 30 30 55 –– 38 56 0 0 BFU38 00A ❶ 394.00 

5 10 10 15 30 40 90 –– 50 90 0 0 11 BFU50 00 ❶ 470.00 

–– –– 20 25 50 60 110 –– 65 110 0 0 11 BFU65 00 ❶ 598.00 

–– –– 25 30 60 75 125 –– 80 125 0 0 11 BFU80 00 ❶ 696.00 

–– –– 30 30 60 75 125 –– 95 125 0 0 11 BFU95 00 ❶ 744.00 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 125 –– 110 125 0 0 11 BFU110 00 ❶ 848.00 

AC/DC coil 

Reversing contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked. Terminals: Screw nut. 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 110 160 110 160 0 0 11 BFU115 00 ❷ 1149.00 

–– –– 50 60 100 125 150 220 150 250 0 0 11 BFU145 00 ❷ 1607.00 

–– –– 60 75 150 150 180 260 185 275 0 0 11 BFU180 00 ❷ 2083.00 

Wired version - AC coil 

Reversing mini-contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked, pre-wired with load and line power and auxiliary wiring. 

Terminals: clamp screw ❸. 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 0 1 11 BGR09 01 A ❶ 148.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 20 –– 12 20 0 1 11 BGR12 01 A ❶ 180.00 

Reversing contactor assemblies, mechanically interlocked, pre-wired with load and line power wiring. Terminals: clamp screw ❹. 

3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 25 –– 9 25 0 1 BFA009 42 ❶ 214.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 12 25 0 1 BFA012 42 ❶ 268.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 16 25 0 1 BFA018 42 ❶ 285.00 

2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 40 –– 25 40 0 1 BFA025 42 ❶ 311.00 



02460 24V 60Hz 

12060 120V 60Hz 

23060 200-240V 60Hz 

46060 440-480V 60Hz 

57560 575V 60Hz 




Voltage range 

AC coil digit 

AC/DC 

024 24V 

120 110/125V 

220 200/240V 

460 440/480V 


❸ Mini-contactor assembly for mounting on printed circuit boards 

is available on request. Contact Sales & Technical Support for 

details. 

An overload relay cannot be directly mounted on the contactors. 

Use the RF25 and the G230 independent mounting base. 

❹ An overload relay can be directly mounted on the contactors. Use 

the RF38 type and consult page 5-4 for details. 


See page TC-26 for contactors with NC contacts. 

See page TC-27 for add-on auxiliary contacts. 


BGR types: UL listed for USA and Canada, file E93602. 

BFA types: cULus pending. 

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, UL508, 

IEC/EN 60947-4-1. 

Dimensions 

page D-18 


page W-5 



electric 


Three-pole reversing contactors with operating coil in DC 

6-9 

UL maximum horsepower ratings UL UL Maximum current Auxiliary Catalog number Price 

Single phase Three phase Amp resistive Inductive Resistive contacts 

115V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V rating Amps AC3 AC1 (per contactor) 

[HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [HP] [A] [A] [A] NO NC $ each 

Unwired version - DC coil. 

Reversing mini-contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked. Terminals: clamp screw. 

1 

/3 1 1 1 /2 2 3 3 16 –– 6 16 1 0 11 BGU06 10 D ❶ 147.00 

0 1 11 BGU06 01 D ❶ 147.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 1 0 11 BGU09 10 D ❶ 177.00 

11 BGU09 01D 

0 1 11 BGU09 01 D ❶ 177.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 20 –– 12 20 1 0 11 BGU12 10 D ❶ 203.00 

11 BFU...C 

11 BGR09 01D 

0 1 11 BGU12 01 D ❶ 203.00 

Reversing contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked. 

Terminals: clamp screw for BFU9C-BFU40C; lug clamp for BFU50C-BFU110C. 

3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 22 –– 9 25 1 0 11 BFU9C 10 ❷ 230.00 

0 1 11 BFU9C 01 ❷ 230.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 12 25 1 0 11 BFU12C 10 ❷ 280.00 

0 1 11 BFU12C 01 ❷ 280.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 16 25 1 0 11 BFU16C 10 ❷ 296.00 

0 1 11 BFU16C 01 ❷ 296.00 

1 1 /2 3 5 5 10 15 32 –– 20 40 1 0 11 BFU20C 10 ❷ 312.00 

0 1 11 BFU20C 01 ❷ 312.00 

2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 40 –– 25 40 1 0 11 BFU25C 10 ❷ 348.00 

0 1 11 BFU25C 01 ❷ 348.00 

3 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 10 20 25 52 –– 32 55 0 0 11 BFU32C 00 ❷ 414.00 

3 7 1 /2 10 15 30 30 52 –– 40 60 0 0 11 BFU40C 00 ❷ 492.00 

5 10 10 15 30 40 90 –– 50 90 0 0 11 BFU50C 00 ❷ 596.00 

–– –– 20 25 50 60 110 –– 65 110 0 0 11 BFU65C 00 ❷ 732.00 

–– –– 25 30 60 75 125 –– 80 125 0 0 11 BFU80C 00 ❷ 848.00 

–– –– 30 30 60 75 125 –– 95 125 0 0 11 BFU95C 00 ❷ 940.00 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 125 –– 110 125 0 0 11 BFU110C 00 ❷ 1048.00 

AC/DC coil. Unwired reversing contactors, mechanically interlocked. 

–– –– 30 40 75 100 110 160 110 160 0 0 11 BFU115 00 ❸ 1149.00 

–– –– 50 60 100 125 150 220 150 250 0 0 11 BFU145 00 ❸ 1607.00 

–– –– 60 75 150 150 180 260 185 275 0 0 11 BFU180 00 ❸ 2083.00 

Wired version. DC coil. 

Reversing mini-contactors assembly, mechanically interlocked, pre-wired with load and line power and auxiliary wiring. 

Terminals: clamp screw ❹❺. 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 2 3 5 5 20 –– 9 20 0 1 11 BGR09 01 D ❶ 188.00 

1 

/2 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 10 20 –– 12 20 0 1 11 BGR12 01 D ❶ 214.00 

Reversing contactor assembly, mechanically interlocked, pre-wired with load and line power wiring. Terminals: clamp screw ❺. 

3 

/4 2 3 3 5 7 1 /2 22 –– 9 25 0 1 11 BFT9C 01 ❷ 257.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 12 25 0 1 11 BFT12C 01 ❷ 309.00 

1 2 5 5 7 1 /2 10 24 –– 16 25 0 1 11 BFT16C 01 ❷ 326.00 

2 5 7 1 /2 7 1 /2 15 20 40 –– 25 40 0 1 11 BFT25C 01 ❷ 376.00 

6 

❶ Complete the catalog number with coil digit. Standard voltages (coil digit) 

are: 024-110V. Other coil voltage values are available on request. 


❷ Complete the catalog number with coil digit. Standard voltages (coil digit) 

are: 024-110V. Other coil voltage values are available on request. 


Voltage range 

AC coil digit 

AC/DC 

024 24V 

120 110/125V 

220 200/240V 

460 440/480V 


❹ Mini-contactor assembly for mounting on printed circuit boards is 

available on request. Contact Sales & Technical Support for details. 

❺ An overload relay can not be directly mounted on the contactors. Use the 

RF25 type with the G230 independent mounting base. 


See page TC-26 for contactors with NC contacts. 

See page TC-27 for add-on auxiliary contacts. 


BGR types: UL listed for USA and Canada, file E93602. 


IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508. 

Dimensions 

page D-18 


page W-5 



PAGES 7-2 TO 6 

METAL BUTTON OPERATORS 

• Momentary flush, extended and guarded 

• Push-push flush and extended 

• Mushroom-head 

• Mechanical reset 

• Illuminated. 

PAGES 7-4 AND 7 

DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH OPERATORS 

• Double touch with or without indicator 

• Triple touch. 

METAL SELECTOR OPERATORS 

• Knob 

• Lever 

• Key 



METAL POTENTIOMETER DRIVES 

• Graduated scale 

• Variable index. 

PAGE 7-8 

METAL JOYSTICKS 

• 2 directions 

• 4 directions 

• 2 directions with mechanical interlock 

• 4 directions with mechanical interlock 

• Complete with auxiliary contacts. 

PAGE 7-9 


PLASTIC BUTTON OPERATORS 

• Momentary flush, extended and guarded 

• Push-push flush and extended 

• Mushroom-head 

• Mechanical reset 



PLASTIC DOUBLE AND TRIPLE TOUCH OPERATORS 

• Double touch with or without indicator 

• Triple touch. 

PLASTIC SELECTOR OPERATORS 

• Knob 

• Lever 

• Key 



PILOT LIGHTS 

• Monoblock LED 

• Conventional monoblock. 

PAGE 7-16 

CONTROL STATIONS 

• 1 to 5 positions without operators 

• Complete units with 1 button. 

PAGE 7-16 

ADD-ON ELEMENTS 

• Mounting adapter 

• Contact elements 

• Lamp holders 

• LED integrated lamp holders. 

PAGE 7-17 

ACCESSORIES 

• Labelling 

• Label holders 

• Bulbs 

• Spare parts. 




7 

PUSH BUTTONS AND PILOT DEVICES - 22MM 

Metal and plastic series 

Oil tight and water tight type 4/4X 

IP65 construction 

Rugged, modular construction with 

rear of panel locking screws on 

mounting adapter 

Contacts with double break, 

positive opening and self cleaning 

Contacts rated for low electronic 

applications-5 milliamps at 

12 volts. 


CLICK 

These operators consent to easy and quick 

installation with neither the use of special tools 

nor the need for subsequent adjustments or 

rotations. 

SEC. PAGE 

Metal series 

Push-button operators, momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 2 

Push-push button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3 

Mushroom-head push-button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3 

Mechanical reset button, momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4 

Double-touch button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4 

Triple-touch button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4 

Selector operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 5 

Illuminated button actuators, momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6 

Illuminated push-push operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6 

Illuminated mushroom-head actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6 

Illuminated selector operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 7 

Double-touch button operators with indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 7 

Pilot light heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8 

Potentiometer drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8 

Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 9 

Plastic series 

Push-button operators, momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 10 

Push-push button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 11 

Mushroom-head push-button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 11 

Mechanical reset button, momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12 

Double-touch button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12 

Triple-touch button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12 

Selector operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 13 

Illuminated button operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 14 

Illuminated mushroom-head operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 14 

Illuminated selector operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 14 

Double-touch button operators with indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 15 

Monoblock LED pilot lights, steady light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 16 

Monoblock pilot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 16 

Control stations 7- 16 

Add-on elements 7- 17 

Accessories and spare parts 7- 19 



7-2 

Push buttons and pilot devices, 22mm 

Metal series 

electric 

7 

Push-button 

operators, 

momentary 

8 LM2T B104 

8 LM2T B204 

8 LM2T B303 

Push-button 

operators, 

momentary, with 

inscription 

8 LM2T B1104 

8 LM2T B2104 

Color Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Flush (without mounting adapter), momentary. 

Black 8 LM2T B102 6.50 

Green 8 LM2T B103 6.50 

Red 8 LM2T B104 6.50 

Yellow 8 LM2T B105 6.50 

Blue 8 LM2T B106 6.50 

White 8 LM2T B108 6.50 

Extended (without mounting adapter), momentary. 

Black 8 LM2T B202 7.00 

Green 8 LM2T B203 7.00 

Red 8 LM2T B204 7.00 


Blue 8 LM2T B206 7.00 

White 8 LM2T B208 7.00 

Guarded (without mounting adapter), momentary. 

Black 8 LM2T B302 12.00 

Green 8 LM2T B303 12.00 

Red 8 LM2T B304 12.00 


Blue 8 LM2T B306 12.00 

White 8 LM2T B308 12.00 

Inscription Color Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Flush (without mounting adapter), momentary. 

O Black 8 LM2T B1102 8.00 

Red 8 LM2T B1104 8.00 

I Green 8 LM2T B1113 8.00 

White 8 LM2T B1118 8.00 

II Green 8 LM2T B1123 8.00 

White 8 LM2T B1128 8.00 

STOP Black 8 LM2T B1132 8.00 

Red 8 LM2T B1134 8.00 

❶ 

Black 8 LM2T B1142 8.00 

White 8 LM2T B1148 8.00 

❷ 

Black 8 LM2T B1152 8.00 

White 8 LM2T B1158 8.00 

START Green 8 LM2T B1163 8.00 

White 8 LM2T B1168 8.00 

R Blue 8 LM2T B1176 8.00 

White 8 LM2T B1178 8.00 

RESET Blue 8 LM2T B1196 8.00 

Black 8 LM2T B1502 8.00 

Black 8 LM2T B1512 8.00 


O Black 8 LM2T B2102 9.50 

Red 8 LM2T B2104 9.50 

STOP Black 8 LM2T B2132 9.50 

Red 8 LM2T B2134 9.50 

❶ Arrow inscription can be used to indicate right or left. 

❷ Arrow inscription can be used to indicate up or down. 


– Ambient conditions: 

• Operating temperature: -13...+140°F (-25...+60°C) 

• Storage temperature: -40...+158°F (-40...+70°C) 

– Any mounting position is allowed 


Materials 

An aluminum and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal 

part whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and 

polycarbonate. 

Mechanical endurance 

Operating force: 1.76lb / 0.8kg (operator). 

Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles. 

Mounting adapter 

See page 7-17. 

Catalog number: 8 LM2T AU120. 

Operators latch onto the mounting adapter with a simple 

rotation. 

The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means of 

incorporated screws (Tmax = 7.1lbin / 0.8 Nm). 

Contactselements 


Catalog numbers: 

8 LM2T C10 (1NO) 

8 LM2T CF10 (1NO Faston) 

8 LM2T C10A (EM) 

8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 

8 LM2T CF01 (1NC Faston) 

8 LM2T C01D (LB) 

Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter. 

Up to 6 contacts can be fitted on the mounting adapter: 

2 on the left, 2 at the center and 2 on the right. 

To mount contacts in the center position, use the 

accessory: LM2T A140 (see page 7-21). 

CLICK 

LM2T A140❸ 

❸ The action plug LM2T A140 for the center position is not standard 

supplied and must be purchased separately. 




Add-on blocks 

pages 7-17 and 18 

Accessories and spare parts 


Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 


Metal series 

7-3 

Push-push button 

operators 

8 LM2T Q104 

8 LM2T Q204 


$ each 

Flush (without mounting adapter). Maintained, push to release. 

Black 8 LM2T Q102❶ 16.00 

Green 8 LM2T Q103❶ 16.00 

Red 8 LM2T Q104❶ 16.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T Q105❶ 16.00 

Blue 8 LM2T Q106❶ 16.00 

White 8 LM2T Q108❶ 16.00 

Extended (without mounting adapter). Maintained, push to 

release. 

Black 8 LM2T Q202❶ 19.00 

Green 8 LM2T Q203❶ 19.00 

Red 8 LM2T Q204❶ 19.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T Q205❶ 19.00 

Blue 8 LM2T Q206❶ 19.00 

White 8 LM2T Q208❶ 19.00 

❶ Use only the early-make type, LM2T C10A. 

No normally open contact element, LM2T C10 must be used with this type of 

button operator. 

A maximum of 2 contact elements can be mounted only. 






– Degree of protection: IP66 (IP65 only for LM2T B654 

operator). 

Materials 






Mechanical life: 

– Push-push operators: 500,000 cycles. 

– Mushroom head buttons: 1,000,000 cycles. 

– Mushroom head latch buttons: 300,000 cycles. 





rotation. 



Mushroom head 

push-button 

operators 

8 LM2T B6144 

8 LM2T B6164 

8 LM2T B6244 

8 LM2T B6344 

8 LM2T B6544 


$ each 

Momentary. Ø 40 mm (1.6in) 

(without mounting adapter). 

Black 8 LM2T B6142 12.50 

Green 8 LM2T B6143 12.50 

Red 8 LM2T B6144 12.50 

Yellow 8 LM2T B6145 12.50 

Blue 8 LM2T B6146 12.50 



Black 8 LM2T B6162 16.00 

Green 8 LM2T B6163 16.00 

Red 8 LM2T B6164 16.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T B6165 16.00 

Blue 8 LM2T B6166 16.00 

Maintained, pull to release. Ø 40 mm (1.6in) 


Black 8 LM2T B6242 19.80 

Red 8 LM2T B6244 19.80 

Maintained, twist to release. Ø 40 mm (1.6in) 


Black 8 LM2T B6342 22.00 

Red 8 LM2T B6344 22.00 

Maintained, twist key to release. Ø 40 mm (1.6in), keyed 


Black 8 LM2T B6542 47.00 

8 LM2T B6542G...❷ 50.00 

Red 8 LM2T B6544 47.00 

8 LM2T B6544G...❷ 50.00 

Maintained, twist to release, mechanical latching EN418 

compliant. Ø 40 mm (1.6in) (without mounting adapter). 

Red 8 LM2T B6644 42.00 

❷ Versions with different key codes. 

Complete with the numeric code of the key. The following versions are available: 

501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. 

Example of complete catalog number: 8 LM2T B6542G505. 

Contact elements for push-push operators 


Catalog numbers: 8 LM2T C10A (EM) 

8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 



1 each on the right and left. 

Contact elements for mushroom-head button operators 

Catalog numbers: 8 LM2T C10 (1NO) 



8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 




Up to 4 contacts can be fitted on the mounting adapter 

with LM2T B624... and LM2T B6644 types. 


with all the rest: 2 on the left, 2 at the right and 2 at the 

center LM2T A140 (see page 7-21). 

To mount the contacts in the center position with 

LM2T B614... and LM2T B616... types only, use the action 

plug LM2T A140 (see page 7-21). 

CLICK 

LM2T A140❸ 



7 




8 LM2T B6644 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



7-4 


Metal series 

electric 

Mechanical reset 

buttons, complete 

unit, momentary 

8 LM2T R1196 


$ each 

Flush (0.12in / 5.2 mm stroke). 

Adjustable length 0-5in (0-123 mm). 

Black 8 LM2T R1002 12.00 

Green 8 LM2T R1003 12.00 

Red 8 LM2T R1004 12.00 

Blue 8 LM2T R1006 12.00 

Blue (RESET) 8 LM2T R1196❶ 13.00 

Extended (0.12in / 5.2 mm stroke). 

Adjustable length 0-5in (0-123 mm). 

Red 8 LM2T R2004 13.00 

Complete with mounting adapter as well as the rod. 

❶ With “RESET” inscription on operator. 






– Degree of protection: IP65 for reset buttons; IP40 for 

touch operators. 

Materials 





Operating force for reset buttons: 1.76lb / 0.8kg (operator) 


7 

Double-touch 

operators, 

momentary 

8 LM2T B713 

Color Symbols Catalog number Price 

$each 

Two flush push-buttons (without mounting adapter). 

Both momentary. 

Black/Red none 8 LM2T B7112 9.60 

Green/Red none 8 LM2T B7113 9.60 

White/Black none 8 LM2T B7114 9.60 

Black/Red I-O 8 LM2T B7122 10.90 

Green/Red I-O 8 LM2T B7123 10.90 

White/Black I-O 8 LM2T B7124 10.90 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LM2T B7133 10.90 

One extended and one flush push-buttons (without 

mounting adapter). Both momentary. 

Black/Red none 8 LM2T B7212 10.50 

Green/Red none 8 LM2T B7213 10.50 

White/Black none 8 LM2T B7214 10.50 

Black/Red I-O 8 LM2T B7222 10.60 

Green/Red I-O 8 LM2T B7223 10.60 

White/Black I-O 8 LM2T B7224 10.60 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LM2T B7233 10.60 




Operartors latch onto the mounting adapter with a simple 

rotation. 



Contact elements for touch operators 





8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 




DOUBLE-TOUCH OPERATORS 


2 on the left and 2 on the right. 

TRIPLE-TOUCH OPERATORS 


2 on the left, 2 in the centre and 2 on the right. 

8 LM2T B723 

Triple-touch 

operators, 

momentary 

8 LM2T B73... 

Colors Marked Catalog Price 

in white number $ each 

Two external flush and one middle extended buttons 

(without mounting adapter) All momentary. 

Green 8 LM2T B7345 14.20 

Red 

Green 

STOP 

Green 8 LM2T B7355 14.20 

Red 

Green 

STOP 




Green 8 LM2T B7365 14.20 

Red 

Green 

STOP 

Green 8 LM2T B7375 14.20 

Red 

Green 

STOP 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 


Metal series 

7-5 

Selector switch 

operators, knob 

8 LM2T S120 


operators, lever 

8 LM2T S231 


operators, key 

8 LM2T S320 

Type of Catalog number Price 

positions 

$ each 

2 position (without mounting adapter). 

8 LM2T S120 11.80 

8 LM2T S121 14.00 


8 LM2T S130 11.80 

8 LM2T S131 14.00 

8 LM2T S132 14.00 

8 LM2T S133 14.00 


positions 

$ each 


8 LM2T S220 12.60 

8 LM2T S221 14.50 


8 LM2T S230 12.60 

8 LM2T S231 14.50 

8 LM2T S232 14.50 

8 LM2T S233 14.50 


positions 

$ each 


8 LM2T S320 35.00 

8 LM2T S320G...❶ 38.00 

8 LM2T S321 35.00 

8 LM2T S321G...❶ 38.00 

8 LM2T S340 36.00 

8 LM2T S340G...❶ 39.00 


8 LM2T S330 35.00 

8 LM2T S330G...❶ 38.00 

8 LM2T S331 35.00 

8 LM2T S331G...❶ 38.00 

8 LM2T S332❷ 35.00 

8 LM2T S332G...❶❷ 38.00 

8 LM2T S333❷ 35.00 

8 LM2T S333G...❶❷ 38.00 

8 LM2T S350 36.00 

8 LM2T S350G...❶ 39.00 

8 LM2T S360 36.00 

8 LM2T S360G...❶ 39.00 

8 LM2T S370❷ 36.00 

8 LM2T S370G...❶❷ 39.00 

8 LM2T S380❷ 36.00 

8 LM2T S380G...❶❷ 39.00 

8 LM2T S390❷ 36.00 

8 LM2T S390G...❶❷ 39.00 

❶ Versions with different key codes. 


501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. 

Example of complete code: 8 LM2T S320G505. 

❷ Available only on specific request. 







Materials 

An aluminium and zinc alloy (zama) is used for the metal 




Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles. 




Operartors latch onto the mounting adapter with a simple 

rotation. 



Contact elements for selector operators 





8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 





2 on the left and 2 on the right. For more, contact Sales & 


Positions 

Angles 

2 position 3 position 

90° 

Maintained position. 

Spring return position. 

Key withdrawal position. 


Versions with colored keys are available upon request. 





45° 

45° 

7 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



7-6 


Metal series 

electric 

7 

Illuminated button 

operators 

8 LM2T BL104 

8 LM2T BL204 

Illuminated 

push-push button 

operators 

8 LM2T QL104 

8 LM2T QL204 

Illuminated 

mushroom head 

button operators 

8 LM2T BL6144 

8 LM2T BL6245 


$ each 

Flush (with side visibility), momentary 


Green 8 LM2T BL103 10.50 

Red 8 LM2T BL104 10.50 

Yellow 8 LM2T BL105 10.50 

Blue 8 LM2T BL106 10.50 

Transparent 8 LM2T BL107 10.50 


Green 8 LM2T BL203 9.50 

Red 8 LM2T BL204 9.50 


Blue 8 LM2T BL206 9.50 

Transparent 8 LM2T BL207 9.50 


$ each 

Flush (without mounting adapter). Maintained, push to release. 

Green 8 LM2T QL103❶ 27.00 

Red 8 LM2T QL104❶ 27.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T QL105❶ 27.00 

Blue 8 LM2T QL106❶ 27.00 

Transparent 8 LM2T QL107❶ 27.00 

Extended (without mounting adapter). Maintained, push to release. 

Green 8 LM2T QL203❶ 30.00 

Red 8 LM2T QL204❶ 30.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T QL205❶ 30.00 

Blue 8 LM2T QL206❶ 30.00 

Transparent 8 LM2T QL207❶ 30.00 

❶ Use only the early-make type, LM2T C10A. 

No normally open contact element, LM2T C10, must be used with this type of 

button operator. 



$ each 

Momentary. Ø 40 mm (1.6in) (without mounting adapter). ❷ 

Green 8 LM2T BL6143 17.00 

Red 8 LM2T BL6144 17.00 


Blue 8 LM2T BL6146 17.00 

White 8 LM2T BL6148 17.00 


(without mounting adapter). ❷ 

Green 8 LM2T BL6243 31.00 

Red 8 LM2T BL6244 31.00 


Blue 8 LM2T BL6246 31.00 

White 8 LM2T BL6248 31.00 

❷ The number of contact elements to be mounted is given in the side notes. 







Materials 







– Push-push operators: 500,000 cycles. 

– Mushroom head latch operators: 300,000 cycles 

– All others: 1,000,000 cycles. 





rotation. 



Contact elements for push-push operators: 


Catalog number: 


8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 

Contact elements snap on to the mounting adapter. 

Up to 2 contacts can be fitted on the mounting adapter in 

a row, 1 each on the right and left, along with the lampholder 

in the center position, of which 

LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T ZL230, 

LM2T L or LM2T M (see page 7-18). 

With lamp-holder LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL, 

one contact can be mounted only (see page 7-18). 

Contact elements for illuminated momentary button and 

mushroom-head operators 





8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 




On LM2T BL1, LM2T BL2 or LM2T BL61 operators, the 

following can be fitted on the mounting adapter: 

– Up to 4 contacts, 2 each on the left and right, when 

one of the following lamp-holders is used: 

LM2T DL400, LM2T EL400, LM2T VL230, 

LM2T ZL230, LM2T L or LM2T M (see page 7-18). 

– Up to 2 contacts, one on top of the other of the same 

type only, when one of the following lamp-holders is 

used LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL (see 

page 7-18). 

On LM2T BL62... operator, the following can be fitted on 

the mounting adapter: 

– Up to 2 contacts, 1 each on the right and left, when 



LM2T ZL230, LM2T L or LM2T M (see page 7-18) 



used: LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL (see 

page 7-18). 

Lamp-holder elements 

See pages 7-18. 

Bulbs 

Maximum recommended power: 1.2W. See page 7-20. 




Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 


Metal series 

7-7 

Double-touch 

operators, 

momentary, white 

indicator 

8 LM2T BL7133 8 LM2T BL7233 

Illuminated selector 

operators 

8 LM2T SL1205 

8 LM2TA12... A12...❶ 

❶ The operator is standard supplied with a white 

diffuser. Colored diffusers LM2T A12... can be 

purchased separately. Refer to page 7-21. 

Color Symbol Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Two flush push-buttons (without mounting adapter). 


Black/Red none 8 LM2T BL7112 10.50 

Green/Red none 8 LM2T BL7113 10.50 

White/Black none 8 LM2T BL7114 10.50 

Black/Red I-O 8 LM2T BL7122 11.60 

Green/Red I-O 8 LM2T BL7123 11.60 

White/Black I-O 8 LM2T BL7124 11.60 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LM2T BL7133 11.60 

One extended push-buttons (without mounting adapter). 


Black/Red none 8 LM2T BL7212 11.10 

Green/Red none 8 LM2T BL7213 11.10 

White/Black none 8 LM2T BL7214 11.10 

Black/Red I-O 8 LM2T BL7222 12.80 

Green/Red I-O 8 LM2T BL7223 12.80 

White/Black I-O 8 LM2T BL7224 12.80 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LM2T BL7233 12.80 

Color Type of Catalog number Price 

positions 

$ each 


Green 8 LM2T SL1203 15.00 

Red 8 LM2T SL1204 15.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T SL1205 15.00 

Blue 8 LM2T SL1206 15.00 

White 8 LM2T SL1208 15.00 

Green 8 LM2T SL1213 18.00 

Red 8 LM2T SL1214 18.00 


Blue 8 LM2T SL1216 18.00 

White 8 LM2T SL1218 18.00 


Green 8 LM2T SL1303 15.00 

Red 8 LM2T SL1304 15.00 


Blue 8 LM2T SL1306 15.00 

White 8 LM2T SL1308 15.00 

Green 8 LM2T SL1313 18.00 

Red 8 LM2T SL1314 18.00 


Blue 8 LM2T SL1316 18.00 

White 8 LM2T SL1318 18.00 

Green 8 LM2T SL1323 18.00 

Red 8 LM2T SL1324 18.00 


Blue 8 LM2T SL1326 18.00 

White 8 LM2T SL1328 18.00 

Green 8 LM2T SL1333 18.00 

Red 8 LM2T SL1334 18.00 


Blue 8 LM2T SL1336 18.00 

White 8 LM2T SL1338 18.00 






– Degree of protection: IP40 for touch operators; IP65 

for selectors. 

Materials 





Mechanical life: 300,000 cycles for selectors; 

1,000,000 cycles for touch operators. 





rotation. 



Contact elements 



8 LM2T C10 (1NO) 



8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 





– Up to 4 contacts can be fitted on the mounting 

adapter, 2 each on the left and right, when one of the 

following lamp-holders is used: LM2T DL400, 

LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L or 

LM2T M (see page 7-18). 

SELECTOR OPERATORS 

On 2-position illuminated selectors, the following can be 

fitted on the mounting adapter: 



LM2T DL400, LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, 



one of the following lamp-holders is used: LM2T XL, 

LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL (see page 7-18). 







– NOTE: The following lamp-holders cannot be used: 

LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL. 

Selector positions 



Selector angles 


90° 



45° 

45° 

Bulbs 

Maximum recommended power: 1.2W. 





7 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



7-8 


Metal series 

electric 

7 

Pilot light head Color Catalog number Price 

$ each 

8 LM2T IL103 

Without mounting adapter. 

Green 8 LM2T IL103 5.00 

Red 8 LM2T IL104 5.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T IL105 5.00 

Blue 8 LM2T IL106 5.00 

Transparent 8 LM2T IL107 5.00 

White 8 LM2T IL108 5.00 

Transparent ❶ 8 LM2T IL1187 6.50 

❶ With inscription indicating dangerous voltage (IEC 60417 5036-a). 

LM2T AU120❸ 

LM2T AU160❸ 

LM2T AL...❸ 

LM2T A160❸ 

LM2T DL400❷ 

LM2T FL...❷ 

LM2T GL... LM2T A190 

LM2T EL400 

LM2T AT...❸ 

LM2T VL230❷ 

LM2T ZL230 

LM2T T100 

LM2T YL... 

LM2T XL...❷ 

LM2T L... 

LM2T M... 

❷ The mounting adapter is standard supplied so there is no need to purchase it 

as a separate accessory. 

❸ Can be purchased separately. Refer to pages 7-20 and 21. 







Materials 








rotation. 





Bulbs 






Potentiometer 

drive 

8 LM2T P100 

(complete with mounting adapter) 

8 LM2T P110 

(complete with mounting adapter) 

Inscription Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Graduated scale 8 LM2T P100❶ 45.40 

Variable index 8 LM2T P110❶ 45.40 

❶ Potentiometer not included, for assembly by the user. 


– Suitable for potentiometers with 1 /4in (6-6.3mm) 

diameter shaft 

– Minimum 1 1 /2in (40mm) shaft length 





– Degree of protection: IP65 (warranted by potentiometers 

with a cylindrical shaft). 

Materials 







Standard supply with operator. 


rotation. 



Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 


Metal series 

7-9 

Joysticks 

Type of Number of Catalog number Price 

positions elements $ each 

Without mechanical interlock. Label holder excluded. 

Complete with auxiliary contacts. 

2 8 LM2T J200 51.00 







2 8 LM2T J201 51.00 

Materials 


parts whereas plastic parts are made of polyamide and 


The sealing boot is made of NBR rubber. 

4 8 LM2T J400 62.00 


Mechanical life: 1,000,000 cycles 

8 LM2T J200 

without mechanical interlock 

4 8 LM2T J401 62.00 

With mechanical interlock in center position. 

Label holder excluded. 

Complete with auxiliary contacts. 

2 8 LM2T J210 58.00 

2 8 LM2T J211 58.00 

Mounting adapter and contact elements 

The joystick is standard supplied with the mounting 

adapter and contacts. 

The joystick latches onto the mounting adapter with a 

simple rotation. 

The adapter is fixed to the mounting surface by means 

of incorporated screws (Tmax = 7.1lbin / 0.8Nm). 

Contacts snap onto the mounting adapter. 

Two LM2T CJ contacts are mounted with the LM2T J2 

types while four on the LM2T J4 versions. 

Terminal tightening torque: 8.8lbin / 1Nm. 

UL designation: A/300, Q/300. 

7 

4 8 LM2T J410 70.00 

1 

4 8 LM2T J411 70.00 

2 

8 LM2T J410 

with mechanical interlock 

Joystick positions and contact engerizing 

2 instable 2 maintained 4 instable 4 maintained 

Accessories 


$ each 

2-4 directional holder 8 LM2T AU101 4.00 

for adhesive legends 

1 

2 

A 

LM2TCJ10 

A B 

1 ● 

2 ● 

8 LM2T AU101 

B 

2 

4 

3 

A B C D 

LM2TCJ10 1 ● 

LM2TCJ01 2 ● 

LM2TCJ10 3 ● 

LM2TCJ01 4 ● 

A 

1 

D 

C 

B 




Accessories 

page 7-19 

Dimensions 

page D-20 



7-10 



electric 

7 

Push-button 

operators, 

momentary 

8 LP2T B104 

8 LP2T B204 

8 LP2T B303 


$ each 

Flush (complete with mounting adapter), momentary. 

Black 8 LP2T B102 7.50 

Green 8 LP2T B103 7.50 

Red 8 LP2T B104 7.50 

Yellow 8 LP2T B105 7.50 

Blue 8 LP2T B106 7.50 

White 8 LP2T B108 7.50 

Extended (complete with mounting adapter), momentary. 

Black 8 LP2T B202 8.00 

Green 8 LP2T B203 8.00 

Red 8 LP2T B204 8.00 


Blue 8 LP2T B206 8.00 

White 8 LP2T B208 8.00 

Guarded (complete with mounting adapter), momentary. 

Black 8 LP2T B302 13.00 

Green 8 LP2T B303 13.00 

Red 8 LP2T B304 13.00 


Blue 8 LP2T B306 13.00 

White 8 LP2T B308 13.00 







Materials 

Polyamide and polycarbonate. 


Operating force: 1.76lb / 0.8 kg (operator). 



Standard supply with the operator. 


rotation. 








8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 




Up to 6 contacts can be fitted on the mounting adapter: 2 

on the left, 2 at the center and 2 on the right. 

To mount the auxiliary contacts in the center position, use 

the accessory: LM2T A140 (see page 7-21). 

Push-button 

operators, 

momentary, with 

inscription 

8 LP2T B1104 

8 LP2T B2104 

Inscription Color Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Flush (complete with mounting adapter), momentary. 

O Black 8 LP2T B1102 9.00 

Red 8 LP2T B1104 9.00 

I Green 8 LP2T B1113 9.00 

White 8 LP2T B1118 9.00 

II Green 8 LP2T B1123 9.00 

White 8 LP2T B1128 9.00 

STOP Black 8 LP2T B1132 9.00 

Red 8 LP2T B1134 9.00 

❶ 

Black 8 LP2T B1142 9.00 

White 8 LP2T B1148 9.00 

❷ 

Black 8 LP2T B1152 9.00 

White 8 LP2T B1158 9.00 

START Green 8 LP2T B1163 9.00 

White 8 LP2T B1168 9.00 

R Blue 8 LP2T B1176 9.00 

White 8 LP2T B1178 9.00 

RESET Blue 8 LP2T B1196 9.00 

Black 8 LP2T B1502 9.00 

Black 8 LP2T B1512 9.00 


O Black 8 LP2T B2102 10.50 

Red 8 LP2T B2104 10.50 

STOP Black 8 LP2T B2132 10.50 

Red 8 LP2T B2134 10.50 

❶ Arrow inscription can be used to indicate right or left. 

❷ Arrow inscription can be used to indicate up or down. 

CLICK 

LM2T A140❸ 






Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 



7-11 


operators 

8 LP2T Q10 

8 LP2T Q20 

Mushroom head 


8 LP2T B614 

8 LP2T B616 

8 LP2T B624 

8 LP2T B634 


$ each 

Flush (complete with mounting adapter). 

Maintained, push to release. 

Black 8 LP2T Q102❶ 21.50 

Green 8 LP2T Q103❶ 21.50 

Red 8 LP2T Q104❶ 21.50 

Yellow 8 LP2T Q105❶ 21.50 

Blue 8 LP2T Q106❶ 21.50 

White 8 LP2T Q108❶ 21.50 

Extended (complete with mounting adapter). 


Black 8 LP2T Q202❶ 23.50 

Green 8 LP2T Q203❶ 23.50 

Red 8 LP2T Q204❶ 23.50 

Yellow 8 LP2T Q205❶ 23.50 

Blue 8 LP2T Q206❶ 23.50 

White 8 LP2T Q208❶ 23.50 

❶ Use the early-make type, LM2T C10A only. 


button operators. 



$ each 


(complete with mounting adapter). 

Black 8 LP2T B6142 14.00 

Green 8 LP2T B6143 14.00 

Red 8 LP2T B6144 14.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T B6145 14.00 

Blue 8 LP2T B6146 14.00 



Black 8 LP2T B6162 17.00 

Green 8 LP2T B6163 17.00 

Red 8 LP2T B6164 17.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T B6165 17.00 

Blue 8 LP2T B6166 17.00 



Black 8 LP2T B6242 22.00 

Red 8 LP2T B6244 22.00 

Maintained, twist to release. Ø 40 mm (1.6in) 


Black 8 LP2T B6342 24.00 

Red 8 LP2T B6344 24.00 

Maintained, twist key to release. Ø 40 mm (1.6in), keyed 


Black 8 LP2T B6542 45.00 

8 LP2T B6542G...❶ 47.00 

Red 8 LP2T B6544 45.00 

8 LP2T B6544G...❶ 47.00 

Maintained, twist to release, mechanical latching EN418 

compliant Ø 40 mm (1.6in) (complete with mounting adapter). 

Red 8 LP2T B6644 40.00 





– Any mounting position is allowed. 

– Degree of protection: IP65 for push-push and 

LP2T B654 operators; IP66 for others. 

Materials 





– Push-push operators: 500,000 cycles 

– Mushroom-head latch operators: 300,000 cycles 





rotation. 



Contact elements for push-push button actuators 



CLICK 


8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 



1 each on the right and left. 

Contact elements for mushroom-head operators 





8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 



Contact elements snap onto the mounting adapter 


with the LP2T B624... and LP2T B6644 types. 

Up to 6 contacts can be fitted on the mounting adapter with 

all the rest: 2 on the left, 2 at the center and 2 on the right. 

To mount the auxiliary contacts in the center position with 

LP2T B614... and LP2T B616... types only, use the action 

plug LM2T A140 (see page 7-21). 

LM2T A140❸ 

7 

8 LP2T B654 



501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. 

Example of complete catalog number: 8 LM2T B6542G505. 






8 LP2T B6644 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

pages D-19 



7-12 



electric 

7 

Mechanical reset 

buttons, complete 

unit, momentary 

8 LP2T R1196 

(complete with mounting adapter and rod) 

Double-touch 

operators, 

momentary 

8 LP2T B7113 

8 LP2T B7223 


$ each 

Flush (0.2in / 5.2 mm stroke). Adjustable length 0-5in (0-123 mm). 

Black 8 LP2T R1002 10.00 

Green 8 LP2T R1003 10.00 

Red 8 LP2T R1004 10.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T R1005 10.00 

Blue 8 LP2T R1006 10.00 

Blue (RESET) 8 LP2T R1196❷ 12.00 

Extended (0.2in /5.2 mm stroke). Adjustable length 0-5in (0-123 mm). 

Red 8 LP2T R2004 12.00 

❷ With “RESET” inscription on the operator. 



Two flush push-buttons (complete with mounting adapter). 


Black/Red –– 8 LP2T B7112 10.00 

Green/Red –– 8 LP2T B7113 10.00 

White/Black –– 8 LP2T B7114 10.00 

Black/Red I-O 8 LP2T B7122 11.00 

Green/Red I-O 8 LP2T B7123 11.00 

White/Black I-O 8 LP2T B7124 11.00 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LP2T B7133 11.00 

One extended and one flush button (c/w mounting adapter). 


Black/Red –– 8 LP2T B7212 10.00 

Green/Red –– 8 LP2T B7213 10.00 

White/Black –– 8 LP2T B7214 10.00 

Black/Red I-O 8 LP2T B7222 11.00 

Green/Red I-O 8 LP2T B7223 11.00 

White/Black I-O 8 LP2T B7224 11.00 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LP2T B7233 11.00 





– Any mounting position is allowed. 

– Degree of protection: IP65 for mechanical reset buttons 

and IP40 for double and triple touch operators. 

Materials 








rotation. 



Contact elements for touch operators 





8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 





Up to 4 auxiliary contacts can be fitted on the mounting 

adapter: 2 on the left and 2 on the right. 

TRIPLE-TOUCH OPERATORS 

Up to 6 auxiliary contacts can be fitted on the mounting 

adapter: 2 on the left, 2 in the center and 2 on the right. 

Triple-touch 

operators, 

momentary 



Two external flush and one middle extended buttons. 

Complete with mounting adapter. All momentary. 

Green 8 LP2T B7345 14.00 

Red 

Green 

STOP 




8 LP2T B7355 

Green 8 LP2T B7355 14.00 

Red 

Green 

STOP 

Green 8 LP2T B7365 14.00 

Red 

Green 

STOP 

Green 8 LP2T B7375 14.00 

Red 

Green 

STOP 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 



7-13 


operators, knob 

8 LP2T S120 


operators, lever 

8 LP2T S230 


operators, key 


positions 

$ each 

2 position (complete with mounting adapter). 

8 LP2T S120 14.00 

8 LP2T S121 16.00 


8 LP2T S130 14.00 

8 LP2T S131 16.00 

8 LP2T S132 16.00 

8 LP2T S133 16.00 


positions 

$ each 


8 LP2T S220 14.00 

8 LP2T S221 16.00 


8 LP2T S230 14.00 

8 LP2T S231 16.00 

8 LP2T S232 16.00 

8 LP2T S233 16.00 


positions 

$ each 


8 LP2T S320 35.00 

8 LP2T S320G...❶ 38.00 

8 LP2T S321 35.00 

8 LP2T S321G...❶ 38.00 

8 LP2T S340 36.00 

8 LP2T S340G...❶ 39.00 


8 LP2T S330 35.00 

8 LP2T S330G...❶ 38.00 

8 LP2T S331 35.00 

8 LP2T S331G...❶ 38.00 

8 LP2T S332❷ 35.00 

8 LP2T S332G...❶❷ 38.00 

8 LP2T S333❷ 35.00 

8 LP2T S333G...❶❷ 38.00 

8 LP2T S350 36.00 

8 LP2T S350G...❶ 40.00 

8 LP2T S360 36.00 

8 LP2T S360G...❶ 40.00 

8 LP2T S370❷ 36.00 

8 LP2T S370G...❶❷ 40.00 

8 LP2T S380❷ 36.00 

8 LP2T S380G...❶❷ 40.00 

8 LP2T S390❷ 36.00 

8 LP2T S390G...❶❷ 40.00 







Materials 







rotation. 









8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 




2 on the left and 2 on the right. For more, contact Sales & 


Positions 

8 LP2T S330 Maintained position. 


Key withdrawal position. 

Angles 


90° 


Versions with colored keys are available upon request. 





45° 

45° 

7 



501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. 

Example of complete catalog number: 8 LP2T S320G505. 

❷ Available only on specific request. 

Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



7-14 



electric 

7 

Illuminated button 

operators 

8 LP2T BL104 

8 LP2T BL204 


operators 

8 LP2T QL104 

8 LP2T QL204 

Illuminated 

mushroom head 


8 LP2T BL6144 


$ each 

Flush (with side visibility), momentary 


Green 8 LP2T BL103 11.00 

Red 8 LP2T BL104 11.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T BL105 11.00 

Blue 8 LP2T BL106 11.00 

Transparent 8 LP2T BL107 11.00 


Green 8 LP2T BL203 12.00 

Red 8 LP2T BL204 12.00 


Blue 8 LP2T BL206 12.00 

Transparent 8 LP2T BL207 12.00 


$ each 

Flush (complete with mounting adapter). 


Green 8 LP2T QL103❶ 32.50 

Red 8 LP2T QL104❶ 32.50 

Yellow 8 LP2T QL105❶ 32.50 

Blue 8 LP2T QL106❶ 32.50 

Transparent 8 LP2T QL107❶ 32.50 

Extended (complete with mounting adapter). 


Green 8 LP2T QL203❶ 38.50 

Red 8 LP2T QL204❶ 38.50 

Yellow 8 LP2T QL205❶ 38.50 

Blue 8 LP2T QL206❶ 38.50 

White 8 LP2T QL207❶ 38.50 

❶ Use the early-make type, LM2T C10A only. 


button operators. 



$ each 

Momentary. Ø 40mm (1.6in) 

(complete with mounting adapter)❷. 

Green 8 LP2T BL6143 18.00 

Red 8 LP2T BL6144 18.00 


Blue 8 LP2T BL6146 18.00 

White 8 LP2T BL6148 18.00 

Maintained, pull to release. Ø 40mm (1.6in) 

(complete with mounting adapter)❷. 

Green 8 LP2T BL6243 37.50 

Red 8 LP2T BL6244 37.50 


Blue 8 LP2T BL6246 37.50 

White 8 LP2T BL6248 37.50 

❷ The number of contact elements to be mounted is given in the side notes. 







Materials 





– Push-push operators: 500,000 cycles 

– Mushroom head latch operators: 300,000 cycles 





rotation. 



Contact elements for illuminated push-push operators: 




8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 



in a row, 1 each on the right and left, along with the 

lamp-holder in the center position, of which 

LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L... or LM2T M... (see 

page 7-18). 

With lamp-holder LM2T YL... or LM2T GL..., one 

auxiliary contact can be mounted only (see page 7-18). 

Contact elements for illuminated momentary button and 

mushroom-head operators: 





8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 




On LP2T BL1, LP2T BL2 or LP2T BL61 operators, the 

following can be fitted on the mounting adapter: 







used LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL (see 

page 7-18). 

On LP2T BL62... operator, the following can be fitted on 

the mounting adapter: 

– Up to 2 contacts, 1 each on the right and left, when 



LM2T ZL230, LM2T L or LM2T M (see page 7-18) 



used: LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL (see 

page 7-18). 

8 LP2T BL6245 


See pages 7-18. 

Bulbs 





Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 



7-15 

Double-touch 

operators 

momentary, white 

indicator 

8 LP2T BL7113 8 LP2T BL7223 

Illuminated 

selector operators 

8 LP2T SL1205 

Color Marked Catalog Price 


Two flush push-buttons (complete with mounting adapter). 


Black/Red –– 8 LP2T BL7112 11.00 

Green/Red –– 8 LP2T BL7113 11.00 

White/Black –– 8 LP2T BL7114 11.00 

Black/Red I-O 8 LP2T BL7122 12.00 

Green/Red I-O 8 LP2T BL7123 12.00 

White/Black I-O 8 LP2T BL7124 12.00 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LP2T BL7133 12.00 

One extended and one flush button (c/w mounting adapter). 


Black/Red –– 8 LP2T BL7212 11.00 

Green/Red –– 8 LP2T BL7213 11.00 

White/Black –– 8 LP2T BL7214 11.00 

Black/Red I-O 8 LP2T BL7222 12.00 

Green/Red I-O 8 LP2T BL7223 12.00 

White/Black I-O 8 LP2T BL7224 12.00 

Green/Red Start/Stop 8 LP2T BL7233 12.00 

Color Type of Catalog number Price 

positions 

$ each 


Green 8 LP2T SL1203 16.00 

Red 8 LP2T SL1204 16.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T SL1205 16.00 

Blue 8 LP2T SL1206 16.00 

White 8 LP2T SL1208 16.00 

Green 8 LP2T SL1213 17.00 

Red 8 LP2T SL1214 17.00 


Blue 8 LP2T SL1216 17.00 

White 8 LP2T SL1218 17.00 


Green 8 LP2T SL1303 16.00 

Red 8 LP2T SL1304 16.00 


Blue 8 LP2T SL1306 16.00 

White 8 LP2T SL1308 16.00 

Green 8 LP2T SL1313 17.00 

Red 8 LP2T SL1314 17.00 


Blue 8 LP2T SL1316 17.00 

White 8 LP2T SL1318 17.00 

Green 8 LP2T SL1323 17.00 

Red 8 LP2T SL1324 17.00 


Blue 8 LP2T SL1326 17.00 

White 8 LP2T SL1328 17.00 

Green 8 LP2T SL1333 17.00 

Red 8 LP2T SL1334 17.00 


Blue 8 LP2T SL1336 17.00 

White 8 LP2T SL1338 17.00 






– Degree of protection: IP40 for touch operators; 

IP65 for selector operators. 

Materials 




Mechanical life for 1,000,000 cycles touch-buttons; 300,000 

cycles for selectors. 


Standard supply with the operartor. 


rotation. 



Contact elements for button operators 



8 LM2T C10 (1NO) 



8 LM2T C01 (1NC) 





– Up to 4 contacts can be fitted on the mounting 

adapter, 2 each on the left and right, when one of the 

following lamp-holders is used: LM2T DL400, 

LM2T VL230, LM2T EL400, LM2T ZL230, LM2T L or 

LM2T M (see page 7-18). 

SELECTOR OPERATORS 








one of the following lamp-holders is used: LM2T XL, 

LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL (see page 7-18). 







– NOTE: The following lamp-holders cannot be used: 

LM2T XL, LM2T YL, LM2T FL or LM2T GL. 

Selector positions 



Selector angles 


90° 



45° 

Bulbs 



45° 

7 




Add-on blocks 




Dimensions 

page D-19 



7-16 


Pilot lights - Empty control stations 

electric 

LED integrated 

monoblock pilot 

lights, steady light 

8 LP2T ILB3 

Voltage LED Catalog Price 

color number $ each 

12VAC/DC Green 8 LP2T ILA3 12.00 

Red 8 LP2T ILA4 12.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T ILA5 12.00 

Blue 8 LP2T ILA6 12.00 

Transparent 8 LP2T ILA8 12.00 

24VAC/DC Green 8 LP2T ILB3 12.00 

Red 8 LP2T ILB4 12.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T ILB5 12.00 

Blue 8 LP2T ILB6 12.00 

Transparent 8 LP2T ILB8 12.00 

110VAC Green 8 LP2T ILE3 14.00 

Red 8 LP2T ILE4 14.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T ILE5 14.00 

Blue 8 LP2T ILE6 14.00 

Transparent 8 LP2T ILE8 14.00 

230VAC Green 8 LP2T ILM3 14.00 

Red 8 LP2T ILM4 14.00 

Yellow 8 LP2T ILM5 14.00 

Blue 8 LP2T ILM6 14.00 

Transparent 8 LP2T ILM8 14.00 


– Supply voltage: 12VAC/DC; 24VAC/DC; 110VAC; 230VAC 

– Consumption ≤20mA 

– Electrical life: >30,000 hours 

– Screw termination 

– Maximum tightening torque: 7.14lbin/0.8Nm 

– Side wire entry 


• Operating temperature: +23...+104°F (-5...+40°C) 

• Degree of protection: IP65 on front, IP20 at rear. 

Materials 


Maximum conductor cross section 

1 or 2 1.5mm 2 or 16 AWG wires. 

Wiring diagram 

LED 

X1 

X2 




7 

Direct wire 

pilot lights with 

diffuser 

8 LP2T IL214 

8 LP2T IL224 

8 LP2T IL234 

Color Bulb Catalog Price 

supplied number $ each 

Screw terminals without protection. 

Green no 8 LP2T IL213 6.00 

Red no 8 LP2T IL214 6.00 

Yellow no 8 LP2T IL215 6.00 

Blue no 8 LP2T IL216 6.00 

Transparent no 8 LP2T IL217 6.00 

White no 8 LP2T IL218 6.00 

Screw terminals with protection. 







Faston terminals without protection ❶. 







❶ LP2T IL23... pilot lights have Faston terminals, 1-6.35 or 2-2.8. 




• Storage temperature: : -40...+158°F (-40...+70°C) 

– Any mounting poisition is allowed 

– Degree of protection: IP65 on front; IP20 at rear. 

Materials 


Maximum conductor cross section 

1 or 2 1.5mm 2 or 16 AWG wires. 

Wiring diagram 

X1 

X2 

Bulbs 


LM2T A190❷ 

LM2T A180❸ 

❷ To be purchased separately . 


❸ Standard supplied for LM2T A190❷ 

8 LP2T IL22 only. 

LM2T AL...❷ 

LM2T AT...❷ 


UL listed for USA and Canada, file E93601 for LP2T IL21 

and LP2T IL22 types; UL recognized for USA and 

Canada, file E93601 for LP2T IL23. 

Compliant with standards IEC/EN 60947-1; 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

Empty control 

station enclosures 

8 L2PP 2A8 

Description Cover Catalog Price 

color number $ each 

For 1 operator Yellow 8 L2PP 1A5 13.00 

For 1 operator White 8 L2PP 1A8 12.00 

For 2 operators White 8 L2PP 2A8 15.00 





Control stations have wire entry through the top or the 

bottom and come fitted with a conduit (0.84in / 21.3 mm 

entry diameter). 


Degree of protection: IP65 using adequate wire glands, not 

included in the supply; except 8 L2PP 5AB IP52 only. 

Tightening torque of cover fixing screws: 7.1lbin / 0.8 Nm. 

Materials 

Self-extinguishing ABS plastic. 






Dimensions 




electric 


Complete control stations - Add-on contact elements 

7-17 

Complete control 

stations 

8 L2PP 160 

❶ Red mushroom head, twist to release, yellow cover 

(EN418 compliant), no label and no label holder. 


8 LM2T AU120 


8 LM2T C 

8 LM2T E 

8 LM2T CF10 


Enclosure + operator number $ each 

8 L2PP 1A8 + 8 LP2T B6244 8 L2PP 100 48.00 

8 L2PP 1A8 + 8 LP2T B6344 8 L2PP 110 47.00 

8 L2PP 1A5 + 8 LP2T B6344 8 L2PP 115 49.00 

8 L2PP 1A8 + 8 LP2T B6544 8 L2PP 120 52.00 

8 L2PP 1A5 + 8 LP2T B6644 8 L2PP 130❶ 50.00 

8 L2PP 1A8 + 8 LM2T B6244 8 L2PP 150 49.00 

8 L2PP 1A8 + 8 LM2T B6344 8 L2PP 160 48.00 

8 L2PP 1A5 + 8 LM2T B6344 8 L2PP 165 49.00 

8 L2PP 1A8 + 8 LM2T B6544 8 L2PP 170 65.00 

8 L2PP 1A5 + 8 LM2T B6644 8 L2PP 180❶ 58.00 


$ each 

Only for metal series operators. 

Mounting adapter 8 LM2T AU120 4.00 

Metal series operators are supplied without mounting adapter. 

Plastic series operators are supplied complete with mounting 

adapter (type LP2T AU120). 

Function Catalog number Price 

$ each 

Screw termination without mounting adapter. 

.3 

NO❶ 

8 LM2T C10❶ 6.00 

.4 

.7 

EM❷ 

8 LM2T C10A 7.00 

.8 

.1 

NC❸ 

8 LM2T C01 6.00 

.2 

.5 

LB❹ 

8 LM2T C01D❶ 7.00 

.6 

Screw termination with mounting adapter 

(only for metal series operators LM2T). 

.3 

NO❶ 

8 LM2T E10❶ 10.00 

.4 

.1 

NC❶❸ 

8 LM2T E01 10.00 

.2 

Faston termination. 

Without mounting adapter. 

.3 

NO❶ 

8 LM2T CF10❶ 7.60 

.4 

.1 

NC❸ 

8 LM2T CF01 7.60 

.2 

❶ Not suitable for push-push operators Use LM2T C10A (EM) or LM2T C01 (NC) 

type only with alternate-push operators. 

❷ Normally open contact with early make operation. 

❸ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation ; safety function per 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

❹ Normally closed contact with late break operation. 


Control stations are supplied assembled and complete with 

the indicated push-button operator, mounting adapter, 

legend holder, “STOP” label (except for L2PP 115, L2PP 

130, L2PP 165 and L2PP 180) and one NC auxiliary contact. 

Control stations have wire entry through the top of the 

bottom and come fitted with a conduit (0.84in / 21.3 mm 

entry diameter). 


Degree of protection: IP65 using adequate wire glands, not 

included in the supply. 

Tightening torque of cover fixing screws: 7.1lbin / 0.8 Nm. 

Materials 

Self-extinguishing ABS plastic. 

Reference standards 

IEC/EN 60947-1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 






– Degree of protection: IP 20 for contacts elements with 

screw termination; IP00 for contact elements with Faston 

connection. 

General characteristics of contact elements 

Self-cleaning with dual effect, wiping and oscillating. 

Rated insulation voltage: 690V. 

Conventional free-air thermal current Ith: 10A. 

UL designation: A600 Q600 

Operational power in AC15: 

[V] 12 24 48 120 240 400 480 500 600 

[A] 6 6 6 6 3 1.9 1.5 1.4 1.2 

Operational power in DC13: 

[V] 12 24 48 125 250 440 500 600 

[A] 3 3 1.5 0.55 0.27 0.15 0.13 0.1 

Contact capacity: ≤20 mΩ. 

Terminals: screw with washer; Faston 1 - 0.25in (6.35mm) 

or 2 - 0.11in (2.8mm). 

Maximum tightening torque: 8.8lbin / 1Nm (Faston excluded). 

Stroke of auxiliary contacts [mm (in)] 

EM 

NO 

NC 

LB 

1(0.04) 2 (0.08) 3 (0.12) 4 (0.16) 4.8 mm (0.19in) 

1.8 (0.07) 2.8 (0.11in) 

Closed contact 

Open contact 

Maximum wire cross section 

1 or 2 12 AWG / 2.5 mm 2 conductors. 

Mechanical and electrical endurance 

Operating force: 1 lb / 0.5 kg (auxiliary contacts). 

Electrical life LM2T C10 1,000,000 cycles 

LM2T CF10 1,000,000 cycles 

LM2T C01 1,000,000 cycles 

LM2T CF01 1,000,000 cycles 

LM2T C10A 600,000 cycles 

LM2T C01D 600,000 cycles 

50 (1.97") 

42.4 (1.67") 

22.5 (0.89") 

30 

(1.18") 

65 (2.56") ❺ 

7 

8 LM2T CF01 

❺ When using Faston, vertical interaxes is 35in (90mm) minimum. 






Dimensions 



page W-9 



7-18 


Lamp-holders 

electric 

Lamp-holders 

without mounting 

adapter 

8 LM2T EL400 

8 LM2T ZL230 

8 LM2T T100 

8 LM2T YL 

8 LM2T GL 

Voltage Bulb Catalog number Price 

supplied 

$ each 

For operators of plastic and metal series. 

Direct supply type. 

≤415V no 8 LM2T EL400❶ 8.00 

Resistor-diode type. 

230VAC yes 130V 8 LM2T ZL230❹ 9.00 

50/60Hz (2W) 

Transformer type. 

110-120VAC yes 24V 8 LM2T YL110❷ 30.00 

50/60Hz (1.2W) 

220-240VAC yes 24V 8 LM2T YL230❷ 30.00 

50/60Hz (1.2W) 

380-415VAC yes 24V 8 LM2T YL400❷ 32.00 

50/60Hz (1.2W) 

Flashing type 

24-48VAC no 8 LM2T GL048❷❸ 25.00 

110-230VAC no 8 LM2T GL230❷❸ 25.00 

Test element for lamp-holders. 

Test element ❺❻❼ 8 LM2T T100 12.00 


Common to all types 





– Degree of protection: IP 20 

– Maximum tightening torque: 8.8lbin/1Nm. 

For LED integrated lamp-holders only 

– Over-voltage protection 

– Inverse polarity protection 

– Shock and vibration insensitivity 

– Front and side visibility 

– Maximum consumption: 

• 33mA for 18-30VAC/DC 

• 28mA for 85-140VAC 

• 25mA for 187-265VAC 

– Electric life: 100,000 hours. 

For test element only 

– To periodically test light bulbs 

– AC circuits are tested with half wave so bulb 

luminosity is low 

– With DC circuits, L2 must be connected to positive (+) 

terminal of LM2T T100. 

7 

Lamp-holders with 

mounting adapter 

8 LM2T DL400 

8 LM2T VL230 

Voltage Bulb Catalog number Price 

supplied 

$ each 

Only for operators of metal series. 

Direct supply type. 

≤415V no 8 LM2T DL400❶ 11.00 

Resistor-diode type. 

230VAC yes 130V 8 LM2T VL230❹ 13.00 

50/60Hz (2W) 

Transfomer type. 

110-120VAC yes 24V 8 LM2T XL110❷ 35.00 

50/60Hz (1.2W) 

220-240VAC yes 24V 8 LM2T XL230❷ 35.00 

50/60Hz (1.2W) 

380-415VAC yes 24V 8 LM2T XL400❷ 37.00 

50/60Hz (1.2W) 

Flashing type. 

24-48VAC no 8 LM2T FL048❷❸ 30.00 

110-230VAC no 8 LM2T FL230❷❸ 30.00 

Maximum wire cross section 

1 or 2 12 AWG / 2.5 mm 2 conductors. 

Wiring diagram for lamp-holder elements 

Direct supply 

Resistor-diode 

LM2T EL400 

X1 

LM2T ZL230 

LM2T DL400 

LM2T VL230 

Transformer 

LM2T YL 

LM2T XL 

LED 

LM2T L 

LM2T M 

Assembly 

X1 

X1 

X2 

LED 

X2 

Operators latch onto the 

mounting adapter with a 

simple rotation. 

X2 

Flashing 

LM2T GL 

LM2T FL 

Test 

element 

X1 

X2 

X1 

X5 

TEST 

X1 

X2 

8 LM2T XL 

8 LM2T FL 

LED integrated 

lamp-holders 

without mounting 

adapter. Steady or 

flashing light. 

8 LM2T LM3 

Voltage LED Catalog number Price Catalog number Price 

❽ color for steady $ each for flashing $ each 

For operators of plastic and metal series. 

Mounting adapter excluded ❼. 

18-30V Green 8 LM2T LB3 9.50 8 LM2T MB3 19.00 

AC/DC Red 8 LM2T LB4 9.50 8 LM2T MB4 19.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T LB5 9.50 8 LM2T MB5 19.00 

Blue 8 LM2T LB6 9.50 8 LM2T MB6 19.00 

White 8 LM2T LB8 9.50 8 LM2T MB8 19.00 

85-140V Green 8 LM2T LE3 13.50 8 LM2T ME3 27.00 

AC Red 8 LM2T LE4 13.50 8 LM2T ME4 27.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T LE5 13.50 8 LM2T ME5 27.00 

Blue 8 LM2T LE6 13.50 8 LM2T ME6 27.00 

White 8 LM2T LE8 13.50 8 LM2T ME8 27.00 

187-265V Green 8 LM2T LM3 13.50 8 LM2T MM3 27.00 

AC Red 8 LM2T LM4 13.50 8 LM2T MM4 27.00 

Yellow 8 LM2T LM5 13.50 8 LM2T MM5 27.00 

Blue 8 LM2T LM6 13.50 8 LM2T MM6 27.00 

White 8 LM2T LM8 13.50 8 LM2T MM8 27.00 

❽ Steady light 9-15VAC/DC types are available on request. Contact Sales & 


Fixing to the mounting surface is 

by means of incorporated screws 


UL listed for USA and Canada, file E 93601. 


❶ Filament bulb, BA9s U≤130V max 2.6W (not supplied); max dimensions 

11x28 mm (0.4x1.1in). For higher voltages, use neon bulbs. 

❷ Not suitable for 3-position selectors. 

❸ Filament bulb, BA9s (not supplied); max dimensions 11x28 mm 

(0.4x1.1in). Suitable for AC duty only. 

Use bulbs with rated voltage equal to that of the power supply. 

E.g.: With LM2T FL230 use 120V bulbs if power supply is 120V and 

230V bulbs if power supply 230V. 2.6W max bulb rating. 

❹ MultiLED bulbs must not be fitted. 

❺ In case of test circuits for lamp-holders having load in parallel, two 

LM2T T100 elements are required for each bulb. Refer to the wiring 

diagram attached to the product or contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❻ In case of neon bulbs, contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❼ Luminosity is reduced during test with test element LM2T T100. 



Dimensions 

page D-19 



electric 



7-19 

Labels with text for 

8 LM2T AU100 

legend holder 

8 LM2T AGB230 


$ each 

General use. 

Blank for writing 8 LM2T AU206 1.00 

Custom printed inscription ❶ 8 LM2T AU208❷ 2.50 

CLOSE 8 LM2T AGB216 1.50 

EMERGENCY 8 LM2T AGB220 1.50 

FAST 8 LM2T AGB231 1.50 

FAULT 8 LM2T AGB263 1.50 

FORWARD 8 LM2T AGB215 1.50 

LEFT 8 LM2T AGB228 1.50 

LOWER 8 LM2T AGB218 1.50 

OFF 8 LM2T AGB221 1.50 

ON 8 LM2T AGB223 1.50 

OPEN 8 LM2T AGB211 1.50 

POWER ON 8 LM2T AGB229 1.50 

RAISE 8 LM2T AGB227 1.50 

RESET 8 LM2T AGB226 1.50 

REVERSE 8 LM2T AGB222 1.50 

RIGHT 8 LM2T AGB217 1.50 

RUNNING 8 LM2T AGB241 1.50 

SLOW 8 LM2T AGB224 1.50 

START 8 LM2T AGB225 1.50 

STOP 8 LM2T AGB230 1.50 

STOP RESET 8 LM2T AGB214 1.50 

THERMAL FAULT 8 LM2T AGB240 1.50 

TRIP 8 LM2T AGB237 1.50 

For selector switches. 

AUTO-MAN 8 LM2T AI233 1.50 

AUTO-O-MAN 8 LM2T AI234 1.50 

MAN-AUTO 8 LM2T AI241 1.50 

MAN-O-AUTO 8 LM2T AI242 1.50 

FWD-O-REV 8 LM2T AGB235 1.50 

OFF-ON 8 LM2T AGB236 1.50 

STOP-START 8 LM2T AGB232 1.50 

International labels for push-buttons. 

O 8 LM2T AU200 1.50 

I 8 LM2T AU201 1.50 

II 8 LM2T AU202 1.50 

International labels for selector switches. 

O-I 8 LM2T AU203 1.50 

I-II 8 LM2T AU204 1.50 

I-O-II 8 LM2T AU205 1.50 


The labels have indelible scratch-proof black lettering on 

metalized grey polycarbonate background (adhesive). 


Labels in different languages are available. 


7 

❶ Recommended use with LM2T AU206 blank label. 

❷ Complete catalog number with text requided. 

Plastic disks for 

mushroom-head 

push-buttons 


$ each 

EMERGENCY STOP Ø90mm 8 LM2T AU113 3.00 

EMERGENCY STOP Ø60mm 8 LM2T AU115 3.00 

90mm = 3.5in; 60mm = 2.4in 


The disks are made of non-adhesive plastic. 


The disk text in different languages is available. 


EMERGENCY 

STOP 


page 7-21 

Dimensions 

page D-20 



7-20 



electric 

7 


spare parts 

8 LM2T AL... 

8 LM2T AU100 

8 LM2T AU105 

8 LM2T AU108 

8 LM2T AU106 

8 LM2T AU170 


$ each 

Rod for mechanical reset 8 LM2T A150 3.00 

button (l=5in/123mm) 

BA9s bulb extractor 8 LM2T A160 0.50 

30mm hole size adapter 8 LM2T A161 1.00 

for 22mm units 

(2 per hole) 

Spare key set for 8 LM2T A170 5.00 

selector or mushroom 

head button 

Spare key set for 8 LM2T A170G❶ 5.00 

G series selector or 

mushroom-head button 

Diffuser for pilot light 8 LM2T A190 1.00 

Filament bulb BA9s 8 LM2T ALA024 1.50 

BA9s 24V - 1.2W 10x28mm 

Filament bulb 8 LM2T ALB024 1.50 

BA9s 24V - 2W 10x28mm 


BA9s 48V - 2W 10x28mm 


BA9s 130V - 2W 10x28mm 

MultiLED bulb BA9s 8 LM2T ALL006❸ 23.00 

6VAC/DC 10x28mm 





Neon bulb ❹ BA9s 8 LM2T ALN130❺ 8.00 

110/125VAC 10x28mm 


220/250VAC 10x28mm 


380/400VAC 10x28mm 

Neon bulb ❹ BA9s 8 LM2T ALP130❻ 1.50 

110/125VAC 10x28mm 


220/250VAC 10x28mm 


380/400VAC 10x28mm 

Blank paper label for 8 LM2T AU106 0.20 

writing (for LM2T AU105) 

Blank plastic label for 8 LM2T AU108 1.00 

engraving (for LM2T AU105) 

IP66 cap for 8 LM2T AU13❷ 2.50 

flush push-buttons 

IP66 cap for extended and 8 LM2T AU14❷ 2.50 

illuminated push-buttons 

IP66 cap for double or triple touch 8 LM2T AU157 7.00 

operators (transparent) 

Transparent protective cap 8 LM2T AU167 15.00 

for 8 L...2T B634 buttons 

Operator gasket ring 8 LM2T AU170 0.50 

LM2T AU170 

LM2T A180 

LM2T AL... 

LM2T A190 

LM2T AT... 

❶ Versions with different key code. Complete with the numeric code 

of the key. The following versions are available: 501, 502, 503, 504, 

505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510. 

Example of complete catalog number: 8 LM2T A170G505. 

Coloured key versions are available on request; contact Sales & 


❷ For push-buttons, add the digit of the required color: 

2 (black); 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 7 (transparent); 8 (white). 

For illuminated push-buttons, add only digit 7 (transparent). 

❸ Add the digit of the selected color: 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow). 

It is advisable to use the same color of bulb as of the actuator to 

obtain adequate light emission. 

Not suitable for resistor-diode lamp-holders. 

❹ Neon bulbs emit an amber light and may not be suitable for use with 

green or blue pilot lights and illuminated actuators. 

❺ Glass with diffuser lens. 

❻ Plastic neon bulb. 

Dimensions 

page D-20 



electric 



7-21 


spare parts 

8 LM2T A130 

8 LM2T A140 


$ each 

Colored diffuser for double 8 LM2T A12❶ 1.00 

touch operators 

Threaded plug for unused 8 LM2T A130 3.00 

holes 

Action plug for center 8 LM2T A140 1.00 

contact 

Guard for knob selector 8 LM2T A185 4.80 

switches 

Printed label to be 8 LM2T AT❸ 1.50 

inserted in pilot lights 

and push-buttons 

Legend holder 8 LM2T AU100❸ 1.00 

Legend holder (for paper 8 LM2T AU105❸ 2.00 

or plastic labels) 

Transparent protection 8 LM2T AU107 0.50 

for 8 LM2T AU106 label 

CLICK 

LM2T A140 

LM2T AU100 

LM2T AU105 

LM2T AU170 

8 LM2T A185 

❶ Add the digit of the selected color: 3 (green); 4 (red); 5 (yellow); 6 (blue); 

7 (transparent); 8 (white). 

❷ Available only on specific request, contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❸ To preserve operator degree of protection (IP65), place its gasket ring between the 

legend holder and mounting surface. 

8 LM2T AT... 

7 


spare parts for 

LP2T (plastic) 

series only 


$ each 

IP20 terminal protection 8 LM2T A180 0.50 

for direct supply pilot light 

Socket wrench 8 LM2T A200 12.00 

for monoblock pilot light 

Mounting adapter 8 LP2T AU120 3.40 

LM2T AU170 

LM2T A180 

LM2T AT... 

LM2T AL... 

LM2T A190 

8 LM2T A180 

Dimensions 

page D-20 



PAGE 8-2 

PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES KB-KC TYPES 

• Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KB type 

• Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 for KC types 

• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic housing 

• Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact 

blocks 

• Heads interchangeable and rotatable in 8 different 

45° angle positions 

• Unique fixing mechanism of operating head 

• IP65 protection 

• 1 /2 NPT or M20. 

PAGE 8-2 

METAL LIMIT SWITCHES KM-KN TYPES 

• Dimensions to EN 50047 standards for KM type 

• Dimensions compatble to EN 50047 for KN type 

• Aluminum-zinc alloy housing 

• Removable and interchangeable auxiliary contact 

blocks 

• Heads interchangeable and rotatable in 8 

different 45° angle positions 

• Unique fixing mechanism of operating head 


• 1 /2 NPT or M20 cable entry. 

PAGE 8-18 

METAL PREWIRED LIMIT SWITCHES KP TYPE 

• Fixing compatible to EN 50047 standards 

• Aluminium-zinc alloy housing 

• Adjustable and capsizable levers 

• 2m long wire; 1m long wire types available 

• IP67 protection. 

PAGE 8-19 

PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCHES T SERIES 

• Dimensions to EN 50041 standards 

• Self-extinguishing polymer thermoplastic 

housing 

• Heads rotatable in 4 different 90° angle 

positions 


• PG13.5 cable entry. 

PAGE 8-21 

ROPE-PULL LEVER LIMIT SWITCHES 

FOR NORMAL STOPPING 


housing 

• Aluminium-zinc alloy housing 

• IP40, IP65 and IP66 protection 

• PG11 or PG13.5 cable entry. 

ROPE-PULL LEVER SAFETY LIMIT SWITCHES 

FOR EMERGENCY STOPPING 

• Compliant to EN 418 standards 

• IP65 and IP66 protection 

• PG11 and PG13.5 cable entry. 

PAGE 8-22 

PLASTIC MICRO SWITCHES KS TYPE 

• Dimensions to EN 50047 standards 

• Thermoplastic reinforced resin housing 

• Aluminum-zinc alloy operating head 

• 15A 250VAC rated contact switch 

• 3 types of termination available. 

PAGE 8-23 


FOOT SWITCHES 

• Versions with or without protection cover 


housing 

• Aluminum-zinc alloy housing 

• IP54 and IP65 protection 

• M20 cable entry. 



8 

LIMIT, MICRO AND FOOT SWITCHES 

Dimensions to EN 50047 standards 

Dimensions compatible to 

EN 50047 standards 

Dimensions to EN 50041 standards 

Direct positive operation of NC 

contacts 

Extensive range of operating heads 

Micro switches for general use 

Insertable and interchangeable 

auxiliary contact blocks. 

Micro switches for general use 

Prewired types with 1 or 2 meter 

wire length. 


The locking bayonet fixing is easily removed to 

allow rotation or exchange of heads, without use 

of tools. 

Heads have 45° angle axial rotation, in 8 positions. 

Metal and plastic limit switches, K series 

SEC. PAGE 

(dimensions to/compatible to EN 50047) 

Top push rod plunger limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 2 

Top roller push plunger limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3 

Roller center push lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4 

Roller side push lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 5 

Roller lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6 

Adjustable roller lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8 

Ceramic rod lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 10 

Adjustable rod lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11 

Wobble stick, omnidirectional limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12 

Hinge operating limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 13 

Slotted lever limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 14 

Key operated limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 15 

Prewired metal limit switches, K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 18 

Plastic limit switches, T series (dimensions to EN 50041) 

Top push rod plunger and roller lever limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 19 

Wobble stick, omnidirectional and key operated limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 20 

Rope-pull lever limit switches for normal stopping . . . 8- 21 

Safety switches for emergency stopping 

EN 418 compliant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 22 

Micro switches, K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 23 

Foot switches, K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 24 


For KB - KC - KM - KN types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 16 

PG adapters for T and RS types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 21 

For rope-pull lever types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 22 

For KS types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 23 

For foot switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 25 



8 

8-2 

Top push rod plunger 

KB A - KM A 

KC A - KN A 

1 /2 NPT ENTRY 

For types with M20 entry, 

remove the letter N at the end of the 

catalog number. 

E.g. KB A1 S11 

Limit, micro and foot switches 

Limit switches, K series 

One bottom entry. Two side entries 

Contacts Plunger Catalog number 

material Plastic Metal 

body Price body Price 

$ each $ each 

One bottom entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. 

1NO+1NC Metal KB A1 S11N 29.00 KM A1 S11N 38.00 

Snap action❶ 

2NC Metal KB A1 S02N 38.00 KM A1 S02N 47.00 


1NO+1NC Metal KB A1 A11N 27.00 KM A1 A11N 36.00 

Slow break make 

before break❶ 

1NO+1NC Metal KB A1 L11N 27.00 KM A1 L11N 36.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NC Metal KB A1 L02N 29.00 KM A1 L02N 38.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NO Metal KB A1 L20N 29.00 KM A1 L20N 38.00 

Slow break 


Slow break❶ 


Slow break❶ 

3NC Metal KB A1 L03N 40.00 KM A1 L03N 49.00 

Slow break❶ 

Two side entries. Dimensions compatible to EN 50047. 

1NO+1NC Metal KC A1 S11N 34.00 KN A1 S11N 42.00 


2NC Metal KC A1 S02N 42.00 KN A1 S02N 51.00 


1NO+1NC Metal KC A1 A11N 32.00 KN A1 A11N 40.00 



1NO+1NC Metal KC A1 L11N 32.00 KN A1 L11N 40.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NC Metal KC A1 L02N 34.00 KN A1 L02N 42.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NO Metal KC A1 L20N 34.00 KN A1 L20N 42.00 

Slow break 

❶ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

; safety function per 

electric 


The LOVATO ELECTRIC limit switches have been 

designed to satisfy requirements for quick installation, 

wiring ease, simple setup, modularity, sturdiness and 

reliability. 

The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable. 

The innovative locking bayonet mechanism provides for 

easy removal and repositioning of the operating head in 

the required configuration without tools. The heads have 

axial rotation of 45° angles. 

The auxiliary contact blocks are removable assuring 

wiring simplicity. The heads are made of metal while the 

body housing of self-extinguishing polymer 

thermoplastic for the KB and KC types or of 

aluminum-zinc alloy (zama) for the KM and KN types. 


– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h 

– Switching time: 0.5-1.5m/s 

– Mechanical life: >10 million cycles 

– Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A 

– UL designation: 

• A600 Q300 for KB-KC types 

• A300 Q300 for KM-KN types 

– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 

• 690VAC for KB-KC types 

• 440VAC for KM-KN types 

– Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 

• 6kV for KB-KC types 

• 4kV for KM-KN types 

– Class II insulation for KB-KC only 

– Contact resistance:

electric 

Top roller push 

plunger 

KB B - KM B 

KC B - KN B 





E.g. KB B1 S11 




Contacts Roller Catalog number 



$ each $ each 

One bottom cable entry. Dimensions to EN 50047. 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB B1 S11N 33.00 KM B1 S11N 42.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB B2 S11N 35.00 KM B2 S11N 44.00 

2NC Plastic KB B1 S02N 42.00 KM B1 S02N 51.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB B2 S02N 43.00 KM B2 S02N 52.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB B1 A11N 31.00 KM B1 A11N 40.00 



Metal KB B2 A11N 33.00 KM B2 A11N 42.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB B1 L11N 31.00 KM B1 L11N 40.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KB B2 L11N 33.00 KM B2 L11N 44.00 

2NC Plastic KB B1 L02N 31.00 KM B1 L02N 42.00 


2NO Plastic KB B1 L20N 33.00 KM B1 L20N 42.00 

Slow break Metal KB B2 L20N 35.00 KM B2 L20N 44.00 





3NC Plastic KB B1 L03N 44.00 KM B1 L03N 53.00 



1NO+1NC Plastic KC B1 S11N 38.00 KN B1 S11N 46.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC B2 S11N 40.00 KN B2 S11N 48.00 

2NC Plastic KC B1 S02N 47.00 KN B1 S02N 55.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC B2 S02N 48.00 KN B2 S02N 57.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC B1 A11N 36.00 KN B1 A11N 44.00 



Metal KC B2 A11N 37.00 KN B2 A11N 46.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC B1 L11N 36.00 KN B1 L11N 44.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC B2 L11N 37.00 KN B2 L11N 46.00 

2NC Plastic KC B1 L02N 38.00 KN B1 L02N 48.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC B2 L02N 40.00 KN B2 L02N 48.00 

2NO Plastic KC B1 L20N 38.00 KN B1 L20N 46.00 

Slow break Metal KC B2 L20N 40.00 KN B2 L20N 48.00 

❶ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation ; safety function per 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

8-3 





reliability. 



























8 

8-4 

Roller center push 

lever 

KB C - KM C 

KC C - KN C 





E.g. KB C1 S11 







$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic KB C1 S11N 34.00 KM C1 S11N 43.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB C2 S11N 35.00 KM C2 S11N 44.00 

2NC Plastic KB C1 S02N 42.00 KM C1 S02N 51.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB C2 S02N 44.00 KM C2 S02N 53.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB C1 A11N 32.00 KM C1 A11N 41.00 



Metal KB C2 A11N 33.00 KM C2 A11N 42.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB C1 L11N 32.00 KM C1 L11N 41.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KB C2 L11N 33.00 KM C2 L11N 42.00 

2NC Plastic KB C1 L02N 34.00 KM C1 L02N 43.00 


2NO Plastic KB C1 L20N 34.00 KM C1 L20N 43.00 

Slow break Metal KB C2 L20N 35.00 KM C2 L20N 44.00 





3NO Plastic KB C1 L03N 45.00 KM C1 L03N 54.00 



1NO+1NC Plastic KC C1 S11N 38.00 KN C1 S11N 47.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC C2 S11N 40.00 KN C2 S11N 48.00 

2NC Plastic KC C1 S02N 47.00 KN C1 S02N 56.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC C2 S02N 49.00 KN C2 S02N 57.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC C1 A11N 36.00 KN C1 A11N 45.00 



Metal KC C2 A11N 38.00 KN C2 A11N 46.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC C1 L11N 36.00 KN C1 L11N 45.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC C2 L11N 38.00 KN C2 L11N 46.00 

2NC Plastic KC C1 L02N 38.00 KN C1 L02N 47.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC C2 L02N 40.00 KN C2 L02N 48.00 

2NO Plastic KC C1 L20N 38.00 KN C1 L20N 47.00 

Slow break Metal KC C2 L20N 40.00 KN C2 L20N 48.00 

Ø11x4mm =0.43x0.16in 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

electric 





reliability. 



























electric 

Roller side push 

lever 

KB D - KM D 

KC D - KN D 





E.g. KB D1 S11 







$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic KB D1 S11N 34.00 KM D1 S11N 43.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB D2 S11N 35.00 KM D2 S11N 44.00 

2NC Plastic KB D1 S02N 42.00 KM D1 S02N 51.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB D2 S02N 43.00 KM D2 S02N 53.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB D1 A11N 32.00 KM D1 A11N 41.00 



Metal KB D2 A11N 33.00 KM D2 A11N 42.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB D1 L11N 32.00 KM D1 L11N 41.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KB D2 L11N 33.00 KM D2 L11N 42.00 

2NC Plastic KB D1 L02N 34.00 KM D1 L02N 43.00 


2NO Plastic KB D1 L20N 34.00 KM D1 L20N 43.00 

Slow break Metal KB D2 L20N 35.00 KM D2 L20N 44.00 





3NC Plastic KB D1 L03N 45.00 KM D1 L03N 54.00 



1NO+1NC Plastic KC D1 S11N 38.00 KN D1 S11N 47.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC D2 S11N 40.00 KN D2 S11N 48.00 

2NC Plastic KC D1 S02N 47.00 KN D1 S02N 56.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC D2 S02N 49.00 KN D2 S02N 57.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC D1 A11N 36.00 KN D1 A11N 45.00 



Metal KC D2 A11N 38.00 KN D2 A11N 46.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC D1 L11N 36.00 KN D1 L11N 45.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC D2 L11N 38.00 KN D2 L11N 46.00 

2NC Plastic KC D1 L02N 38.00 KN D1 L02N 47.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC D2 L02N 40.00 KN D2 L02N 48.00 

2NO Plastic KC D1 L20N 38.00 KN D1 L20N 47.00 

Slow break Metal KC D2 L20N 40.00 KN D2 L20N 48.00 

Ø11x4mm =0.43x0.16in 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

8-5 





reliability. 



























8 

8-6 

Roller lever plunger 

KB E1 - KB E2 

KM E1 - KM E2 

KB E3 - KM E3 



One bottom entry 




$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KB E1 S11N 36.00 KM E1 S11N 45.00 

Snap action❸ Metal❶ KB E2 S11N 38.00 KM E2 S11N 47.00 

Rubber❷ KB E3 S11N 42.00 KM E3 S11N 51.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KB E1 S02N 44.00 KM E1 S02N 53.00 

Snap action❸ Metal❶ KB E2 S02N 47.00 KM E2 S02N 56.00 

Rubber❷ KB E3 S02N 51.00 KM E3 S02N 60.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KB E1 A11N 34.00 KM E1 A11N 43.00 

Slow break make Metal❶ KB E2 A11N 36.00 KM E2 A11N 45.00 

before break❸ Rubber❷ KB E3 A11N 40.00 KM E3 A11N 49.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KB E1 L11N 34.00 KM E1 L11N 43.00 

Slow break❸ Metal❶ KB E2 L11N 36.00 KM E2 L11N 45.00 

Rubber❷ KB E3 L11N 40.00 KM E3 L11N 49.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KB E1 L02N 36.00 KM E1 L02N 45.00 



2NO Plastic❶ KB E1 L20N 36.00 KM E1 L20N 45.00 

Slow break Metal❶ KB E2 L20N 38.00 KM E2 L20N 47.00 








3NC Plastic❶ KB E1 L03N 47.00 KM E1 L03N 56.00 



BI-DIRECTIONAL. 


2NC❸ Plastic❶ KB E1 D02N 50.00 KM E1 D02N 58.00 

Independent 

❶ Ø19x5mm = 0.75x0.2in 

❷ Ø50x10mm = 1.97x0.39in 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

electric 





reliability. 









thermoplastic for the KB types or of 

aluminum-zinc alloy (zama) for the KM types. 







• A600 Q300 for KB types 

• A300 Q300 for KM types 


• 690V for KB types 

• 440V for KM types 


• 6kVAC for KB types 

• 4kVAC for KM types 

– Class II insulation for KB only 


electric 


KC E1 - KC E2 

KN E1 - KN E2 

KC E3 - KN E3 



Two side entries. 




$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KC E1 S11N 40.00 KN E1 S11N 49.00 

Snap action❸ Metal❶ KC E2 S11N 43.00 KN E2 S11N 51.00 

Rubber❷ KC E3 S11N 47.00 KN E3 S11N 55.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KC E1 S02N 49.00 KN E1 S02N 57.00 

Snap action❸ Metal❶ KC E2 S02N 52.00 KN E2 S02N 60.00 

Rubber KC E3 S02N 56.00 KN E3 S02N 64.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KC E1 A11N 38.00 KN E1 A11N 47.00 

Slow break make Metal❶ KC E2 A11N 41.00 KN E2 A11N 49.00 

before break❸ Rubber❷ KC E3 A11N 45.00 KN E3 A11N 53.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KC E1 L11N 38.00 KN E1 L11N 47.00 

Slow break❸ Metal❶ KC E2 L11N 41.00 KN E2 L11N 49.00 

Rubber❷ KC E3 L11N 45.00 KN E3 L11N 53.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KC E1 L02N 40.00 KN E1 L02N 49.00 

Slow break❸ Metal❶ KC E2 L02N 43.00 KN E2 L02N 51.00 


2NO Plastic❶ KC E1 L20N 40.00 KN E1 L20N 49.00 

Slow break Metal❶ KC E2 L20N 43.00 KN E2 L20N 51.00 




2NC❸ Plastic❶ KC E1 D02N 54.00 KN E1 D02N 61.00 

Independent 

❶ Ø19x5mm = 0.75x0.2in 

❷ Ø50x10mm = 1.97x0.39in 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

8-7 





reliability. 









thermoplastic for the KC types or of 

aluminum-zinc alloy (zama) for the KN types. 







• A600 Q300 for KC types 

• A300 Q300 for KN types 


• 690VAC for KC types 

• 440VAC for KN types 


• 6kV for KC types 

• 4kV for KN types 

– Class II insulation for KC only 


8 

8-8 

Adjustable roller 

lever 

KB F - KM F 





E.g. KB F1 S11 

❶ Ø19x5mm = 0.75x0.2in 

❷ Ø50x10mm = 1.97x0.39in 

❸ Ø50x10mm = 1.97x0.39in off alignment 

❹ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation ; 

safety function per IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 



One side entry 




$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KB F1 S11N 37.00 KM F1 S11N 46.00 

Snap action❹ Metal❶ KB F2 S11N 40.00 KM F2 S11N 49.00 

Rubber❷ KB F3 S11N 43.00 KM F3 S11N 52.00 

Rubber❸ KB F4 S11N 45.00 KM F4 S11N 54.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KB F1 S02N 46.00 KM F1 S02N 55.00 

Snap action❹ Metal❶ KB F2 S02N 48.00 KM F2 S02N 57.00 

Rubber❷ KB F3 S02N 52.00 KM F3 S02N 61.00 

Rubber❸ KB F4 S02N 54.00 KM F4 S02N 63.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KB F1 A11N 35.00 KM F1 A11N 44.00 

Slow break make Metal❶ KB F2 A11N 38.00 KM F2 A11N 47.00 

before break❹ Rubber❷ KB F3 A11N 41.00 KM F3 A11N 50.00 

Rubber❸ KB F4 A11N 43.00 KM F4 A11N 52.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KB F1 L11N 35.00 KM F1 L11N 44.00 

Slow break❹ Metal❶ KB F2 L11N 38.00 KM F2 L11N 47.00 

Rubber❷ KB F3 L11N 41.00 KM F3 L11N 50.00 

Rubber❸ KB F4 L11N 43.00 KM F4 L11N 52.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KB F1 L02N 37.00 KM F1 L02N 46.00 




2NO Plastic❶ KB F1 L20N 37.00 KM F1 L20N 46.00 

Slow break Metal❶ KB F2 L20N 40.00 KM F2 L20N 49.00 











3NC Plastic❶ KB F1 L03N 48.00 KM F1 L03N 57.00 






2NC❸ Plastic❶ KB F1 D02N 52.00 KM F1 D02N 60.00 

Independent 

electric 





reliability. 




the required configuration without tools. 




thermoplastic for the KB types or of 

aluminum-zinc alloy (zama) for the KM types. 







• A600 Q300 for KB types 

• A300 Q300 for KM types 


• 690V for KB types 

• 440V for KM types 


• 6kVAC for KB types 

• 4kVAC for KM types 

– Class II insulation for KB only 


electric 

Adjustable roller 

lever 

KC F - KN F 





E.g. KC F1 S11 



Two side entries 




$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KC F1 S11N 42.00 KN F1 S11N 50.00 

Snap action❹ Metal❶ KC F2 S11N 45.00 KN F2 S11N 53.00 

Rubber❷ KC F3 S11N 48.00 KN F3 S11N 56.00 

Rubber❸ KC F4 S11N 50.00 KN F4 S11N 59.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KC F1 S02N 51.00 KN F1 S02N 59.00 

Snap action❹ Metal❶ KC F2 S02N 53.00 KN F2 S02N 62.00 

Rubber❷ KC F3 S02N 57.00 KN F3 S02N 65.00 

Rubber❸ KC F4 S02N 59.00 KN F4 S02N 67.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KC F1 A11N 40.00 KN F1 A11N 48.00 

Slow break make Metal❶ KC F2 A11N 43.00 KN F2 A11N 51.00 

before break❹ Rubber❷ KC F3 A11N 46.00 KN F3 A11N 54.00 

Rubber❸ KC F4 A11N 48.00 KN F4 A11N 56.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic❶ KC F1 L11N 40.00 KN F1 L11N 48.00 

Slow break❹ Metal❶ KC F2 L11N 43.00 KN F2 L11N 51.00 

Rubber❷ KC F3 L11N 46.00 KN F3 L11N 54.00 

Rubber❸ KC F4 L11N 48.00 KN F4 L11N 56.00 

2NC Plastic❶ KC F1 L02N 42.00 KN F1 L02N 50.00 

Slow break❹ Metal❶ KC F2 L02N 45.00 KN F2 L02N 53.00 



2NO Plastic❶ KC F1 L20N 42.00 KN F1 L20N 50.00 

Slow break Metal❶ KC F2 L20N 45.00 KN F2 L20N 53.00 



❶ Ø19x5mm = Ø0.75x0.2in 

❷ Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.39in 

❸ Ø50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.39in off alignment 

❹ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 


8-9 





reliability. 








thermoplastic for the KC types or of 

aluminum-zinc alloy (zama) for the KN types. 







• A600 Q300 for KC types 

• A300 Q300 for KN types 


• 690VAC for KC types 

• 440VAC for KN types 


• 6kV for KC types 

• 4kV for KN types 

– Class II insulation for KC only 


8 

8-10 

Ceramic rod lever 

KB H - KM H 

KC H - KN H 





E.g. KB H1 S11 




Contacts Rod Catalog number 



$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Ceramic KB H1 S11N 52.00 KM H1 S11N 62.00 


2NC Ceramic KB H1 S02N 61.00 KM H1 S02N 70.00 


1NO+1NC Ceramic KB H1 A11N 51.00 KM H1 A11N 60.00 



1NO+1NC Ceramic KB H1 L11N 51.00 KM H1 L11N 60.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NC Ceramic KB H1 L02N 52.00 KM H1 L02N 62.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NO Ceramic KB H1 L20N 52.00 KM H1 L20N 62.00 

Slow break 


Slow break❶ 


Slow break❶ 

3NC Ceramic KB H1 L03N 64.00 KM H1 L03N 73.00 

Slow break❶ 


1NO+1NC Ceramic KC H1 S11N 58.00 KN H1 S11N 66.00 


2NC Ceramic KC H1 S02N 67.00 KN H1 S02N 75.00 


1NO+1NC Ceramic KC H1 A11N 56.00 KN H1 A11N 64.00 



1NO+1NC Ceramic KC H1 L11N 56.00 KN H1 L11N 64.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NC Ceramic KC H1 L02N 58.00 KN H1 L02N 66.00 

Slow break❶ 

2NO Ceramic KC H1 L20N 58.00 KN H1 L20N 66.00 

Slow break 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

electric 



designed to satisfy requirements FOR quick installation, 


reliability. 



























electric 

Adjustable rod lever 

KB L - KM L 

KC L - KN L 







$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic KB L1 S11N 39.00 KM L1 S11N 48.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB L2 S11N 39.00 KM L2 S11N 48.00 

2NC Plastic KB L1 S02N 48.00 KM L1 S02N 57.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KB L2 S02N 48.00 KM L2 S02N 57.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB L1 A11N 37.00 KM L1 A11N 46.00 



Metal KB L2 A11N 37.00 KM L2 A11N 46.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB L1 L11N 37.00 KM L1 L11N 46.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KB L2 L11N 37.00 KM L2 L11N 46.00 

2NC Plastic KB L1 L02N 39.00 KM L1 L02N 48.00 


2NO Plastic KB L1 L20N 39.00 KM L1 L20N 48.00 

Slow break Metal KB L2 L20N 39.00 KM L2 L20N 48.00 





3NC Plastic KB L1 L03N 50.00 KM L1 L03N 59.00 



1NO+1NC Plastic KC L1 S11N 44.00 KN L1 S11N 52.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC L2 S11N 44.00 KN L2 S11N 52.00 

2NC Plastic KC L1 S02N 53.00 KN L1 S02N 61.00 

Snap action❶ Metal KC L2 S02N 53.00 KN L2 S02N 61.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC L1 A11N 42.00 KN L1 A11N 50.00 



Metal KC L2 A11N 42.00 KN L2 A11N 50.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC L1 L11N 42.00 KN L1 L11N 50.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC L2 L11N 42.00 KN L2 L11N 50.00 

2NC Plastic KC L1 L02N 44.00 KN L1 L02N 52.00 

Slow break❶ Metal KC L2 L02N 44.00 KN L2 L02N 52.00 

2NO Plastic KC L1 L20N 44.00 KN L1 L20N 52.00 

Slow break Metal KC L2 L20N 44.00 KN L2 L20N 52.00 





2NC❶ Plastic KB L1 D02N 54.00 KM L1 D02N 60.00 



Independent Metal KB L2 D02N 54.00 KM L2 D02N 60.00 

E.g. KB L1 S11 ❶ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation ; safety function per 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

8-11 





reliability. 


























8 

8-12 

Wobble stick, 

omnidirectional 

KB M - KM M 

KC M - KN M 





E.g. KB M1 S11 







$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic KB M1 S11N 38.00 KM M1 S11N 47.00 

Snap action Metal KB M2 S11N 36.00 KM M2 S11N 45.00 

2NC Plastic KB M1 S02N 47.00 KM M1 S02N 56.00 

Snap action Metal KB M2 S02N 44.00 KM M2 S02N 53.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB M1 A11N 36.00 KM M1 A11N 45.00 

Slow break make Metal KB M2 A11N 34.00 KM M2 A11N 43.00 

before break 

1NO+1NC Plastic KB M1 L11N 36.00 KM M1 L11N 45.00 

Slow break Metal KB M2 L11N 34.00 KM M2 L11N 43.00 

2NC Plastic KB M1 L02N 38.00 KM M1 L02N 4700 


2NO Plastic KB M1 L20N 38.00 KM M1 L20N 47.00 






3NC Plastic KB M1 L03N 49.00 KM M1 L03N 58.00 



1NO+1NC Plastic KC M1 S11N 43.00 KN M1 S11N 52.00 

Snap action Metal KC M2 S11N 41.00 KN M2 S11N 49.00 

2NC Plastic KC M1 S02N 52.00 KN M1 S02N 60.00 

Snap action Metal KC M2 S02N 49.00 KN M2 S02N 58.00 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC M1 A11N 41.00 KN M1 A11N 49.00 

Slow break make Metal KC M2 A11N 38.00 KN M2 A11N 47.00 

before break 

1NO+1NC Plastic KC M1 L11N 41.00 KN M1 L11N 49.00 

Slow break Metal KC M2 L11N 38.00 KN M2 L11N 47.00 

2NC Plastic KC M1 L02N 43.00 KN M1 L02N 52.00 


2NO Plastic KC M1 L20N 43.00 KN M1 L20N 52.00 


electric 





reliability. 


























electric 




8-13 

Hinge operating Contacts Shaft Catalog number 

features Plastic Metal 


KB P - KM P 

KC P - KN P 





E.g. KB Q1 L11 

$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Short KB P1 L11N 70.00 KM P1 L11N 79.00 

Slow break❶ cylinder 

1NO+1NC Long KB P2 L11N 73.00 KM P2 L11N 82.00 

Slow break❶ solid 


Slow break❶ solid w/ 

reduction 

2NC Short KB P1 L02N 72.00 KM P1 L02N 81.00 


2NC Long KB P2 L02N 75.00 KM P2 L02N 84.00 




reduction 







reduction 







reduction 

3NC Short KB P1 L03N 83.00 KM P1 L03N 92.00 






reduction 


1NO+1NC Short KC P1 L11N 76.00 KN P1 L11N 84.00 


2NC Long KC P2 L11N 79.00 KN P2 L11N 88.00 


1NO+1NC Long KC P3 L11N 79.00 KN P3 L11N 88.00 


reduction 

2NC Short KC P1 L02N 78.00 KN P1 L02N 86.00 






reduction 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 





reliability. 



























8 

8-14 

Slotted lever 

KB Q - KM Q 

KC Q - KN Q 




Contacts 

Catalog number 

Plastic 

Metal 


$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KB Q1 L11N 63.00 KM Q1 L11N 72.00 

2NC Slow break❶ KB Q1 L02N 65.00 KM Q1 L02N 74.00 



3NC Slow break❶ KB Q1 L03N 76.00 KM Q1 L03N 85.00 


1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KC Q1 L11N 69.00 KN Q1 L11N 77.00 

2NC Slow break❶ KC Q1 L02N 71.00 KN Q1 L02N 80.00 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 


electric 





reliability. 



























electric 

Key operated 

KB N1 L11N 

KC N1 L02N 





E.g. KB N1 L11 




Contacts Key Catalog Price 

shape❷ number 

Plastic body 

$ each 


1NO+1NC Straight KB N1 L11N 64.00 

Slow break❶ Angled KB N2 L11N 64.00 

Straight “T” KB N3 L11N 63.00 

Angled “T” KB N4 L11N 63.00 

2NC Straight KB N1 L02N 66.00 












3NC Straight KB N1 L03N 77.00 





1NO+1NC Straight KC N1 L11N 70.00 

Slow break❶ Angled KC N2 L11N 70.00 

Straight “T” KC N3 L11N 68.00 

Angled “T” KC N4 L11N 68.00 

2NC Straight KC N1 L02N 72.00 

Slow break❶ Angled KC N2 L02N 72.00 

Straight “T” KC N3 L02N 71.00 

Angled “T” KC N4 L02N 71.00 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

❷ The key is standard supplied. 

8-15 





reliability. 


The heads have axial rotation in any of 4 positions at 90° 

angles. 




thermoplastic. 






– UL designation: A600 Q600 



– Class II insulation 


8 

8-16 

Auxiliary contact 

blocks 

K X B S02 

K X B L03 

Body complete with 


KX CB - KX CM 

KX CC - KX CN 





E.g. KB Q1 L11 

Forward travel of snap action contacts 

Return travel of snap action contacts 

KX ... S11 

KX ... S02 

KX ... A11 

KX ... L11 

open 

closed 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

0 0.5 2.3 6mm 

(0.02in) (0.09in) (0.24in) 

11-12 

21-22 

11-12 

21-22 

0 0.5 2.3 6mm 

(0.02in) (0.09in) (0.24in) 

13-14 

21-22 

0 1.1 2.1 6mm 

(0.04in) (0.08in) 

(0.24in) 

13-14 

21-22 

0 2.1 2.9 6mm 

(0.08in) (0.11in) (0.24in) 



for KB, KC, KM and KN limit switches 

Contacts 

Catalog number Price 

$ each 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶❷ KX B S11 15.70 

2NC Snap action❶❷ KX B S02 24.90 

1NO+1NC Slow break, make before break❶❷ KX B A11 13.50 

1NO+1NC Slow break❷ KX B L11 13.50 

2NC Slow break❷ KX B L02 15.70 

2NO Slow break KX B L20 15.70 

1NO+2NC Slow break❷❸ KX B L12 27.70 

2NO+1NC Slow break❷❸ KX B L21 27.70 

3NC Slow break❷❸ KX B L03 27.70 

❶ Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP / KMP / 

KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types. 

❷ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation ; safety function per 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

❸ Not suitable for KC and KN types. 

Contacts 

Catalog number 

Plastic 

Metal 


$ each $ each 


1NO+1NC Snap action❶❷ KX CB S11N 21.90 KX CM S11N 30.90 

2NC Snap action❶❷ KX CB S02N 30.40 KX CM S02N 39.40 

1NO+1NC Slow break, KX CB A11N 19.90 KX CM A11N 28.90 

make before break❶❷ 

1NO+1NC Slow break❷ KX CB L11N 19.90 KX CM L11N 28.90 

2NC Slow break❷ KX CB L02N 21.90 KX CM L02N 30.90 

2NO Slow break KX CB L20N 21.90 KX CM L20N 30.90 

1NO+2NC Slow break❷❸ KX CB L12N 32.90 KX CM L12N 41.90 

2NO+1NC Slow break❷❸ KX CB L21N 32.90 KX CM L21N 41.90 

3NC Slow break❷❸ KX CB L03N 32.90 KX CM L03N 41.90 


1NO+1NC Snap action❶❷ KX CC S11N 26.00 KX CN S11N 34.00 

2NC Snap action❶❷ KX CC S02N 35.00 KX CN S02N 43.00 

1NO+1NC Slow break, KX CC A11N 24.00 KX CN A11N 32.00 

make before break❶❷ 

1NO+1NC Slow break❷ KX CC L11N 24.00 KX CN L11N 32.00 

2NC Slow break❷ KX CC L02N 26.00 KX CN L02N 34.00 

2NO Slow break KX CC L20N 26.00 KX CN L20N 34.00 

❶ Not suitable for key operated KBN / KCN, hinged operating KBP / KCP / KMP / 

KNP and slotted lever KBQ / KCQ / KMQ / KNQ types. 

❷ Direct (positive-guided) opening operation ; safety function per 

IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

❸ Not suitable for KC and KN types. 

KX ... L02 

KX ... L20 

KX ... L12 

KX ... L21 

KX ... L03 

11-12 

21-22 

0 2.1 6mm 

(0.08in) 

(0.24in) 

13-14 

23-24 

0 2.1 6mm 

(0.08in) 

(0.24in) 

21-22 

31-32 

13-14 

0 2.2 2.7 6mm 

(0.08in) (0.11in) 

(0.24in) 

21-22 

13-14 

33-34 

0 2.2 2.7 6mm 

(0.08in) (0.11in) 

(0.24in) 

11-12 

21-22 

31-32 

0 2.2 6mm 

(0.08in) 

(0.24in) 

electric 


The KX B contact blocks can be used with KB, KC, KM 

and KN limit switches. Combinations of 2 contacts with 

slow-break or snap action and 3 slow-break contacts, for 

KB and KM types only, are available. 

The NC contacts have direct opening operation, a 

specific safety principle. 

The particular four-point contacts warrant high 

conductivity in any sort of application. The removal of 

the contacts from the limit switch body provides wiring 

ease and reduces installation time as well. 

The KX C... bodies, complete with auxiliary contacts, can 

be used as spare parts for the KB, KC, KM and KN limit 

switches or coupled with the KX A... operating heads, to 

obtain complete limit switches in the required 

configurations. 

The body cover is hinged at the bottom and removable 

to have the best access. Each body includes the 

innovative locking bayonet mechanism of the operating 

head. Plastic and metal types are available. 





• A600 Q300 for KX CB-KX CC types 

• A300 Q300 for KX CM-KX CN types 


• 690VAC for KX CB-KX CC types 

• 440VAC for KX CM-KX CN types 


• 6kV for KX CB-KX CC types 

• 4kV for KX CM-KX CN types 

– Class II insulation for KX CB-KX CC only 


electric 



for KB, KC, KM and KN limit switches 

8-17 

Operating heads Description Catalog number Price 

KX A A1 KX A B1 KX A B2 

KX A C1 

KX A D1 

KX A C2 

KX A D2 

KX A E1 KX A E2 KX A E3 

$ each 

Top push rod plunger KX A A1 7.30 

Plastic top roller push plunger KX A B1 11.30 

Metal top roller push plunger KX A B2 13.00 

Plastic roller centre push lever KX A C1 12.10 

Metal roller centre push lever KX A C2 13.40 

Plastic roller side push lever KX A D1 12.10 

Metal roller side push lever KX A D2 13.40 

Plastic roller lever plunger KX A E1 13.70 

Metal roller lever plunger KX A E2 16.30 

Rubber Ø50x10mm (1.97x0.34in) KX A E3 20.20 

roller lever plunger 

Adjustable plastic roller lever KX A F1 15.30 

Adjustable metal roller lever KX A F2 18.00 

Adjustable rubber Ø50x10mm KX A F3 21.30 

(1.97x0.34in) roller lever 

Adjustable offset rubber KX A F4 23.20 

Ø50x10mm (1.97x0.34in) roller 

lever 

Ceramic rod lever KX A H1 30.70 

Adjustable plastic rod lever KX A L1 17.20 

Adjustable metal rod lever KX A L2 17.20 

Flexible wobble stick KX A M1 16.50 

Semirigid wobble stick KX A M2 14.00 


The KX A operating heads can be used as spare parts for 

the KB, KC, KM and KN limit switches or coupled with 

the KX C bodies to obtain complete limit switches in the 

required configurations. 

The heads are made of metal, providing sturdiness and 

operating reliability in all conditions. 

The shape of the coupling section with the body of the 

KB, KC, KM and KN switches allows for orientation of 

the head in any 45° angle position while the initial level 

and rod position can be adjusted 360° at 15° angle 

positions. 

The head fixing to the body is achieved by the innovative 

locking bayonet mechanism so there is no need for 

tools. 

8 

KX A F1 

KX A F2 

KX A F3 KX A F4 KX A H1 

KX A L1 KX A L2 KX A M1 KX A M2 

Accessories Description Catalog number Price 

$ each 

M20 cable gland KX P01 1.50 

PG13.5 cable gland KX P02 1.50 

M20 rubber grommet KX P03 1.00 

KX P... KX P03 

General characteristics for cable glands 

The cable glands are in plastic with either M20 or PG13.5 

thread and provide to keep the cable in place and 

maintain the proper IP protection of the limit switch after 

installation. 

Operational characteristics for cable glands 

– Material: Self-extinguishing polyamide 

– Degree of protection: IP68 

– Gland seal with wire diameter: 6-12mm / 0.24-0.47 in. 

Certifications and compliance for cable glands 


Compliant with standards: EN 50262. 

Dimensions 




8 

8-18 

Prewired limit 

switches 

KP A1 

KP B1 

KP B3 

KP B5 

KP B7 

KP A2 

KP B2 

KP B4 

KP B6 

KP B8 


KP types prewired metal limit switches 

Dimensions compatible to EN 50047 

Contacts Catalog Price 

number❻ 

$ each 

Top push metal rod plunger. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP A1 S11 55.90 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP A1 L11 55.90 

Top plastic roller push plunger. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP B1 S11 60.20 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP B1 L11 60.20 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP B3 S11❷ 60.20 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP B3 L11❷ 60.20 

Top metal roller push plunger. 





M12 fixing head. Top push metal rod plunger. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP A2 S11 58.80 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP A2 L11 58.80 

M12 fixing head. Top plastic roller push plunger. 





M12 fixing head. Top plastic roller push plunger. 





Roller lever plunger. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP E1 S11❷ 57.20 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP E1 L11❷ 57.20 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP E1 S11❹ 57.20 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP E1 L11❹ 57.20 

Adjustable plastic roller rod lever ❺. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP F1 S11 58.50 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP F1 L11 58.50 

Adjustable metal rod lever. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP L2 S11 60.80 

1NO+1NC Slow break❶ KP L2 L11 60.80 

Omnidirectional metal rod wobble stick. 

1NO+1NC Snap action❶ KP M2 S11 62.10 



open 

closed 

electric 


The prewired metal limit switches come equipped with a 

multicore wire connected to the electrical contacts and 

firmly fixed to the body by means of resin. As a result, 

these limit switches have a combination of unique 

features: a very reduced depth - 16mm only - and a 

high degree of production - IP67. 

They are suitable to detect the position of mobile 

mechanisms and parts in many operating conditions, 

which can be found in the industrial field. They are 

particularly ideal when a high protection degree is 

required, for example on machinery and equipment for 

outdoor use or where very compact size is essential. 

Each can be simply fixed to the machinery by screws, 

inserting them in the apposite openings on the switch 

body and then connected to the circuit; the different 

colors of the cores and the contact scheme on the front 

ease wiring as well. 

The operating heads have axial rotation while levers are 

adjustable and capsizable. 


– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cy/h 



– UL designation: B300 R300 



– Class 1 insulation 


electric 


TS1 01 10 - TL1 01 10 


T plastic series limit switches 

Dimensions to EN 50041 

Contacts Plunger Catalog number Price 

material 

$ each 

Without reset button. 

1NO+1NC Steel TS1 01 10 54.00 

Snap action 

1NO+1NC ❶ Steel TL1 01 10 54.00 

Slow break 

With reset button on front. 

1NO+1NC Steel TS2 01 10 64.00 

Snap action 

1NO+1NC ❶ Steel TL2 01 10 64.00 

Slow break 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

Type 

TS1 01 10 

TS2 01 10 

TL1 01 10 

TL2 01 10 

TS1 05 

TS2 05 

TL1 05 

TL2 05 



21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 

8-19 

open 

closed 

6 (0.24in) 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 6 (0.24in) 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

0 60° 

21-22 

13-14 

0 60° 

TS2 01 10 - TL2 01 10 

Roller lever 

TS1 - TL1 05 

(Ø 20x5mm) 

Contacts Roller Catalog number Price 

material 

$ each 


1NO+1NC Plastic 20x5 TS1 05 20 A❷ 62.00 

Snap action Metal 20x5 TS1 05 21 A 64.00 

Rubber 50x10 TS1 05 24 A❸ 66.00 

1NO+1NC ❶ Plastic 20x5 TL1 05 20 A❷ 62.00 

Slow break Metal 20x5 TL1 05 21 A 64.00 

Rubber 50x10 TL1 05 24 A❸ 66.00 

With reset button on the left. 

1NO+1NC Plastic 20x5 TS2 05 20 AS❷ 72.00 

Snap action Metal 20x5 TS2 05 21 AS 74.00 

Rubber 50x10 TS2 05 24 AS❸ 76.00 

1NO+1NC ❶ Plastic 20x5 TL2 05 20 AS❷ 72.00 

Slow break Metal 20x5 TL2 05 21 AS 74.00 

Rubber 50x10 TL2 05 24 AS❸ 76.00 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

❷ Version with Ø30x15mm plastic roller is available; replace 20 with 23 in the 

catalg number. 

❸ Version with Ø30x15mm rubber roller is available; replace 24 with 22 in the 

catalg number. 

Roller sizes: 

Ø 20x5mm = Ø 0.79x0.2in 

Ø 50x10mm = Ø1.97x0.39in 

Ø 30x5mm = Ø 1.18x0.2in 

Ø 35x15mm = Ø 1.38x0.59in 


The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and 

manufactured per European standards 

EN 50041 for dimensions. 

The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of 

self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent 

mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for 

assembly on machinery or installations in the 

general-purpose industrial field. 

The housing sturdiness makes these switches ideal for 

use in heavy duty applications. 

The double-insulated housing of the limit switch protects 

internal circuits against shocks or impacts in industrial 

environments, against accidental ingress of tools, and 

accidental contact. 

The contacts are designed to ensure self cleaning of the 

silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL 

series have direct (positive) opening operation to prevent 

sticking or welding. 





– Utilization category (UL designation): 

• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (R150) 

• AC15 duty: 6A 250V (B600) 


– Rated insulation voltage Ui: 250VAC 


8-20 Limit, micro and foot switches 

electric 

T plastic series 

Dimensions to EN 50041 

Wobble stick, 

omnidirectional 

Contacts Rod Catalog number Price 

material 

$ each 


1NO+1NC Flexible TS1 09 92 62.00 

Snap action 

1NO+1NC Flexible TL1 09 92 62.00 

Slow break 

Type 

TS1 09 92 

TL1 09 92 

TL2 10 



open 

closed 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

0 36° 

21-22 

13-14 

0 36° 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 4.2 (0.17in) 

8 

TS1 09 92 - TL1 09 92 

Key operated 

TL2 10 


spare parts 

Contacts Key Catalog number Price 

shape ❷ 

$ each 

Front key withdrawal ❶. 

1NO+1NC ❸ Straight TL2 10 10 68.00 

Slow break Angled TL2 10 11 68.00 

Angled “T” TL2 10 12 68.00 

Straight “T” TL2 10 13 68.00 

❶ Version with key withdrawal on the left or on the right is available; replace the 

last letter (A) of the catalog number respectively with S or D 

(e.g. TS2 10 10S - left or TS2 10 10D - right). For further assistance, contact 


❷ The key is standard supplied. 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 


$ each 

Extra keys. 

Straight key A 20746 6.00 

Angled key A 20747 6.00 

Angled “T” key P 32753 6.00 

Straight “T” key P 32752 6.00 

Toggle key A 20748 10.00 


The TS-TL series limit switches are designed and 

manufactured per European standards 

EN 50041 for dimensions. 

The insulated housing of the limit switch is made of 

self-extinguishing thermoplastic giving excellent 

mechanical stability and is suitable, as a result, for 

assembly on machinery or installations in the 

general-purpose industrial field. 

The housing sturdiness makes these switches ideal for 

use in heavy duty applications. 

The double-insulated housing of the limit switch protects 

internal circuits against shocks or impacts in industrial 

environments, against accidental ingress of tools, and 

accidental contact. 


silver-alloy contact surfaces. Contacts (NC) of the TL 

series have direct (positive-guided) opening operation to 

prevent sticking or welding. 






• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (R150) 

• AC15 duty: 6A 250V (B600) 

– Rated thermal current Ith: 6A 



electric 

Rope lever for 

normal stopping 

RS1 13 10 

RS2 13 10 

RS3 13 10 


Rope-pull lever limit switches 

Normal stopping 

Contacts Ring Catalog number Price 

material 

$ each 


1NO+1NC Steel RS1 13 10 48.00 

Snap action 

1NO+1NC Steel RS2 13 10 46.00 

Slow break 

2NO Steel RS3 13 10 48.00 

Slow break 

Type 

RS1 13 10 

RS2 13 10 

RS3 13 10 

TS1 13 10 

TL1 13 10 



8-21 

open 

closed 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 6 (0.24in) 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 6 (0.24in) 

21-22 

11-12 

0 [mm] 6 (0.24in) 

21-22 

13-14 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 6 (0.24in) 

21-22 

13-14 

0 [mm] 6 (0.24in) 


normal stopping 

Contacts Ring Catalog number Price 

material 

$ each 


1NO+1NC Steel TS1 13 10 65.00 

Snap action 

1NO+1NC Steel TL1 13 10 63.00 

Slow break 


The RS and T series limit switches are designed and 

manufactured according to European standards for 

dimensions EN 50041 and EN 50047, and operating 

characteristics. 

The double-insulated housing of the limit switch is made 

of glass-reinforced self-extinguishing polyamide resin to 

protect internal circuits against shocks or impacts in 

industrial environments, against accidental ingress of 

tools and accidental contact. 


silver-alloy contact surfaces. 

8 

TS1 1310 - TL1 13 10 

PG adapters for all 

RS and T types 


$ each 

Metal, for PG11 to 1 /2 NPT G611 2.50 

Plastic, for PG11 to 1 /2 NPT G612 1.50 

Metal, for PG13.5 to 1 /2 NPT G613 2.50 

Plastic, for PG13.5 to 1 /2 NPT G614 1.50 


– Maximum operating rate: 3600 cycles/h for 

RS...13 10; 1200 cycles/h for T...13 10 




• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (R150) 

• AC15 duty: 6A 250V (B600) 




8 

8-22 


emergency stopping 

RS13 13 10 

TL13 13 10 


Rope-pull lever safety switches. EN418 compliant 


Contacts Force Catalog Price 

number 

[N] 

$ each 

With reset button. 

1NO + 1NC❶ 25 (5.6lb) RS13 13 10 54.00 

1NO + 1NC❶ 25 (5.6lb) TL13 13 10 69.00 


IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 

Example of wiring diagram 

R 

S 

T 

MOTORE 

M 

3 

N 

MARCIA START 

STOP ARRESTO 


ROPE FUNE 

INTERRUTTORE 

ROPE LEVER 

DI SWITCH SICUREZZA A FUNE 

ELEMENTO CONTACT 

DI ELEMENT CONTATTO 

Type 

RS... 

T... 


The rope-operated safety switches for emergency stop 

are mainly suitable for emergency stop or alarm systems 

for machinery which occupies a large space. This 

emergency stop can be achieved from any point when 

the rope is manually pulled each time. 

The choice of the body, between plastic and metal, can 

satisfy the most diversified requirements for sturdiness 

and size. 





• DC13 duty: 1.5A 24V (R150) 

• AC15 duty: 6A 250V (B600) 




electric 


Micro switches 

8-23 

Micro switches 

KS A1... 

KS A2... 

KS A3... 

KS A4... 

KS A9... 

KS B1... 

KS B2... 

KS C1... 

KS C2... 

KS C3... 

KS C9... 

KS L1... 

KS L2... 

KS L3... 

Description Type of Catalog Price 

terminal number 

$ each 

Top push rod - metal plunger. 

Pin Solder KS A1 S 9.50 

Pin Screw KS A1 V 9.80 

Pin Faston KS A1 F 10.50 

High rod plunger Solder KS A2 S 11.80 

High rod plunger Screw KS A2 V 12.00 

High rod plunger Faston KS A2 F 12.70 

Low rod plunger Solder KS A3 S 11.00 

Low rod plunger Screw KS A3 V 11.30 

Low rod plunger faston KS A3 F 12.00 

M12 fixing head. 

Rod plunger Solder KS A4 S 14.30 

Rod plunger Screw KS A4 V 14.70 

Rod plunger Faston KS A4 F 15.40 

Push button. 

Hand operation Solder KS A9 S 10.20 

Hand operation Screw KS A9 V 10.40 

Hand operation Faston KS A9 F 11.10 

M12 fixing head. 

Top roller push plunger Solder KS B1 S 17.50 

Top roller push plunger Screw KS B1 V 17.90 

Top roller push plunger Faston KS B1 F 18.60 

Top roller push plunger 90°❶ Solder KS B2 S 17.90 

Top roller push plunger 90°❶ Screw KS B2 V 17.50 

Top roller push plunger 90°❶ Faston KS B2 F 18.60 

Roller center push lever. 

26.6mm (1.05in) lever Solder KS C1 S 11.50 

26.6mm (1.05in) lever Screw KS C1 V 11.80 

26.6mm (1.05in) lever Faston KS C1 F 12.50 

48.5mm (1.91in) lever Solder KS C2 S 11.80 

48.5mm (1.91in) lever Screw KS C2 V 12.20 

48.5mm (1.91in) lever Faston KS C2 F 12.90 

38mm (1.5in) lever Solder KS C3 S 11.80 

38mm (1.5in) lever Screw KS C3 V 12.20 

38mm (1.5in) lever Faston KS C3 F 12.90 

One-way roller lever Solder KS C9 S 13.90 

One-way roller lever Screw KS C9 V 14.30 

One-way roller lever Faston KS C9 F 14.90 

Operating lever. 

Flat 63mm (2.48in) long, Solder KS L1 S 10.50 

reverse acting 

Flat 63mm (2.48in) long, Screw KS L1 V 10.80 


Flat 63mm (2.48in) long, Faston KS L1 F 11.50 


Flat 54mm (2.13in) long, Solder KS L2 S 10.50 


Flat 54mm (2.13in) long, Screw KS L2 V 10.80 


Flat 54mm (2.13in) long, Faston KS L2 F 11.50 


Round 168.3mm (6.63in) long Solder KS L3 S 14.30 

Round 168.3mm (6.63in) long Screw KS L3 V 14.70 

Round 168.3mm (6.63in) long Faston KS L3 F 15.40 

Accessories. 

Terminal protection cover KSS C01 0.80 

Terminal protection cover with grommet KSS CB2 1.90 


Micro switches are very compact and simple 

electromechanical limit switches, universally used for 

many years in many applications to detect the position 

of mobile parts not closely related with the safety of 

machinery. 

Typically micro switches are composed by a plastic body 

which contains contacts in 1NO, NC, common SPDT 

switch configuration; the terminals for electric 

connection are directly accessible and are not protected, 

except with appropriate accessories. 

Owing to their structure, the direct opening operation of 

NC contacts cannot be ensured; therefore these micro 

switches are not suitable for safety applications, such as 

machinery protection control. 

Since electric contact terminals, as mentioned above, are 

easily accessible and not protected, micro switches must 

be positioned in a suitable ambient, sheltered from 

external agents or equipped with appropriate terminal 

covers. 


– Maximum operating rate: 240 cycles/min 

– Switching time: 0.01 - 1m/s 

– Mechanical life: 20 million cycles 

– Contacts: 1NO, 1NC and common SPDT switch 


– UL designation: A600 P300 


8-24 


Foot switches 

electric 

8 

Foot switches 

KG2 00 S11 

KG2 20 L11 

KG1 10 L11 

M20 ENTRY 

For types with PG13.5 entry, 

add the letter P at the end of 

the catalog number. 

E.g. KG1 00 S11P 

KR2 00 L11 

KR2 20 S11 

KR2 10 L11 

KR2 11 S22 

Model Contacts Catalog number 

Plastic 

Metal 


$ each $ each 

ONE PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. 

With free actuation. 

Open 1NO+1NC KG1 00 S11 65.00 KR1 00 S11 120.00 

Snap action ❶ 

Open 1NO+1NC KG1 00 L11 62.00 KR1 00 L11 117.00 

Slow break ❶ 

With 1NO+1NC KG2 00 S11 78.00 KR2 00 S11 144.00 

cover Snap action ❶ 

With 1NO+1NC KG2 00 L11 75.00 KR2 00 L11 141.00 

cover Slow break ❶ 

With safety lever. 











With pedal actuator lock. 









With two-stage safety lever. 


cover 2-stage 

snap action ❶ 

❶ Direct (positive-guided) opening ; safety function per IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 


The KG and KR series foot switches are used to control 

machinery and other equipment, leaving the operator’s 

hands free to do other functions. The sturdiness of the metal 

and plastic body and the wide range of the available versions 

provide the proper solution for each control need. 

Main features are: 

– Thermoplastic or metal version. 

The plastic or metal body gives adequate robustness to 

the foot switch, for installation in all ambient and 

application conditions. 

– Versions complete with or without pedal protection cover. 

The cover assures protection against accidental foot 

switch operation, due to sudden tool or heavy material 

dropping or other shock or vibration. The type without 

cover, open version, is instead immediately accessible 

and is preferred when the most important pedal operation 

is to stop a machine. 

– Versions with safety lever. 

The safety mechanism prevents unintentional foot switch 

activation and excludes the pedal to be pressed if the 

operator’s foot is not completely in place. 

– Stable pedal base. 

The foot switch is equipped with rubber feet and metalreinforced 

base for a firm and non-sliding position and a 

more reliable and safe activation. 





• A600 Q600 for KG series 

• A300 Q300 for KR series 

– Tightening torque for contacts: 0.74lbft / 1Nm 


• 690VAC for KG series 

• 440VAC for KR series 


• 6kV for KG series 

• 4kV for KR series 

– Class II insulation (KG series only) 


electric 


Foot switches and accessories 

8-25 

Foot switches 

KGD 003 - KGD 004 

M20 ENTRY 

For types with PG13.5 entry, 

add the letter P at the end of 

the catalog number. 

E.g. KG1 00 S11P 

Model Contacts Catalog number 

(for each Plastic Metal 

pedal) body Price body Price 

$ each $ each 

TWO PEDAL FOOT SWITCHES. 

With safety lever on both pedals. 

Both 1NO+1NC KGD 001 202.00 KRD 001 373.00 

with Snap action ❶ 

cover 

Both 2NO+2NC KGD 002 240.00 KRD 002 441.00 


cover 

Left pedal with free actuation and right pedal with safety lever. 

Left 1NO+1NC KGD 003 187.00 KRD 003 345.00 

open Snap action ❶ 

Right 

with 

cover 

Left 1NO+1NC KGD 004 205.00 KRD 004 380.00 

open Snap action ❶ 

Right 2NO+2NC 


cover 

❶ Direct (positive-guided) opening ; safety function per IEC/EN 60947-5-1. 


The KG and KR series foot switches are used to control 

machinery and other equipment, leaving the operator’s 

hands free to do other functions. The sturdiness of the metal 

and plastic body and the wide range of the available versions 

provide the proper solution for each control need. 


– Thermoplastic or metal version. 

The plastic or metal body gives adequate robustness to 

the foot switch, for installation in all ambient and 

application conditions. 

– Versions complete with or without pedal protection cover. 

The cover assures protection against accidental foot 

switch operation, due to sudden tool or heavy material 

dropping or other shock or vibration. The type without 

cover, open version, is instead immediately accessible 

and is preferred when the most important pedal operation 

is to stop a machine. 

– Versions with safety lever. 

The safety mechanism prevents unintentional foot switch 

activation and excludes the pedal to be pressed if the 

operator’s foot is not completely in place. 

– Stable pedal base. 

The foot switch is equipped with rubber feet and metalreinforced 

base for a firm and non-sliding position and a 

more reliable and safe activation. 





• A600 Q600 for KG series 

• A300 Q300 for KR series 

– Tightening torque for contacts: 0.74lbft / 1Nm 


• 690VAC for KG series 

• 440VAC for KR series 


• 6kV for KG series 

• 4kV for KR series 

– Class II insulation (KG series only) 


PAGE 9-2 

GX SERIES 

• 16A to 40A capacity 

• Square-shaped contact body 

• IP20 degree of protection of terminals 

• IP65 degree of protection on front, standard 

supplied. 

PAGE 9-10 

GN SERIES 

• 12A to 125A capacity 

• Round-shaped contact body 

• IP00 degree of protection of terminals 

• IP40 degree of protection on front, standard 

supplied. 



9 

ROTARY CAM SWITCHES 

Suitable for use as isolation switch 

for motor or non-motor loads 

General purpose ratings from 10 to 

100 Amp 

On/off, Double-Throw, Reversing 

and custom power switching 

applications 

Ammeter, voltmeter and custom 

control switching 

Finger protection, enclosures and 

other accessories available 

IP65 Type 4/4X protection available 


SEC. PAGE 

Front mounting versions 

GX GN 

On/Off switches. U version, front mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 2 8 

Double-throw switches with or without O (OFF). U version, front mounting . 9- 3 9 

Motor switches. U version, front mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4 10 

Voltmeter switches. Ammeter switches. U version, front mounting . . . . . . . . 9- 4 11 

On/Off switches. U11 version, front mounting with handle operation for 

22mm center fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 5 12 

On/Off switches. U12 version, front mounting with key operation for 

22mm center fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 5 12 

On/Off switches. U25-U65 version, front mounting with padlock 

system, red/yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 5 12 

Mounting plate versions 

On/Off switches. O88-O98-O99 version, door-coupling and padlock system, 

red/yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 6 13 

On/Off switches. O68-O78-O79 version, door-coupling system . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 6 13 

Versions in enclosure 

On/Off switches. Double-throw switches. P version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 7 14 

Motor switches. P version with rotating handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 7 15 

On/Off switches. P25 version with padlockable handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 7 15 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 16 17 

PAGE 



9-2 

Rotary cam switches 

GX series 

electric 

9 

U version 

front mounting. 

ON/OFF switches 

General Rated Front Catalog number Price 

purpose current plate 

AC21A size 

[A] [A] [mm] $ each 

ON/OFF SWITCHES. 

One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 90 U 30.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 90 U 34.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 90 U 45.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 90 U 51.00 

Two-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 91. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 91 U 35.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 91 U 39.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 91 U 51.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 91 U 58.00 

Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 10 U 41.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 10 U 46.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 10 U 61.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 10 U 69.00 

Four-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 92. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 92 U 47.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 92 U 52.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 92 U 71.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 92 U 78.00 

Front plate sizes 

48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

0 

0 

0 

0 


- 16 to 40A capacity 

- Extended mechanical and electrical life 

- Switching angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90° 

- Silver-alloy dual-breaking contacts. Direct 

(positive-guided) opening operation ; safety 

function per IEC/EN 60947-5-1 

- IP65 front degree of protection; IP20 protection of 

contacts 

- Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in 

the catalog number table; any other on request. 

Selection guide 

See pages TC-34 and 35. 

Optional 

Enlarged front plate for GX16-GX20 (65x65mm instead 

of standard 48x48): 

Add “H” after the switch rating in the order code 

E.g. GX16H 10 U. 



Add “H” after the switch rating in the catalog number 

E.g. GX32H 10 U. 


In addition to standard types, particular versions are 

available with special operating circuit schemes. 

Contact Sales & Technical Support or complete the form; 

refer to the page just after TC-48. 

UL horsepower ratings 

Max AC23A 

Type 1 phase 3 phase power 

at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GX16 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 5 5 6.5 

GX20 3 /4 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 5 7.5 

GX32 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 15 15 15 

GX40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 

Example of U version switch mounting 



Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 60947-1, 

IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 61058-1. 

Accessories 

page 9-16 

Dimensions 

page D-27 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

electric 


GX series 

9-3 

U version 


Double-throw 

switches with 0 

position. 

Double-throw 

switches without 0 

position 



AC21A size 


DOUBLE-THROW SWITCHES WITH 0. 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 51 U 40.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 51 U 44.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 51 U 59.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 51 U 70.00 

Two-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 52. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 52 U 48.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 52 U 51.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 52 U 68.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 52 U 81.00 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 53 U 60.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 53 U 65.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 53 U 87.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 53 U 104.00 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 75 U 74.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 75 U 79.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 75 U 111.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 75 U 116.00 

DOUBLE-THROW SWITCHES WITHOUT 0. 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 54 U 39.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 GX20 54 U 42.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 54 U 57.00 

Two-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 55. 

12 16 ■ 48 2 GX16 55 U 44.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 GX20 55 U 49.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 55 U 66.00 


12 16 ■ 48 2 GX16 56 U 59.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 GX20 56 U 65.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 56 U 87.00 


12 16 ■ 48 2 GX16 69 U 71.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 GX20 69 U 77.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 69 U 116.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

1 

0 2 

0 2 

1 

0 2 

1 


1 

2 

0 2 









contacts 





Optional 




E.g. GX16H 52 U. 




E.g. GX32H 52 U. 







Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GX16 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 5 5 6.5 

GX20 3 /4 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 5 7.5 

GX32 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 15 15 15 

GX40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 


9 




Accessories 

page 9-16 

Dimensions 

page D-27 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-4 


GX series 

electric 

9 

U version 


Motor switches 

U version 


Voltmeter switches. 

Ammeter switches 



AC21A size 


MOTOR SWITCHES❶. 

Reversing switches. Three-pole – 3 wafers – scheme 11. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 11 U 49.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 11 U 58.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 11 U 79.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 11 U 88.00 

Pole-changing switches. 4 wafers – scheme 13. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 13 U 70.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 13 U 78.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 13 U 110.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 13 U 116.00 

Wye-delta switches. 2 wafers – scheme 12. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 12 U 70.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 12 U 78.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 12 U 110.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 12 U 116.00 

3-pole motor reversing switches with spring return to 0. 

3 wafers – scheme 26. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 26 U 52.00 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 26 U 59.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 26 U 80.00 

❶ See side table for UL horsepower ratings. 



AC21A size 


VOLTMETER SWITCHES. 

Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N – 2 wafers – scheme 68. 

12 16 ■ 48 0 

L1N GX16 68 U 51.00 

L2N 

L3N 

0 2 

1 

0 2 

1 

0 2 

1 

0 2 

1 


- 16 to 40A capacity for motor switches 

- 16A capacity for voltmeter and ammeter switches 






- IP65 front degree of protection; IP20 contact degree 

of protection 





Optional 


of standard 48x48): Add “H” after the switch rating in 

the catalog number E.g. GX16H 11 U. 


of standard 65x65): Add “H” after the switch rating in 

the catalog number E.g. GX32H 11 U. 







Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GX16 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 5 5 6.5 

GX20 3 /4 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 5 7.5 

GX32 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 15 15 15 

GX40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 


Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 – 2 wafers – scheme 67. 

12 16 ■ 48 0 

L1-L2 GX16 67 U 51.00 

L2-L3 

L3-L1 

For 3 phase to phase voltage and 3 phase voltage readings 


12 16 ■ 48 L1-L2 

0 

L1-N GX16 66 U 78.00 

L2-L3 

L3-L1 

L2-N 

L3-N 

For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltage readings 


12 16 ■ 48 0 

L1N L1-L2 GX16 60 U 78.00 

L2-L3 

L3-L1 





AMMETER SWITCHES. 

Direct L1-L2-L3 current readings – 5 wafers – scheme 97. 

12 16 ■ 48 0 GX16 97 U 80.00 

L3 

L1 

L2 

For L1-L2-L3 readings via 3 CTs – 3 wafers – scheme 98. 

12 16 ■ 48 0 GX16 98 U 62.00 

L3 

L1 

L2 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

Accessories 

page 9-16 

Dimensions 

page D-27 






pages TC-34 and 35

electric 


GX series 

9-5 

U11 version 

front mounting with 

handle operation, 

for central 22mm 

fixing. 




AC21A size 


ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. 

12 16 none 0 GX16 90 U11 60.00 


12 16 none 0 GX16 91 U11 70.00 

1 

1 









contacts 

- Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is for 

reference only while for U25 and U65 types standard 

supplied as illustrated in the catalog number table; 

any other on request. 

U12 version 

front mounting 

with key operation, 

for central 22mm 

fixing. 



12 16 none 0 GX16 10 U11 80.00 


12 16 none 0 GX16 92 U11 90.00 



AC21A size 


ON/OFF SWITCHES. One-pole – 1 wafer – scheme 90. 

12 16 none 0 GX16 90 U12 64.00 


12 16 none 0 GX16 91 U12 74.00 


12 16 none 0 GX16 10 U12 84.00 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 



Optional 




E.g. GX16H 10 U25. 




E.g. GX32H 10 U25. 







Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GX16 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 5 5 6.5 

GX20 3 /4 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 5 7.5 

GX32 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 15 15 15 

GX40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 

Example of U25-U65 switch mounting 

9 


12 16 none 0 GX16 92 U12 94.00 

1 

U25-U65 versions 

front mounting with 

red/yellow padlock 

system. 




AC21A size 


ON/OFF SWITCHES. Three-pole – 2 wafers – scheme 10. 

12 16 ■ 48 GX16 10 U25 43.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 10 U25 51.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 10 U25 63.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 10 U65 74.00 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 92 U25 49.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 92 U25 56.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 92 U25 73.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 92 U65 80.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

0 

0 





Accessories 

page 9-16 

Dimensions 

page D-27 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-6 


GX series 

electric 

O88 - O98 versions 

door coupling with 

red/yellow padlock 

system. 




AC21A size 




12 16 ■ 48 GX16 10 O88 64.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 10 O88 72.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 10 O88 82.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 10 O88 104.00 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 92 O88 68.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 92 O88 75.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 92 O88 90.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 92 O98 116.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

0 

0 








- IP65 front degree of protection; IP20 contact degree 

of protection 

- Suitable for screw fixing or mounting on 35mm DIN 

rail (IEC/EN 60715) 

- Self alignment feature 





Optional 




E.g. GX16H 10 O88. 

9 

O68 - O78 versions 

door coupling. 




AC21A size 




12 16 ■ 48 GX16 10 O68 62.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 10 O68 67.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 10 O68 80.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 10 O78 99.00 


12 16 ■ 48 GX16 92 O68 66.00 

1 

15 20 ■ 48 GX20 92 O68 72.00 

32 32 ■ 65 GX32 92 O68 85.00 

40 40 ■ 65 GX40 92 O78 114.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

0 

0 




E.g. GX32H 10 O88. 







Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GX16 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 5 5 6.5 

GX20 3 /4 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 5 7.5 

GX32 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 15 15 15 

GX40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 

Example of O version switch mounting 





Accessories 

page 9-16 

Dimensions 

page D-27 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

electric 


GX series 

9-7 

P version in 

enclosure with 

rotating handle. 

On/Off switches. 

Double-throw 

switches 

1 

General Rated Type Catalog number Price 

purpose current size 

AC21A 



Three poles - scheme 10. 

12 16 90x90 GX16 10 P 117.00 

0 

15 20 90x90 

1 

GX20 10 P 124.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 10 P 136.00 

40 40 110x110 GX40 10 P 144.00 

Four poles - scheme 92. 

12 16 90x90 GX16 92 P 128.00 

0 

15 20 90x90 

1 

GX20 92 P 132.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 92 P 150.00 

40 40 110x110 GX40 92 P 161.00 

DOUBLE-THROW SWICTHES. 


12 16 90x90 GX16 53 P 138.00 

15 20 90x90 

0 2 

GX20 53 P 142.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 53 P 167.00 

40 40 110x110 GX40 53 P 178.00 


12 16 90x90 GX16 75 P 146.00 

15 20 90x90 

1 

0 2 

GX20 75 P 149.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 75 P 179.00 

40 40 110x110 GX40 75 P 193.00 


– 16 to 40A capacity 

– Extended mechanical and electrical life 

– Switching angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90° 




– IP65 degree of protection 

– Top and bottom entry: 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for 

90x90mm types and 4 PG21 for 110x110mm; metric 

entry available on request. NPT adapters are given on 

page 9-16 

– Legend marking is standard supplied as illustrated in 










Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GX16 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 5 5 6.5 

GX20 3 /4 1 1 /2 1 1 /2 3 5 5 7.5 

GX32 1 1 /2 3 3 7 1 /2 15 15 15 

GX40 2 5 5 10 15 15 18.5 

P version in 






AC21A 



Three-pole reversing switches - scheme 11. 

12 16 90x90 GX16 11 P 136.00 

15 20 90x90 

1 

0 2 

GX20 11 P 145.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 11 P 166.00 

40 40 110x110 GX40 11 P 175.00 





9 


P version in 


padlockable 


On/Off switches 



AC21A 




12 16 90x90 0 

1 

GX16 10 P25 124.00 

15 20 90x90 GX20 10 P25 130.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 10 P25 145.00 


12 16 90x90 0 

1 

GX16 92 P25 132.00 

15 20 90x90 GX20 92 P25 144.00 

32 32 110x110 GX32 92 P25 162.00 

Enclosure type sizes 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

110x110mm = 4.3x4.3in 

Accessories 

page 9-16 

Dimensions 

page D-27 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-8 


GN series 

electric 

9 

U version 





AC21A size 



One pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90. 

10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 90 U 30.00 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 90 U 34.00 

1 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 90 U 39.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 90 U 45.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 90 U 51.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 90 U 68.00 

2 poles - 1 wafer - scheme 91. 

10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 91 U 35.00 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 91 U 39.00 

1 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 91 U 45.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 91 U 51.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 91 U 58.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 91 U 74.00 

3 poles - 2 wafers - scheme 10. 

10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 10 U 41.00 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 10 U 46.00 

20 25 ■ 48 0 7 GN25 10 U 53.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 10 U 61.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 10 U 69.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 10 U 97.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 10 U 293.00 


10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 92 U 47.00 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 92 U 52.00 

20 25 ■ 48 0 7 GN25 92 U 61.00 

22 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 92 U 71.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 92 U 78.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 92 U 109.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 92 U 313.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

0 

0 

1 

1 








– Open type 

– IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see 

Optional-front plate), IP00 for contacts 

– Legend marking is per standard supplied, as 

illustrated in the catalog number table; any other on 

request. 



Optional 

IP65 front plate 

Add “51” at the end of the catalog number. 

E.g. 7 GN12 92 U 51. 

Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65 instead of 48x48) 

Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the catalog 

number. 

E.g. 7 GN12H 10 U. 



number. 

E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U. 



available with special operating circuit diagrams. 




Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 

GN125 7 1 /2 15 15 25 50 40 45 


UL listed for USA, File E 155982. 

CSA certified for Canada and USA, File LR 207767. 

Compliant with standards: IEC/EN 60947, 


Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

electric 


GN series 

9-9 

U version, front 

mounting. 

Double-throw 

switch with or 

without 0 (OFF) 



15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 53 U 65.00 Add the letter “H” after the switch size of the catalog 

number. 

20 25 ■ 48 1 

0 2 

7 GN25 53 U 76.00 E.g. 7 GN32H 52 U. 



AC21A size 


[A] [A] [mm] $ each – Switching angles: 30°, 45°, 60° and 90° 


DOUBLE-THROW SWITCH WITH 0 (OFF). 


1 pole - 1 wafer - scheme 51. 


10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 51 U 38.00 – Open type 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 51 U 44.00 – IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see 

1 

0 

20 25 ■ 48 2 


7 GN25 51 U 50.00 – Legend marking is per standard supplied, as 

20 25 ■ 48 1 

0 2 

7 GN25 52 U 59.00 Add “51” at the end of the catalog number. 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 51 U 59.00 


35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 51 U 70.00 

request. 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 51 U 98.00 Selection guide 

2 poles - 2 wafers - circuit diagram 52. 


10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 52 U 46.00 

Optional 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 52 U 51.00 IP65 front plate 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 52 U 68.00 E.g. 7 GN12 52 U 51. 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 52 U 81.00 Enlarged plate for GN12-20-25 (65x65 instead of 48x48) 


100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 52 U 323.00 number. 

E.g. 7 GN12H 52 U. 



32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 53 U 87.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 53 U 104.00 Special versions 


55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 53 U 154.00 available with special operating circuit schemes. 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 53 U 346.00 Contact Sales & Technical Support or complete the form; 



10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 75 U 72.00 


Max AC23A 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 75 U 79.00 


20 25 ■ 48 1 

0 2 

7 GN25 75 U 95.00 

at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 75 U 111.00 

GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 75 U 116.00 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 75 U 190.00 

GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 75 U 391.00 

GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

DOUBLE-THROW switch without 0 (OFF). 

1 pole - 1 wafers - scheme 54. 

GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

10 12 ■ 48 2 7 GN12 54 U 37.00 

GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 

15 20 ■ 48 1 7 GN20 54 U 42.00 

GN125 7 1 /2 15 15 25 50 40 45 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 54 U 57.00 


10 12 ■ 48 2 7 GN12 55 U 42.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 7 GN20 55 U 49.00 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 55 U 59.00 


10 12 ■ 48 2 7 GN12 56 U 57.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 7 GN20 56 U 65.00 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 56 U 76.00 


10 12 ■ 48 2 7 GN12 69 U 69.00 

15 20 ■ 48 1 7 GN20 69 U 77.00 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 69 U 91.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 






9 

Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-10 


GN series 

electric 

9 

U version 





20 25 ■ 48 0 7 GN25 12 U 95.00 



AC21A size 






3-pole reversing switches - 3 wafers - scheme 11. 


10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 11 U 49.00 – Open type 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 11 U 58.00 – IP40 front degree of protection (for IP65 see 


20 25 ■ 48 1 

0 2 

7 GN25 11 U 69.00 – Legend marking is per standard supplied, as 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 11 U 79.00 illustrated in the catalog number table; any other on 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 11 U 88.00 request. 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 11 U 132.00 Selection guide 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 11 U 334.00 See pages TC-34 and 35. 

Pole changing switches - 4 wafers - scheme 13. 

Optional 

10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 13 U 70.00 IP65 front plate 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 13 U 78.00 Add “51” at the end of the catalog number. 

20 25 ■ 48 0 2 

7 GN25 13 U 95.00 E.g. 7 GN12 11 U 51. 



55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 13 U 187.00 number. 

E.g. 7 GN12H 11 U. 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 13 U 392.00 

Wye-delta switches - 4 wafers - scheme 12. 



number. 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 12 U 78.00 E.g. 7 GN32H 11 U. 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 12 U 110.00 Special versions 


35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 12 U 116.00 available with special operating schemes. 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 12 U 187.00 Contact Sales & Technical Support or complete the form; 

100 125 2■ 90 7 GN125 12 U 392.00 refer to the page just after TC-48. 

1 

0 2 

3-pole reversing switches with spring return to 0 

3 wafers - scheme 26. 

10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 26 U 52.00 

1 

Y ∆ 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 26 U 59.00 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 26 U 72.00 

Pole changing switches with reversing (Dahlander) 


10 12 ■ 48 0 7 GN12 20 U 88.00 

15 20 ■ 48 2 2 7 GN20 20 U 102.00 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 20 U 128.00 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 


1 

1 


Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 

GN125 7 1 /2 15 15 25 50 40 45 






Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

pages D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

electric 


GN series 

9-11 

U version, front 

mounting. 

Voltmeter switches. 

Ammeter switches 



AC21A size 


VOLTMETER SWITCHES. 

Phase-Neutral L1-N/L2-N/L3-N 


10 12 ■ 48 0 

L1N 7 GN12 68 U 46.00 

15 20 ■ 48 

L3N 

7 GN20 68 U 51.00 

Phase-Phase L1-L2/L2-L3/L3-L1 - 


10 12 ■ 48 0 

L1-L2 7 GN12 67 U 46.00 

15 20 ■ 48 

L3-L1 

7 GN20 67 U 51.00 

For 3 phase to phase voltages and 3 phase voltages 


10 12 ■ 48 L1-L2 

0 

L1-N 7 GN12 66 U 71.00 

L2-L3 

15 20 ■ 48 L3-L1 

L3-N 7 GN20 66 U 78.00 

For 1 phase voltage and 3 phase to phase voltages 


10 12 ■ 48 0 

L1N L1-L2 7 GN12 60 U 71.00 

15 20 ■ 48 L3-L1 7 GN20 60 U 78.00 

AMMETER SWITCHES. 

Direct L1-L2-L3 reading - 5 wafers - scheme 97. 

10 12 ■ 48 0 7 GN12 97 U 73.00 

15 20 ■ 48 L3 

L1 7 GN20 97 U 80.00 

L1-L2-L3 reading via 3 current transformers - 


10 12 ■ 48 0 7 GN12 98 U 55.00 

15 20 ■ 48 L3 

L1 7 GN20 98 U 62.00 

L2 

L2N 

L2-L3 

L2-N 

L2-L3 


– 12 and 20A capacity 






– Open type 





request. 



Optional 



E.g. 7 GN12 67 U 51. 



number. 

E.g. 7 GN20H 68 U. 



available with special operating schemes. 








9 

L2 


48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-8 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-12 

U11 version front 

mounting with 

handle operation 

for 22mm central 

fixing. 



GN series 



AC21A size 


ON/OFF SWITCHES. One pole - 1 wafer - scheme 90. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 90 U11 58.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 90 U11 65.00 

Two poles - 1 wafer - scheme 91. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 91 U11 68.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 91 U11 75.00 

electric 









Optional-front plate), IP00 for contacts and IP20 for 

incoming contacts of U25 and U65 only 

– Legend marking for U11 and U12 versions is for 

reference only while for U25 and U65 types standard 

supplied as illustrated in the catalog number table; 

any other on request. 

9 

Three poles - 2 wafers - scheme 10. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 10 U11 78.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 10 U11 85.00 

Four poles - 2 wafers - scheme 92. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 92 U11 88.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 92 U11 95.00 

U12 version front 

mounting with key 

operation for 

central fixing Ø22. 


0 

U25-U65 version 

front mounting 

with padlock 

system, red/yellow. 



65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 



AC21A size 


ON/OFF SWITCHES. One pole - 1 wafer - circuit diagram 90. 

10 12 none 

1 

7 GN12 90 U12 62.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 90 U12 69.00 

Two poles - 1 wafer - circuit diagram 91. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 91 U12 72.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 91 U12 79.00 

Three poles - 2 wafers - circuit diagram 10. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 10 U12 82.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 10 U12 89.00 

Four poles - 2 wafers - circuit diagram 92. 

10 12 none 0 

1 

7 GN12 92 U12 92.00 

15 20 none 7 GN20 92 U12 99.00 



AC1 size 


ON/OFF SWITCHES. Three poles - 2 wafers - scheme 10. 

10 12 ■ 65 7 GN12 10 U25 41.00 

15 20 ■ 65 7 GN20 10 U25 51.00 

20 25 ■ 65 0 7 GN25 10 U25 56.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 10 U25 63.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 10 U65 74.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 10 U65 103.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 10 U65 300.00 

Four poles - 2 wafers - scheme 92. 

10 12 ■ 65 7 GN12 92 U25 47.00 

15 20 ■ 65 7 GN20 92 U25 55.00 

20 25 ■ 65 0 7 GN25 92 U25 65.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 92 U25 73.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 92 U65 80.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 92 U65 116.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 92 U65 320.00 

1 

1 



Optional 



E.g. 7 GN12 92 U25 51. 



number. 

E.g. 7 GN32H 10 U25. 







Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 

GN125 7 1 /2 15 15 25 50 40 45 






Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

electric 

O88-O98-O99 

version, base 

mounting, 

door-coupling and 

padlock system, 

red/yellow. 


(without extension 

shaft) 


GN series 



AC21A size 




10 12 ■ 65 7 GN12 10 O88 64.00 

15 20 ■ 65 7 GN20 10 O88 72.00 

20 25 ■ 65 0 7 GN25 10 O88 79.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 10 O88 82.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 10 O98 104.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 10 O98 141.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 10 O99 346.00 


10 12 ■ 65 7 GN12 92 O88 68.00 

15 20 ■ 65 7 GN20 92 O88 75.00 

20 25 ■ 65 0 7 GN25 92 O88 82.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 92 O88 90.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 92 O98 116.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 92 O98 150.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 92 O99 387.00 


45x45mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

1 

1 

9-13 








– Open type 


Optional-front plate), IP20 for incoming contacts only 

– Self alignment feature 



request. 



Optional 



E.g. 7 GN12 92 068 51. 

Fixing plate for DIN 35mm rail (IEC/EN 60715) 


E.g. 7 GN25 10 O68 18. 



number. 

E.g. 7 GN12H 10 O68. 

O68-O78-O79 

version, base 

mounting, 

door-coupling 

system. 


(without extension 

shaft) 

0 



AC21A size 




10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 10 O68 62.00 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 10 O68 67.00 

20 25 ■ 48 7 GN25 10 O68 75.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 10 O68 80.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 10 O78 99.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 10 O78 135.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 10 O79 351.00 


10 12 ■ 48 7 GN12 92 O68 66.00 

15 20 ■ 48 7 GN20 92 O68 72.00 

20 25 ■ 48 0 7 GN25 92 O68 79.00 

32 32 ■ 65 7 GN32 92 O68 85.00 

35 40 ■ 65 7 GN40 92 O78 114.00 

55 63 ■ 65 7 GN63 92 O78 148.00 

100 125 ■ 90 7 GN125 92 O79 382.00 


45x45mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

1 

1 



number. 

E.g. 7 GN32H 10 O68. 







Max AC23A 


at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 

GN125 7 1 /2 15 15 25 50 40 45 






9 

Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-14 


GN series 

electric 

9 

P version, enclosed 

On/Off switches. 

Double-throw 

switches 


0 2 


20 25 90x90 

1 

7 GN25 75 P 165.00 


AC21A 









10 12 65x65 7 GN12 10 P 115.00 – Enclosed type 

15 20 75x75 7 GN20 10 P 124.00 – IP65 degree of protection (IP54 for GN12 only) 

0 

– Top and bottom entry: 

1 

20 25 75x75 7 GN25 10 P 130.00 • 4 PG11 threaded knockouts for 65x65mm types 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 10 P 136.00 • 4 PG13.5 threaded knockouts for 75x75mm types 

35 40 90x90 7 GN40 10 P 144.00 • 4 PG16 threaded knockouts for 90x90mm types 

• 4 PG21 threaded knockouts for 110x110mm types 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 10 P 212.00 – NPT adapters are given on page 9-17; metric entry 


available on request 

10 12 65x65 7 GN12 92 P 126.00 – Legend marking is per standard supplied, as 


15 20 75x75 7 GN20 92 P 132.00 

0 

request. 

1 

20 25 75x75 7 GN25 92 P 142.00 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 92 P 150.00 Selection guide 


35 40 90x90 7 GN40 92 P 161.00 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 92 P 232.00 Special versions 

DOUBLE-THROW SWITCHES. 


One pole - scheme 51. 



10 12 65x65 7 GN12 51 P 120.00 refer to the page just after TC-48. 

15 20 75x75 7 GN20 51 P 126.00 

1 

0 

20 25 75x75 2 


Max AC23A 

7 GN25 51 P 132.00 


32 32 90x90 7 GN32 51 P 140.00 

at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V 

35 40 90x90 7 GN40 51 P 146.00 

[kW] 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 51 P 221.00 GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

Two poles - scheme 52. 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

10 12 65x65 7 GN12 52 P 128.00 GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

15 20 75x75 7 GN20 52 P 133.00 GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

20 25 75x75 

1 

0 2 

7 GN25 52 P 142.00 GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 52 P 153.00 GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 

35 40 90x90 7 GN40 52 P 162.00 Certifications and compliance 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 52 P 241.00 UL listed for USA, File E 155982. 




10 12 65x65 7 GN12 53 P 136.00 IEC/EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC/EN 61058-1. 

15 20 75x75 7 GN20 53 P 142.00 

20 25 75x75 

1 

0 2 

7 GN25 53 P 152.00 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 53 P 167.00 

35 40 110x110 7 GN40 53 P 178.00 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 53 P 253.00 


10 12 65x65 7 GN12 75 P 144.00 

15 20 75x75 7 GN20 75 P 149.00 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 75 P 179.00 

35 40 110x110 7 GN40 75 P 193.00 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 75 P 275.00 

Enclosure type sizes 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

75x75mm = 3x3in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

110x110mm = 4.3x4.3in 

Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

electric 

P with rotating 

handle version in 

enclosure. 



GN series 



AC21A size 



Three-pole reversing switches - circuit scheme 11. 

10 12 65x65 7 GN12 11 P 134.00 

15 20 75x75 7 GN20 11 P 145.00 

20 25 75x75 

0 2 

7 GN25 11 P 156.00 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 11 P 166.00 

35 40 110x110 7 GN40 11 P 176.00 

55 63 110x110 7 GN63 11 P 220.00 


9-15 








– Enclosed type 

– IP65 degree of protection 

– Top and bottom entry: 


• 4 PG13.5 threaded knockouts for 75x75mm types 



– NPT adapters are given on page 9-17; metric entry 

available on request 



request. 

P25 version in 


padlock system. 




AC21A 


ON/OFF SWITHCES. 


15 20 90x90 0 

1 

7 GN20 10 P25 130.00 

20 25 90x90 7 GN25 10 P25 139.00 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 10 P25 145.00 


15 20 90x90 0 

1 

7 GN20 92 P25 136.00 

20 25 90x90 7 GN25 92 P25 148.00 

32 32 90x90 7 GN32 92 P25 156.00 

Enclosure type size: 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

75x75mm = 3x3in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

110x110mm = 4.3x4.3in 

1 

UL horsepower ratings Max AC23A 









at 440V 

120V 240V 120V 240V 480V 600V [kW] 

GN12 3 /4 1 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 6 

GN20 3 /4 2 1 1 /2 3 –– –– 7.5 

GN25 1 1 /2 3 3 5 10 10 11 

GN32 2 5 5 10 15 15 15 

GN40 2 5 5 10 20 20 18.5 

GN63 5 10 7 1 /2 15 25 25 30 






9 

Accessories 

page 9-17 

Dimensions 

page D-28 


page W-7 




pages TC-34 and 35

9-16 


Accessories for GX series 

electric 

9 

7 A014 - 7 AR114 - 7 AR214 

7 AR124 - 7 AR224 

7 APRBP 

GX M1 - GX M2 


number 

$ each 

Black operating handle ❶. 

For 48x48mm front plate 7 AO14 2.10 

For GX32-GX40 65x65mm 7 A114 4.20 

front plate 

For GX16-GX20 65x65mm 7 AR114 4.20 

front plate 

For GX32-GX40 90x90mm 7 AR214 5.50 

front plate 

Black operating lever ❶. 

For GX32-GX40 65x65mm 7 A124 5.50 

front plate 

For GX16-GX20 65x65mm 7 AR124 5.50 

front plate 

For GX32-GX40 90x90mm 7 AR224 8.00 

front plate 

Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft, 70mm (2.8in) long 

maximum ❶. 

For GX16 to GX40 7 APRBP 5.50 

IP40 face plates ❶. 

48x48mm blank face plate GX M1 3.00 


IP40 face plates with legend plates. 


with legend plate 


with legend plate 

Padlockable handles ❶. 

48x48mm yellow/red GX A01 10.30 

padlockable handle for 

GX16-GX20 

65x65mm yellow/red GX A01H 12.20 


GX16-GX20 

65x65mm yellow/red GX A11 12.20 


GX32-GX40 

PG adapter for enclosure entries ❶. 





For operating handle or lever, plate dimension: 

45x45mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

❶ Also suitable for GN series. 

GX M5 - GX M6 

GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11 



electric 


Accessories for GN series 

9-17 

7 A019... 

7 A119... 

7 AO14 

7 AR114 

7 AR214 

7 A180 - 7 A181 

7 APRBP 

7 A169... 

7 A441 - 7 A442 - 7 A443 

GX M1 - GX M2 

7 AR124 

7 AR224 

GX A01 - GX A01H - GX A11 


number 

$ each 

Finger protection covers for supply terminals. 

For GN12-GN20 7 A0191 2.80 

For GN25 7 A0192 2.80 

For GN32 U version 7 A119U 2.80 

For GN32 O version 7 A119O 2.80 

For GN40 7 A1691 3.50 

For GN63 7 A1692 3.50 

For GN125 7 A1693 3.50 

Black operating handle ❶. 

For 48x48mm front plate 7 AO14 2.10 

For GN32 - GN40 - GN63 65x65mm 7 A114 4.20 

front plate 

For GN12 - GN20 - GN25 65x65mm 7 AR114 4.20 

front plate 

For GN32 - GN40 - GN63 - GN125 7 AR214 5.50 

90x90mm front plate 

Black operating lever ❶. 

For GN32 - GN40 - GN63 65x65mm 7 A124 5.50 

front plate 

For GN12 - GN20 - GN25 65x65mm 7 AR124 5.50 

front plate 

For GN32 - GN40 - GN63 - GN125 7 AR224 8.00 

90x90mm front plate 

35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) base mounting piece 

for U version. 

For GN12 to GN25 7 A180 3.50 

For GN32 to GN63 7 A181 4.50 

Adjustable door-coupling extension shaft, 

70 mm (2.8in) long maximum ❶. 

For GN12 to GN63 7 APRBP 5.50 

Flexible rubber boot ❷. 

Ø 58mm (2.3in), 70mm (2.8in) 7 A441 9.00 

long for GN12 to GN25 with 2 wafers 

Ø 58mm (2.3in), 92mm (3.6in) 7 A442 10.00 

long for GN12 to GN25 with 4 wafers 

Ø 58mm (2.3in), 125mm (4.9in), 7 A443 11.00 

for GN12 to GN25 with 6 wafers 

IP40 face plates ❶. 



Padlockable handles ❶. 

48x48mm yellow/red padlockable GX A01 10.30 

handle for GN12-GN20-GN25 

65x65mm yellow/red padlockable GX A01H 12.20 


65x65mm yellow/red padlockable GX A11 12.20 


PG adapters for enclosure entries ❶. 


Metal, for PG13.5 to 1 /2” NPT G613 2.50 




Plastic, for PG13.5 to 1 /2” NPT G614 1.50 



For operating handle or lever, plate dimension: 

45x45mm = 1.9x1.9in 

65x65mm = 2.6x2.6in 

90x90mm = 3.5x3.5in 

❶ Also suitable for GX series. 

❷ Raises contact degree of protection from IP00 to IP20. 

9 



MODULAR TIMERS 

• Internal panel mounting 

• Time ranges: 0.1 second - 100 days 

• LED indication 

• Mounting on 35mm DIN rail 

• Screw terminals. 

PAGE 10-2 

PAGE 10-4 

DIN RAIL MOUNT TIMERS 

• Internal panel mounting 

• Time ranges: 0.3 seconds - 768 minutes 


• Mounting on 35mm DIN rail 

• Screw terminals. 

PAGE 10-8 

PLUG-IN AND FLUSH-MOUNT TIMERS, 48x48mm 

• Flush and internal panel mounting 

• Time ranges: 0.05 second - 10 hours 


• 8 and 11-pin sockets for panel mounting. 



10 

TIMERS 

Modular type 

Plug-in (8 pin and 11 pin) or 

flush-mount 48x48mm type 

DIN rail mount type 

Rugged, reliable, high repeat 

accuracy 

Multi-voltage, single-scale, 

single-fuction versions 

Multi-voltage, multi-scale and 

multi-function versions. 

PLANET -DIN 

SEC. PAGE 

Modular timers 

On delay, multiscale, multivoltage, AC/DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 2 

Multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage, 1 double-throw contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 2 

Multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage, 1 double-throw and 1 normally 

open contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 2 

Asymmetrical recycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3 

Off delay, multiscale, AC/DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3 

For starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3 

For staircases, AC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 4 

DIN rail mount timers 

On delay, multiscale, AC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 4 

On delay, multiscale, AC/DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 4 

Off delay, multiscale, AC/DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 5 

Multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage, 1 double-throw contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 5 

Multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage, 2 independent double-throw contacts . . . 10- 6 

Asymmetrical recycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 6 

For starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 7 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 7 

Plug-in and flush-mount timers 

On delay, multiscale, multivoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8 

On delay, multiscale, single voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8 

Multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8 

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 9 



10-2 Timers 

electric 


On delay. 

Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply 

Time of Control Catalog number Price 

scale range power 

[V] 

$ each 

0.1-1s 24-48VDC TM P 59.00 

1-10s 24-240VAC 

6s-1min 

1-10min 

6min-1h 

1h-10h 

0.1-1 day 

1-10 days 

ON only 

OFF only 


– Multiscale, multivoltage. 

On delay, delay on make, with start at relay energizing 

– One relay output with 1 SPDT contact 

– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch: 

10-100% 

– Green LED indicator for power on 

– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing for delay 

and steady when relay energized 

– Modular 17.5mm (0.7in) wide; suitable for screw 

fixing or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting 

– Degree of protection: IP40 on front (only when 

mounted in housing or electric board with IP40); 

IP20 on terminals. 

TM P 




Operational diagram 

See page W-8. 

10 

Multifunction. 

Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply. 

1 relay output 

TM M1 


Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply. 

2 relay outputs 



[V] 

$ each 

0.1-1s 12-240V TM M1 79.00 

1-10s AC/DC 

6s-1min 

1-10min 

6min-1h 

1h-10h 

0.1-1 day 

1-10 days 

ON only 

OFF only 



[V] 

$ each 

0.1-1s 12-240V TM M2 89.00 

1-10s AC/DC 

6s-1min 

1-10min 

6min-1h 

1h-10h 

0.1-1 day 

1-10 days 

ON only 

OFF only 


– Multifunction, multiscale, multivoltage 

– Enabling input 

– One relay output with 1 SPDT contact for TM M1 

– Two relay outputs, one with 1 delayed SPDT contact 

and the other with 1 normally open (N/O) contact, 

programmable as instantaneous or delayed for TM M2 

– Selectable functions: (a) On delay; delay on make with 

start at relay energizing. (b) Pulse on relay energizing 

with start when energized. (c) Flasher starting with OFF 

interval. Equal timing recycle. (d) Flasher starting with 

ON interval. Equal timing recycle. (e) Off delay; relay 

energizing at external contact closing with start on 

break. (f) Pulse on relay energizing with start on 

external contact closing. (g) Pulse on relay energizing 

with start on external contact opening. (h) On-off 

delay. Delay on make, with start at external contact 

closing, and delay at break, with start at external 

contact opening. (i) Step relay at each closing of an 

external contact. (j) Pulse generator, unequal timing 

recycle; starting with OFF pulse time and 0.5s ON 

pulse. 


10-100% 



and steady when relay energised 

– Modular 17.5mm (0.7in) wide; suitable for screw fixing 

or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) mounting 








See page W-8 for TM M1 and W-9 for TM M2. 

TM M2 

Dimensions 

page D-29 






page TC-38

electric 

Asymmetrical 

recycle, independent 

timing. 

Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply 

TM PL 

Timers 




[V] 

$ each 

0.1-1s 12-240V TM PL 150.00 

1-10s AC/DC 

6s-1min 

1-10min 

6min-1h 

1h-10h 

0.1-1 day 

1-10 days 

3-30 days 

10-100 days 

10-3 


– Programmable asymmetrical recycle, multiscale, 

multivoltage. Flasher with independent timing for ON 

and OFF intervals 

– Enabling input of ON or OFF interval 


– Delay time for OFF (pause) interval, adjustable on 

front by rotary switch: 10-100% 

– Delay time for ON (work) interval, adjustable on front 

by rotary switch: 10-100% 












See page W-9. 

Off delay. 

Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply 



[V] 

$ each 

0.06-0.6s 24-240V TM D 147.00 

0.6-6s AC/DC 

6s-1min 

12s-2min 


– Multiscale, multivoltage. True off delay; delay on break 

with start at relay de-energizing 



10-100% 










TM D 


See page W-9. 

10 

Timer for 

starters. 

Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply 

TM ST 



[V] 

$ each 

0.1-1s 24-48VDC TM ST 106.00 

1-10s 24-240VAC 

6s-1min 

1-10min 

380-440VAC TM ST A440 106.00 


– Multiscale, multivoltage for starting (wye-delta, 

impedance, autotransformer, etc.) of induction 

motors, 2 separate timings 

– One relay output with 2 normally open (N/O) contacts 

with common pole 


10-100% for wye connection 

– Starting and transition time (20-300ms time scale), 

adjustable on front by rotary switch 


– Red LED indicator for relay state; flashing during 

delay and steady at delay lapsing 










See page W-10. 

Dimensions 

page D-29 






page TC-38

10-4 Timers 

electric 

Modular timers. DIN rail mount timers 

For staircases. 

AC supply 

TM LS 



[V] 

$ each 

0.5-20min 220-240VAC TM LS 75.00 


– Single scale and voltage for staircase illumination 

– One relay output with 1 powered normally open (N/O) 

contact 

– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary switch 

– Suitable for 3 or 4-wire systems 

– 1 slide switch for timed or constant operation 

– Function for 1-hour lighting and quick switch off 


– Connection with up to 50 light-up switches maximum; 

≤ 1mA each 











On delay. 

Multiscale. 

AC supply 


scale range power ❶ 

[V] 

$ each 

0.3-3s 24VAC 31 AT1P 240 68.00 

1.2-12s 100-240VAC 

9.6-96s 24VAC 31 AT1P 440 68.00 

76.8-768s 220-440VAC 

❶ For 31 AT1 single-scale types, contact Sales & Technical Support. 


– On delay, multivoltage, multiscale 

– One output with 1 SPDT contact 

– Delay time adjustable on front using potentiometer 

– Time scale setting using dip switches 

– LED indication for power on and relay state 

– 22.5mm (0.9in) wide housing suitable for mounting 

on 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 

– Screw fixing adapter CE106. 

31 AT1P 

Time-range setting 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

0.3-3s 1.2-12s 9.6-96s 76.8-768s 






10 

On delay. 

Multiscale. 

AC/DC supply 


scale range power ❷ 

[V] 

$ each 

12VAC/DC 31 AT1CP 24 68.00 

0.3-3s 24VAC/DC 

1.2-12s 

9.6-96s 48-60VAC/DC 31 AT1CP 125 68.00 

76.8-768s 110-125V 

AC/DC 



– One output with 1 SPDT contact 







31 AT1CP 

❷ For 31 AT1C single-scale types, contact Sales & Technical Support. 


ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

0.3-3s 1.2-12s 9.6-96s 76.8-768s 






Accessories 

pages 10-7 

Dimensions 

page D-29 


page W-10 




pages TC-36 and 38

electric 

Timers 


10-5 

Off delay. 

Multiscale 



[V] 

$ each 

0.3-3s 

24VAC/DC 31 ATD 24 180.00 

1.2-12s 48VAC/DC 31 ATD 48 180.00 

9.6-96s 110-127VAC 31 ATD 110 180.00 

76.8-768s 

220-240VAC 31 ATD 220 180.00 


ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

ON 

2 

1 

0.3-3s 1.2-12s 9.6-96s 76.8-768s 


– True off delay. Does not require continuous power 

source. 

– Single voltage, multiscale 











31 ATD 



Off delay after 

external contact 

opening. 

Multiscale 



[V] 

$ each 

With auxiliary power supply. 

0.3-3s 

24VAC/DC 31 AT1DP 24❶ 115.00 

1.2-12s 48VAC/DC 31 AT1DP 48❶ 115.00 

9.6-96s 110-127VAC 31 AT1DP 110 115.00 

76.8-768s 

220-240VAC 31 AT1DP 220 115.00 


– Off delay after external contact opening, single 

voltage, multiscale 



– Time range setting using dip switches 


– 22.5mm wide housing suitable for mounting on 

35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 


31 AT1DP 

❶ With DC supply, connect (–) polarity to terminal A2. 


ON 

2 

1 

0.3-3s 

ON 

2 

1 

1.2-12s 

ON 

2 

1 

9.6-96s 

ON 

2 

1 

76.8-768s 







Multiscale. 

Multivoltage. 

1 double-throw 

contact 

31 BTPM1 



[V] 

$ each 

0.3-3s 24VAC/DC 31 BTPM1 220 118.00 

1.2-12s 110-127VAC 

9.6-96s 220-240VAC 

76.8-768s 24-48-60V 31 BTPM1 60❷ 118.00 

0.3-3min AC/DC 

1.2-12min 

9.6-96min 

76.8-768min 

❷ Available on request. 


ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0.3-3s 1.2-12s 9.6-96s 76.8-768s 0.3-3min 1.2-12min 9.6-96min 76.8-768min 


– Multifunction, multivoltage, multiscale 


– Delay time adjustable on front 

– Selectable functions: Delay on operate with relay 

de-energized. Pulsing on relay energizing. Delay on or 

off after on opening of external contact. Pulsing. 

Pulsing on opening of external contact 

– Time scale and functions selected by dip switches 


– Time relay resetting possible by using an external 

contact connected at R1-R2 terminals; 5ms resetting 

time 









10 

Accessories 

pages 10-7 

Dimensions 

page D-29 


page W-10 




pages TC-36 and 37

10-6 Timers 

electric 



Multiscale. 

Multivoltage. 

2 independent 

double-throw 

contacts 

31 BTPM 



[V] 

$ each 

0.3-3s 24VAC/DC 31 BTPM 220 132.00 

1.2-12s 110-127VAC 

9.6-96s 220-240VAC 

76.8-768s 24-48-60V 31 BTPM 60❶ 132.00 

0.3-3min AC/DC 

1.2-12min 

9.6-96min 

76.8-768min 

❶ Available on request. 


ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0.3-3s 1.2-12s 9.6-96s 76.8-768s 0.3-3min 1.2-12min 9.6-96min 76.8-768min 


– Multifunction, multivoltage, multiscale 

– Two output relays, each with 1 SPDT contact, 

programmable by dip switches 


– Selectable functions: Delay on operate with relay 

de-energized. Delay on relay energizing. Delay on or 

off after opening of external contact. Pulsing 

beginning with pause. Pulsing beginning with work. 

Pulsing after opening of external contact beginning 

with pause. Pulsing after opening of external contact 

beginning with work. 

Possibility, selectable by dip switches, to program an 

output relay with instantaneous function (21-22-24 

output) 

– Time scale and functions selected by dip switches 


– Time relay resetting possible by using an external 

contact connected at R1-R2 terminals; 5ms resetting 

time 









10 

Programmable 

asymmetrical 

recycle timer 



[V] 

$ each 

0.3-3s 24VAC/DC 31 DRPL 220 176.00 

0.6-6s 110-127VAC 

1.2-12s 220-240VAC 

3-30s 

6-60s 

48-60VAC/DC 31 DRPL 60❷ 176.00 

12-120s 

0.3-3min 

0.6-6min 

1.2-12min 

3-30min 

6-60min 

12-120min 

❷ Available on request. 


– Programmable asymmetrical recycle timers, 

multivoltage, multiscale 

– Two relay outputs, each with SPDT contact 

– Pause and work time adjustable on front using 

potentiometers 

– Time scale selected by independent dip switches 


– Cycle can begin with work interval instead of pause 

(jumper on S1-S2 terminals) 

– 45mm (1.8in) wide housing suitable for mounting on 

35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 




Compliant with standards: IEC 61812-1. 

31 DRPL 


ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

0.3-3s 0.6-6s 1.2-12s 3-30s 6-60s 12-120s 

Functional diagram 


ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

ON 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

0.3-3min 0.6-6min 1.2-12min 3-30min 6-60min 12-120min 

Accessories 

pages 10-7 

Dimensions 

page D-29 


page W-11 




page TC-37

electric 

Timers 

DIN rail mount and accessories 

10-7 

Timer for starters 

31 BT2N 


scale scale power 

[V] 

$ each 

0.6-6s 31 BT2N 6S 48 106.00 

1.2-12s 24VAC/DC 31 BT2N 12S 48 106.00 

3-30s 48VAC/DC 31 BT2N 30S 48 106.00 

6-60s 31 BT2N 60S 48 106.00 

0.6-6s 31 BT2N 6S 110 106.00 

1.2-12s 24VAC/DC 31 BT2N 12S 110 106.00 

3-30s 110-127VAC 31 BT2N 30S 110 106.00 

6-60s 31 BT2N 60S 110 106.00 

0.6-6s 31 BT2N 6S 220 106.00 

1.2-12s 24VAC/DC 31 BT2N 12S 220 106.00 

3-30s 220-240VAC 31 BT2N 30S 220 106.00 

6-60s 31 BT2N 60S 220 106.00 

0.6-6s 31 BT2N 6S 380 106.00 

1.2-12s 24VAC/DC 31 BT2N 12S 380 106.00 

3-30s 380-415VAC 31 BT2N 30S 380 106.00 

6-60s 31 BT2N 60S 380 106.00 


– Dual voltage, for starters (wye-delta, impedance, 

autotransformer, etc.) of induction motors, 2 separate 

timing 

– Two output relays, each with 1 SPDT contact 

– Starting time and transition time (20-300ms) 

adjustable on front using potentiometers 




– Screw fixing adapter CE107 

– Timing starts immediately as soon as voltage is 

applied to time relay; upon expiry of the interval 

(starting time), the two output relays are energized in 

sequence. 

The first one disables the starting contactor, which 

opens; the second one, after the time interval which 

can be adjusted between 20 and 300ms (transition), 

enables the second contactor to close. 

If the supply is removed before the set time expires, 

the time already elapsed is reset. 






0.6-6s 31 BT2N 6S 440 106.00 

1.2-12s 24VAC/DC 31 BT2N 12S 440 106.00 

3-30s 415-440VAC 31 BT2N 30S 440 106.00 

6-60s 31 BT2N 60S 440 106.00 

Accessories for 

DIN rail mount 

timers 


$ each 

Screw fixing adapter 31 CE106 3.00 

for timers: AT1 - AT1C - AT1P - 

AT1CP - ATD - AT1DP - DRPL 

Screw fixing adapter 31 CE107 3.00 

for timers: BTPM1 - BTPM - 

BT2N 

10 

Dimensions 

page D-29 


page W-11 




page TC-37

10-8 Timers 

electric 

Plug-in timers 

10 

Plug-in and 

flush-mount timers 

31 L48TP 

31 L48TPB 

31 L48M 



$ each 

Time relay, on delay. 

Multiscale and multivoltage, 8-pin. 

0.1-780s 

24VAC/DC 

31 L48TP S 240 72.00 

1.8s-780min 

110VAC 

220-240VAC 31 L48TP M 240 72.00 

Time range setting. 

1 

0 

AB AB AB AB 

1 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

L48TP S 0.3-3s 1.2-12s 10-100s 78-780s 

L48TP M 18s-3min 72s-12min 10s-100min 78s-780min 



$ each 

Time relay, on delay. 

Multiscale and single voltage, 8-pin. 

24VAC/DC 31 L48TPB M24 79.00 

0.05s-10min 110VAC 31 L48TPB M110 79.00 

220-240VAC 31 L48TPB M240 79.00 


1 

0 

0.05-1s 0.1-10s 0.6-1min 6s-10min 



$ each 

Time relay, multifunction, multivoltage and multiscale, 11-pin. 

0.05s-10min 24-240V 31 L48M M 240 82.00 

0.6s-10h AC/DC 31 L48M H 240 82.00 


1 

0 

AB AB AB AB 

1 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

AB AB AB AB 

1 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

L48M M 0.05-1s 0.1-10s 0.6s-1min 6s-10min 

L48M H 0.05-1min 0.1-10min 0.6min-1h 1min-10h 


L48TP TIMER 



– Delay time adjustable on front by rotary knob 

– Time scale selected by dip switches: 

for L48TP S: 0.3-3s, 1.2-12s, 10-100s or 78-780s 

for L48TP M: 18s-3min, 72s-12min, 10-100min or 

78-780min 


– Use with 8-pin socket, see page 10-9 

– Flush mount bracket, see page 10-9 


L48TPB TIMER 

– On delay, single voltage, multiscale 

– Two relay outputs, each with 1 SPDT contact, 

adjustable as both delayed at energization or 

1 delayed and 1 instantaneous at energization 

– Delay time adjustable on front by royary knob 

– Time scale selected by dip switches: 

0.05-1s, 0.1-10s, 0.6s-1min, 6s-10min 





L48M TIMER 

– Multifunction, multivoltage and multiscale 

– 2 DPDT output contacts 

– Delay time adjustable on front 

– Selectable functions: Delay on operate when relay 

de-energized. Delay on operate when relay energized. 

Pulsing beginning with pause. Pulsing beginning with 

work. Time relay resetting is possible on closing of 

external contact (R) connected to terminals 7-6. 

Possibility of stopping the time relay saving the 

elapsed time on closing of external contact (M) 

connected to terminals 7-5 and then restarting time 

on opening it. See diagrams on page W-9. 

– Time scale and functions selected by dip switches: 

for L48M M: 0.05-1s, 0.1-10s, 0.6s-1min, 6s-10min 

for L48M H: 0.05s-1min, 0.1s-10min, 0.6m-1h, 

1min-10h 






UL Recognized for USA and Canada, file E172189. 

Compliant to standards: IEC/EN 61812-1. 

Housing size 48x48mm = 1.9x1.9in 

Operational diagrams 


Accessories 

page 10-9 

Dimensions 

page D-29 


page W-12 




page TC-37

electric 

Timers 

Accessories 

10-9 

Accessories for 

plug-in and 

flush-mount timers 


$ each 

8-pin socket for screw 31 S8 9.00 

fixing or on 35mm DIN 

rail (IEC/EN 60715). 


8-pin loose socket. 31 L48 P8 12.00 


11-pin socket for screw 31 S11 10.50 

fixing or on 35mm DIN 

rail (IEC/EN 60715). 


11-pin loose socket. 31 L48 P11 14.00 


Flush mount bracket. 31 L48AP 5.00 

Certifications 

Sockets: CSA certified, file LR 26716. 

UL recognized, file E113714. 

10 

Dimensions 

page D-29 



PAGE 11-2 AND 3 

MODULAR VOLTAGE RELAYS 

• For single phase system 

• For three phase system without neutral 

• Powered by monitored voltage 

• Programmable rated voltage value to monitor 

• Delayed tripping. 

PAGE 11-4 

MODULAR CURRENT RELAYS 

• For single phase system 

• Undercurrent, overcurrent and combination 

• Auxiliary power supply 

• Automatic or manual resetting 

• Selectable functions. 

OTHER MODULAR RELAYS 

• Frequency control 

• Phase shift control 

• Selectable operating mode. 

PAGE 11-5 



11 

PROTECTION RELAYS 

Modular version 

Minimum and maximum voltage 

monitoring relays for single and 

three phase systems, without 

neutral 

Minimum and maximum current 

monitoring relays with dual 

thresholds 

Frequency monitoring relay 

Phase shift relay. 

PLANET -DIN 

Modular voltage control 

SEC. PAGE 

For single-phase systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 2 

For three-phase systems, without neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 2 

Modular current control 

For single phase systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 4 

Modular frequency control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 5 

Modular phase shift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 5 



11-2 Protection relays 

electric 

Modular voltage monitoring relays 

Voltage monitoring 

for single-phase 

systems 

PMV55 

Rated voltage Catalog number Price 

to be controlled Ue 

[V] 50/60Hz 

$ each 

Single-phase system. 

Minimum and maximum voltage control. 

208-240VAC PMV55 A240 200.00 

380-440VAC PMV55 A440 200.00 


– Voltage monitoring relay for high and low voltage 

conditions of single-phase systems; powered by the 

monitored voltage 

– 4 programmable rated voltages: 

• For PMV55 A240: 208-220-230-240VAC 

• For PMV55 A440: 380-400-415-440VAC 

– Excellent tripping accuracy 

– TRMS measures (True Root Mean Square value) 

– 1 relay output with 1 SPDT contact 

– Modular housing, 1.38in (35mm) wide 




ADJUSTMENTS: 

“V max” Tripping threshold for high voltage 

105-115% Ue 

“V min” Tripping threshold for low voltage 

80-95% Ue 

“Delay” for each Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1-20 seconds. 


UL listed for USA and Canada, File E 93601. 


IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3. 



Voltage monitoring 

for three-phase 

systems without 

neutral 



phase to phase 

[V] 50/60Hz 

$ each 

Three-phase system, without neutral. 

Phase loss and incorrect phase sequence. Delayed tripping. 

17.5mm/0.69in module. 

208-440VAC PMV10 A440 125.00 

35mm/1.4in module. 

100-240VAC PMV20 A240 140.00 

208-575VAC PMV20 A575 140.00 

380-600VAC PMV20 A600 140.00 


– Voltage monitoring relay for phase loss and incorrect 

phase sequence of three-phase systems, without neutral; 

powered by the monitored voltage. Delayed tripping 

– Detection of phase loss if one of the voltages is

electric 

Protection relays 


11-3 

PMV40 

PMV50 



phase to phase 

[V] 50/60Hz 

$ each 


Phase loss, incorrect phase sequence and high asymmetry 

control. Delayed tripping. 

208-240VAC PMV40 A240 200.00 

380-575VAC PMV40 A575 200.00 

600VAC PMV40 A600 200.00 


Phase loss, incorrect phase sequence, minimum and 

maximum voltage control. Delayed tripping. 

208-240VAC PMV50 A240 260.00 

380-575VAC PMV50 A575 260.00 

600VAC PMV50 A600 260.00 


Phase loss, incorrect phase sequence, minimum voltage and 

high asymmetry control. Delayed tripping. 

208-240VAC PMV60 A240 300.00 

380-575VAC PMV60 A575 300.00 

600VAC PMV60 A600 300.00 


Phase loss, incorrect phase sequence, minimum and maximum 

voltage and high asymmetry control. Delayed tripping. 

208-240VAC PMV70 A240 325.00 

380-575VAC PMV70 A575 325.00 

600VAC PMV70 A600 325.00 


PMV40 is voltage monitoring relay for phase loss, 

incorrect phase sequence and high asymmetry 

conditions of three-phase systems, without neutral. 

PMV50 is a voltage monitoring relay for phase loss, 

incorrect phase sequence, low and high voltage 

conditions of three-phase systems, without neutral. 


incorrect phase sequence, low voltage and high 

asymmetry conditions of three-phase systems, without 

neutral. 


incorrect phase sequence, low and high voltage and high 

asymmetry conditions of three-phase systems, without 

neutral. 

Features common to these 4 types: 

– Powered by the monitored voltage 

– Delayed tripping 

– 4 programmable rated voltages for PMV... A240: 

208-220-230-240VAC 

– 8 programmable rated voltages for PMV... A575: 

380-400-415-440-460-480-525-575VAC 


– TRMS measures (True Root Mean Square value) 

– Control of phase-to-phase voltages 

– Phase loss detection if one of the voltages is

11-4 Protection relays 

electric 

Modular current monitoring relays 

Current monitoring 

for single-phase 

systems 

PMA20 

Rated Auxiliary Catalog number Price 

current control 

Ie 

power 

[A] [V] $ each 


AC/DC undercurrent control. Auxiliary AC/DC supply. 

Automatic or manual resetting. 

0.02-1-5-16 24-240V PMA20 ❶ 

multiscale AC/DC 

❶ Coming in 2007, contact Sales & Technical Support for availability and pricing. 


– Current monitoring for low current conditions of singlephase 

systems. AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary supply. 

Automatic or manual resetting 

– Direct connection or by current transformer (CT) 


– TRMS current measures (True Root Mean Square value) 

– Resetting and inhibition input 


– Modular housing, 2.07in (52.5mm) wide 




ADJUSTMENTS: 

“I min” Tripping threshold for low current 

5-100% end scale 

“Reset Hysteresis” Resetting hysteresis 5-30% 

“Trip delay” Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

“Inhibition time” Inhibition time 0.1-20 seconds. 




IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3. 



Overcurrent relay 

PMA21 



Ie 

power 



AC/DC undercurrent control. Auxiliary AC/DC supply. 


0.02-1-5-16 24-240V PMA21 ❶ 




– Current monitoring for high current conditions of 

single-phase systems. AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary 

supply. Automatic or manual resetting 










ADJUSTMENTS: 

“I max” Tripping threshold for high current 


“Reset hysteresis” Resetting hysteresis 5-30% 

“Trip delay” Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

“Inhibition time Inhibition time 0.1-20 seconds. 




IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3. 



11 

Combination 

under/overcurrent 

relay 

PMA30 



Ie 

power 



AC/DC under/overcurrent control. 

Auxiliary AC/DC supply. Automatic or manual resetting. 

0.02-1-5-16 24-240V PMA30 ❶ 




– Current monitoring for high/low current conditions of 

single-phase systems. AC/DC multivoltage auxiliary 

supply. Automatic or manual resetting 

– 4 selectable tripping functions: 

• Low current 

• High current 

• Low current with reset pulsing 

• High current with reset pulsing 










ADJUSTMENTS: 

“Set point” 

Tripping threshold for low current 


“Reset Hysteresis” Resetting hysteresis 5-30% 

“Trip delay” 

“Inhibition time” 

“Reset delay” 

“Mode” 

Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

Inhibition time 0.1-20 seconds 

Time delay for resetting 

0.1-20 seconds 

A to H operating mode. 




IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3. 



Dimensions 

page D-30 






page TC-39

electric 

Frequency 

monitoring 

PMF20 



Control Catalog number Price 

power 

[V] 50/60Hz 

$ each 

Minimum and/or maximum frequency control. 

220-240VAC PMF20 A240 360.00 

380-415VAC PMF20 A415 360.00 

11-5 


– Frequency monitoring for high and low frequency 

conditions; powered by the monitored voltage 

– Rated frequency choice: 50Hz or 60Hz 

– 4 operating modes 

• Tripping threshold for high frequency in not function 

• Tripping threshold for high frequency 

• Tripping threshold for low frequency 

• Tripping threshold for low and high 

– Tripping threshold for low or high frequency 



– Modular housing, 1.38in (35mm) wide 




ADJUSTMENTS: 

frequency 

“Delay” Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

“Hz max” Tripping threshold for high frequency 

+1 to +10% 

“Hz min” Tripping threshold for low frequency 

-1 to -10% 

“Reset delay” Resetting time 0.1-20seconds. 


UL listed for USA and Canada, File E 93601. 


IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3. 



Phase shift 

monitoring 

PMA40 

PMA50 

Rated 

current 

Ie 

Auxiliary 

control 

power 

Catalog number Price General characteristics 

PMA40 is a phase control relay for pump protection 

against dry running. Suitable for single and three-phase 

[A] [V] $ each systems. Auxiliary AC control power. 

PMA50 is a phase shift monitoring relay for single or 

Single and three-phase systems. 

three-phase systems. Auxiliary AC control power. 

For pump protection. AC control power. 


0.02-1-5-16 220-240VAC PMA40 A240 ❶ 

Programmable operating modes: 

multiscale 380-415VAC PMA40 A415 ❶ 

For PMA40: 

– Single phase control 

Single and three-phase systems. Phase shift control. 

– Three phase control 

AC control power. Automatic or manual resetting. 

For PMA50 

0.02-1-5-16 220-240VAC PMA50 A240 ❶ 

– Minimum control for three phases 

multiscale 380-415VAC PMA50 A415 ❶ 

– Maximum control for three phases 

– Minimum control for single phase 


– Maximum control for single phase 

11 

Features common to both types: 

– Direct connection or by external CT 

– Selector for single or three-phase system 

– Resetting for inhibition input 







ADJUSTMENTS FOR PMA40 

“Set point cosϕ” Tripping threshold for minimum c 

osϕ 0-1 

“Trip delay Sec” Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

ADJUSTMENTS FOR PMA50: 

“Set point cosϕ“ 

Tripping threshold for minimum 

cosϕ 0-1 

“Hysteresis” Resetting hysteresis 5-30% 

“Trip delay” 

“Inhibition” 

“Reset delay” 

Tripping time 0.1-20 seconds 

Inhibition time 0.1-20 seconds 

Resetting time 0.1-20 seconds. 


UL listing for USA and Canada pending. 


IEC/EN 61000-6-2, IEC/EN 61000-6-3. 



Dimensions 

page D-30 


page W-14 




page TC-39

LEVEL MONITORING RELAYS 

• Single or dual voltage 

• Emptying or filling functions 

• Multifunction 

• Automatic resetting. 

PAGE 12-2 

ELECTRODES 

• Single pole 

• Three pole. 

PAGE 12-3 

PAGE 12-5 

MODULAR START-UP PRIORITY CHANGE RELAYS 

• Alternate starting control of two motors. 



12 

LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL RELAYS 

Level monitoring for electrically 

conductive liquids 

Modular version 

Adjustable 2.5-200kΩ sensitivity 

Startup priority change relays. 

PLANET -DIN 

Level monitoring relays 

SEC. PAGE 

For conductive liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 2 

Electrodes and electrode holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 4 

Start-up priority change relays 

Priority change relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 5 



12-2 Liquid level control relays 

electric 

Single and multi voltage types 

Modular 

single-voltage relay 

LVM20 

Control Type of Catalog number Price 

power output 

contacts 

[V] 50/60Hz 

$ each 

Automatic resetting. 

24VAC SPDT LVM20 A024 108.00 

110-127VAC SPDT LVM20 A127 108.00 

220-240VAC SPDT LVM20 A240 108.00 

380-415VAC SPDT LVM20 A415 108.00 


– 3 sensing electrodes, MIN, MAX and COM 

– 2.5-50kOhm sensitivity 

– 1 relay output with SPDT contact 

– Double insulation between supply, electrodes and 

output relay circuit 

– Fixed probe signal delay:

Modular 

single-voltage 

multifunction relay 

LVM40 

electric 

Liquid level control relays 

Single voltage type 


power output 

contacts 

[V] 50/60Hz 

$ each 

Multiple functions. 

Automatic resetting. 

24VAC SPDT +1 N/O LVM40 A024 265.00 

110-127VAC SPDT +1 N/O LVM40 A127 265.00 



12-3 


– 5 sensing electrodes, MIN1, MAX1, MIN2, MAX2 and 

COM 

– 2.5-200kOhm sensitivity 

– Sensitivity adjustment: 25-50-100-200kOhm 

– Separate sensitivity adjustment of MAX electrodes for 

foam detection 

– Insensitivity to stray electrode-cable capacitance 

– Programming selector for 5 different functions: 

• Standard emptying and filling with alarms 

• Emptying and filling with SUPER-MIN and/or 

SUPER-MAX relay 

• Emptying and filling with priority start-up change 

control 

• Emptying and filling with priority start-up change 

pump and standby pump control 

• Well draining and tank filling with dry-running alarm 

relay 

– 2 relay outputs, one with SPDT contact and one with 

normally open (N/O) contact 

– Double insulation between each supply, electrodes and 

output relay circuits 

– Adjustable probe signal delay: 1-10 seconds 

– Adjustable pump start delay: 0-30 minutes 


– Red LED indicators for output relay and electrode state 


– Degree of protection:IP40 on front (only when 






Electrodes and Electrode holders 

Use electrodes and electrode holders type: 

SN1/PS31/PS3S/SCM/CGL or similar type. See page 12-4. 

12 

Dimensions 

page D-30 


page W-16 




12-4 

electric 

Electrodes and 

electrode holders 

11 SN1 

31 SCM... 

Level electrodes - Electrode holders - 

Rod probes for conductve liquids 

Rod probe Rod probe Catalog number Price 

length included 

[in / mm] 

$ each 

Single-pole electrodes. 

For wells and storage tanks. 

0.39 / 10 Yes 11 SN1 25.00 

For boilers and autoclaves. 

1.57 / 40 Yes 31 SCM 04 61.00 

19.7 / 500 Yes 31 SCM 50 106.00 

39.4 / 1000 Yes 31 SCM 100 111.00 

For boilers and autoclaves. 

15.75 / 300 Yes 31 CGL125 3 126.00 

19.7 / 500 Yes 31 CGL125 5 136.00 

27.6 / 700 Yes 31 CGL125 7 152.00 

39.4 / 1000 Yes 31 CGL125 10 176.00 

Three-pole electrodes. 

For small containers. 

15.75 / 300 Yes 31 PS31 96.00 

Electrode holder for 3 rod probes. 

For general use. 

31 PS3S No 31 PS3S 122.00 


SN1 SINGLE-POLE ELECTRODE 

Used for level control in wells and storage tanks. 

It comprises an AISI 313 stainless steel probe, a plastic 

(PPOX) holder and a cable gland. 

A sealing ring and the tightening of the cable gland 

prevent liquid from entering the wire terminal connector 

which causes oxidation. 

The external wire diameter must be 0.1-0.24in 

(2.5-6mm) to warrant perfect sealing of the PG7 gland 

Terminal connection: Screw 

Maximum operating temperature: +140°F/+60°C 

Application: Tanks and deep wells. 

SCM ELECTRODE 

Used for level control on boilers, autoclaves and in 

general where pressure (10 bar maximum) and high 

temperature (212°F/100°C maximum) are present. 

It includes an AISI 303 stainless steel probe embedded 

in an alumina oxide body and a 3/8” GAS threaded metal 

support holder. 

Terminal connection: Screw. 

Application: Tanks, pressurized tanks and boilers. 

CGL125 ELECTRODE 

Used for level control on boilers and autoclaves and in 

general wherever pressure is up to 10 bar maximum. 

It includes an AISI 302 probe and 3/8” threaded 

terminal. 

Maximum operating temperature: 356°F/+180°C 

Threaded rod and nut. 

Application: Tanks, pressurized tanks and boilers. 

31 CGL125... 

31 PS31 

PS31 Electrode 

A small electrode holder, complete with three AISI 304 

stainless steel probes. 

Particularly suited to small containers whenever 

pressure is up to 2 bar maximum. 

1/2” GAS threaded coupling. 

Faston termination for wire connection; relative lugs 

standard supplied. 

Maximum operating temperature: +158°F/+70°C 

Application: Tanks and automatic dispensers. 

PS3S ELECTRODE HOLDER 

A thermoset resin electrode holder to be used with three 

probes (rod probes to be purchased separately) comes 

complete with terminal cover. 

1/2” GAS threaded coupling. 

Maximum operating temperature: +212°F/+100°C. 

Wire connection: Screw 

Application: Tanks. 

12 

31 PS3S 

Rod probes 

Rod probe Catalog number Price 

length 

[in / mm] 

$ each 

Extensions for SCM electrode. 

18.1 / 460 31 ASTA 460 MM4 30.00 

37.8 / 960 31 ASTA 960 MM4 35.00 

Coupler unit for ASTA...MM4 probe extension. 

- 31 RE213 6.00 

For PS3S electrode holder. 

18.1 / 460 31 ASTA 460 MM6 37.00 

37.8 / 960 31 ASTA 960 MM6 43.00 


Stainless steel AISI 304 probes with 4M or 6M threaded 

extremity suitable as extensions for SCM electrode or as 

rod probe for PS3S a holder. 

Dimensions 

page D-30 



electric 

Modular start-up 

priority change 

relays 

LVM P05 

LVM P10 


Start-up priority change relays 


power output 

contacts 

[V] 

$ each 

2 outputs. AC/DC supply voltage. 

24-48VDC 2 N/O LVM P05 116.00 

24-240VAC 

2 outputs. AC supply voltage. 

24VAC 2 N/O LVM P10 A024 133.00 

110-127VAC 2 N/O LVM P10 A127 133.00 

220-240VAC 2 N/O LVM P10 A240 133.00 

390-415VAC 2 N/O LVM P10 A415 133.00 

12-5 


The relays are designed to balance the operating time, and 

hence the wear of pumps, compressors, generators, when 

two units – primary and stand-by – are installed. 

The LVM P05 type is multivoltage and has simple 

operation and installation. It alternates the starting of two 

motors at each power up. The flashing rate of the relay 

LED identifies which of the two relay outputs is energized. 

The LVM P10 is programmable and is normally used with 

float switches, level controls, pressure switches, etc., 

equipped with dry contacts. It can be connected to either 

2 or 3-wire start-stop motor control, to exclude control 

contact chattering when used with float or pressure 

switches. 

It has 4 inputs for motor control, 2 of which for starting 

and 2 for stopping, each protected against over-voltage 

conditions. Usage can be either as priority change of 2 

motors or the control for the simultaneous operation of 2 

motors, by activating the stand-by motor 4 seconds after 

the first motor starting, to avoid current peaks and 

subsequent mains voltage drop. 


– Operating limit: 0.85-1.1 Ue 

– Maximum power consumption: 16VA for LVM P05; 

3.5VA for LVM P10 

– Maximum power dissipation: 0.9W for LVM P05; 

1.8W for LVM P10 

– Connection: permanent 

– 2 output relays each with 1 normally open (N/O) 

contact 

– Rated contact voltage: 250VAC 

– Rated switching voltage: 400VAC 

– UL designation: B300 (AC1 8A 250V) 


– Red LED indicators for output relay state 

– Modular housing: 0.71in (18mm) wide for LVM P05; 

2.07in (52.5mm) wide for LVM P10 







12 

Dimensions 

page D-30 


page W-17 



PAGE 13-2 

SINGLE PHASE DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS 

• Modular and flush-mount types 

• Single function voltmeter 

• Single function ammeter 

• Single function voltmeter or ammeter 

• Single function frequency meter 

• Single function cosphi meter 

• Available without or complete with programmable 

relay output for protection activation. 

THREE PHASE DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS 

• Modular and flush-mount types 

• Single function voltmeter 

• Single function ammeter 

• Multifunction: voltage, current, watt readouts 

• Available without or complete with programmable 

relay output for protection activation. 

PAGE 13-6 

DIGITAL MULTIMETERS 

DMK 2...- DMK 5... (47 electric parameters) 

• Basic version: DMK 20 - DMK 50 

• Version with energy meters: DMK 21 - DMK 51 

• Version with energy meters and RS485 port: 

DMK 22 - DMK 52 

• Version for use with generating sets: DMK 25 - DMK 55. 

DMK 3... - DMK40 - DMK 6... (251 electric parameters) 

• Basic version: DMK 30 - DMK 60 

• Version with 2 programmable outputs: 

DMK 31 - DMK 61 

• Versions with 2 programmable outputs and RS485 

port: DMK 32 - DMK 62 

• Version with data-logger, RS232 and RS485 ports: 

DMK 40. 

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 

• Primary: 40-1000A 

• Secondary: 5A. 

PAGE 13-9 

MULTIMETER FUNCTIONS 

SUMMARY 

96x96mm housing ➨ 

Modular housing ➨ 

Usage in medium and high voltage systems 

INSTANTANEOUS MEASUREMENTS: 

Instantaneous measurements: 

Voltage (phase-to-phase, phase, system) 

Current ➊ 

Apparent power (phase, system) 

Active-reactive import power (phase, system) 

Frequency (input voltage) 

Power factor (phase) 

Cosϕ 

Active-reactive export power (phase, system), 

system integral apparent power 

Battery supply voltage 

Voltage imbalance 

Current imbalance 

HARMONIC ANALYSIS 

Even-odd, 2° to 22° orders, of phase voltages and currents 

Total and residual distortion 

METER/COUNTER 

Imported active-reactive energy power 

Exported active-reactive energy power 

Total and partial operating hours 

STORAGE OF INSTANTANEOUS MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM VALUES 

Voltage and current (phase) 

Import active-reactive power (system) 

Export active-reactive power (system) 

Average/maximum integral active-apparent power 

DIGITAL OUTPUTS 

1 relay, rated B300/5A 250V AC1 

1 static, rated 55mA 60VAC/DC AC1 

SERIAL INTERFACE 

RS485 port 

RS232 port 

➊ Maximum integral phase, system and imbalance current values obtainable with DMK SW remote control software only. 

❷ Available with use of DMK SW remote control software only. ... 

❸ Serial ports cannot be used simultaneously. 

DMK 25 DMK 26 DMK 20 DMK 21 DMK 22 DMK 30 DMK 31 DMK 32 DMK 40 

DMK 50 DMK 51 DMK 52 DMK 60 DMK 61 DMK 62 

❷ 

❸ 

❸ 



13 

DIGITAL METERING INSTRUMENTS AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 

Metering instruments for voltage, 

current, frequency, power factor 

and watt readouts, also including 

a variety of programmable 

protections features available on 

version with relay output 

Single and multi function metering 

devices 

Monitor and measure of 47, 51 and 

251 electric parameters 

Single and three-phase 

connection 

Ideal for co-generation energy 

systems, stand-by generating sets 

or on-board machine tools 

High measurement accuracy 

Totally programmable digital 

outputs 

RS485 serial port used with 

Modbus ® RTU or ASCII protocols. 

PLANET -LOGIC 

Digital metering instruments 

SEC. PAGE 

Single-phase modular instruments, without or complete with output relay . . . . . 13- 2 

Three-phase modular instruments, without or complete with output relay . . . . . . 13- 4 

Digital multimeters 

51 measurements - flush-mount three-phase type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 6 

47 measurements - flush-mount and modular types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 7 

251 measurements - flush-mount and modular types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 8 

Currrent transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 9 



13-2 


and current transformers 

electric 

13 

For single phase 

systems 

Modular type 

DMK 80 

DMK 81 

DMK 80 R1 

DMK 81 R1 

DMK 82 DMK 82 

DMK 83 

DMK 84 

DMK 83 R1 

DMK 84 R1 


number 

$ each 

Digital control, without programmable relay output. 

Voltmeter - 3 viewed DMK 80 A127 171.00 

measurements; 15-660VAC 

readout and 1.00-500.00 PT ratio 

programming ranges 

Ammeter - 3 viewed DMK 81 A127 171.00 

measurements; 0.05-5.75A 

readout 5-10,000 CT primary 


Voltmeter or ammeter - 3 viewed DMK 82 A127❶ 189.00 

measurements; ranges: 

15-660VAC or 0.05-5.75A 


or OFF/5-10,000 CT primary 


Frequency meter - 3 viewed DMK 83 A127 237.00 

measurements; 15-65Hz 

readout range, ±1 digit accuracy; 

15-660VAC voltage input range 

Cosphi meter - 2 viewed DMK 84 A127 237.00 

measurements; cosϕ readout 

error: ±0.5° ±1 digit, measured 

in 4 quadrants. 

Digital control, complete with programmable relay output. 

Voltmeter - 3 viewed DMK 80 R1A127 186.00 




Ammeter - 3 viewed DMK 81 R1 A127 186.00 




Frequency meter - 3 viewed DMK 83 R1 A127 251.00 

measurements; 15-65Hz readout 

range, ±1 digit accuracy; 


Cosphi meter - 2 viewed DMK 84 R1 A127 251.00 




❶ The DMK 82 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped with 

two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user depending on 

which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme used. 


The modular digital metering instruments of the DMK 

series provide excellent stability of readouts due to a very 

high sampling rate. 

The measurements in TRMS provide for a correct 

operation, even in presence of voltage and current 

conditions with high harmonic content. All models are 

able to store and display maximum (HIGH) and minimum 

(LOW) values of the readouts. 

The DMK...R1 types also come equipped with one relay 

output, configurable with a number of protection and 

configurable functions, as stated below. 

They can be used directly in low voltage (

electric 



13-3 

For single phase 

systems 

Flush-mount type 

DMK 00 


number❶ 

$ each 










Voltmeter or ammeter - 3 viewed DMK 02 A127❷ 189.00 

measurements; ranges: 

15-660VAC or 0.05-5.75A readout 

and 1.00-500.00 PT ratio or 

OFF/5-10,000 CT primary 


Frequency meter - 3 viewed DMK 03 A127 237.00 

measurements; 45-66Hz 

readout range, ±1 digit accuracy; 


Cosphi meter - 2 viewed DMK 04 A127 237.00 





Voltmeter - 3 viewed DMK 00 R1 A127 186.00 








Frequency meter - 3 viewed DMK 03 R1 A127 251.00 

measurements; 45-66Hz readout 

range, ±1 digit accuracy; 


Cosphi meter - 2 viewed DMK 04 R1 A127 251.00 




❶ Coming in 2007, contact Sales & Technical Support for availability. 

❷ The DMK 02 can operate as a voltmeter or ammeter. It is duly equipped with 

two front plates (V and A) which must be fitted by the user depending on 

which instrument is required and on the wiring scheme used. 


The flush-mount digital metering instruments of the DMK 












13-4 



electric 

13 

For three phase 

systems 

Modular type 

DMK 70 

DMK 71 

DMK 75 

DMK 70 R1 

DMK 71 R1 

DMK 75 R1 


number 

$ each 



measurements; 15-660VAC L-L 

(10-382V L-N) 







Combined voltmeter, ammeter DMK 75 A127 314.00 

and wattmeter - 39 viewed 


(20-382V L-N) 

and 0.05-5.75A readout, 

1.00-500.00 PT ratio and 

5-10,000 CT primary 



Voltmeter - 3 viewed DMK 70 R1A127 214.00 


(10-382V L-N) 







Combined voltmeter, ammeter DMK 75 R1 A127 328.00 



(20-382V L-N) 





❶ Independent time delay, configurable for each of the mentioned functions. 


The modular digital metering instruments of the DMK 












electric 



13-5 

For three phase 

systems 

Flush-mount type 

DMK 15 


number❶ 

$ each 




(10-382V L-N) 







Combined voltmeter, ammeter DMK 15 A127 314.00 



(20-382V L-N) 






Voltmeter - 3 viewed DMK 10 R1 A127 214.00 


(10-382V L-N) 







Combined voltmeter, ammeter DMK 15 R1 A127 328.00 



(20-382V L-N) 





❶ Coming in 2007, contact Sales & Technical Support for availability. 

❷ Independent time delay, configurable for each of the mentioned functions. 


The flush-mount digital metering instruments of the DMK 












13 

13-6 

Digital multimeter 

51 measurements 

DMK 16 




number 

$ each 

Multimeter - 51 viewed DMK 16 A127 ❶ 378.00 

measurements; 110-127VAC, 

7-segment 4-digit display. 

❶ Coming in 2007; contact Sales & Technical support for availability. 

electric 


This flush-mount digital multimeter provides excellent 

stability and viewing of readouts even in presence of 

critical operating conditions, such as voltages and 

currents with high harmonic content and variable 

frequency. It is a cost-effective solution to replace 

traditional analog instruments. 

It is capable of storing and displaying 23 different 

maximum (HIGH) and minimum (LOW) measurements, 

can be used directly in low voltage (

electric 



13-7 



DMK 50 

DMK 20 


number 

$ each 

Modular housing. 

Basic version, 110-127VAC DMK 50 120 447.00 

Version with energy meters DMK 51 120 494.00 

included, 110-127VAC 

Version with energy meters and DMK 52 120 626.00 

RS485 port included, 110-127VAC 

Flush-mount housing. 

Basic version, 110-127VAC DMK 20 120 447.00 


included, 110-127VAC 


and RS485 port included, 

110-127VAC 

Version for generating set duty, DMK 25 525.00 

12-24VDC 

Version for generating set duty DMK 26 598.00 

with maximum current demand, 

voltage and current imbalance, 

12-24VDC 

Accessories. 

Remote supervision software for DMK SW 971.00 

PC ↔ DMK 22/52, with 

Modbus ® -RTU and ASCII 

protocols, complete with 51 C4 

connecting cable 

RS232/RS485 converter drive, 4 PX1 115 661.00 

opto-isolated, 110-120VAC 

PC ↔ PX1 drive connecting cable, 51 C4 65.00 

6ft (1.8m) long 

IP54 front protection cover for 31 PA96X96 34.00 

DMK20/21/22/25/26 types 


DMK 2... and DMK 5... multimeters monitor and view 

reliable readings of electric parameters, even in presence 

of critical operating conditions, such as voltages and 

currents with high harmonic content and variable 

frequency. The total and partial hour counter feature 

provides an interesting feature for electric panels of 

emergency generating sets. 

The diversified and accurate measure give the multimeters 

valuable technical and cost effective advantages respect to 

traditional analog instrumentation. 

The digital multimeters DMK 2... and DMK 5... view 47 

electric parameters: 

– Voltage: phase, line and system values 

– Battery voltage: 9-38VDC for DMK 25 and DMK 26 only 

– Current: phase values 

– Power: apparent phase, active and reactive values 

– P.F.: power factor per phase 

– Frequency of measured voltage value 

– HIGH/LOW: instantaneous minimum and maximum 

values of each phase voltage and current, total active 

power (ΣW), total reactive power (Σvar) and total 

apparent power (ΣVA) values 

– Total hours: non-volatile clearable log for DMK 20, 

DMK 25, DMK 26 and DMK 50 only 

– Partial hours: non-volatile configurable log for DMK 20, 

DMK 25, DMK 26 and DMK 50 only. 


For DMK20 and DMK50: 

– Auxiliary power: 110-127VAC standard; 208-240VAC 

on request 

– Operating limits: 90-152VAC for standard supply 

For DMK 21, DMK 22, DMK51 and DMK 52 

– Auxiliary supply: 110-127VAC standard; 208-240VAC 

on request 

– Operating limits: 94-140VAC for standard supply 

For DMK 25 and DMK26: 

– Auxiliary supply: 12-24VDC standard 

– Operating limits: 9-32VDC 

For all types: 

– Voltage measure range: 60-830VAC L-L 

– Current measure range: 0.05-6A 

– Frequency range: 45-65Hz 

– CT ratio programming range: 1.0-2,000 

– Accuracy 

• Voltage/current readouts: 0.5 ±0.25% ful scale ±1 digit 

• Energy class 2 (IEC/EN 61036; IEC/EN 61268) 

– Non-volatile total and partial hour counter with 

separate clearing; used as maintenance interval with 

display alarm in DMK 20, DMK 25, DMK 26 and 

DMK 50 only 

– Partial hour counter used as maintenance interval with 

display alarm 

– HIGH and LOW value functions to read and log 

instantaneous voltage, current and power values 

– Delayed automatic resetting of default measures 

– Averaging function to slow down repetitive fluctuations 

to obtain more stable readouts 

– Current connection in ARON configuration via 2 current 

transformers (CTs) only 

– Single, two, three phase with or without neutral and 

balanced three-phase connection 

– TRMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order 

– Housing: 

flush mount 3.8x3.8in (96x96mm) for DMK 2... 

modular for DMK 5... 

– Degree of protection: IP54 on front for DMK 2... 

IP41 on front for DMK 5... 

IP 20 at rear. 

13 




IEC/EN 61000-6-3, IEC/EN 61000-6-2, CISPR11/EN 55011. 

Dimensions 

page D-31 


page W-18 




pages TC-44 and 45

13-8 Digital metering instruments 

electric 


13 



DMK 60 

DMK 30 

DMK 40 


number 

$ each 

Modular housing. 

Basic version DMK 60 881.00 

Version with 2 programmable DMK 61 1066.00 

outputs of which 1 relay and 

1 static type 

Version with RS485 port and 2 DMK 62 1235.00 

programmable outputs of which 

1 relay and 1 static type 

Flush-mount housing. 

Basic version DMK 30 881.00 

Version with 2 programmable DMK 31 1066.00 

outputs of which 1 relay and 

1 static type 

Version with RS485 port and 2 DMK 32 1235.00 

programmable outputs of which 

1 relay and 1 static type 

Version with data-logger, RS232 DMK 40 2503.00 

and RS485 opto-isolated ports 

Accessories. 

Remote supervision software for DMK SW 971.00 

PC ↔ DMK 32/62, with 

Modbus ® -RTU and ASCII 

protocols, complete with 51 C4 

connecting cable 

Data-logger software for DMK SW 10 1100.00 

PC ↔ DMK 40 complete with 

51 C2 connecting cable and 

remote supervision software 

DMK SW and 51 C4 connecting 

cable 



PC ↔ DMK 40 connecting cable, 51 C2 60.00 


PC ↔ PX1 drive connecting cable, 51 C4 65.00 


DMK 40 ↔ analog modem 51 C5 69.00 

connecting cable, 6ft (1.8m) long 

Analog modem ↔ 4 PX1 51 C9 83.00 

converter drive connecting cable, 


IP54 front protection cover for 31 PA96X96 34.00 

DMK 30/31/32/40 


DMK 3.. and DMK 6... multimeters comprise excellent 

features, superior to devices of the same category 

currently on the marketplace. Distorted waveform 

conditions, such as very disturbed electric lines having 

voltage and currents with high harmonic content and 

variable frequency, do not influence the high accuracy 

DMK multimeter readouts because of rigorous design in 

addition to the use of the latest generation of 

microprocessor technology. Measurement of the phase 

angle (cosϕ) in addition to power factor, harmonics 

analysis and 

HIGH-LOW-MAX functions are just a few of those which 

are difficult to find on higher category equipment. 

The DMK 40 version includes a reliable data-logger 

system, extremely easy to use. 

DMK 3..., DMK 40 and DMK 6... digital multimeter can 

display more than 251 measurements; a few of these are 

listed below. 

– Voltage: phase, line and system values 

– Current: phase and system values 

– Power: active, reactive, apparent phase and total values 

– Energy: import, export, inductive and capacitive values 

– P.F.: power factor per phase 

– cosϕ: angle displacement, i.e. power factor related to 

the harmonic fundamental only 

– Frequency of measured voltage value 

– Harmonics (HARM.): residual and total harmonic 

content for each harmonic order up to the 22° per 

phase, both for voltage and current values 

– HIGH / LOW: readings of maximum / minimum values 

of phase voltage and current and ΣW, Σvar and ΣVA 

power 

– Maximum (MAX): readings of maximum current and 

total active power values, both calculated on 

programmable integration time. 

The technical features of the DMK 40 data-logger are: 

– 2Mb non-volatile memory for data logging 

– Real Time Clock (RTC) with replaceable back-up 

lithium battery 

– Sampling time, 1s to 24h configurable 

– Number of sampling measures, 1 to 32 configurable at 

a time 

– Communication protocols: Modbus ® -RTU and ASCII 

– Data logging of one electric parameter in continuous 

format or with begin and end by programmable 

thresholds 

– Suspension of data acquisition at full memory or 

refreshing of oldest data. 


– Auxiliary power: 100-240VAC; 110-250VDC 

– Operating range: 85-265VAC; 93.5-300VDC 

– Voltage measure range: 20-830VAC L-L in one model 

– Current measure range: 0.02-6A 

– HIGH and LOW value functions to detect and log 

instantaneous voltage, current and power values 

– Averaging function to slow down repetitive 

fluctuations to obtain more stable readouts 

– Current connection in ARON configuration via 2 

current transformers only 

– Single, three phase with or without neutral and balanced 

three-phase connection via 1 current transformer only 

– Usage with potential transformers for voltages >830VAC 

– Operating frequency: 45-65Hz 

– TRMS measurements up to 22° harmonic order, 

class 1 accuracy 

– Power factor and cosϕ measure 

– Voltage and current harmonic analysis per phase up to 

22° harmonic order 

– Electric meters of active energy (import-export) 

– Electric meters of reactive energy (inductive-capacitive) 

– Housing: flush mount 3.8x3.8in (96x96mm) for 

DMK 3...and DMK 40; modular for DMK 6... 

– Degree of protection: 

IP54 on front for DMK 3... and DMK 40 

IP41 on front for DMK 6... 

IP 20 at rear. 




IEC/EN 61000-6-2, CISPR11/EN 55011. 

Dimensions 

page D-31 


page W-19 




page TC-45

electric 

Current 

transformers 

DM1T 

DM2T 



Primary Burden Catalog Price 

Current Class 0.5 Class 1 number 

[/5A] [VA] [VA] $ each 

For Ø0.87in / 22mm wire. 

40 - 1 DM1T 0040 34.00 

50 - 1 DM1T 0050 34.00 

60 - 1 DMIT 0060 34.00 

80 1.5 3 DM1T 0080 34.00 

100 1.5 3 DM1T 0100 34.00 

150 1.5 3 DM1T 0150 34.00 

For Ø0.91in / 23mm wire. 

For 1.2X0.9in / 30X10mm, 1X0.6in / 25X15mm, 

0.8X0.6in / 20X15mm busbars. 

60 - 1 DM2T 0060 36.00 

80 - 1 DM2T 0080 36.00 

100 - 1 DM2T 0100 36.00 

150 - 1 DM2T 0150 36.00 

200 1.5 3 DM2T 0200 36.00 

250 1.5 3 DM2T 0250 36.00 

300 1.5 3 DM2T 0300 39.00 

400 1.5 4 DM2T 0400 39.00 

For 1.6X0.9in / 40X10mm, 1.2X0.8in / 30X20mm, 

1X1in / 25X25mm busbars. 

200 2 4 DM3T 0200 51.00 

250 2.5 5 DM3T 0250 51.00 

300 4 6 DM3T 0300 63.00 

400 5 6 DM3T 0400 63.00 

500 6 10 DM3T 0500 70.00 

600 6 12 DM3T 0600 70.00 

800 8 15 DM3T 0800 89.00 

1000 10 20 DM3T 1000 89.00 

S1 S2 

K L 

P1-K 

S1 S2 

K L 

13-9 


The DM...T series current transformers (CT) are installed 

in electric systems to reduce the line current to a 

secondary value of 5A, which is compatible with current 

inputs of digital multimeters or protection relays. 

These are without primary winding and are used for high 

primary current values from 40A upward. 

Suitable for screw fixing or mounting on 35mm DIN rail 

(IEC/EN 60715), using the standard-supplied kit. 

The number of loops of the primary cable does not 

modify the accuracy but converts the primary current 

value proportional to secondary current. 

S1 S2 

K L 

P1-K 

300 / 5A standard 

1 loop = 300 / 5A 

300 / 5A 

2 loops = 150 / 5A 

300 / 5A 

3 loops = 100 / 5A 

DM3T 

P1-K 


– Operating frequency: 40-60Hz 

– Secondary output current: 5A 

– Overload withstand: 1.2 In 

– Rated dynamic current Idyn: 2.5 rated Ith current for 

1 second 

– Insulation (dry type): class E 


• Operating temperature: -4...+122°F (-20 ... +50°C) 

• Storage temperature: -40...+176°F (-40 ... +80°C) 

• Relative humidity: 90%, no condensation 

• Degree of protection: IP30. 


No UL listing or recognition. 


13 

Dimensions 

page D-31 



PAGE 14-2 

ADXM06BP - ADXM12BP - ADXM18BP 

• Rated starter current Ie 6 to 18A ratings 

• Rated motor power 1.5 to 10HP up to 600VAC 

• Integrated by-pass relay 

• Adjustable acceleration and deceleration time 

and initial torque 

• LED indicators for starter status 

• 35mm DIN rail mounting. 

PAGE 14-3 

ADXM25BP - ADXM45BP 

• Rated starter current Ie 25 to 45A ratings 

• Rated motor power 10 to 40HP up to 600VAC 

• Integrated by-pass relay 

• Total protection against over temperature 

• LED indicators for starter status 

• Adjustable acceleration and deceleration time 

and initial torque 

• 35mm DIN rail mounting. 



14 

SOFT STARTERS 

6 to 45A starter ratings 

Internal by-pass relay 

Two-pole switching 

Soft start and stop 

Initial torque control for smooth 

and gradual starting 

Total integrated motor protection. 

PLANET -LOGIC 

Soft starters 

SEC. PAGE 

1.5 to 10HP ratings up to 600VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14- 2 

10 to 40HP ratings up to 600VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14- 3 



14-2 

Soft starters 

electric 

ADXM...BP type Motor rating Rated starter Catalog Price 

Three-phase current Ie number ❶❷ 

power 

51 ADXM 06BP 

51 ADXM 12BP 

51 ADXM 18BP 

[HP] [kW] [A in AC-53b] $ each 

With integrated by-pass relay. 

220VAC motor voltage. 

1.5 1.1 6 51 ADXM 06BP A220 579.00 

3 3 12 51 ADXM 12BP A220 707.00 

5 4 18 51 ADXM 18BP A220 783.00 


7.5 5.5 12 51 ADXM 12BP A480 707.00 


10 7.5 12 51 ADXM 12BP A600 707.00 

ADXM 06/12/12B adjustments 

➀ Ramp-up time 0.5 to 10s. Time from zero to full load voltage. 

➁ Ramp-down time 0.5 to 20s. Time from full load voltage to zero. 

➂ Initial torque 0 to 85% voltage at the beginning of the ramp-up function. 

Starting and stopping time as well as initial torque can be independently 

adjusted by built-in potentiometers. 

Led indication 

Motor voltage 

Time 

Description LED color Inscription 

Power supply on Green POWER ON 

Ramp up/down Yellow RAMPING 

(constantly on) 

By-pass relay Yellow BY-PASS 



ADXM...BP is a compact soft starter, for three-phase 

squirrel-cage motors; it soft starts and soft stops rated 

motor load currents up to 18A. 

The soft starter reduces the mechanical load on motors, 

shafts, gearboxes and drive belts. 

The internal by-pass relay of the starter eliminates the 

need for external heatsinks thereby reducing space 

requirements in panels and generated heat. 


– Suitable for three-phase induction motors up to 

10HP/7.5kW at 600V 

– 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715) 

– Integrated by-pass relay 

– Low in-rush current and reduced vibrations during 

starting 

– Simple programming and installation 

– Ideal for conveyor belts, compressors, pumps, 

hoisting equipment, blowers, fans and mixers. 


– Number of controlled phases: Two 

– Controlled operational voltage L1-L2.L3: 

220VAC -15/+10% for ADXM...BP A220 types ❶ 

480VAC -15/+10% for ADXM 12BP A480 ❷ 

600VAC -15/+10% for ADXM 12BP A600 ❷ 

– Rated AC frequency: 50/60Hz ±10% (self-configurable) 

– Auxiliary control power: A1-A2 - 24-110VAC/DC ±15% 

A1-A3 - 110-480VAC ±15% 

– Min-max control input current: 1-5mA 

– Method of starting and stopping: Voltage control 

– Start time adjustment - ramp up: 0.5 to 10 seconds 

– Stop time adjustment - ramp down: 0.5 to 20 seconds 

– Start torque adjustment - initial torque: 0-85% voltage 

– Minimum operating current: 250mA 

– Termination: 

• Line: 6 cage clamp type with M4 screw 

• Secondary: 7 cage clamp type with M3 screw 

– Conductor cross section: 

• Line: 14...8 AWG / flexible 2.5...10mm 2 or 2 - 4mm 2 

• Secondary: 22...12 AWG / flexible 0.5...1.5mm 2 

– Maximum tightening torque (tool): 

• Line: 22lbin / 2.5Nm (Pozidrive 2) 

• Secondary: 4.5lbin / 0.5Nm (Phillips 0) 


– Natural cooling system 




• Relative humidity:

electric 

Soft starters 14-3 

ADXM...BP type Motor rating Rated starter Catalog Price 

Three-phase current Ie number ❶❷ 

power 

51 ADXM 25BP 

51 ADXM 45BP 

[HP] [kW] [A in AC-53b] $ each 

With integrated by-pass relay. 


10 5.5 25 51 ADXM 25BP A220 978.00 

15 11 45 51 ADXM 45BP A220 2106.00 


20 15 25 51 ADXM 25BP A480 978.00 

30 30 45 51 ADXM 45BP A480 2106.00 


25 18.5 25 51 ADXM 25BP A600 978.00 

40 30 45 51 ADXM 45BP A600 2106.00 

ADXM 25/45BP adjustments 

Motor voltage 

Time 

➀ Ramp-up time 1 to 10s. Time from zero to full load voltage. 

➁ Ramp-down time 1 to 30s. Time from full load voltage to zero. 

➂ Initial torque 0 to 70% voltage at the beginning of the ramp-up function. 

Starting and stopping time as well as initial torque can be independently 

adjusted by built-in potentiometers. 

Led indication 

Description LED color Inscription 

Power supply on Green POWER ON 

Ramp up/down Yellow RAMPING 

(flashing) 

By-pass relay Yellow BYPASS 


Over temperature Red OVERHEAT 

inside starter (flashing) 

Over temperature Red 

in motor (PTC) (constantly on) 

Wrong phase Red WRONG SEQ 

sequence ❸ (flashing) 

Phase failure/loss ❸ Red PHASE LOSS 

(fast flashing) 

Voltage too low Red 

(slow flashing) 

❸ These protections are active at power on only. 


ADXM...BP is a compact soft starter, for three-phase 

squirrel-cage motors; it soft starts and soft stops rated 

motor load currents up to 45A. 

The soft starter reduces the mechanical load on motors, 

shafts, gearboxes and drive belts. 

The internal by-pass relay of the starter eliminates the 

need for external heatsinks thereby reducing space 

requirements in panels and generated heat. 


– Suitable for three-phase induction motors up to 

40HP/30kW at 600V 

– 35mm DIN rail mounting (IEC/EN 60715) 

– Integrated by-pass relay 

– Low in-rush current and reduced vibrations during 

starting 

– Full protection against over temperature 

– Simple programming and installation 

– Ideal for conveyor belts, compressors, pumps, 

hoisting equipment, blowers, fans and mixers. 


– Number of controlled phases: Two 

– Controlled operational voltage L1-L2.L3: 

220VAC -15/+10% for ADXM...BP A220 types ❶ 

480VAC -15/+10% for ADXM...BP A480 ❷ 

600VAC -15/+10% for ADXM...BP A600 ❷ 

– Rated AC frequency: 50/60Hz ±10% (self-configurable) 

– Auxiliary control power: 

A1-A2 24-550VAC/DC ±15% for ADXM...BP A220 

and A480 

A1-A2 24-600VAC/DC +10% for ADXM...BP A600 

– Min-max control input current: 1-5mA 

– Method of starting and stopping: Voltage control 

– Start time adjustment - ramp up: 1 to 10 seconds 

– Stop time adjustment - ramp down: 1 to 30 seconds 

– Start torque adjustment - initial torque: 0-70% voltage 

– Minimum operating current: 500mA 

– Termination: 

• Line: 6 cage clamp type with M5 screw 

• Secondary: 7 cage clamp type with M3 screw 

– Conductor cross section: 

• Line: 14...4 AWG / flexible 0.75...16mm 2 

• Secondary: 22...14 AWG / flexible 0.75...2.5mm 2 

– Maximum tightening torque : 

• Line: 22lbin / 2.5Nm 

• Secondary: 4.5lbin / 0.5Nm 


– Natural cooling system 




• Relative humidity:

PAGE 15-2 

DCRK 

• Digital programming 

• 5 or 7 step configuration in 96x96mm housing 

• 8 or 12 step configuration in 144x144mm 

housing 

• Capacitor overload protection 

• Internal panel temperature sensor 

• TTL/RS232 programming interface 

• Automatic set-up function 

• Configurable alarms. 

PAGE 15-3 

DCRJ 


• 8 or 12 step configurationin 144x144mm 

housing 

• Dual displays 

• Independent voltage measure input 


• Internal-external panel temperature sensor 

• RS232 programming and supervision interface 

• RS485 supervision interface 

• Voltage and current harmonics measures 

• Event log 

• Automatic set-up function (adjustable) 

• Configurable alarms 

• Suitable for medium voltage systems. 

PAGE 15-3 

DCRJF (STATIC OUTPUTS) 


• 11 step + 1 alarm configuration in 144x144mm 

housing 

• Dual displays 

• Independent voltage measure input 


• Internal-external panel temperature sensor 

• RS232 programming and supervision interface 

• Voltage and current harmonics measures 

• Event log 

• Configurable alarms. 

DESCRIPTION DCRK DCRJ DCRJ12F 

Front plate 

3-digit display ● ● ● 

4-digit display supplement ● ● 

4 operation keys ● ● ● 

1 function key ● ● 

7 LED indicators for main functions and measures ● 

14 LED indicators for main functions and measures ● ● 

Control - Functions 

Automatic recognition of current flow ● ● ● 

4-quadrant operation ● ● ● 

Independent voltage input ● ● 

Three-phase voltage control ● ● 

Medium-voltage usage ● ● 

Phase-Neutral connection in 3-phase systems ● ● 

Programmable input as functional ● ● 

or remote temperature sensor 

Keypad lock ● ● ● 

TTL/RS232 communication interface 

● 

RS232 communication interface ● ● 

Isolated RS485 communication interface ● ● 

Automatic set-up function (adjustable) ● ● 

Easy current transformer setting function ● ● ● 

Set-up and automatic panel test software ● ● 

Remote supervision software ● ● 

Real time clock with back-up battery ● ● 

Current and voltage waveform captures, ● ● 

related to harmonic events 

Events logging such as: alarms, power ON, ● ● 

power OFF, set-up changes, etc. 

Measurements 

Instantaneous displacement power factor (cosϕ) ● ● ● 

Instantaneous and average weekly power factor ● ● ● 

Voltage and current ● ● ● 

Reactive power to reach set-point value ● ● ● 

Total reactive power ● ● ● 

Capacitor overload ● ● ● 

Electric panel temperature ● ● ● 

Maximum voltage and current value ● ● ● 

Maximum capacitor overload value ● ● ● 

Maximum panel temperature value ● ● ● 

Maximum capacitor temperature value ● ● 

Active and apparent power ● ● 

Current and voltage harmonic analysis ● ● 

Current and voltage harmonic waveform ● ● 

logged at overload events 

Step “var” value ● ● 

Number of switching measures per step ● ● 

Protection functions 

Voltage too high and too low ● ● ● 

Current too high and too low ● ● ● 

Over compensation (capacitors disconnected ● ● ● 

and cosϕ higher than set-point) 

Under compensation (capacitors connected ● ● ● 

and cosϕ lower than set-point) 

Capacitor overload ● ● ● 

Capacitor overload on all 3 phases ● ● 

Over temperature ● ● ● 

No-voltage release protection ● ● ● 

Capacitor bank failure ● ● 

Over maximum harmonic distortion level limit ● ● 

Programmable alarm properties ● ● ● 

(enable, trip delay, relay energising, etc.) 



15 

AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CONTROLLERS 

Microprocessor supervision 

and control 

Accurate current evaluation 

with RMS readings 

Automatic intelligent adjustment 

Version with 5, 7, 8 or 12 steps 

Use in co-generation systems 

Communication serial interfaces 

ASCII and Modbus®-RTU 

communication protocols. 

PLANET -LOGIC 

Automatic power factor controllers 

SEC. PAGE 

DCRK series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15- 2 

DCRJ series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15- 3 



15-2 


electric 

DCRK Series 

DCRK5 

DCRK8 

Example of main window frame using DCRK SW software 

Flush-mount Steps Catalog Price 

housing size 

number 

[mm] n° $ each 

96x96 5 DCRK 5 460 480.00 

96x96 7 DCRK 7 460 540.00 

144x144 8 DCRK 8 460 765.00 

144x144 12 DCRK 12 460 885.00 

96x96mm = 3.78x3.78in 

144x144mm = 5.67x5.67in 


number 

$ each 

Software. 

Set-up and automatic test software DCRK SW 430.00 

complete with 51 C11 connecting 

wire 

Accessories and spare parts. 

PC ↔ DCRK connecting wire for 51 C11 230.00 

TTL/RS232 communication port, 


IP54 front sealable cover for 31 PA96X96 34.00 

DCRK5 and DCRK7 

IP54 front protective cover for 31 PACR 40.00 

DCRK8 and DCRK12 


– 5, 7, 8 and 12 step versions, the last two of which are 

programmable as alarm and/or fan control 

– Digital microprocessor regulator for automatic power 

factor correction systems with output relays for the 

connection and disconnection of capacitor banks 

– For co-generation systems; 4 quadrant operation 

– Accurate and reliable power factor control of a system 

even in presence of high current and voltage 

harmonic content 

– Provides for increased capacitor life by intelligent 

control of the capacitor operation and connection time 

– RMS voltage and current measurements 

– Average weekly power factor measurement (last 7 

days) 

– Adjustable tripping sensitivity, integral switching time 

– Adjustable reconnection time delay 

– No-voltage release protection 

– Protection against capacitor overload and panel 

overheating 

– Automatic set-up function 

– TTL-RS232 interface with personal computer for: 

fast set-up, function and alarm personalizing and 

automatic electric panel testing 

– Installation ease with the use of one external current 

transformer only. 


– Voltage circuit 

• Input and control power Ue: 440-480VAC 

(220-240VAC or 380-415VAC or 480-525VAC on 

request) 

• Rated frequency: 50/60Hz ±1% self configurable 

• Power consumption: 6.2VA (DCRK5 and DCRK7) 

5VA (DCRK8 and DCRK12) 

– Current circuit 

• Rated current Ie: 5A (1A on request) 

• Overload peak: 20Ie for 10ms 

• Power consumption: 0.65W 

– Measurements and controls 

• Power factor adjustment: 

0.8 inductive - 0.8 capacitive 

• Voltage measurement range: -15 to +10% Ue 

• Current measurement range: 2.5 to 120% Ie 

• Temperature measurement range: -22 to +185°F 

(-30 to +85°C) 

• Capacitor overload current range: 0-250% 

• Type of voltage and current measurement: RMS 

• Reconnection time of same step: 5-240s 

• Tripping sensitivity: 5-600s/step 

– Output relays 

• 5, 7, 8 or 12 steps, the last of which is isolated 

• Contact configuration: Normally Open (NO); the last 

contact of DCRK8-DCRK12 is double throw 

• Rated current Ith: 5A 250VAC (AC1) 

• Maximum capacity of common terminal: 12A 

• Rated operational voltage: 250VAC 

• UL designation: B300 

• Maximum switchable voltage: 440VAC 

– Housing 

• Flush mounting 

• Degree of protection on front: 

IP54 for DCRK5 and DCRK7. 

IP41 for DCRK8 and DCRK12; IP54 with protective 

cover 

15 




IEC/EN 61000-6-2, CISPR 11/EN 55011. 

Special contactors for power factor correction 

See section 3, page 3-8. 

Dimensions 

page D-32 


page W-19 




page TC-46

electric 

Automatic power factor controllers 15-3 

DCRJ series 

DCRJ8 

Example of main window frame using DCRJ SW software 

Flush-mount Steps Catalog Price 

housing size 

number 

[mm] n° $ each 

Version with relay outputs. 

144x144 8 DCRJ 8 1235.00 

144x144 12 DCRJ 12 1320.00 

Version with static outputs. 

144x144 11+1 relay DCRJ12F 1650.00 

output 

144x144mm = 5.67x5.67in 


number 

$ each 

Software. 

Set-up / automatic test / remote DCRJ SW 950.00 

control software complete with 

51 C2 connecting wire 

Accessories and spare parts. 

PC ↔ DCRJ connecting 51 C2 60.00 

cable, 6ft (1.8m) long 

PC ↔ 4 PX1 converter 51 C4 65.00 


DCRJ ↔ Analog modem 51 C5 69.00 

connecting cable, 6ft (1.8m) long❶ 

4 PX1 ↔ Analog modem 51 C9 83.00 



opto-isolated, 110-120VAC❷ 

Temperature sensor NTC 01 36.00 

Front protective cover, 31 PACR 40.00 

IP54 protection 

❶ “3Com-U.S. Robotics” 56k V.92 modem with RS232 interface, complete with 

PC connecting cable, compatible with LOVATO ELECTRIC remote control 

software. 

❷ RS232/RS485 opto-isolated converter drive, 38,400 Baud-rate maximum, 

automatic or manual TRANSMIT line supervision. 


– 8 and 12 step versions (DCRJ8-DCRJ12), the last two 

of which are programmable as alarm and/or fan control 

– Version (DCRJ12F) with 11 static output plus 1 alarm 

relay output 

– Digital microprocessor regulator for automatic power 

factor correction systems with output relays for the 

connection and disconnection of capacitor banks 

– For medium voltage systems (separate voltage input) 

and co-generation (4 quadrant operation) 

– Accurate and reliable power factor control of a system 

even in presence of high current and voltage harmonic 

content 

– Provides for increased capacitor life by inteligent 

control of the capacitor operation and connection time 

– RMS voltage and current measure 

– Measure of average weekly power factor (last 7 days), 

capacitor overload, electric panel temperature, voltage 

and current harmonic content 

– Event viewing when harmonic overload limit exceeded 

– Harmonic content analysis of logged events complete 

with relative waveforms 

– Adjustable tripping sensitivity, integral switching time 

– Adjustable reconnection time delay (DCRJ8-DCRJ12) 

– No-voltage release protection 

– Protection against capacitor overload and panel 

overheating 

– Panel temperature sensor 

– Connection to remote NTC temperature sensor 

– Automatic set-up function (programmable on DCRJ8 

and DCRJ12) 

– RS232 and RS485 serial ports 

– Remote supervision software for personal computer 

interface and supervision for: fast set-up, function and 

alarm customising and automatic electric panel testing 

– Modbus ® -RTU and ASCII communication protocols 

– Configuration of mixed static and electromechanical 

steps (DCRJ12F). 


– Supply circuit 

• Dual control power Ue: 110-127 / 220-240VAC 

• Rated frequency: 50/60Hz ±5% self configurable 

• Power consumption:9.7VA for DCRJ8-DCRJ12; 

9.2VA for DCRJ12F 

– Voltage circuit 

• Three phases without neutral 

• Measuring rated voltage: 100-690VAC 

– Current circuit 

• Rated current Ie: 5A (1A on request) 

• Overload peak: 20Ie for 10ms 

• Power consumption: 0.3VA 

– Measurements and controls 

• Type of voltage and current measurement: RMS 

• Voltage measurement range: 85-760VAC 

• Current measurement range: 2.5 to 120% Ie 

• External temperature measurement range: 

-40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C) 

• Capacitor overload current range: 0-250% 

• Power factor adjustment: 0.8 inductive - 0.8 capacitive 

• Reconnection time of same step: 5-240s for DCRJ8- 

DCRJ12 only 

• Tripping sensitivity: 5-600s/step 

• Sampling time: ≈20ms for DCRJ12F 

– Output relays for DCJ8-DCRJ12 

• 8 or 12 steps, the last of which is isolated 

• Contact configuration: Normally Open (NO); the last 

of which is double throw 

• Rated current Ith: 5A 250VAC (AC1) 

• Maximum capacity of common terminal: 12A 

• Rated operational voltage: 250VAC 

• UL designation: B300 

• Maximum switchable voltage: 440VAC 

– Outputs for DCRJ12F 

• 11 static outputs for static contactors control 

• 1 alarm relay output 

• Opto-isolated bi-directional static outputs (Opto-Mosfet) 

• Maximum operational voltage: 40VDC; 30VAC 

• Maximum operational current: 55mA 

– Housing 

• Flush mounting 

• Degree of protection on front: IP41; IP54 with 

protective cover. 




IEC/EN 61000-6-2, CISPR 11/EN 55011. 

Special contactors for power factor correction 

See section 3, page 3-8. 

15 

Dimensions 

page D-32 


page W-19 




page TC-46

PAGE 16-2 

ATL20 

• Automatic transfer switch controller with 

RS232 port 

• AC/DC auxiliary supply. 

PAGE 16-3 

ATL30 

• Automatic transfer switch controller with 

RS232 and RS485 ports 

• Real time clock 

• AC/DC auxiliary supply. 



16 

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROLLERS 

Supervision of two supply lines 

Emergency demand supervision for 

stand-by generating set 

Supervision of motorized manual 

starters 

Event logging 

TRMS measures of voltage values 

Microprocessor remote control and 

supervision 

RS232 and RS485 serial ports 

Modbus ® -RTU and Modbus ® -ASCII 

communication protocols 

Real time clock. 

PLANET -LOGIC 

Automatic transfer switch controllers 

SEC. PAGE 

ATL20 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16- 2 

ATL30 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16- 3 




16-2 

electric 

Standard version 

with RS232 port 

ATL20 A120 


number 

$ each 

Controller with RS232 port ATL20 A120 1255.00 

Software. 

Set-up software complete ATL SW 965.00 

with 51 C2 cable 

Accessories. 

PC ↔ ATL connecting cable, 9ft (2.8m) 51 C2 60.00 

long, for RS232/TTL communication 

Front IP54 protective cover 31 PACR 40.00 


The automatic transfer switch controller ATL is used for 

the automatic switching of the load from the MAIN LINE 

to a stand-by or emergency SECONDARY LINE and vice 

versa. 

It is made of a single unit in an insulated housing and 

has two outputs for the “automatic” and/or “manual” 

control of contactors or motorized manual starters. 

The controller has the following main features: 

– Dual supply input: One for AC and the other for 

battery supply 

– Measure inputs of three-phase plus neutral voltages, 

also suitable for 1 and 2-phase lines 

– 2 displays to view main and secondary line measures 

– 22 status LED indicators 

– 8 digital inputs, 6 of which programmable 

– 7 relay outputs, 5 of which programmable 

– 4 operating modes: OFF-MAN-AUT-TEST 

– Viewing of phase and phase-to-phase line voltage 

measures 

– Viewing of motorized manual starters or contactors 

status 

– Configuration programming of lines and control 

parameters 

– Emergency demand supervision parameter 

programming for stand-by generating sets 

– Microprocessor supervision of functions 

– RS232 communication interface 

– Modbus ® -RTU and Modbus ® -ASCII communication 

protocols 

– Set-up and remote control software via direct PC 

connection, desk or GSM modem or Ethernet 

network. 

CONTROL FUNCTIONS OF THE LINES 

– Phase sequence and phase loss 

– Minimum and maximum voltage 

– Voltage asymmetry 

– Minimum and maximum frequency. 


– Auxiliary supply 

• Control power: 12-24-48VDC and 110-120VAC 

• Operating range: 9-70VDC; 93.5-132VAC 

• Power consumption: 6VA at 120VAC 

• Power dissipation: 2.8W at 48VDC or 120VAC 

• Current consumption: 420mA at 12VDC; 200mA at 

24VDC; 100mA at 48VDC 

• Frequency range: 45-65Hz. 

– Voltage measurement inputs 

• Rated voltage Ue: 690VAC phase-phase; 400VAC 

phase-neutral 

• Measurement range: 80-800VAC phase-phase 


– Digital inputs 

• Negative type of inputs 

• Input current: ≤10mA. 

– Relay outputs 

• 2 relay outputs, each with 1 N/O contact rated 

B300/16A AC1 at 250VAC 


B300/8A 8A AC1 at 250VAC 

• 2 relay outputs, each with 1 SPDT contact rated 

B300/8A AC1 at 250VAC; 1A 30VDC pilot duty. 

– Housing 

• Flush-mount 5.7x5.7in (144x144mm) version 

• Degree of protection: 

– IP20 at rear 

– IP41 on front, without protective cover 

– IP54 on front, complete with protective cover. 

16 

Certfications and compliance 


Compliant with stadards: IEC/EN 60947-1, 

IEC/EN60947-6-1, IEC/EN61000-6-3, IEC/EN61000-6-2. 

Dimensions 

page D-33 


page W-20 




page TC-47

electric 

Automatic transfer switch controllers 16-3 

Version with 

RS232 and RS485 

opto-isolated 

ports 

ATL30 A120 


number 

$ each 

Controller with RS232 and RS485 ports ATL30 A120 1506.00 

and RTC 

Software. 

Set-up software complete with 51 C2 ATL SW 965.00 

cable 

Accessories. 

PC ↔ ATL connecting cable, 9ft (2.8m) 51 C2 60.00 

long 

PC ↔ 4 PX1 converter connecting 51 C4 65.00 


ATL ↔ Analog modem connecting 51 C5 69.00 


ATL ↔ 4 PX1 converter connecting 51 C6 60.00 


PC ↔ Analog modem connecting 51 C9 83.00 




Front IP54 protective cover 31 PACR 40.00 


The automatic transfer switch controller ATL is used for 

the automatic switching of the load from the MAIN LINE 

to a stand-by or emergency SECONDARY LINE and vice 

versa. 

It is made of a single unit in an insulated housing and 

has two outputs for the “automatic” and/or “manual” 

control of contactors or motorized manual starters. 

The controller has the following main features: 

– Dual supply input: One for AC and the other for 

battery supply 

– Measure inputs of three-phase plus neutral voltages 

also suitable for 1 and 2-phase lines 

– 2 displays to view main and secondary line measures 

– 22 status LED indicators 

– 8 digital inputs, 6 of which programmable 

– 7 relay outputs, 5 of which programmable 

– 4 operating modes: OFF-MAN-AUT-TEST 

– Viewing of phase and phase-to-phase line voltage 

measures 

– Viewing of motorized manual starters or contactors 

status 

– Configuration programming of lines and control 

parameters 

– Supervision parameter programming for emergency 

demand of generating sets 

– Microprocessor supervision of functions 

– RS232 communication interface 

– RS485 opto-isolated communication interface 

– Modbus ® -RTU and Modbus ® -ASCII communication 

protocols 

– Set-up and remote control software via direct PC 

connection or via normal modem or GSM modem or 

Ethernet network. 

CONTROL FUNCTIONS OF THE LINES 

– Phase sequence and phase loss 

– Minimum and maximum voltage 

– Voltage asymmetry 

– Minimum and maximum frequency. 


– Auxiliary supply 

• Control power: 12-24-48VDC and 110-120VAC 

• Operating range: 9-70VDC; 93.5-132VAC 

• Power consumption: 6VA at 120VAC 

• Power dissipation: 2.8W at 48VDC or 240VAC 

• Current consumption: 420mA at 12VDC; 200mA at 

24VDC; 100mA at 48VDC 


– Voltage measurement inputs 

• Rated voltage Ue: 690VAC phase-phase 

(400VAC phase-neutral) 

• Measurement range: 80-800VAC phase-phase 



• Negative type of input 

• Input current: ≤10mA. 

– Relay outputs 


B300/16A AC1 at 250VAC 


B300/8A AC1 at 250VAC 

• 2 relay outputs, each with 1 SPDT contact rated 

B300/8A AC1 at 250VAC; 1A 30VDC pilot duty. 

– Housing 

• Flush-mount 5.7x5.7in (144x144mm) version 

• Degree of protection: 

– IP20 at rear 

– IP41 on front, without protective cover 

– IP54 on front, complete with protective cover. 

Certfications and compliance 


Compliant with stadards: IEC/EN 60947-1, 

IEC/EN60947-6-1, IEC/EN61000-6-3, IEC/EN61000-6-2. 

16 

Dimensions 

page D-33 


page W-20 




page TC-47

PAGE 17-2 

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC RELAYS 

• Versions with: 

6 inputs + 4 outputs 



• 24VDC, 24VAC or 110-240VAC control power 

• Relay or transistor outputs. 

PAGE 17-2 

EXPANSION MODULES 

• Variants with a total of 8 inputs/outputs 

• 24VDC, 24VAC or 110-240VAC control power 

• Relay or transistor outputs. 

PAGE 17-2 

STARTER KITS 

• Complete kit to begin using the programmable 

relays 

• Each equipped with LRD relay, programmingsupervision 

software and connecting cable. 

PAGE 17-3 

LOGIC RELAY ACCESSORIES 

• Communication and memory modules 

• Power supply unit 

• Supervision software. 

LOGIC FUNCTIONS 

10 different operating modes: 

– AND - Consent simultaneity (series connection of contact) 

– AND - Consent simultaneity with edge evaluation 

– NAND - No simultaneity (parallel connection of contact) 

– NAND - Simultaneity loss with edge evaluation 

– OR - At least one consent (parallel connection of contact) 

– NOR - No consents (series connection of contact) 

– XOR - 2 signals of diverse state (dual changeover contact) 

– NOT - State inverter 

– Pulse - Pulse output 

– SR - Two distinct signals for permanent enable and 

disable. 

TIMERS (15 maximum) 


– ON delay - standard 

– ON delay - sum of time at enable and reset signals 

– OFF delay - output enable on up time, off on down time 

– OFF delay - output enable and off on down input 

– Recycle - input signal always enabled (equal timing) 

– Recycle - output enable on input and enable resets up 

time (equal timing) 

– Recycle - on-off intervals with independent timing. 

RTC - REAL TIME CLOCK (15 maximum) 


– Daily - choice of days of the week (from ... to) and daily 

hours (from ... to) 

– Weekly - choice of week day and hours to begin and end 

of week day 

– Yearly - choice of date to begin and end. 

COUNTERS (15 maximum) 

8 different operating modes (up and down): 

– Without over-counting and no retain at power loss 

– With over-counting function and no retain at power loss 

– Without over-counting and retain function at power loss 

– With over-counting and retain function at power loss 

– With over-counting and no retain at power loss and reset 

to 0 

– With over-counting and retain function at power loss and 

reset to 0 

– High speed counter 

– Frequency comparison. 

ANALOG COMPARATORS (15 maximum) 


– Comparators for analog inputs 

– Comparators for analog inputs and constants 



17 

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC RELAYS 

Suitable for small automated and 

control systems 

Quick and easy to program, 

versatile and expandable 

Activation of logic control, timer, 

counter, real time clock, analog 

comparators functions 

FBD and LADDER program 

language logic. 

PLANET -LOGIC 

SEC. PAGE 


Base control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 2 

Expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 2 

Starter kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 2 

Accessories 

Communication, backup memory and power supply units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 3 

Software, connecting cable, manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17- 3 



17-2 


® 

electric 

Relay modules 

with RS232 port 

Control RTC Catalog Price 

power 

number 

INPUTS 

OUTPUTS 

Total Digital/Analog❷ Digital 

(0-10VDC) 

$ each 

n° n° n° Type 

Base control modules. 

24VDC Yes LRD12R D024 295.00 

8 2 4 Relay 

24VDC Yes LRD12T D024 288.00 

8 2 4 Transistor 

24VDC Yes LRD20R D024 435.00 

12 4 8 Relay 

24VDC Yes LRD20T D024 420.00 


24VAC Yes LRD12R A024 310.00 

8 0 4 Relay 

LRD10R A240 

24VAC Yes LRD20R A024 435.00 

100-240VAC Yes LRD10R A240 310.00 

12 0 8 Relay 

6 0 4 Relay 

100-240VAC Yes LRD20R A240 435.00 

12 0 8 Relay 

Expansion modules. 

24VDC No LRE08R D024 175.00 

4 0 4 Relay 

24VDC No LRE08T D024 165.00 


24VAC No LRD08R A024 175.00 

4 0 4 Relay 

100-240VAC No LRE08R A240 175.00 

4 0 4 Relay 

17 

LRD20R A240 

Expansion modules 

LRE08R A240 

Starter kits 

LRDKIT 10R A024 

Starter kits. 

LR relay kit complete with 8I/4O LRDKIT 12R D024 405.00 

24VDC relay, LRX C00 

connecting cable and LRX SW 

programming / supervision 

software 

LR relay kit complete with 6I/4O LRDKIT 10R A240 420.00 

100-240VAC relay, LRX C00 



software 

LR relay kit complete with 8I/4O LRDKIT 12R A024 420.00 

24VAC relay, LRX C00 



software 

Kinco can be easily adapted to every type of need. The number of 

inputs and outputs of the control module can be directly increased 

by using the expansion modules. 

The programmable relay is compact in size and has an excellent 

performance suitable for the control and supervision of low and 

medium complexity automatisms. 

It can be used in diverse applications, including industrial, 

commercial and residential. It combines the functions of 

numerous traditional devices, such as control relays, timers, 

counters, hour meters and other parts. 

LRD10 

LRD12 

LRD20 

LRE08 

Kinco Expansions Total number of 

Inputs/Outputs 

LRD10 

10 (6 Inputs + 4 Outputs) 

+ LRE08 18 (10 Inputs + 8 Outputs) 

+ LRE08 + LRE08 26 (14 Inputs + 12 Outputs) 

+ LRE08 + LRE08 + LRE08 34 (18 Inputs + 16 Outputs) 

LRD12 





LRD20 





❷ Digital inputs can be used as analog inputs. 


Maximum configuration up to 44 inputs/outputs with a 

control and three expansion modules. 

Main features also include: 

– RS232 serial interface port for PC or program 

back-up memory connection 

– 4-line 12-character display with backlight 

– Programming language logics: Ladder for 200 lines 

maximum or FBD (Function Block Diagram) for 99 

blocks maximum 

– On-board programming languages: Italian, English, 

Spanish, French, German, Portuguese and Chinese 

– PC programming languages: Italian, English, Spanish 


– Control power: 24VDC or 100-240VAC depending on 

module 

– Operating limits: 21.6-26.4VDC; 85-2264VAC 


• Input voltage: 

For state 0:

® 

electric 

Programmable logic relays 17-3 

Accessories 

LRX 1V3 D024 


number 

$ each 

Modbus ® protocol communication LRE P00 480.00 

module 

Power supply switching module, LRX 1V3 D024 150.00 

100-240VAC/24VDC 1.3A 

PC ↔ LRD module connecting LRX C00 140.00 

cable, 5.9ft (1.8m) long 

User’s manual in Italian in CD LRX D00 40.00 

format 

User’s manual in English in CD LRX D01 40.00 

format 

User’s manual in Spanish in CD LRX D02 40.00 

format 

Program back-up memory LRX M00 40.00 

Programming and supervision LRX SW 50.00 

software for PC, in CD format 


The power supply module produces a direct-current 

voltage needed to supply the control and expansion 

modules when a 24VDC power source is not available. 

It can also be used to power eventual other 24VDC 

auxiliary circuits. 

The backup memory allows the user’s program to be 

saved and then simply and quickly transferred to other 

Kinco control modules. 

The communication module implements Modbus ® 

protocol. 

Kinco can be set up and reprogrammed to satisfy new 

requirements or to enhance the operation of a system. 

Programming is simple and intuitive, can be done either 

directly on the relay keypad or by personal computer, 

connected by the interface cable, using the relative 

LRX SW software. 

Kinco has a simulator option. The user can control the 

exactness of the implemented program in off-line 

simulation, directly on the PC, before on-line testing and 

system setup are carried out. 

Base unit inputs state 

123456789ABC 

RUN MO10:31 

Base unit outputs state 

Date and time LRD state 

I/O STATUS 

DATA 


UL listed for USA and Canada, file E300049, for power 

supply module only. 


Expansion inputs state 

123456789ABC 

Expansion outputs state 

19.09.05 Date 

KEY 

MENU 

1123456789ABC 

DEF - 

A1=1.25 

A2=0.00 

A3=2.40 

A4=6.59 

A5=5.35 

A6=0.10 

A7=2.70 

A8=8.32 

Memory, timer, counter, 

RTC and analog 

comparator state 

Value of analog inputs 

Value of analog inputs 

KEY 

I/O STATUS 

PLC STATUS 

TIME 

Analogs 

STATUS 1 

KEY 

ESC 

LADDER---------- 1 

FBD -------------- 2 

RUN -------------- 3 

CLEAR PROG. --- 4 

WRITE------------ 5 

READ------------- 6 

SET--------------- 7 

RTC SET --------- 8 

ANALOG SET ---- 9 

PASSWORD----- 10 

LANGUAGE ----- 11 

INITIAL --------- 12 

ID SET 01 

REMOTE I \O N 

BACKL I GHT x 

7 M K E E P √ 

I \O NUMBER: 0 

I \ O A L A RM : √ 

C K E E P x 

1 

I1-M1----(Q1 

I2- 

Q1-m1----(T1 

8 

RTC SET V1 . 4 

05.09.19 

MO 13:43 

2 

3 

4 

5 

1 

1 

RUN PROG . 

> Y E S 

NO 

CLEAR 

> Y E S 

NO 

WR I T E 

> Y E S 

NO 

10.00 T1 

PROG. 

9 

A1=GA IN: 010 

OFFSET :+00 

A2=GA IN: 010 

OFFSET :+00 

A3=GA IN: 010 

OFFSET :+00 

A4=GA IN: 010 

OFFSET :+00 

PASSWORD 

0000 

10 

11 

ENGL I SH 

FRANCA I S 

ESPANOL 

ITALIANO 

DEUTCH 

PORTUGUES 

CHINESE 

x 

READ 

INITIAL 

6 

> Y E S 

NO 

12 

>LADDER 

FBD 

17 

Dimensions 

page D-33 


page W-21 




page TC-48

Dimensions 



D 

Dimensions 

® 

electric 

® 

electric 




D-2 

Dimensions [mm (in)] 


electric 

Manual starters SM1B 

with front and side-mount auxiliary contacts 

80.5 (3.17") 

18 (0.71") 9 (0.39") 

SMX12 

D 

88 (3.46") 

91 (3.58") 

35.3 

(1.39") 

44.5 (1.75") 

55.5 (2.18") 

SMX14 

SMX15 

SMX16 

44.5 (1.75") 4.8(0.19") 

44.4 (1.75") 

SMX13 11 

23.5 

(0.92") 

72.2 (2.84") 

82.5 (3.25") 

SMX11 11 

SMX11 20 

Manual starters SM1B c/w SMX90 03 connector 

and BG contactors 

44.5 (1.75") 

SM1B c/w SMX31 41 connector 

and BF09A-BF25A contactors 

44.5 (1.75") 85 (3.34") 

SM1B c/w SMX32 41 connector 

and BF26A-BF38A contactors 

44.5 (1.75") 94 (3.70") 

160 (6.30") 

SMX90 03 

184.2 (7.25") 

SMX31 41 

193.2 (7.60") 

SMX32 41 

Enclosures SMX17 10 

with SMX17 30 or SMX17 35 handle 

100 (3.93") 

Ø4.5 (0.17") 

134.4 (5.29") 

109 (4.29") 

SMX17 11 

with SMX17 40 button 

85.4 (3.36") 

Ø4.5 (0.17") 

173 (6.81") 

109 (4.29") 

181.2 (7.13") 

164 (6.45") 

170 (6.69") 

PG16 

42 

(1.65") 

19.2 

(0.75") 

SMX17 3... 

SMX17 40 

SMX17 20 


122 (4.80") 

94 (3.70") 

39.4 

(1.55") 

Cutout 

164 (6.45") 

144 (5.66") 

181.2 (7.13") 

170 (6.69") 

Ø22.5 

(0.88") 

44.1 

(1.73") 

23.1 

(0.91") 

SMX17 3... 

14 (0.55") 

122 (4.80") 



electric 



D-3 

Manual starters SM2A 

with side-mount SMX2... blocks 

10 (0.39") 

SMX22 

17 

(0.67") 20 

(0.79") 

SMX24 

SMX25 

SMX26 

121 (4.76") 

102 (4.2") 

52 (2.05") 

SM2A 


121 (4.76") 

102 (4.2") 

52 (2.05") 

13.11 

(0.52") 1...4 

(0.04...0.16") 

SMX28 05 

SMX28 10 

D 

125 (4.92") 

89 (3.50") 

45 (1.77") 

85 (3.35") 

130 (5.12") 

140 (5.51") 

5 

(0.20") 

5 

(0.20") 

9 (0.35") 

18 (0.71") 

30 

(1.18") 

55 (2.17") 

SMX23 11 

18 (0.71") 

8 (0.31") 

109 (4.29") 

127 (5,00") 

132 (5.20") 

144 (5.67") 

8 (0.31") 

109 (4.29") 

127 (5,00") 

132 (5.20") 

144 (5.67") 

min. 55 (2.16") 

max 327 (12.93") 

33 

(1.3") 

17 (0.69") 

Manual starters SM3A 

with side-mount SMX2... blocks 

SM3A 


12 

SMX22 

(0.47") 

23 (0.91") 

SMX24 

SMX25 

SMX26 

146 (5.75") 

138 (5.43") 

127 (5.00") 

77 (3.03") 

147 (5.78") 

138 (5.43") 

127 (5.00") 

77 (3.03") 

13.11 

(0.52") 1...4 

(0.04...0.16") 

SMX28 05 

SMX28 10 

165 (6.58") 

155 (6.18") 

89 (3.50") 

45 (1.77") 

116 (4.57") 

150 (5.91") 

5 

(0.20") 

5 

(0.20") 

min. 55 (2.16") 

max 327 (12.93") 

33 

(1.3") 

17 (0.69") 

9 (0.35") 

18 (0.71") 

30 

(1.18") 

70 (2.75") 

SMX23 11 

18 

(0.71") 

8 (0.31") 

138 (5.43") 

152 (5.98") 

169 (6.65") 

8 (0.31") 

138 (5.43") 

152 (6.02") 

169 (6.65") 

Manual starters LMS25 

with side-mount LMH LMS contacts 25 con LMH 

45 (1.77") 

30.8 

(1.21") 

9 (0.35") 

80 (3.14") 

75 (2.94") 

35 (1.37") 

45 (1.77") 

4 

(0.16") 

LMH... 

38 (1.49") 

73.5 (2.89") 

83 (3.26") 

Enclosures LMZ111 -- LMZ112 

with LMZ106 LMZ111 stop LMZ111 button - LMZ112 - LMZ112 

Fixing axis 

and drillings 

LMZ113 - LMZ114 

LMZ113 - LMZ114 

LMZ113 LMZ113 - LMZ114 - LMZ114 

with LMZ106 stop button 

Cutout 

80 (3.14") 

95.5 (3.75") 

85 (3.34") 

80 (3.34") 12.5 (0.49") 

60 (2.36") 

55 (2.16") 

135 (5.31") 

M4 

55 (2.16") 

105 (4.13") 

39 (1.53") 

18.5 

(0.73") 

129 (5.07") 

105 (4.13") 

105 (4.13") 

LMZ106 

LMZ106 

M4 

69.5 (2.73") 

69.5 (2.73") 

M25 



D-4 



electric 

Door coupling version GUS with GUSH and GUSS 

6 (0.24") 

min 80 (3.15") 

38 (1.50") 

1...4 

(0.04...0.16") 

‡80 (3.15") 

52 (2.05") 

D 

85 (3.35") 

35 (1.38") 

Ø22.5 (0.89") 

min 10 (0.39") 

max 14 (0.55") 

M4 


DP definitive purpose contactors 

THREE AND FOUR-POLE BG AND DPBG MINI-CONTACTORS AND CONTROL RELAY WITH AC OR DC COIL 

BG mini-contactors or control relay 

DPBG definite purpose contactor 

44 (1.73") 

4.4 (0.17") 

4.4 

(0.17") 

4 (0.16") 

57 (2.24") 

BG and DPBG mini-contactors 

with screw terminals and RF...9 thermal relay 

44 (1.73") 

4 (0.16") 

57 (2.24") 

BGS with front PCB solder pins 

44 

(1.73") 

8.5 (0.34") 

8.5 (0.34") 

8.5 (0.34") 

44 (1.73") 

9.7 

(0.38") 

BGP 

with rear PCB solder pins 

4.4 (0.17") 

34.9 

(1.37") 

4.4 (0.17") 

50 (1.97") 

58 (2.28") 

94.2 (3.7") 

44 (1.73") 

44 (1.73") 

4.4 (0.17") 

34.9 

(1.37") 

BGF 

with Faston terminals 

4.4 

(0.17") 

50 (1.97") 

58 (2.28") 

3.2 

(0.13") 

fl 4 (0.16") 

RF...9 

89.2 (3.51") 

7.6 

(0.3") 

fl1 (0.03") 

5.6 (0.22") 

56 

(2.20") 

50 (1.97") 

53 (2.08") 

58 (2.28") 

28 

(1.10") 

58 (2.28") 

Ø1.4 (0.06")➊ 

50 (1.97") 

58 (2.28") 

8.5 (0.34") 

8.5 (0.34") 

8.5 (0.34") 

9.7 

(0.38") 

56 (2.2") 

5.6 (0.22") 

8.5 (0.34") 

8.5 (0.34") 

8.5 (0.34") 

9.7 

(0.38") 

34.9 

(1.37") 

56 (2.20") 

❶ Recommended PCB drillings 1.7-2mm (0.07-0.08in). 

BF AND DPBF CONTACTORS WITH AC COIL 

BF00A control relay - DPBF09A - DPBF12A - DPBF18A definite purpose and 

BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A contactors four poles 

6.2 

(0.24") 

45 (1.77") 

10.9 

(0.43") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

80.7 (3.17") 

BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A - DPBF09A - DPBF12A - DPBF18A three poles 

with RF..38 thermal relay 

6.2 

(0.24") 

45 (1.77") 

10.9 

(0.43") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

7 

80.7 (3.17") 

35 

(1.38") 

BF26A - BF32A - BF38A - DPBF26A - DPBF32A three poles 


7.9 

(0.31") 

45 (1.77") 

14.6 

(0.57") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

90 (3.54") 

BF26 T - BF32 T❶ - BF38 T - DPBF26T - DPBF32T❶ four poles 

61 (2.4") 

14.6 

(0.57") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

90 (3.54") 

134.8 (5.3") 

80 (3.14") 

90 (3.54") 

80 (3.14") 

90 (3.54") 

71 (2.79") 

81 (3.18") 

126 (4.95") 

71 (2.79") 

81 (3.18") 

8.5 (0.33") 

30 

(1.18") 

35 

(1.38") 

RF...38 

7.9 

(0.31") 14.6 (0.57") 

81.2 (3.19") 

35 

(1.38") 

RF...38 

35 

(1.38") 

❶ DPBF32A fitted with fourth pole BFX42. 

7.9 

(0.31") 14.6 (0.57") 

81.5 (3.2") 



electric 



D-5 

BF50 00 - BF65 00 - BF80 00 - BF95 00 - BF110 00 three-poles 

with RF...95 3 thermal relay 

BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 four poles 

14 

(0.55") 

75 (2.95") 

23.5 

(0.92") 

Ø6 (0.24") 

113.5 (4.47") 

14 

(0.55") 

98 (3.85") 

23.5 (0.92") 

Ø6 (0.24") 

107 (4.21") 

D 

BF CONTACTORS WITH DC COIL 

BF9C - BF12C - BF16C three and four poles❶ 


6.6 

(0.26") 

44 (1.73") 

10.3 

(0.40") 

4.2 (0.17") 

108 (4.25") 

8 

(0.31") 

BF20C - BF25C three and four poles❶ 


54 (2.12") 

13.7 

(0.54") 

4.2 (0.17") 

112.5 (4.43") 

110.4 (4.35") 

60 (2.36") 

75 (2.95") 

114 (4.49") 

60 (2.36") 

78.5 (3.09") 

182 (7.16") 

112 (4.4") 

124 (4.88") 

110 (4.33") 

124 (4.88") 

55 (2.16") 

78 (3.07") 

RF...95 3 

24.6 

(0.97") 

16.5 (0.65") 

111 (4.37") 

35 

(1.38") 

RF...25 

43.7 

(1.72") 

RF...25 

7.5 

(0.29") 12.5 (0.49") 

117.6 (4.63") 

❶ Normally, the thermal relay is mounted with three-pole types only. 

7.5 

(0.29") 12.5 

(0.49") 

119.8 (4.72") 


BF20C - BF25C three and four poles❶ 

with RF..95 1 thermal relay 

8 

(0.31") 

54 (2.12") 

13.7 

(0.54") 

4.2 (0.17") 

112.5 (4.43") 

BF32C 00 - BF40C 00 three poles 


10.5 

(0.41") 

55 (2.16") 

17 

(0.67") 

4.2 (0.17") 

118.6 (4.67") 

133.5 (5.25") 

43.7 

(1.72") 

60 (2.36") 

78.5 (3.09") 

RF...95 1 

120.9 (4.76") 

40 

(1.57") 

75 (2.35") 

88 (3.46") 

RF...25 

11 

16.5 (0.65") 

125.4 (4.93") 

(0.43") 


BF32C 00 - BF40C 00 three poles 

with RF..95 2 thermal relay 

7.5 

(0.29") 12.5 

(0.49") 

BF40C 40 - BF40C 22 four poles 

120.4 (4.73") 

10.5 

(0.41") 

55 (2.16") 

17 

(0.67") 

4.2 (0.17") 

118.6 (4.67") 

11.4 

(0.45") 

74 (2.91") 

17 

(0.67") 

6 (0.24") 

142.5 (5.6") 

138.4 (5.44") 

40 

(1.57") 

75 (2.35") 

88 (3.46") 

55 (2.16") 

80 (3.14") 

92 (3.62") 

RF...95 2 

11 

(0.43") 

16.5 (0.65") 

129.2 (5.08") 



D-6 



electric 

BF50C 00 - BF65C 00 - BF80C 00 - BF95C 00 - BF110C 00 three poles 

with RF..95 3 relay 

BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 four poles 

D 

14 

(0.55") 

75 (2.95") 

23.5 

(0.92") 

6 (0.24") 

150.5 (5.92") 

14 

(0.55") 

98 (3.85") 

23.5 

(0.92") 

6 (0.24") 

144 (5.67") 

B CONTACTORS WITH AC/DC COIL 

B115 - B145 - B180 three poles 

with RF...200 thermal relay 

120 (4.72") 

40 40 

(1.57") (1.57") 

B 

A 

184 (7.23") 

114 (4.48") 4 (0.16") 

150 (5.90") 

170 (6.69") 

120 (4.72") 

150 (5.90") 

170 (6.69") 

182 (7.16") 

112 (4.4") 

124 (4.76") 

110 (4.33") 

124 (4.88") 

55 (2.16") 

RF...95 3 

78 (3.07") 

24.6 

(0.97") 

16.5 (0.65") 

149.5 (5.88") 

322 (12.65") 

M6 

Ø7.5 (0.29") 

90 (3.54") 

CONTACTOR TYPE A B 

B115 M6 15 (0.6") 

B145 M8 20 (0.8") 

B180 M8 20 (0.8") 

20 

(0.79") 40 

(1.57") 

40 

(1.57") 

M8 

56.5 (2.20") 

166.1 (6.53") 

B115 4 - B145 4 - B180 4 four poles 

40 

(1.57") 

A 

160 (6.29") 

40 

(1.57") 

B 

40 

(1.57") 

184 (7.23") 

114 (4.48") 4 (0.16") 

150 (5.90") 

170 (6.69") 

120 (4.72") 

150 (5.90") 

170 (6.69") 

CONTACTOR TYPE A B 

B115 M6 15 (0.6") 

B145 M8 20 (0.8") 

B180 M8 20 (0.8") 

Ø7.5 (0.29") 

M6 

130 (5.11") 



electric 



D-7 


B250 - B310 - B400 three poles 

with RF...420 thermal relay 

145 (5.70") 

47.5 47.5 

(1.87") (1.87") 

M10X35 25 (1") 

219.2 (8.61") 

144 (5.67") 5 (0.2") 

D 

180 (7.08") 

370 (14.54") 

204 (8.03") 

140 (5,51") 

179 (7.04") 

204 (8.03") 

M8 

Ø10 (0.39") 

110 (4.32") 

25 (1") 

47.5 

(1.87") 

47.5 

(1.87") 

M10 

56.8 (2.23") 

166.1 (6.53") 

B250 4 - B310 4 - B400 4 four poles 

47.5 

(1.87") 

192.5 (7.58") 

47.5 

(1.87") 

25 (1") 

47.5 

(1.87") 

219.2 (8.61") 

144 (5.67") 5 (0.2") 

180 (7.08") 

204 (8.03") 

140 (5,51") 

179 (7.04") 

204 (8.03") 

Ø10 (0.39") 

M8 

157.5 (6.19") 



D-8 



electric 


B500 - B630 three poles 

A 

65 

(2.55") 

192 (7.55") 

B 

65 

(2.55") 

263 (10.35") 

177.5 (6.99") 6 (0.23") 

D 

270 (10.6") 

230 (9.05") 

170 (6.70") 

230 (9.05") 

C 

Ø12 (0.47") 

M10 

150 (5.9") 

CONTACTOR TYPE A B C 

B500 M10 35 (1.38") 265 (10.43") 

B630 M12 40 (1.57") 270 (10.63") 

B500 4 - B630 4 four poles 

A 

65 

(2.55") 

B 

257 (10.1") 

65 

(2.55") 

65 

(2.55") 

263 (10.35") 

177.5 (6.99") 6 (0.23") 

270 (10.6") 

230 (9.05") 

170 (6.70") 

230 (9.05") 

C 

Ø12 (0.47") 

M10 

CONTACTOR TYPE A B C 

B500 M10 35 (1.38") 265 (10.43") 

B630 M12 40 (1.57") 270 (10.63") 

215 (8.46") 



electric 



D-9 


B630 1000 three poles 

60 

(2.36") 

65 

(2.55") 

194 (7.62") 

65 

(2.55") 

M12 

147.2 (5.78") 

263 (10.35") 

207.6 (8.16") 

D 

476 (18.74") 

230 (9.05") 

270 (10.63") 

170 (6.70") 

230 (9.05") 

Ø12 (0.47") 

150 (5.9") 

B630 1000 four poles 

60 

(2.36") 

65 

(2.55") 

259 (10.18") 

65 

(2.55") 

65 

(2.55") 

M12 

263 (10.35") 

207.6 (8.16") 

147.2 (5.78") 

476 (18.74") 

230 (9.05") 

270 (10.63") 

170 (6.70") 

230 (9.05") 

Ø12 (0.47") 

215 (8.45") 



D-10 



electric 

B CONTACTORS WITH AC COIL 

B1250 - B1600 three poles 

D 

80 (3.15") 

40 

(1.57") 

540 (21.25") 

500 (16.69") 

130 (5.12") 

M1 

288 (11.34") 

10 (0.39") 

360 (14.17") 

320 (12.6") 

Ø12 (0.47") 

B1250 - B1600 four poles 

670 (26.33") 

630 (24.76") 

80 (3.15") 

40 

130 (5.12") 

(1.57") M1 

288 (11.34") 

10 (0.39") 

360 (14.17") 

320 (12.6") 

Ø12 (0.47") 

B115 - B145 - B180 - B250 - B310 - B400 - B500 - B630 - B630 1000 - B1250 - B1600 

10 (0.39") 

Minimum safety distance 

from metal parts. 

Minimum space needed to replace the coil. 

A 

B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630 1000 

A 120 (4.7”) 145 (5.7”) 170 (6.69”) 

B 100 (3.9”) 110 (4.3”) 160 (6.29”) 

B 

If dimension B is respected, coil replacement is 

possible without removing power wiring. 



electric 



D-11 


BFK09 10A - BFK12 10A - BFK18 10A 

BFK26 00A - BFK32 00A - BFK38 00A 

6.2 

(0.24") 

10.9 (0.43") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

116.6 (4.58") 

7.9 

(0.31") 

14.6 (0.57") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

125.5 (4.93") 

D 

81 (3.19") 

71 (2.79") 

113.5 (4.46") 

90 (3.54") 

80 (3.14") 

123.2 (4.84") 

45 (1.77") 

35 

(1.38") 

45 (1.77") 

35 

(1.38") 

BF50K 00 - BF65K 00 - BF70K 00 - BF80K 00 

13.9 

(0.55") 

23.5 

(0.92") 

Ø6 (0.24") 

148.3 (5.83") 

124 (4.87") 

112 (4.4") 

185 (7.27") 

55 (2.16") 

75 (2.95") 

ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BG MINI-CONTACTORS 

BGX10 auxiliary contacts ❶ 

BGX50 00 interlock with BGX10 or BGXF auxiliary contacts 

and BGX77 or BGX78 or BGX79 suppressor 

BGX77 or BGX78 or BGX79 

suppressor only 

58 (2.28") 

44 (1.73") 

82 (3.23") 

26 

(1.02") 

30 

(1.18") 

58 (2.28") 

88 (3.46") 

88 (3.46") 

6 (0.24") 

26 

(1.02") 

30 

(1.18") 

58 (2.28") 

44 (1.73") 

56 (2.20") 

26 

(1.02") 

23.8 

(0.94") 

❶ Valid for BGX11... contacts as well when mounted on 

left-hand contactor of BGT or BGC assembly. 

BGX50 00 

BGX10 - BGX77 

BGX78 - BGX79 

BGXF10 

7.75 (0.31") 

BGX77 - BGX78 

BGX79 

Paralleling links G323 - G324 

G325 - G326 

BGX80 00 shroud 

21 

(0.83") 

10 

(0.39") 

37 

(1.45") 

G323 

15 

(0.59") 

10 

(0.39") G324 

12 

(0.47") 

23.5 

(0.92") 

12 

(0.47") 

37 

(1.45") 

G325 

9 

(0.35") 

16 

(0.63") 

G326 

12 

(0.47") 

58 (2.28") 

44 (1.73") 59 (2.32") 

48.5 (1.91") 

BGX80 00 

ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BF CONTACTORS 

Auxiliary contacts BFX10 

❶ 

21.4 

(0.84") 

28.9 

(1.14") 

G484 

28.2 

(1.11") 

36 

(1.42") 

G418 

8 

(0.31") 

28 

(1.1") 

41.4 

(1.63") 

40.6 

(1.6") 

46 

(1.6") 

❶ BFX10 add-on blocks with four contacts are 42.8mm wide. 



D-12 



electric 

ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH BF CONTACTORS 

G218 

G481, G482 

G280 adapter with G218 contact 

D 

8 (0.31") 

27 

(1.06") 

46.9 

(1.85") 

8 (0.31") 

36 

(1.42") 

43 

(1.69") 

9.5 (0.37") 52.5 (2.07") 

10.3 

(0.41") 

44.2 

(1.74") 

G419 adapter c/w G418 contacts, G428 contacts 

G483 adapter c/w G481 or G482 contacts 

9.5 (0.37") 57 (2.24") 

12.3 

(0.48") 

G485, G486, G487 delayed contacts 

28 

(1,1") 

45.7 (1.8") 

BFX50 00, BFX50 01 interlocks 

10 (0.39") 

51 (2.01") 

44.7 

(1.76") 

BFX50 03, G269 1, G269 2 interlocks 

15 (0.59") 

31.9 

(1.25") 

G222, G272 latch 

45 (1.77") 

29.1 

(1.15") 

G454, G455 manual closing 

35 

(1.38") 

20 

(0.79") 

32.1 

(1.26") 

41 (1.61") 

40 (1.57") 

38.7 

(1.52") 

G318, G319 225, G322 suppressors 

G231 terminal 

10 (0.39") 

33.5 

(1.32") 

G232 terminal 

12 (0.47") 

34.5 

(1.36") 

8 (0.31") 

16.5 

(0.65") 

23 (0.91") 

41 (1.61") 

13.6 (0.53") 

16 (0.63") 

17 

(0.67") 

G281 terminal 

53 (2.09") 46 (1.81") 

31.3 

(1.24") 

G271, G288 terminal 

66.5 (2.62") ❶ 

24.8 

(0.98") 

49 (1.93") 

28.9 

(1.14") 

G285 auxiliary terminal 

11.5 (0.45") 

17.1 

(0.67") 

25 

(0.98") 

11.3 (0.44") 

21 (0.83") 

❶ For G288 terminal, 90mm (3.54in) dimension. 

Universal base BFX89 01 

Brackets BFX89 02 

75 (2.95") 

45 (1.77") 

45 (1.77") 

Ø4.3 

(0.17") 

31.8 (1.25") 

11.6 (0.46") 

86 (3.39") 

14.5 (0.57") 

R2.1 

(R0.08") 

21 

(0.83") 

16 (0.63") 

10 

(0.39") 

9.7 

(0.38") 

35 

(1.38") 

Ø4.3 

(0.17") 

Ø3.5 (0.14") 



electric 



D-13 

ADD-ON BLOCKS WITH B CONTACTORS 

G350, G350, G354 G354 

G350, G354 auxiliary contacts 

14.5 (0.57") 

111.5 (4.39") 

G355 G355 interlock 

15 (0.59") 

60.6 (2.39") 

D 

G356... 

G356 interlocks 

29.8 

(1.17") 

G358 G358 

G358 adapter 

30 

(1.18") 

➊ 

G360, G361 G360, G361 

❶ For interaxes dimensions, refer to page TC-28. 

Terminal protection G360, G361 

31.9 

(1.26") 

102 (4.01") 50 (1.97") 

G363 

G363 

G363 

35.2 

(1.38") 

127.5 (5.02") 56.5 (2.22") 

68 (2.68") 

96.7 (3.81") 



D-14 

G527, G529 

G527, G529 terminal protection 



electric 

185 (7.28") 167 (6.57") 83 (3.27") 

D 

117 (4.6") 

G528, G530 

G528, G530 terminal protection 

250 (9.84") 

167 (6.57") 83 (3.27") 

117 (4.6") 

11 BA1594 

11 BA1594 

BA1594, BA1720, BA1845 2-pole bar 

B 5 (0.2") 

A 

BAR TYPE A B C 

BA1594 45 (1.77") 32 (1.26") Ø14 (0.55") 

BA1720 53 (2.09") 50 (1.97") Ø18 (0.71") 

BA1845 65 (2.51") 80 (3.15") Ø13 (0.51") 



electric 



D-15 

RFX38 04 base c/w RF...38 thermal relay 

7.9 

(0.31") 

45 (1.77") 

14.6 

(0.57") 

70.3 (2.77") 

34 

(1.34") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

73.5 (2.89") 

88.4 (3.48") 

83 (3.27") 

D 

7.9 

(0.31") 

14.6 

(0.57") 

G230 base c/w RF...25 thermal relay 

G270 base c/w RF...95 thermal relay 

5.5 

(0.22") 

44 (1.73") 

12.8 

35 

(1.38") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

93.1 (3.67") 

84 (3.3") 

9.7 

(0.38") 

55 (2.16") 

16.5 

(0.65") 

43 (1.69") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

102 (4.02")❶ 

95.4 (3.76") 

7.5 

(0.31") 

12.6 

(0.5") 

79 (3.11") 

85 (3.35") 

11 

(0.43") 

16.5 

(0.65") 

RF...200 thermal relay with G372 links 

23.8 

(0.94") 

127.5 (5.02") 40 

166.1 (6.54") 

40 

(1.57") 

122 (4.8") 

(1.57") 

Ø5.4 

(0.21") 

113.4 (4.46") 

51 (2") 

74 (2.91") 

172 (6.77") 

38.6 

(1.52") 

61 (2.4") 

20 (0.79") 

40 

(1.57") 

40 

(1.57") 

M8 

56.5 (2.22") 

RF...420 thermal relay with G376 links 

25 

(0.98") 

145 (5.71") 

47.5 (1.87") 

47.5 (1.87") 

165.4 (6.51") 

153.3 (6.04") 

Ø5.4 

(0.21") 

121.2 (4.77") 

74 (2.91") 

189.6 (7.46") 

44.8 (1.76") 

25 

(0.98") 

47.5 (1.87") 47.5 (1.87") 

M10 

56.8 (2.24") 

ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS 

G228 reset 

G244 button 

63 (2.48") 

19 

(0.75") 

89.7 (3.53") 

13.3 

(0.52") 

54.5 (2.15") 

10 

(0.39") 

35.8 

(1.41") 

35.8 

(1.41") 

26.7 

(1.05") 



D-16 



electric 

FULL VOLTAGE STARTERS - EMPTY ENCLOSURES 

M0 

M1 

D 

88 (3.46") 

44 (1.73") fl4.5 (0.18") 

140 (5.51") 

133.3 (5.26") 

119.5 (4.7") 

88 (3.46") 

44 (1.73") 

fl4.5 (0.18") 

155.3 (6.11") 

148.3 (5.84") 

134.5 (5.3") 

184 (7.24") 

175 (6.89") 

49 (1.93") 

19.4 

(0.74") 

202 (7.95") 

193 (7.6") 

49 (1.93") 

19.4 

(0.74") 

PG13.5 / M20 knockout 


M2 

110 (.33") 

55 (2.17") 

Ø4.5 (0.18") 

169 (6.65") 

162.3 (6.39") 

148.5 (5.85") 

234 (9.21") 

225 (8.86") 

60 (2.36") 

22.8 

(0.9") 

PG16 / M25 knockout 




electric 



D-17 

FULL VOLTAGE STARTERS - EMPTY ENCLOSURES 

M3 

220 (8.66") 

190,8 (7.51") 

170 (6.69") 

D 

280 (11.02") 

60 (2.36") 

31.4 

(1.24") 

Ø37 (1.45") knockout 



D-18 



electric 

REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 

BGR with external interlock and wiring 

D 

58 (2.28") 

88 (3.46") 

4.4 4.4 (0.17") 

(0.17") 

Ø4 (0.16") 

50 (1.97") 

6 (0.24") 

8.5 (0.33") 

8.5 (0.33") 

8.5 (0.33") 

9.7 (0.38") 

34.9 

(1.37") 

56 (2.2") 

BGU with external interlock 

88 (3.46") 

4.4 4.4 (0.17") 

(0.17") 

Ø4 (0.16") 

6 (0.24") 

58 (2.28") 

50 (1.97") 

8.5 (0.33") 

8.5 (0.33") 

8.5 (0.33") 

9.7 (0.38") 

34.9 

(1.37") 

56 (2.2") 

BF0...A with external interlock 

90 (3.54") 

Ø4.2 (0.17") 

90 (3.54") 

83 (3.77") 

71 (2.79") 

35 

(1.38") 

BFU9C - BFU12C - BFU16C 

6.6 

(0.26") 

88 (3.46") 

10.3 (0.40") 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

108 (4.25") 

75 (2.95") 

60 (2.36") 

35 

(1.38") 

35 

(1.38") 

BFU20C - BFU25C 

8 

(0.31") 

108 (4.25") 

13.7 (0.53") 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

112.5 (4.43") 

75 (2.95") 

60 (2.36") 

43.7 (1.72") 



electric 



D-19 

Flush push-button with auxiliary 

contacts or lamp-holder (direct or 

resistor-diode type) 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

Flush push-button with faston auxiliary 

contacts 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

Drillings - Minimum 

recommended distances 

50 (1.97") 

Push-buttons 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

10 

(0.39") 

30 

(1.18") 

n 1 LM2T 

n 1 LP2T 

n 1 LM2T 

n 1 LM2T 

n 1 LM2T 

AU120 

AU120 

ADD-ON 

ELEMENTS 

C.. 

VL230 

DL400 

42.4 (1.67") 

20.3 

(0.78") 

13.8 

(0.54") 

43 (1.69") 

22.7 

(0.89") 

n 1 LM2T 

n 1 LP2T 

n 1 LM2T 

AU120 

AU120 

CF.. 

ADD-ON 

ELEMENTS 

42.4 (1.67") 

63.5 (2.50") 

20.3 

(0.78") 

22.7 

(0.89") 

43 (1.69") 13.8 

(0.54") 

42.4 (1.67") 

22.5 

(0.88") 

30 (1.18") 

65 (2.56") 

❶ 

20.9 

(0.82") 

Extended 

L...2T B2... 

Push-push 

L...2T Q2... 

Illuminated extended 

L...2T BL2... 

Illuminated push-push 

L...2T QL2... 

20.5 

(0.80") 

Guarded 

L...2T B30... 

Illuminated flush 

L...2T BL10... 

Illuminated push-push 

L...2T QL10... 

D 

❶ When faston auxiliary contacts are 

used, the vertical pitch must be 

90mm (3.54”) minimum. 

Mushroom-head buttons 

Ø40 (1.57") 

28.5 

(1.12") 

Ø60 (2.36") 

29.2 

(1.15") 

Ø40 (1.57") 

29 

(1.14") 

Ø40 (1.57") 

49.3 (1.94") 

Ø40 (1.57") 

32.6 (1.28") 

Ø40 (1.57") 

24.2 

(0.95") 

33.8 

(1.33") 

Ø40 (1.57") 

49 (1.93") 

Spring return 

L...2T B614... 

Illuminated spring return 

L...2T BL614... 

Spring return 

L...2T B616... 

Push-pull 

L...2T B624... 

Illuminated 

Push-pull 

LM2T BL624... 

Turn to release 

L...2T B634... 

Turn key to release 

L...2T B654... 

Turn to release 

EN418 compliant 

L...2T B6644 

Reset button 

(complete unit) 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

19.1 

(0.75") 

42.4 (1.67") 

L...2T R1... 

13.8 

(0.54") 

140 (5.51") max 

Double-touch push buttons 

with or without indicator 

2 flush buttons 

54 (2.13") 

28 (1.10") 

O 

12 

(0.47") 

L...2T B71... - L...2T BL71... 

Potentiometer drive 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

42.4 (1.67") 

35.7 (1.40") 

56.8 (2.23") 

LM2T P100 - LM2T P110 

Double-touch push buttons 

with or without indicator 

1 flush and 1 extended buttons 

54 (2.13") 

28 (1.10") 

O 

15 

(0.59") 

L...2T B72... - L...2T BL72... 

Selectors 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

Knob 

L...2T S1... 

Illuminated knob 

L...2T SL1... 

27.5 

(1.08") 

Triple-touch buttons 

2 external flush and middle 

extended buttons 

54 (2.13") 

28 (1.10") 

I 

STOP 

I 

L...2T B73... 

12 

(0.47") 

6 

Ø39.4 (1.55") 

Lever 

L...2T S2... 

27.5 

(1.08") 

Transformer or flashing 

lamp holder 

50 (1.97") 

25.1 

(0.99") 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

Key 

L...2T S3... 

42.4 (1.67") 

LM2T YL... - LM2T GL... 

LM2T XL... - LM2T FL... 

23.8 

(0.93") 

27.5 

(1.08") 

LED integrated lamp-holder 

steady or flashing light 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

10 

(0.39") 

30 (1.18") 

57 (2.24") 

LM2T L... - LM2T M... 

20.2 

(0.79") 

42.4 (1.67") 

20.3 

(0.78") 

43 (1.69") 

Pilot light head 

Ø29.8 

(1.17") 

LM2T IL1... 

16.2 

(0.64") 

LED-integrated 

monoblock pilot light 

steady light 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

Ø29.5 

(1.17") 

LP2T ILA... 

LP2T ILB... 

LP2T ILE... 

LP2T ILM... 

38.4 (1.51") 14.3 

(0.56") 

Monoblock pilot light 

complete with diffuser, 

without terminal 

protection 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

Ø29.6 

(1.16") 

LP2T IL21... 

16.5 

(0.65") 

42 (1.65") 


complete with diffuser 

and terminal 

protection 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

Ø29.6 

(1.16") 

LP2T IL22... 

16.6 

(0.65") 

43 (1.69") 


complete with diffuser, 

1-6.35 (0.25”) or 2-2.8 (0.11”) 

Faston terminals without 

terminal protection 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

Ø29.6 

(1.16") 

LP2T IL23... 

16.5 

(0.65") 

42 (1.65") 



D-20 



electric 

D 

Transparent boot 

Ø44 (1.73") 

35 

(1.38") 

LM2T AU167 

Button protection boot 

25 

(0.98") 

Ø33.4 

(1.31") 

18.1 

(0.71") 

LM2T AU14... LM2T AU13... 

Ø33.4 

(1.31") 

Double/triple button boot 

55 (2.16") 

30 

(1.18") 

LM2T A157 

20.4 

(0.8") 

Threaded plug for 

unused holes 

21.3 

(0.84") 

Ø30 

(1.18") 

LM2T A130 

Knob selector protection 

36 

(1.42") 

27.5 

(1.08") 

Label holder 

48 (1.89") 

Label 

15.1 

(0.59") 

27 

(1.08") 

LM2T AU10... 

Label holder 

12.4 (0.49") 

27.8 

(1.09") 

45.6 (1.80") 

Label 

12.2 (0.48") 

27.5 

(1.08") 

LM2T A... 

Plastic disk for mushroomhead 

push-buttons 

A 

Ø22.5 

(0.89") 

EMERGENCY 

8 LM2T AU185 

29.8 

(1.17") 

(2x2mm (0.08x0.08”) tab) 

LM2T AU105 

29.8 

(1.17") 

Joystick with free actuation lever 

Ø29.5 

(1.16") 

Joystick with mechanical latch lever 

Ø29.5 

(1.16") 

Control station for one operator 

72 (2.83") 

54 (2.13") 65 (2.56") 

LM2T J21... - LM2T J41... 

Complete push button station with one actuator 

42.5 (1.67") 

49 (1.93") 

85 (3.35") 

40 (1.57") 

40 (1.57") 

40 (1.57") 

40 (1.57") 

22.3 

(0.88") 

29.9 

(1.18") 

33.5 (1.32") 

33 (1.30") 

24.2 

(0.95") 

49 (1.93") 

L2PP 1A5 - L2PP 1A8 

(2x2mm (0.08x0.08”) tab) 

L2PP 100 

L2PP 150 

L2PP 110 

L2PP 115 

L2PP 160 

L2PP 165 

L2PP 120 

L2PP 170 

L2PP 130 

L2PP 180 

Control station for two actuators 

72 (2.83") 

54 (2.13") 

65 (2.56") 

34.5 (1.35") 

81 (3.19") 

117 (4.61") 

41.5 (1.63") 

70.5 (2.78") 

70.5 (2.78") 

(2x1mm (0.08x0.04”) tab) 

LM2T AU100 

STOP 

LM2T AU11... 

1.5 (0.05") 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

(2x2mm (0.08x0.08”) tab) 

A = 60mm 

A = 90mm 

LM2T J20 

For 

8LM2T J40 only 

20 

(0.79") 

43 (1.69") 

22.7 

(0.89") 

1.5 (0.05") 

1-6 (0.03"-0.23") max 

LM2T J20 

For 

8LM2T J40 only 

20 

(0.79") 

43 (1.69") 

22.7 

(0.89") 

10 

(0.39") 

30 (1.18") 

LM2T J20... - LM2T J40... 

42.4 (1.66") 

10 

(0.39") 

30 (1.18") 

42.4 (1.66") 

22.3 

(0.88") 

L2PP 2A8 (2x2mm (0.08x0.08”) tab) 

For 3, 4 or 5 actuator versions, increase the total length by the 

pitch between the drillings, 35mm (1.38”) for each extra operator. 



electric 



D-21 

KB A1 

KM A1 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

20 

(0.78") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC A1 

KN A1 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

20 

(0.78") 

44 (1.73") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB B1 - KB B2 

KM B1 - KM B2 

Ø11 

(0.43") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

30.5 

(1.20") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC B1 - KC B2 

KN B1 - KN B2 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø11 

(0.43") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

30.5 

(1.20") 

44 (1.73") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

D 

KB C1 - KB C2 

KM C1 - KM C2 

Ø14 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

39 

(1.53") 

54.5 (2.14") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC C1 - KC C2 

KN C1 - KN C2 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø14 

(0.55") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

33 

(1.30") 

44 (1.73") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB D1 - KB D2 

KM D1 - KM D2 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

Ø14 

(0.55") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 41 

(1.61") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC D1 - KC D2 

KN D1 - KN D2 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø14 

(0.55") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

44 (1.73") 41 (1.61") 

12.5 

(0.49") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB E1 - KB E2 

KM E1 - KM E2 

Ø19 

(0.74") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 54 (2.12") 

40 (1.57") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC E1 - KC E2 

KN E1 - KN E2 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø19 

(0.74") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

54 (2.12") 

44 (1.73") 

40 (1.57") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB E3 

KM E3 

Ø50x10 

(1.97"x0.39") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

69.5 (2.73") 

42.5 (1.67") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC E3 

KN E3 

Ø50x10 

(1.97"x0.39") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

69.5 (2.73") 

44 (1.73") 

41.5 (1.63") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB F1 - KB F2 

KM F1 - KM F 

KC F1 - KC F2 

KN F1 - KN F2 

KB F3 

KM F3 

42.5 (1.67") 

KC F3 

KN F3 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

68 - 111 (2.67"-4.37") 

54.5 (2.14") 

40 (1.57") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

66-110 (2.60"x4.33") 

44 (1.73") 

40 (1.57") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø50x10 

(1.97"x0.39") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

84 - 127 (3.30"- 5") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø50x10 

(1.97"x0.39") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

81-125 (3.19"-4.92") 

44 (1.73") 

42.5 (1.67") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB F4 

KM F4 

51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61") 

KC F4 

KN F4 

KB H1 

KM H1 

KC H1 

KN H1 

Ø50x10 

(1.97"x0.39") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

84 - 127 (3.30"- 5") 

54.5 (2.14") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø50x10 

(1.97"x0.39") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

81-125 (3.19"-4.92") 

44 (1.73") 

51.5-66.5 (2.02"-2.61") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

50 (1.97") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

94 (3.7") 

54.5 (2.14") 

Ø10 

(0.39") 

26 

(1.02") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

50 (1.96") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

1/2 NPT 40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

94 (3.70") 

44 (1.73") 

Ø10 

(0.39") 

26 

(1.02") 

30 

(1.18") 



D-22 


Limit switches, K series. 

electric 

KB L1 - KB L2 

KM L1 - KM L2 

KC L1 - KC L2 

KN L1 - KN L2 

KB M1 - KB M2 

KM M1 - KM M2 

KC M1 - KC M2 

KN M1 - KN M2 

D 

32-208 (1.26"-8.19") 

33.6 

(1.32") 

32-208 (1.26"-8.19") 

33.6 

(1.32") 

Ø6 

(0.24") 

140 (5.51") 

12 

(0.49") 

Ø6 

(0.23") 12.5 

(0.49") 

140 (5.51") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

44 (1.73") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

44 (1.73") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB P1 - P2 - P3 

KM P1 - P2 - P3 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

Ø12 

(0.47") 

20 

(0.79") 

P1 

23.1 

(0.91") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 N 

Ø8 (0.31") 

121 (4.76") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø6.9 (0.27") 

31 

(1.22") 

Ø8 (0.31") 

69 (2.71") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

KC P1 - P2 - P3 

KN P1 - P2 - P3 

P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

20 

(0.78") 

44 (1.73") 

Ø12 (0.47") 

23.1 

(0.90") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø8 (0.31") 

121 (4.76") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø6.9 (0.27") 

31 

(1.22") 

Ø8 (0.31") 

69 (2.71") 

30 

(1.18") 

KB Q1 L 

KM Q1 L 

KC Q1 L 

KN Q1 L 

KB N1 - KB N2 

KM N1 - KM N2 

KC N1 - KC N2 

KN N1 - KN N2 

77 (3.03") 

77 (3,03") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

54.5 (2.14") 

20 

(0.79") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

20 

(0.78") 

44 (1.73") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

30 

(1.18") 

34 (1.34") 

54.5 (2.14") 

38,5 

(1.52") 

30 

(1.18") 

1/2 NPT 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

1/2 NPT 

22(0.86") 

20 (0.78") 

42 (1.65") 

40(1.57") 

50 (1.97") 

60 (2.36") 

34 

(1.33") 

38.5 (1.51") 

44 (1.73") 

30 

(1.18") 

Keys 

KX N1 KX N2 KX N3 

KX N4 KX N5 

43 (1.69") 

14 (0.55") 

9.5 

(0.37") 

9x4.6 (0.35x0.18") 

30.9 

(1.22") 

Cable glands 

KX P01 

KX P02 

Grommet 

KX P03 

CH24 

27 (1.06") 

CH24 

9 

(0.35") 

9 

(0.35") 

15 (0.59") 

27 (1.06") 

14 (0.55") 

9.5 

(0.37") 

9x4.6 (0.35x0.18") 

30 (1.18") 

22 

(0.87") 

11 (0.43") 

5x4.2 (0.2x0.18") 

17 (0.67") 

7.1 (0.28") 

30 (1.18") 

22 

(0.87") 

7 (0.28") 

5x4.2 (0.2x0.18") 

13 (0.51") 

Ø4.2 (0.18") 

5 (0.2") 

30 (1.18") 

15 (0.59") 

12.9 (0.51") 

12.9 (0.51") 

1.5 (0.06") 

CH24 

5.6 

(0.22") 

M20 

PG13.5 

M20 

7.9 

(0.31") 

CH = Spanner/Wrench 



electric 


Prewired metal limit switches, KP types 

D-23 


Metal plunger 

KP A1 

20 (0.79") 

40 (1.58") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

16 (0.63") 

M12 fixing head 

KP A2 

34 (1.34") 

40 (1.58") 

30 

(1.18") 

M12x1 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

16 (0.63") 

Top roller push plunger 

Plastic or metal roller 

KP B1 - KP B2 

30 

(1.18") 

40 (1.58") 

12 

(0.47") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

16 (0.63") 


90° plastic roller 

KP B4 

30 

(1.18") 

40 (1.58") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

12 

(0.47") 

16 (0.63") 

M12 head top roller push plunger 


KP B5 - KP B6 

44.8 (1.76") 

40 (1.58") 

12 

(0.47") 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

M12x1 

16 (0.63") 

D 

90° plastic roller 

KP B7 - KP B8 

44.8 (1.76") 

40 (1.58") 

M12x1 

30 

(1.18") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

12 

(0.47") 

16 (0.63") 



KP E1 - KP E2 

52 (2.05") 

40 (1.58") 

14 (0.55") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

24 

(0.94") 

4.5 (0.18") 

13.5 (0.49") 

Adjustable roller lever 

Plastic roller 

KP F1 

48-118 (1.89"-4.65") 

40 (1.58") 

18 (0.71") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

34,4 

(1.35") 4.5 (0.18") 

17.3 (0.68") 

Adjustable rod lever 

Metal rod 

KP L2 

max. 139 (5.47") 

40 (1.58") 

3 (0.12") 

5.5 (0.22") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

29 

(1.14") 

15.8 (0.62") 

Wobble stick 

Metal rod 

KP M2 

122 (4.8") 

40 (1.58") 

7.9 (0.31") 

Ø4.3 (0.17") 

20 

(0.79") 

30 

(1.18") 

16 (0.63") 

30 

(1.18") 

16 (0.63") 

30 

(1.18") 

16 (0.63") 

30 

(1.18") 

16 (0.63") 

Plastic limit switches, T series without reset button 

Limit switches without reset button 

TS1 01 - TL1 01 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

30 

(1.18") 

34.5 

(1.36") 

60 (2.36") 

100.5 (3.95") 

16 

(0.63") 

31 

(1.22") 

TS1 05 20 - TL1 05 20 

TS1 05 21 - TL1 05 21 

Ø20x5 

(0.78x0.19") 

Metal 

or 

plastic 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

30 

(1.18") 

62 (2.44") 

60 (2.36") 

128 (5.03") 

57.5 (2.26") 

31 

(1.22") 

TS1 05 24 - TL1 05 24 

Ø50x10 

(1.97x0.39") 

Rubber 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

30 

(1.18") 

77 (3.03") 

60 (2.36") 

143 (5.63") 

31 

(1.22") 

60 (2.36") 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Limit switches without reset button 

TS1 09 - TL1 09 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

Ø6 (0.23") 

Steel 

30 

(1.18") 

27 

(1.06") 

60 (2.36") 

195 (7.67") 

16 

(0.63") 

31 

(1.22") 

TL2 10 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

30 

(1.18") 

40 (1.57") 

30 

(1.18") 

60 (2.36") 

107 (4.21") 

7 

(0.27") 

31 

(1.22") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Keys 

P32752 

Ø4.5 

(0.17") 

28 

(1.10") 

20 

(0.78") 

A20748 

8.5 (0.33") 

55 (2.16") 

13.5 (0.53") 

28.5 

(1.12") 

P32753 A20746 A20747 

20 

(0.78") 

15 

(0.59") 

21.5 

(0.84") 

28.5 

(1.12") 

31.43 

(1.23") 

15 

(0.59") 

72 (2.83") 

31 

(1.22") 

30 

(1.18") 

43 (1.69") 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Ø4.2 

(0.16") 

35 (1.37") 

26 

(1.02") 

29 

(1.14") 

13 

(0.51") 

50 (1.97") 



D-24 


Plastic limit switches, T series with reset button 

electric 

Limit switches with reset button 

TS2 01 - TL2 01 

TS2 05 20 - TL2 05 20 

TS2 05 21 - TL2 05 21 

TS2 05 24 - TL2 05 24 

60 (2.36") 

D 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

30 

(1.18") 

34.5 

(1.36") 

60 (2.36") 

100.5 (3.95") 

16 

(0.63") 

31 

(1.22") 

Ø20x5 

(0.78x0.19") 

Plastic 

or 

Metal 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

4.3 (0.17") 

30 

(1.18") 

62 (2.44") 

60 (2.36") 

128 (5.03") 

58.5 (2.3") 

31 

(1.22") 

Ø50x10 

(1.97x0.39") 

Rubber 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

4.3 (0.17") 

30 

(1.18") 

77 (3.03") 

60 (2.36") 

143 (5.63") 

31 

(1.22") 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Rope-pull lever switches for normal stopping 

RS1 13 10 - RS3 13 10 - RS3 13 10 

TS1 13 10 - TL1 13 10 

16 

(0.63") 

Ø20 

(0.78") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

55 (2.16") 49 (1.93") 

30 

(1.18") 

= = 

Ø20 

(0.78") 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

30 

(1.18") 

46.5 (1.83") 

60 (2.36") 

31 

(1.22") 

30.5 

(1.20") 

35 

(1.37") 

PG11 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 

Rope-pull safety switches, EN 418 compliant 

RS13 13 10 

TL13 13 10 

16 

(0.63") 

Ø20 

(0.79") 

Ø4.3 

(0.16") 

22 

(0.86") 

20 

(0.78") 

49 (1.93") 

55 (2.16") 

30 

(1.18") 

= = 

Ø20 

(0.78") 

5.3x7,3 

(0.20x0.28") 

30 

(1.18") 

46.5 (1.83") 

60 (2.36") 

31 

(1.22") 

30.5 

(1.20") 

35 

(1.37") 

PG11 

Ø5.3 

(0.20") 

40 (1.57") 

43 (1.69") 

PG13.5 



electric 


Micro switches, KS types 

D-25 

Top push rod - metal plunger 

Pin 

KS A1 

High rod plunger 

KS A2 

Low rod plunger 

KS A3 


KS A4 

Push button 

Hand operation 

KS A9 

23.3 

(0.92") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

16.4 

(0.65") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

Ø2.3 (0.09") 

27.5 

(1.83") 

23.4 

(0.92") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

27.8 

(1.83") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

Ø5.2 (0.2") 

Ø4 (0.16") 

27.5 

(1.83") 

23.3 

(0.92") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

22 

(0.87") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

12.3 (0.40") 

10 (0.39") 

Ø7.15 (0.28") 

27.5 

(1.83") 

23.3 

(0.92") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

38.6 

(1.52") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

M12xT1 

Ø8.3 (0.33") 

27.5 

(1.83") 

20.2 

(0.79") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

33 

(1.3") 

D 



KS B1 

M12 fixing head, 90° roller 

KS B2 

23.3 

(0.92") 

50.2 

(1.98") 

M12xT1 

Ø12.5x3.8 

(0.49"x0.15") 

23.3 

(0.92") 

50.2 

(1.98") 

M12 

Ø12.5x3.8 

(0.49"x0.15") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

27.5 

(1.83") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

27.5 

(1.83") 

Roller center push lever 

25mm long lever 

KS C1 


KS C2 


KS C3 

One-way roller lever 

KS C9 

R26.1 

(R1.05") 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

33.7 

(1.33") 

Ø9.5x4 

(0.37"x0.16) 

33 

(1.3") 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

R38 (R1.5") 

37.3 

(1.47") 

Ø9.5x4 

(0.37"x0.16) 

33 

(1.3") 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

R48.5 (R1.91") 

37.3 

(1.47") 

Ø9.5x4 

(0.37"x0.16) 

33 

(1.3") 

R31.9 

(R1.2") 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

44 

(1.73") 

Ø9.5x4 

(0.37"x0.16) 

33 

(1.3") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

Flat lever 


KS L1 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

R63.5 (R2.5") 

29 

(1.14") 

4.9 (0.19") 

33 

(1.3") 


KS L2 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

R54 (R2.13") 

29 

(1.14") 

4.9 (0.19") 

33 

(1.3") 

168.3mm long lever 

KS L3... 

20.2 

(0.79") 

26.2 

(1.03") 

168.3 (6.63") 

17 (0.67") max 

33 

(1.3") 

0.96 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

Ø4.4 

(0.17") 

17.5 

(0.69") 

25.4 (1") 

49.2 (1.94") 

16 

(0.63") 

17.5 

(0.69") 



D-26 


Foot switches 

electric 

KG1 

264 (10.39") 

M20 

150 (5.90") 

D 

86 (3.39") 

34 

(1.33") 

KG2 

285 (11.22") 

150 (5.90") 

34 

(1.33") 

M20 

86 (3.39") 

164 (6.45") 

KR1 

238.7 (9.4") 

140 (5.51") 

M20 

25 

(0.98") 

57 (2.24") 

KR2 

250 (9.84") 

140 (5.51") 

KGD 

516.5 (20.33") 

516.5 (20.33") 

25 

(0.98") 

M20 

75 (2.95") 

120 (4.72") 

286.6 (11.28") 

301.2 (11.86") 



electric 


Rotary cam switches GX series 

D-27 

Front mounting 

Type 

Dimensions 

L [mm (in)] 

A B C D E F G H I L M 

1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 5 wafers 6 wafers 

D 

B 

A 

C 

1...5 

Drilling 

H 

L 

M 

E 

GX16 U 48 –– 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 28 6 12 5 

(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX16 U25 48 60 ❶ 45 48 34 23.5 28 6 12 5 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX20 U 48 –– 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 28 6 12 5 

(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX20 U25 48 60 ❶ 45 48 34 23.5 28 6 12 5 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX32 U 65 –– 53 58 66 34.5 26 28 7 14 5 

(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

GX32 U25 65 80 ❶ 58 66 38 26 28 7 14 5 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

GX40 U 65 –– 53 58 66 34.5 26 28 7 14 5 

(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

GX40 U25 65 80 ❶ 58 66 38 26 28 7 14 5 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.50”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85 

(1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”) 

39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82 

(1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”) 

42.5 51 59.5 68 76.5 85 

(1.67”) (2.00”) (2.34”) (2.67”) (3.01”) (3.35”) 

39.5 48 56.5 65 73.5 82 

(1.55”) (1.89”) (2.22”) (2.55”) (2.89”) (3.22”) 

47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5 

(1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”) 

48 60 72 84 96 108 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”) 

47.5 59.5 71.5 83.5 95.5 107.5 

(1.87”) (2.34”) (2.81”) (3.29”) (3.75”) (4.23”) 

48 60 72 84 96 108 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (2.83”) (3.30”) (3.77”) (4.25”) 

D 

I 

L 

G 

F 

Rear view 

❶ Padlockable handle. 

Door coupling O version 

Drilling for 4-screw wafer 

fixing on mounting plate 

Coupling and front plate 

fixing on the door 

K 

S 

1...5 

E 

B 

A 

C 

M 

T 

U 

U 

T 

P 

D 

DIN35 

IEC/EN 60715 

N 

52 

L 

G 

F 

Rear view 

Type 

Dimensions 

A C D E F G K M N O P S T U 

GX16 O 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 –– 28 6 52 66.5 48-58 12 5 

(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX16 O88 48 ❶ 45 48 34 23.5 36 –– 6 52 66.5 45-55 12 5 

(1.89”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.42”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX20 O 48 39.5 45 48 26.5 23.5 –– 28 6 52 66.5 48-58 12 5 

(1.89”) (1.55”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.1”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX20 O88 48 ❶ 45 48 34 23.5 36 –– 6 52 66.5 45-55 12 5 

(1.89”) (1.77”) (1.89”) (1.33”) (0.92”) (1.42”) (0.24”) (2.04”) (2.61”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.47”) (0.20”) 

GX32 O 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 –– 28 7 68 78 48-58 14 5 

(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

GX32 O88 65 ❶ 58 66 38 26 48 –– 7 68 78 45-55 14 5 

(2.56”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.49”) (1.02”) (1.89”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

GX40 O 65 53 58 66 34.5 26 –– 28 7 68 78 48-58 14 5 

(2.56”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (1.1”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.89”-2.28”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

GX40 O88 65 ❶ 58 66 38 26 48 –– 7 68 78 45-55 14 5 

(2.56”) (2.28”) (2.59”) (1.49”) (1.02”) (1.89”) (0.27”) (2.68”) (3.07”) (1.77”-2.16”) (0.55”) (0.20”) 

❶ Padlockable handle. 

L [mm (in)] 


40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5 

(1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”) 

40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5 

(1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”) 

40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5 

(1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”) 

40 48.5 57 65.5 74 82.5 

(1.57”) (1.90”) (2.24”) (2.57”) (2.91”) (3.24”) 

48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7 

(1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”) 

48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7 

(1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”) 

48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7 

(1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”) 

48.7 60.7 72.7 84.7 96.7 108.7 

(1.91”) (2.38”) (2.86”) (3.33”) (3.80”) (4.27”) 

Mounting in enclosure 

Drilling for enclosure fixing 

A 

C 

L 

F 

L1 

F 

A1 

C1 

M 

R 

D 

N 

Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Cable glands 

size L L1 A A1 C C1 D F M N L L1 degree 

GX16 90x90 1-2 3-5 90 90 79 63 4.5 25 19 30 71.3 98.3 

GX20 (3.54”x3.54”) 1-2 3-5 (3.54”) (3.54”) (3.11”) (2.48”) (0.17”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”) 

IP65 4 PG 16 

GX32 110x110 1-2 3-4 110 110 98.4 83 4.5 32 21 39.5 85.5 119.5 

GX40 (4.33”x4.33”) 1-2 3-4 (4.33”) (4.33”) (3.87”) (3.26”) (0.17”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (1.55”) (3.36”) (4.70”) 

IP65 4 PG 21 

Flush mounting Ø 22mm 


1-5 

1-5 

11.25 (0.44") 

fl 22.5 

(0.88") 

45 (1.77") 

L 

18.5 

(0.72") 

30 (1.18") 

28 

(1.10") 

11.25 (0.44") 

fl 22.5 

(0.88") 

45 (1.77") 

L 

18.5 

(0.72") 23 (0.90") 

28 (1.10") 

Type 

L [mm (in)] 

1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 

GX16 35 43.5 52 60.5 

(1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”) 

Type 

L [mm (in)] 

1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 

GX16 35 43.5 52 60.5 

(1.37”) (1.71”) (2.04”) (2.38”) 



D-28 


Rotary cam switches GN series 

electric 

Front mounting 

Type 

Dimensions 

L 

D 

M 

B 

A 

J 

D3 

Rear view 

C 

Wafer and front plate fixing on the door 

D1 

D2 

M 

2-screw drillings 

for types up to GN63 

G 

D 

L 

H 

D1 

K 

D2 

4-screw drillings for GN125 

and “4V” suffix types only 

1...5 

F 

E 

N 

A B C D D1 D2 D3 E F Ø G H J K M N 


GN12 48 60 39.5 38 12 5 4.3 26.5 23.5 38 5 36 36 48 6 32.5 42.1 51.7 61.3 70.9 80.5 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (1.55”) (1.50”) (0.47”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.50”) (0.20”) (1.42”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.28”) (1.66”) (2.03”) (2.41”) (2.79”) (3.17”) 

GN12∆ 65 80 53 38 14 5 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 5.5 48 48 65 7 39.2 48.8 58.4 68 77.6 87.2 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.09”) (1.50”) (0.55”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (0.22”) (1.89”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.54”) (1.92”) (2.30”) (2.68”) (3.05”) (3.43”) 

GN20 48 60 39.5 39 12 5 4.3 26.5 23.5 38 5 36 36 48 6 33.1 42.8 52.5 62.2 71.9 81.6 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (1.55”) (1.53”) (0.47”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.50”) (0.20”) (1.42”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.30”) (1.68”) (2.07”) (2.45”) (2.83”) (3.21”) 

GN20∆ 65 80 53 39 14 5 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 5.5 48 48 65 7 39.8 49.5 59.2 68.9 78.6 88.3 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.09”) (1.53”) (0.55”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (0.22”) (1.89”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.57”) (1.95”) (2.33”) (2.71”) (3.09”) (3.48”) 

GN25 48 60 39.5 43 12 5 4.3 26.5 23.5 38 5 36 36 48 6 37.5 51.1 64.7 78.2 91.9 105.5 

(1.89”) (2.36”) (1.55”) (1.69”) (0.47”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.04”) (0.92”) (1.50”) (0.20”) (1.42”) (1.42”) (1.89”) (0.24”) (1.48”) (2.01”) (2.55”) (3.08”) (3.62”) (4.15”) 

GN25∆ 65 80 53 43 14 5 4.3 34.5 20 58.5 5.5 48 48 65 7 44.2 57.8 71.4 85 98.6 112.2 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.09”) (1.69”) (0.55”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (0.79”) (2.30”) (0.22”) (1.89”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.74”) (2.27”) (2.81”) (3.35”) (3.88”) (4.42”) 

GN32 65 80 53 56 14 5 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 5.5 48 48 65 7 40.9 54.5 68.1 81.7 95.3 108.9 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.09”) (2.20”) (0.55”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (0.22”) (1.89”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.61”) (2,14”) (2.68”) (3.22) (3.75”) (4.29”) 

GN40 65 80 53 58 14 5 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 5.5 48 48 65 7 43.5 58.6 73.7 88.8 103.9 119 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.09”) (2.28”) (0.55”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (0.22”) (1.89”) (1.89”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.71”) (2.31”) (2.90”) (3.50”) (4.09”) (4.68”) 

GN63 65 80 53 62 14 5 4.3 34.5 26 58.5 5.5 48 68 65 7 47.3 65.4 83.5 101.6 119.7 137.8 

(2.56”) (3.15”) (2.09”) (2.44”) (0.55”) (0.20”) (0.17”) (1.36”) (1.02”) (2.30”) (0.22”) (1.89”) (2.68”) (2.56”) (0.27”) (1.86”) (2.57”) (3.29”) (4.00”) (4.71”) (5.42”) 

GN125 90 110 70.5 86 16 6 5.3 41.5 28 84 7.5 68 68 90 9 67.3 96.4 125.5 154.6 183.7 212.8 

(3.54”) (4.33”) (2.77”) (3.38”) (0.63”) (0.24”) (0.21”) (1.63”) (1.10”) (3.31”) (0.29”) (2.68”) (2.68”) (3.54”) (0.35”) (2.65”) (3.79”) (4.94”) (6.09”) (7.23”) (8.38”) 

∆ Dimensions for U06 and U25 versions 

Door coupling 

Drillings for 4-screw wafer fixing on mounting plate 

K 

K 

S 

1...5 

D2 

D2 

A 

C 

D1 

K 

D1 

Foratura 4 viti per 

elementi 

D2 

2-screw drillings for 

types up to GN63 

4-screw drillings for GN125 

and “4V” suffix types only 

L 

E 

Type Dimensions L 

A D1 D2 E K S 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 

GN12-O88 65 (2.56”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.58 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”) 

GN20-O88 65 (2.56”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”) 

GN25-O88 65 (2.56”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”) 

GN12-O68 48 (1.89”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 37.5 (1.48”) 47.1 (1.85”) 56.7 (2.23”) 66.3 (2.61”) 

GN20-O68 48 (1.89”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 38.1 (1.50”) 47.8 (1.88”) 57.5 (2.26”) 67.2 (2.64”) 

GN25-O68 48 (1.89”) 12 (0.47”) 5 (0.20”) 26.5 (1.04”) 36 (1.42”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 42.5 (1.67”) 56.1 (2.21”) 65.7 (2.59”) 83.2 (3.27”) 

GN32 65 (2.56”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 49.2 (1.94”) 62.8 (2.47”) 76.4 (3.00”) 90 (3.54”) 

GN40 65 (2.56”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 45.9 (1.81”) 59.5 (2.34”) 73.1 (2.88”) 86.7 (3.41”) 

GN63 65 (2.56”) 14 (0.55”) 5 (0.20”) 34.5 (1.36”) 48 (1.89”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 54.3 (2.14”) 72.4 (2.85”) 90.5 (3.56”) 108.6 (4.27”) 

GN125 90 (3.54”) 16 (0.63”) 6 (0.24”) 41.5 (1.63”) 68 (2.68”) 45-55 (1.77”-2.16”) 74.8 (2.94”) 103.9 (4.09”) 133 (5.23”) 162.1 (6.38”) 

Mounting in enclosure 

A 

Drilling for enclosure fixing 

C 

L 

F 

L1 

F 

A1 

C1 

M 

R 

D 

N 

Type Enclosure N° of wafers Protection Conduits 

size L L1 A A1 C C1 D F M N L L1 degree 

GN12 65x65 

65 65 54 38 4.3 19 13 25 55.5 75 

1-2 3-4 

(2.55”x2.55”) (2.55”) (2.55”) (2.12”) (1.49”) (0.16”) (0.74”) (0.51”) (0.98”) (2.18”) (2.95”) 

IP54 4 PG 11 

GN12 1-2 3-4 

75 75 64 50 4.5 19 14 28 57.5 79.8 

GN20 75x75 1-2 3-4 

(2.95”) (2.95”) (2.51”) (1.96”) (0.17”) (0.74”) (0.55”) (1.10”) (2.26”) (3.14”) 

GN25 1 2-3 

IP65 4 PG 13.5 

GN20 1-3 4-6 

GN25 

1-2 3-4 90 90 63 79 4.5 25 19 30 71.3 98.3 

90x90 

GN32 1-2 3-4 (3.54”) (3.54”) (2.48”) (3.11”) (0.17”) (0.98”) (0.74”) (1.18”) (2.80”) (3.87”) 

IP65 4 PG 16 

GN40 1 2-3 

GN32 1-3 4-5 

GN40 

1-2 3-4 125 175 112 146 5.5 32 21 68 84.3 118.3 

110x110 

GN63 1-2 3-4 (4.92”) (6.88”) (4.40”) (5.74”) (0.21”) (1.25”) (0.82”) (2.67”) (3.31”) (4.65”) 

IP65 4 PG 21 

GN125 1 2 




Ø A E P 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 

GN12 28 30 58 41.5 51.1 60.7 70.3 

(1.10”) (1.18”) (2.28”) (1.63”) (2.01”) (2.39”) (2.77”) 

GN20 28 30 58 42.1 51.8 61.5 71.2 

(1.10”) (1.18”) (2.28”) (1.66”) (2.04”) (2.42”) (2.80”) 

GN25 28 30 58 46.5 60.1 73.7 87.3 

(1.10”) (1.18”) (2.28”) (1.83”) (2.37” (2.90”) (3.44”) 


Ø A E P 1 wafer 2 wafers 3 wafers 4 wafers 

GN12 28 23 58 41.5 51.1 60.7 70.3 

(1.10”) (0.90”) (2.28”) (1.63”) (2.01”) (2.39”) (2.77”) 

GN20 28 23 58 42.5 51.8 61.5 71.2 

(1.10”) (0.90”) (2.28”) (1.67”) (2.04”) (2.42”) (2.80”) 

GN25 28 23 58 46.5 60.1 73.7 87.3 

(1.10”) (0.90”) (2.28”) (1.83”) (2.37”) (2.90”) (3.44”) 



8 

9 

34 

A 

2 

7 

10 

A2 

11 

11 

31 

1 

11 

32 

31 

22 

5 

2 

A1 

6 

34 

3 

14 

12 

4 

electric 


Timers 

D-29 

Timers 

TM 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

43.7 (1.72") 

AT1P - AT1CP - ATD - AT1DP 

BTPM1 - BTPM - BT2N 

100 (3.94") 

100 (3.94") 

D 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

18 

(0.70") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.35") 

Timers 

L48 

80 (3.15") 

13 

(0.51") 

3.5 (0.14") 

35 

(1.37") 

48 (1.89") 

Accessories 

S8 - S11 

65 (2.56") 

L48 P8 

43.50 

(1.71") 

33 

(1.30") 

43.50 

(1.71") 

20.50 

(0.80") 

1 8 

7 B 

14 3 

12 4 5 

L48 P11 

47 (1.85") 

33 

(1.30") 

47 (1.85") 

20.50 

(0.80") 

32 24 

6 21 

38 (1.49") 

27 

(1.06") 

48 (1.89") 

27 

(1.06") 

76 (2.99") 

103 (4.05") 

45 (1.77") 

45 (1.77") 

79 (3.11") 

79 (3.11") 

22.5 

(0.88") 

22.5 

(0.88") 

DRPL 

Accessories 

CE106 

CE107 

99.5 (3.91") 

22.5 

(0.88") 

10 

(0.39") 

22.5 

(0.88") 

10 

(0.39") 

78.8 (3.10") 

94 (3.70") 

84 (3.30") 

Ø4.5 (0.17") 

110 (4.33") 

100 (3.93") 

Ø4.5 (0.17") 

45 

(1.77") 

Cutout 



D-30 



electric 


PMV10 

PMV - PMF 

PMA 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

43.7 (1.72") 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 43.7 (1.72") 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

43.7 (1.72") 

D 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

18 

(0.70") 

35.8 (1.41") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.36") 

53.5 (2.10") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.35") 


Level relays 

LVM25 - LVMP05 

LVM20 

LVM30 - LVM40 - LVMP10 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

43.7 (1.72") 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 43.7 (1.72") 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

43.7 (1.72") 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.35") 

18 

(0.70") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.35") 

35.8 (1.41") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.36") 

53.5 (2.10") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

59.9 (2.35") 

Electrodes and electrode holders 

SN1 

SCM... 

CGL125... 

PS31 

PS3S 

8 

(0.31") 

100 (3.94") 

8 

19.5 

(0.77") 

53 (2.09") 

L 

M3.5 

7 (0.28") 

18 (0.71") 

21 (0.83") 

3/8" GAS 

M4 

TYPE L mm / in 

SCM04 40 / 1.6 

SCM50 500 / 9.7 

SCM100 1000 / 39.4 

L 

47 (1.85") 

L 

22 (0.87") 

3/8" GAS 

TYPE L mm / in 

CGL125 3 300 / 11.8 

CGL125 5 500 / 19.7 

CGL125 7 700 / 25.6 

CGL125 10 1000 / 39.4 

48 (1.89") 

300 (11.8") 

25 (0.98") 

1/2" GAS 

40 (1.57") 20 

(0.79") 

2" GAS 

78 (3.07") 28 

(1.1") 

6 (0.24") 

M4 

Rods 

ASTA 460 MM4 

ASTA 960 MM4 

ASTA 460 MM6 

ASTA 960 MM6 

Coupler 

RE213 

460 (18.1") 

960 (37.8") 

460 (18.1") 

960 (37.8") 

30 

(1.18") 

M4 

M4 

M6 



electric 


Digital metering instruments and current transformers 

D-31 

Digital instruments 

DMK7 - DMK8 

Ø4.2 (0.16") 

43.8 (1.72") 

Multimeters DMK2 

96 (3.78") 

14 

(0.55") 

62 (2.44") 

6 

(0.23") 

Cutout 

91 

104.7 (4.12") 

98.3 (3.87") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

96 (3.78") 

90 (3.54") 

91 

D 

53.5 (2.10") 

5 

(0.19") 

58 (2.28") 

DMK3 - DMK40 

12 

(0.47") 

82 (3.22") 

6 

(0.23") 

91 (3.58") 

96 (3.78") 

90 (3.54") 

91 (3.58") 

96 (3.78") 

DMK0 - DMK1 

96 (3.78") 

16 (0.63") 

81 (3.19") 

9 

(0.35") 

91 (3.58") 

DMK5 - DMK6 

60 (2.36") 

105 (4.13") 

55 (2.16") 

36 

95 (3.74") 

90 (3.54") 

44 (1.73") 

48 (1.89") 

45 (1.77") 

90 (3.54") 

63 (2.48") 

45 (1.77") 

1 

Current transformers 

DM1T 

DM2T 

DM3T 

52 (2.05") 

9.5 

(0.37") 

46.5 (1.83") 

52 (2.05") 

9.5 

(0.37") 

46.5 (1.83") 

71 (2.8") 

9.5 

(0.37") 

62.5 (2.46") 

Ø22 

(0.87") 

28 

(1.1") 

65.5 (2.58") 

27.5 

(1.08") 

56.5 (2.22") 

28 

(1.1") 

Ø23 

(0.9") 

20 

(0.74") 25 

(0.98") 

30 

(1.81") 

10 (0.39") 

12.5 (0.49") 

15 (0.59") 

65.5 (2.58") 

27.5 

(1.08") 

56.5 (2.22") 

36.5 

(3.19") 

Ø30 

(1.18") 

25 

(0.98") 

30 

(1.81") 

40 

(1.57") 

10 (0.39") 

20 (0.74") 

40 

(0.59") 

81.5 (3.19") 

44.5 (1.75") 

72.5 (2.85") 



D-32 


Soft starters 

electric 

ADXM 06BP - ADXM 12BP - ADXM 18BP 

45 (1.77") 126 (4.96") 

ADXM 25BP - ADXM 45BP 

90 (3.54") 

109 (4.29") 

D 

114 (4.49") 

110 (4.33") 

83 (3.27") 

117 (4.61") 


DCRK5 - DCRK7 

Cutout 

DCRK8 - DCRK12 

Cutout 

65 

(2.56") 

53 

(2.08") 

31 

(1.22") 

91 (3.58") 

62 

(2.44") 

52 

(2.04") 

31 

(1.22") 

138.5 (5.45") 

96 (3.78") 

DCRJ8 - DCRJ12 - DCRJ12F 

Cutout 

62 

(2.44") 

52 

(2.04") 

7.7 

(0.30") 

144 (5.67") 

138.5 (5.45") 

144 (5.67") 

138.5 (5.45") 

PA96x96 (3.78"X3.78") 

91 (3.58") 

144 (5.67") 

PACR 

103.1 (4.08") 

114.1 (4.49") 

138.5 (5.45") 

58 (2.28") 

90 (3.54") 

50 (1.97") 

76.2 (3") 

100 (3.94") 

96 (3.78") 

6 

(0.23") 

144 (5.67") 

7.7 

(0.30") 



electric 



D-33 

ATL 

Cutout 

94 (3.7") 

79 

(3.11") 

31 

(1.22") 

138.5 (5.45") 

D 

144 (5.67") 

PACR 

138.5 (5.45") 

144 (5.67") 

7.9(0.30") 


Base modules 

LRD10 

LRD12 

5.08 (0.2") 

LRD20 

Ø4.5 (0.18") Ø4.5 (0.18") 

LRD 

57.30 (2.26") 

49.30 (1.94") 

31.50 (1.24") 

+ - I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 

+ - 

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 

A1 A2 A3 A4 

106 (4.17") 

98 (3.86") 

74 (2.91") 

90 (3.54") 

68 (2.28") 

45 (1.77") 

35.40 (1.36") 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 

Q1 

Q2 

Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 

72 (2.83") 

80 (3.15") 

126 (4.96") 

5 (0.2") 

59.60 (2.35") 

Expansion and communication modules 

LRE... 

8 

5 

(0.2") 

54.6 (2.15") 

44.3 (1.74") 

Power supply module 

LRX1V3 D024 

72 (2.83") 

60 (2.36") 

5 

(0.2") 

52.3 (2.06") 

44.3 (1.74") 

90 (3.54") 

(0.3") 38 (1.5") 

Ø4.5 (0.18") 

98 (3.86") 

106 (4.17") 

45 (1.77") 

68 (2.28") 

90 (3.54") 

97.9 (3.85") 

106 (4.17") 

45 (1.77") 

68 (2.28") 

Ø4.5 (0.18") 






W 


® 

electric 

® 

electric 




W-2 Wiring diagrams 


electric 

W 

MANUAL STARTERS 

SM1 - SM2 - SM3 - LMS25 

Three phase 

LINE 

L1 L2 L3 

Single phase or DC 

LINE 

L1 L2 

ADD-ON BLOCKS 

SMX11 20 SMX11 11 

SMX21 11 

13 23 

13 21 

SMX12 11 

SMX22 11 

33 41 

SMX12 20 

SMX22 20 

33 43 

SMX12 02 

SMX22 02 

31 41 

SMX13 11 

57 65 

SMX15... 

SMX25... 

D1 O7 

U< 

14 24 

SMX20 11 

12 14 

14 22 

SMX23 11 

57 65 

34 42 

77 85 

34 44 

LMH11... 

13 21 

32 44 

32 42 

14 22 

31 43 

58 66 

SMX14... 

SMX24... 

LMU... 

D1 

D2 

O8 

SMX16... 

SMX26... 

LMA... 

C1 

T1 

T2 

LOAD 

T3 

T1 

T2 

LOAD 

U< 

D2 

C2 

❶ Change in event of magnetic and/or thermal tripping. 

❷ Change in event of magnetic tripping. 

NOTE: During breaker testing, contacts 57-56 and 65-66 switch only. 

11 

58 66 78 86 

➊ ➋ 

31 43 

14 22 

Mounting on 

left side of 

starter. 

32 44 

13 21 

Mounting on 

right side of 

starter. 


Definitive purpose contactors 

THREE-POLE CONTACTORS 

BG06 - BG09 - BGF09 - BGP09 - BG12 - DPBG12 

BF09A - BF12A - BF18A - BF25A - DPBF09A - DPBF12A - DPBF18A 

BF9C - BF12C - BF16C - BF20C - BF25C 

...10 

L1 L2 L3 

A1 1 3 5 

A2 2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

13 

14 

...01 

L1 L2 L3 

A1 1 3 5 

21(11❺) 

A2 2 4 6 22(12❺) 

T1 T2 T3 

➌ For BF9C-BF25C types only. 

BF26A - BF32A - BF38A 

DPBF26A - DPBF32A - BF32C 

BF40C - BF50 - BF110 

B115 - B630 1000 ➍ 

L1 L2 L3 

A1 1 3 5 

A2 2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

B1250 24 - B1600 24... ➍ 

A1 

A2 

L1 L2 L3 

T1 T2 T3 

➍ The input electronic circuit 

of the contactor coil is 

designed and tested 

according to IEEEC 62.41 

standards and can 

withstand a 10kV impulse 

voltage (1.2/50µs) with 60 

Joule energy. The use of 

an auxiliary reduced 

voltage transformer is 

recommended for higher 

values. 


BG09 T4 - BGF09 T4 - BGP09 T4 - DPBG T4 

BF09 T4 - BF38 T4 - DPBF09 T4 - DPBF26 T4 

BF9C 40 - BF40C 40 

BF50 40 - BF65 40 - BF80 40 

BF65C 40 - BF80C 40 

B115 4 - B630 1000 4 ❹ 

L1 L2 L3 L4 

A1 1 3 5 7 

B1250 4 - B1600 4 ➍ 

A1 

A2 

L1 L2 L3 

T1 T2 T3 

L4 

T4 

➍ The input electronic circuit 

of the contactor coil is 

designed and tested 

according to IEEEC 62.41 

standards and can 

withstand a 10kV impulse 

voltage (1.2/50µs) with 60 

Joule energy. The use of 

an auxiliary reduced 

voltage transformer is 

recommended for higher 

values. 

A2 2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

8 

T4 


BFK09 A - BFK12 A - BFK18 A 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

BFK26 A - BFK32 A - BFK38A - BF50K - BF65K - BF70K - BF80K 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

A1 

13 

A1 

A2 

14 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 



electric 




W-3 

SPECIAL FOUR-POLE CONTACTORS 

BG09 T2 

BF09 T2 A - BF18 T2 A - BF26 T2 A - BF38 T2 A 

BF16C 22 - BF25C 22 - BF40C 22 

BF18 T0 A 

BF16C 04 - BF25C 04 

A1 

1 R1 R3 

NO NC NC 

3 

NO 

A1 

R1 1 3 

NC NO NO 

R3 

NC 

A1 

R1 R3 R5 

NC NC NC 

R7 

NC 

W 

A2 

2 

R2 

R4 

4 

A2 R2 2 

4 

R4 

A2 

R2 

R4 

R6 

R8 

CONTROL RELAYS 

BG00 40 - BGF00 40 

BF00 40 A 

BG00 31 - BGF00 31 

BF00 31 A 

BG00 22 - BGF00 22 

BF00 22 A 

BF00 04 A 

A1 13 23 

33 

43 

A1 13 21 

33 

43 

A1 13 21 

31 

43 

A1 11 21 

31 

41 

A2 14 24 

34 

44 

A2 14 22 

34 

44 

A2 14 22 

32 

44 

A2 12 22 

32 

42 

ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS 

Auxiliary contacts 

BGX10 02 

BGXF10 02 

BGX10 11 

BGXF10 11 

BGX10 20 

BGXF10 20 

BGX10 04 

BGXF10 04 

BGX10 13 

BGXF10 13 

BGX10 22 

BGXF10 22 

BGX10 31 

BGXF10 31 

BGX10 40 

BGXF10 40 

51 61 

53 61 

53 63 

51 61 71 81 

53 61 71 81 

53 63 71 81 

53 63 73 81 

53 63 73 83 

52 62 

54 62 

54 64 

52 62 72 82 

54 62 72 82 

54 64 72 82 

54 64 74 82 

54 64 74 84 

Surge suppressors 

BGX77 

~ 

BGX78 

+ 

BGX79 

~ 

+ 

– 

~ 

-- 

~ 

Rigid connecting kits 

SMX90 21 

SMX90 22 

L1 L2 

A1 1 3 

L3 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

L1 L2 

A1 1 3 

L3 

5 11 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

11 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 12 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

12 

ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR BF CONTACTORS 


BFX10 20 

BFX10 11 

BFX10 02 

G484 30 

G484 21 

G484 12 

G484 03 

53 

63 

53 

61 

51 

61 

53 

63 

73 

53 

61 

73 

53 

61 

71 

51 

61 

71 

54 

64 

54 

62 

52 

62 

54 

64 

74 

54 

62 

74 

54 

62 

72 

52 

62 

72 

BFX10 04 

BFX10 13 

BFX10 22 

BFX10 31 

BFX10 40 

G418 10 

G428 10 

G418 10A 

G428 10A 

G418 01 

G428 01 

G418 01A 

G428 01A 

51 61 71 81 

53 61 71 81 

53 63 71 81 

53 63 73 81 

53 63 73 83 

53 

57 

51 

55 

52 62 72 82 

54 62 72 82 

54 64 72 82 

54 64 74 82 

54 64 74 84 

54 

58 

52 

56 







G218 

electric 

W 

02 

91 

03 

94 

04 

93 

01 

92 

04 

93 

01 

92 

02 

91 

03 

94 

92 

01 

93 

04 

94 

03 

01 

03 

93 91 

91 

02 

94 

02 

92 

04 

The termination of the G218 auxiliary block has more than one numbering due to the fact that the block can assume various mounting positions. 

See the numbering in boldface and larger digits for a correct interpretation. 

G481 20 

G481 11 

G481 02 

G482 

G485 

G486 - G487 

BFX42 

BFX50 01 

124 114 

NO NO 

93 

03 

122 114 

NC NO 

93 

01 

122 112 

NC NC 

91 

01 

114 

94 

111 

91 

57 

65 

67 

55 

L4 

7 

131 

131 

94 

04 

123 113 

NO 

NO 

94 

02 

121 113 

NO 

NC 

92 

121 111 

NC 

02 

NC 

92 

112 

58 

66 

68 

56 

8 

T4 

132 

132 

Mechanical latch 

G222 - G272 

Surge suppressors 

G318 - BFX77 

G319 225 

G322 - BFX79 

A1 

~ 

+ 

~ 

+ 

– 

E1 

E2 

A2 

~ 

-- 

~ 

Rigid connecting kits 

BFX31 01 - BFX32 01 

BFX31 11 - BFX32 11 

BFX31 31 - BFX32 31 - BFX32 32 

L1 L2 

A1 1 3 

L3 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

L1 L2 

A1 1 3 

L3 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

L1 L2 

A1 1 3 

L3 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

ADD-ON BLOCKS FOR B CONTACTORS 

Auxiliary contacts G350 - G354 

G354 

G350 

G350 

G354 

41 

73 

73 

01 

42 

74 

13 

74 

13 

53 

113 

54 

114 

61 

oppure 

02 

53 

113 

54 

114 

61 

14 

93 

81 

21 

82 

22 

oppure 

14 

81 

21 

82 

22 

121 

62 

121 

62 

94 

33 

34 

122 

121 

114 

54 

113 

53 

02 

42 

01 

41 

122 

122 

34 

122 

33 

94 

62 

62 

121 

14 

22 

21 

81 

82 

oppure 

14 

21 

81 

22 

82 

93 

61 

oppure 

61 

114 

54 

113 

53 

13 

74 

73 

13 

73 

74 

G354 

G350 

G350 

G354 



electric 



W-5 

OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BG MINI-CONTACTORS 

RF9 - RFN9 

RFS9 

RFA9 - RFNA9 

95 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

95 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

L1 L3 

1 5 

95 

L1 L2 L3 

97 1 3 5 

W 

96 

98 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

96 

98 

2 6 

T1 T3 

96 

98 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR BF CONTACTORS 

RF38 - RFN38 

RFS38 

RF25 - RFN25 

RF95 - RFN95 

RFS25 

RFS95 

95 

STOP 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

95 

STOP 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

L1 L3 

1 5 

95 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

95 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

L1 L3 

1 5 

96 

98 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

96 

98 

2 6 

T1 T3 

96 

98 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

96 

98 

2 6 

T1 T3 

RFA25 

RFA95 

RFSA25 

95 

L1 L2 L3 

97 1 3 5 

95 

L1 L3 

97 1 5 

96 

98 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

96 

98 

2 6 

T1 T3 

OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR B CONTACTORS 

RF200 - RFN200 

RF420 - RFN420 

95 

STOP 

97 

TEST 

RESET 

1 3 5 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

ADD-ON BLOCKS 

G228 electrical reset 

L1 L2 L3 

A1 1 3 

BF... 

5 

A2 2 4 

6 

96 

98 

2 4 6 

R 

TEST 

RESET 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

E1 

G228... 

95 

97 

1 3 5 

E2 

96 

98 

RF... 

2 4 6 

L 

L1 

T1 T2 T3 


REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY 

BGR09 

BFA...42 

L1 L2 

A1 1 3 

L3 

5 21 

A1 

L1 

1 

L2 

3 

L3 

5 

21 

KM1 

KM2 

A2 

2 4 6 22 

T1 T2 T3 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

22 





electric 

FULL VOLTAGE - ACROSS THE LINE - NON REVERSING STARTERS IN NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURE 

W 

M...P 

I 

R 

5 

A1 

A2 

1 

95 

96 

2 

97 

98 

LINE 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

6 

3 

4 

4 

3 

M...R 

R 

5 

A1 

A2 

1 

95 

96 

97 

98 

LINE 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

6 

3 

4 

DIAGRAM 2 

For two-wire control, connect the 

N/O signal contact between 

terminal 3 of the contactor and 

terminal 95 of the overload relay. 

IMPORTANT 

-- For separate control voltage 

supply, remove jumpers 5 and 6 

and connect external control 

power to terminals A1 and 3. 

– If control circuit supply is to be 

line to neutral, remove jumper 5 

and connect the neutral to 

terminal A1. 

-- SINGLE-PHASE SUPPLY 

The main circuit must be 

configured according to Diagram 

3 or 4 in the case of a single 

phase line or motor. 

-- FUSES 

A set of fuses must be 

connected upstream of the 

starter in the event no 

appropriate protection is 

included in the system. 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

LOAD 

Diagram 1 - Incorporated button control 

LOAD 

Diagram 2 - External button control 

M...R 

LINE 

LINE 

6 

5 

A1 

L1 

1 

L3 

5 

3 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

A2 

2 

T1 

6 

T3 

4 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

1 

95 

97 

R 

96 

98 

2 6 

T1 T3 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

LOAD 

Diagram 3 - Power connection for 1-phase motors 

(type c/w RFS overload relay) 

LOAD 

Diagram 4 - Power connection 

for 1-phase motors (type c/w RF overload relay) 



electric 



W-7 

K...S11 

Snap 

TS... 

Snap 

K...L11 

Slow 

K...L02 

Slow 

K...S02 

Snap 

K...L20 

Slow 

K...A11 

Slow 

21 13 

13 21 

21 13 

11 21 

11 21 

13 23 

17 25 

W 

22 14 

1NO + 1NC 

14 22 

1NO + 1NC 

22 14 

1NO + 1NC 

12 22 

2NC 

12 22 

2NC 

14 24 

2NO 

18 26 

1NO + 1NC 

make before break 

K...L03 

Slow 

K...L12 

Slow 

K...L21 

Slow 

RS13... 

TL13 

KP 

KS 

11 

21 31 

13 

21 31 

13 

23 31 

BLACK BROWN 

2 NC 3 NO 

13 14 

GREEN/YELLOW 

12 

22 32 

3NC 

14 

22 32 

1NO + 2NC 

14 

24 32 

2NO + 1NC 

BLACK 

BLUE 

1 COM 

21 22 

Rotary cam switches - Circuit schemes 

90 - One-pole ON/OFF switch 91 - Two-pole ON/OFF switch 10 - Three-pole ON/OFF switch 

0 

0 

0 

1 

1 

1 

92 - Four-pole ON/OFF switch 51 - 1-pole double throw 

switch with 0 

0 

1 

1 

0 0 2 

1 2 

52 - 2-pole double throw 

switch with 0 

Number of wafers: 1 

Switching angle: 60° 











53 - 3-pole double throw switch 

with 0 

75 - 4-pole double throw switch 

with 0 

1 

0 0 2 

1 

2 

2 


without 0 

1 


without 0 

1 

2 


without 0 

1 

2 











69 - 4-pole double throw without 0 

11 - 3-pole reversing switch 

13 - Pole-changing switch with 0 (Dahlander) 

1 

2 

1 

0 0 2 

1 2 



12 - Wye-delta switch 





26 - Reversing switch, spring return to 0 

Y 

0 

0 

∆ 

1 

0 2 





20 - Pole-changing switch with reversing (Dahlander) 

1 

1 

2 2 






Rotary cam switches. Circuit schemes 

electric 

97 - Ammeter switch direct reading or via current transformer 68 - Phase-neutral voltmeter switch 67 - Phase-phase voltmeter switch 

L3 

0 

L1 

0 

L1N 

L2N 

L3N 

0 

L1-L2 

L2-L3 

L3-L1 

W 

L2 







66 - Phase-phase phase-neutral 

voltmeter changeover 

60 - Double throw switch 1 phase 

phase-neutral, 3 phase-phase voltages 

98 - L1-L2-L3 current double throw switch 

L1-L2 

0 

L1-N 

L2-L3 

L2-N 

L3-L1 

L3-N 

0 

L1N L1-L2 

0 

L2-L3 

L3-L1 

L3 

L2 

L1 







Timers 

TM P 

A1 15 

On delay. Delay on make, with 

start at relay energizing. 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A2 16 18 

18 

15 

16 

t 

TM M1 


start at relay energizing 

A1 

A2 

ON 

Pulse on relay energizing with start 

at external contact closing 

A1 

A2 

ON 

S 

A1 S 

15 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

18 

15 

16 

t 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

S 

18 

15 

16 

t 

t 

A2 16 18 

Pulse on relay energising with 

start on energizing 

A1 

A2 

ON 


at external contact opening 

A1 

A2 

ON 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

18 

15 

16 

t 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

S 

18 

15 

16 

t 

t 

Flasher, starting with OFF (pause) 

interval. Equal timing recycle. 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

A1 

A2 

ON 

18 

15 

16 

t 

(pause) 

t t t 

(work) (pause) (work) 

On-Off delay. Delay on make, with 

start at external contact closing, and 

delay at break, with start at external 

contact opening. 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

A1 

A2 

ON 

S 

18 

15 

16 

t 

t t t 

Flasher, starting with ON (work) 

interval. Equal timing recycle. 

ON 

A1 

A2 

Step relay at each closing of an 

external contact. 

A1 

A2 

ON 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

18 

15 

16 

t t t t 

(work) (pause) (work) (pause) 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

S 

18 

15 

16 

Off delay. Relay energising at 

external contact closing with start 

on break 

A1 

A2 

ON 

Pulse generator. Unequal timing 

recycle, starting with OFF pulse time 

and 0.5sec ON time. 

A1 

A2 

ON 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

18 

15 

16 

t 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

18 

15 

16 

t 

0,5s 

t 

0,5s 



electric 


Timers 

W-9 

TM M2 

S 

With instantaneous operation 

programmed 

S 

With delayed operation programmed 

A1 S 15 

23 

A1 S 15 

27 

W 

INST 

DEL 

A2 16 18 

24 

A2 16 18 

28 

On delay. Delay on make, with start 

at relay energizing 

Pulse on relay energising with start on 

energizing 

On delay. Delay on make, with start 

at relay energizing 

Pulse on relay energising with start on 

energizing 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

15 

16 

23 

24 

t 


interval. Equal timing recycle 

23 

24 

t 

Flasher, starting with ON (work) interval. 

Equal timing recycle 

15 

16 

27 

28 

t 


interval. Equal timing recycle 

27 

28 

t 

Flasher, starting with ON (work) interval. 

Equal timing recycle 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

ON 

A1 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

15 

16 

15 

16 

23 

24 

t 

(pause) 

t 

(work) 

t 

(pause) 

t 

(work) 

23 

24 

t 

(work) 

t 

(pause) 

t 

(work) 

t 

(pause) 

27 

28 

t 

(pause) 

t 

(work) 

t 

(pause) 

t 

(work) 

27 

28 

t 

(work) 

t 

(pause) 

t 

(work) 

t 

(pause) 

Off delay. Relay energizing at external 

contact closing with start on break 

Pulse on relay energizing with start on 

external contact closing 


contact closing with start on break 

Pulse on relay energizing with start on 

external contact closing 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

S 

18 

15 

16 

23 

24 

t 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

S 

18 

15 

16 

23 

24 

t 

t 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

S 

18 

15 

16 

27 

28 

t 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 

S 

18 

15 

16 

27 

28 

t 

t 

C 

B 

A 

D E F G 

J 

H 

I 


on external contact opening 

On-off delay. Delay make, with start at 

external contact closing and delay at 

break, with start at external contact 

opening 


on external contact opening 

On-off delay. Delay make, with start at 

external contact closing and delay at 

break, with start at external contact 

opening 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

18 

18 

18 

18 

15 

16 

23 

24 

t 

t 

15 

16 

23 

24 

t 

t t t 

15 

16 

27 

28 

t 

t 

15 

16 

27 

28 

t 

t t t 

Step relay at each closing of an external 

contact 

Pulse generator. Unequal timing recycle, 

starting with ON pulse time 

Step relay at each closing of an external 

contact 

Pulse generator. Unequal timing recycle, 

starting with ON pulse time 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

S 

D E F G 

C 

H 

B 

I 

A J 

18 

15 

16 

18 

15 

16 

18 

18 

15 

16 

23 

24 

23 

24 

t 

0,5s t 0,5s 

15 

16 

27 

28 

27 

28 

t 

0,5s t 0,5s 

TM PL 

A1 S 15 

Flasher, starting with 

ON interval. Equal 

timing recycle, ON first 

ON 

A1 

A2 

Flasher, starting with 

OFF interval. Equal 

timing recycle, OFF first 

ON 

A1 

A2 

TM D 

A1 15 

True off delay. Delay on break, starting 

at relay de-energising 

ON 

A1 

A2 

A2 16 18 

S-A1 

18 

15 

16 

W 

P 

W 

P 

S-A1 

18 

15 

16 

P 

W 

P 

W 

A2 16 18 18 

15 

16 

t 

W = Work / On 

P = Pause / Off 




Timers 

electric 

TM LS 

Staircase lighting 

TM ST 

For starting 

W 

L 

N 

N 3 

L 4 

L 

N 

ON 

L/N 

3 

L 

4 

t t 1h 

>3s >3s >3s 

A1 17 

A2 

18 28 

A1 

A2 

ON 

18 

17 

28 

17 

start 

transition 

N 3 

L 

N 

ON 

L 

N 

L 4 

L 

4 

AT1P 

AT1CP 

ATD 

220-440VAC 

100-240VAC 

24VAC 



24VAC/DC 

110-125VAC/DC 

12VAC/DC 

48-60VAC/DC 



24VAC/DC 

48VAC/DC 

110-127VAC 

220-240VAC 

True off delay. Delay on break, starting at 

relay de-energizing 

A1 A3 15 

ON 

RELAY 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

t 

A1 A3 15 

ON 

RELAY 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

t 

A1 15 

ON 

RELAY 

A1 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

t 

A2 16 18 

A2 16 18 

A2 16 18 

AT1DP 

24VAC/DC 

48VAC/DC 

110-127VAC 

220-240VAC 

Off delay. Relay energizing at external contact closing. 

Delay at break, with start at de-engerzing, auxiliary supply 

❶ 

A1 B1 15 

A2 16 18 

ON 

RELAY 

A1 

A2 

B1 

18 

15 

16 

> 25ms 

t 

❶ B1 terminal must be simultaneously supplied 

with terminal A1 or there after. 

CAUTION: With DC supply, the “-” polarity must be 

connected to A2 terminal. 

BTPM1 

On delay. Delay on make, with start at relay 

energizing 

Pulse on relay energizing with start when 

energized 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 16 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 

16 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

220-240VAC 

110-127VAC 

24VAC/DC 

On delay. Delay on make with start at 

external contact opening 


contact opening 

A1 

A3 

A4 

15 

A2 16 18 

R1 

R2 

C❷ 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 

16 

R1 

C❶ 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 

16 

R1 

C❶ 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

60VAC/DC 

48VAC/DC 

24VAC/DC 

Flasher 

Starting with OFF interval. 

Equal timing 

Starting with ON interval. 

Equal timing 

A1 

A3 

A4 

15 

A2 16 18 

R1 

R2 

C❷ 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 16 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 

16 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

t 

t t t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

❷ “C” contact must be volt free (dry). 

Flasher at external contact 

“C” opening 

Starting with OFF interval. 

Equal timing 

Starting with ON interval. 

Equal timing 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 16 

C❶ 

R1 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

A. 

A2 

RELAY 

18 

15 

16 

R1 

C❶ 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 



electric 


Timers 

W-11 

BTPM 

220-240VAC 

110-127VAC 

24VAC/DC 

On delay. Delay 

on make, 

with start at 

relay energizing 

2 SPDT contact, both delayed 1 instantaneous SPDT contact + 

1 delayed SPDT contact 

ON 

RELAY 

25 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

26 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

RELAY 

15 

A. 

A2 

18 

16 

24 

21 

22 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

W 

A1 A3 A4 25 

15 

A2 26 28 16 18 

R1 

R2 

C❶ 

Pulse on relay 

energising 

with start 

when 

energized 

ON 

RELAY 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

25 

26 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

RELAY 

21 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

24 

22 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

60VAC/DC 

48VAC/DC 

24VAC/DC 

A1 A3 A4 25 

15 

A2 26 28 16 18 

R1 

R2 

C❶ 

On delay. 

Delay on 

make with 

start at 

external 

contact 

opening 

ON 

RELAY 

25 

C❶ 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

26 

R1 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

RELAY 

15 

C❶ 

A. 

A2 

18 

16 

24 

21 

22 

R1 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

A1 

A1 

Time range setting (t DELAY) 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0.3-3sec 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0.3-3min 

220-240VAC 

A3 

A2 

110-127VAC 

A4 

60VAC/DC 

A3 

A2 

24VAC/DC 

48VAC/DC 

A4 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1.2-12sec 

ON 

22 

24VAC/DC 

22 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1.2-12min 

21 

21 

24 

24 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

9.6-96sec 

ON 

15 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

9.6-96min 

16 18 

15 

16 18 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

76.8-768sec 

ON 

R1 

R2 

R1 

R2 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

76.8-768min 

C❶ 

C❶ 

Off delay. 

Delay at 

break, 

with start 

at external 

contact 

opening 

Flasher 

ON 

RELAY 

Flasher at 

external contact 

“C” opening 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

25 26 

C❶ 

R1 

R2 

Starting with 

OFF interval. 

Equal timing 

Starting with 

ON interval. 

Equal timing 

Starting with 

OFF interval. 

Equal timing 

Starting with 

ON interval. 

Equal timing 

t 

ON 

RELAY 

ON 

RELAY 

ON 

RELAY 

ON 

RELAY 

25 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

26 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

25 

26 

25 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

C❶ 

28 

26 

R1 

R2 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

28 

25 

26 

t 

t 

t 

t t t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

RELAY 

C❶ 

21 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 16 

24 

22 

R1 

R2 

t 

ON 

RELAY 

ON 

RELAY 

ON 

RELAY 

ON 

RELAY 

15 

A. 

A2 

18 

16 

24 

21 

22 

21 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

24 

22 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

24 

21 

22 

C❶ 

21 

R1 

R2 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 

16 

24 

22 

t 

t 

t 

t t t t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

ON 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

❶ “C” contact must be volt free (dry). 

C❶ 

R1 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

R1 

C❶ 

R2 

t 

t 

t 

DRPL 

220-240VAC 

110-127VAC 

24VAC/DC 

A1 A3 A4 15 25 

A2 16 18 26 28 S1 S2 

Time range setting (t DELAY) 

1 

Flasher, starting with OFF interval. 

Independent timing 

ON 

ON 

WORK 

1 

ON 

25 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 16 

28 

26 

1 

ON 

t1 t2 t1 t2 

1 

ON 

1 

ON 

1 

ON 

Inizio pausa 

S1 

S2 

1 

ON 

Flasher, starting with ON interval. 

Independent timing 

1 

ON 

ON 

WORK 

1 

15 

ON 

A. 

A2 

18 

16 

28 

25 26 

1 

ON 

t2 

1 

t1 

ON 

t2 

1 

t1 

ON 

Inizio lavoro 

S1 

S2 

BT2N 

For starting 

48VAC/DC 

110-127VAC 

220-240VAC 

380-415VAC 

415-440VAC 

24VAC/DC 

A1 A3 15 

A2 16 18 

26 

25 

28 

ON 

RELAY 

A. 

A2 

18 

15 16 

28 

25 

26 

start 

transition 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

3 

4 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

6 

7 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

8 

0.3-3s 

0.6-6s 

1.2-12s 

3-30s 

6-60s 

12-120s 0.3-3min 0.6-6min 1.2-12min 3-30min 6-60min 12-120min 




Timers 

electric 

L48TP... 

L48TPB... 

110VAC 

220VAC 

24VAC 

24VAC/DC 

110VAC 

240VAC 

24VAC/DC 

110VAC 

240VAC 

W 

ON 

RELAY 

8 

1 2 4 8 

7 5 6 

On delay 

2 

7 

6 

5 

t 

ON 

RELAY 

1 

8 

2 

7 

3 

4 

6 

5 

2 1 

7 4 3 

On delay 

t 

8 

5 6 

B 

A 

DIP-SWITCH 

ON 

RELAY 

1 

8 

2 

7 

3 

4 

6 

5 

2 1 

7 4 3 

8 

5 6 

B 

A 

DIP-SWITCH 

On delay with one instantaneous 

SPDT contact and one late-break 

SPDT contact 

L48M... 

24÷240VAC/DC 

2 1 

On delay 

1 

0 

11 

F 

5 

6 

M 

R 

T (preset time) = T1+T2 

❶ Contacts “M” and “R” are to be volt free (dry). 

F 

F 

F 

DIP SWITCH 1 DIP SWITCH 1 DIP SWITCH 1 DIP SWITCH 

Pulse on relay 0 

Flasher 

0 

Flasher 

0 

energizing with start on energizing 

starting with OFF 

starting with ON 

ON 

2 

10 

MEMORY 

5 

7 

6 

RESET 

7 

9 

RELAY 11 

8 

3 

1 

4 

T 

M 

R 

T1 T2 

2 

ON 

10 

MEMORY 5 

7 

RESET 

6 

7 

9 

RELAY 11 

8 

3 

1 

4 

M 

R 

T1 T2 T 

ON 

2 

10 

5 

MEMORY 

7 

6 

RESET 

7 

9 

RELAY 11 

8 

3 

1 

4 

T 

T 

T 

M 

T 

R 

T 

T 

ON 

2 

10 

MEMORY 5 

7 

6 

RESET 

7 

9 

RELAY 11 

8 

3 

1 

4 

M 

R 

T 

T 

T T T 

T 

T 


Voltage monitoring for single-phase systems 

PMV55 

A1 

Reset delay 

MAX Delay 

Reset delay 

MIN Delay 

Reset delay 

A2 

A1 A2 

TRMS 

Set up V MAX 

Hysteresis 

14 

12 11 

Hysteresis 

Set up V MIN 

V MAX 

V MIN 

ON 

Relay 

14 

11 

12 

A1 - A2 

Voltage monitoring for three-phase systems 

PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40 

PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Phase loss and phase sequence (PMV10 - PMV20 - PMV30 - PMV40 - PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70) 

Reset delay 

Reset delay 

Reset delay 

L1 

L2 

L2 

L1 

L3 

L3 

L1 L2 L3 

TRMS 

14 12 11 

ON 

MAX 

MIN 

ASYMMETRY 

11 

14 

12 

ON 

MAX 

MIN 

ASYMMETRY 

14 

11 

12 



electric 



W-13 

Voltage monitoring for three-phase systems 

PMV30 - PMV40 

PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 

L2 L3 

TRMS 

High and low voltage (PMV30 - PMV50 - PMV60 - PMV70) 

Reset delay MAX Delay Reset delay MIN Delay Reset delay 

Set up V MAX 

Hysteresis 

Hysteresis 

Set up V MIN 

L1 - L2 - L3 

W 

14 

12 11 

ON 

V MAX 

V MIN 

14 

11 

12 

Asymmetry (PMV40 - PMV60 - PMV70) 

Reset delay 

Trip delay 

Reset delay 

Set point 

asymmetry 

Hysteresis 

L1 - L2 - L3 

On 

Asymmetry 

11 

14 

12 

Current monitoring of single-phase systems 

PMA20 

Automatic resetting 

Manual resetting 

PMA20 

2 

10 

2 

10 

Us 

0.02A 

1A 

5A 

16A 

A1 A2 R I B4 B3 B2 B1 C 11 12 14 

B2÷B4 

9 

RESET 

11 

3 

INHIBITION 

11 

9 

RESET 

11 

3 

INHIBITION 

11 

RESET 

INHIBITION 

C 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 

L2 

L3 

7 

6 

5 

I 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 

7 

6 

5 

I 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

Inhibition 0.1-20s 

Delay 0.1-20s 

t 

Inhibition 

0.1-20s 

Delay 

0.1-20s 

Manual 

Reset 

t 

PMA21 Automatic resetting Manual resetting 

PMA21 

2 

10 

2 

10 

Us 

A1 A2 R I B4 B3 B2 B1 C 11 12 14 

B2÷B4 

RESET 

INHIBITION 

0.02A 

1A 

5A 

16A 

C 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L1 

L2 

L3 

9 

9 

RESET 

RESET 

11 

11 

3 

3 

INHIBITION 

INHIBITION 

11 

11 

7 

6 

6 

5 

I 

Set Point 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 

7 

5 

I 


Delay 0.1-20s 

t 

Inhibition 

0.1-20s 

Delay 

0.1-20s 

Manual 

Reset 

t 





electric 

PMA30 



Manual pulse resetting 

PMA30 

A1 

A2 

A1 

A2 

A1 

A2 

W 

Us 

0.02A 

1A 

5A 

16A 

A1 A2 R I B4 B3 B2 B1 C 11 12 14 

B2÷B4 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

A1 

INHIBITION 

I 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

A1 

INHIBITION 

I 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

A1 

INHIBITION 

I 

Inhibition 

Reset 

RESET 

INHIBITION 

C 

L1 

L2 

L3 

14 

11 

12 

I 

14 

11 

12 

I 

14 

11 

12 

I 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 


Delay 0.1-20s 

t 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

Inhibition 

0.1-20s 

Delay 

0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

Manual 

Reset 

t 


Delay 0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

t 



Manual pulse resetting 

A1 

A2 

A1 

A2 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

Inhibition 

Reset 

A1 

INHIBITION 

I 

A1 

INHIBITION 

I 

A1 

INHIBITION 

I 

14 

11 

12 

I 

14 

11 

12 

I 

14 

11 

12 

I 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 

Set Point 

5÷100% f.s. 

5-30% 


Delay 0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

t 


Delay 0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

t 


Delay 0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

t 

Manual Reset 

Frequency monitoring 

Reset delay 

MAX Delay 

Reset delay 

MIN Delay 

Reset delay 

PMF20 

Set up Hz MAX 

Hysteresis 

A1 

A2 

Nominal 

frequency 

MAX Delay 

Reset delay 

A1 A2 

F. Detect 

Hysteresis 

Set up Hz MIN 

Set up Hz MAX 

Hysteresis 

14 

12 11 

A1 - A2 

Nominal 

frequency 

Hz MAX 

A1 - A2 

Hz MIN 

Hz MAX 

Phase shift monitoring 

ON 

14 

Relay 11 

12 

ON 

14 

Relay 11 

12 

PMA40 - PMA50 Automatic resetting Manual resetting 

16A 

PMA40 

PMA50 

A1 A2 R B4 B3 B2 B1 C 11 12 14 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

A1 

A2 

ON 

A1 

RESET 

R 

L2 

L3 

RESET 

B1 C 

L1 

L2 

L3 

14 

11 

12 

I 

14 

11 

12 

I 

L1 

L2 

L3 

Set Point 

cosϕ 

5-30% 

Set Point 

cosϕ 

5-30% 


Delay 0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

t 


Delay 0.1-20s 

Reset Delay 

0.1-20s 

Manual 

Reset 

t 



electric 



W-15 

Emptying function 

LVM20 

LVM20 

W 

24VAC 

110-127VAC 

220-240VAC 

380-415VAC 

A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11 

0VAC 

-MAX 

-MIN 

-COM 

Emptying function with 3 electrodes 

Emptying function with 2 electrodes 

COM 

MIN 

MAX 

COM 

MAX 

MIN 

ON 

LVM20 

A2 

A1 

ON 

LVM20 

A2 

A1 

RELAY 

RELAY 

11 

14 

12 

11 

14 

12 

Emptying or filling functions 

LVM25 

LVM25 

Emptying function (DOWN) 

Connection with 3 electrodes 

COM 

MIN 

MAX 

PROBE SIGNAL 

OR STARTING DELAY ❶ 

PROBE SIGNAL DELAY ❶ 


COM 

MAX 

MIN 

PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY ❶ 


A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 12 14 11 

ON 

SUPPLY 

SUPPLY 

ON 

24-48VAC/DC 

110-240VAC/DC 

RELAY 

RELAY 

0VAC 

LVM30 

-MAX 

-MIN 

-COM 

RELAY 

❷ 

24 

21 

22 

14 

11 

12 

❶ Time delay for LVM30 only. 

❷ SPDT contact for LVM30 only. 

RELAY 

24 

21 

22 

14 

11 

12 

LVM30 

Filling function (UP) 



PROBE SIGNAL 



PROBE SIGNAL OR STARTING DELAY ❶ 

220-240VAC 

380-415VAC 

A1 A2 COM MAX MIN 

A3 14 12 11 24 22 21 

COM 

MIN 

MAX 

PROBE SIGNAL 


COM 

MAX 


24VAC 

110-127VAC 

0VAC 

-MAX 

-MIN 

-COM 

ON 

SUPPLY 

SUPPLY 

ON 

RELAY 

RELAY 

RELAY 

❷ 

24 

21 

22 

14 

11 

12 

❶ Time delay for LVM30 only. 

❷ SPDT contact for LVM30 only. 

RELAY 

24 

21 

22 

14 

11 

12 





electric 

Multiple functions 

LVM40 

LVM40 

Emptying function + alarms 

COM 

MIN 2 

MIN 1 

MAX 1 

MAX 2 

➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➋ 

W 

ON 

A2 

A1 

24VAC 

110-127VAC 

220-240VAC 

380-415VAC 

0VAC 

A1 A2 COM MIN2 MIN1 MAX1 MAX2 13 11 22 24 21 

-MAX2 

-MAX1 

-MIN1 

-MIN2 

-COM 

14 

13 

21 24 

22 

Filling function + alarms 

COM 

MIN 2 

MIN 1 

MAX 1 

MAX 2 

➊ 

➋ ➊ ➋ ➋ ➋ ➋ ➋ 

ON 

A2 

A1 

14 

13 

24 

21 

22 

Filling function + pump start change 

COM 

MIN 1 

MIN 2 

MAX 1 

MAX 2 

➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ 

ON 

A2 

A1 

14 

13 

21 24 

22 

5 sec 

Filling function + pump start change 

COM 

MIN 2 

MIN 1 

MAX 2 

MAX 1 

➊ ➋ ➊ ➋ ➊ ➊ ➋ ➊ 

ON 

A2 

A1 

14 

13 

24 

21 

22 

5 sec 

Filling tank and draining well function + alarm 

COM 

MIN 1 

MAX 1 

➊ 

➋ 

➊ 

➋ 

➊ 

Tank 

COM 

MIN 2 

MAX 2 

Well 

ON 

A2 

A1 

14 

13 

➊ Probe signal and starting delay 

➋ Probe signal delay 

21 24 

22 



electric 



W-17 

Startup priority change monitoring 

LVM P05 

A1 13 

Relay 

1 

Relay 

2 

ON 

A1 

A2 

W 

A2 

14 24 

14 

13 

24 

13 

LVM P10 

2-wire connection 

A1 

14 

Relay 1 

24 

Relay 2 

ON 

A2 

A1 

C-S1 

A2 

C 

S1 S2 

C 

R1 R2 

13 

23 

C-S2 

RELAY 1 

RELAY 2 

13 

14 

23 

24 

DELAY 

S1 = Primary 

S2 = Secondary / Standby 

3-wire connection 

A1 

14 

24 

ON 

A2 

A1 

Relay 1 

Relay 2 

C-S1 

A2 

C S1 S2 C R1 R2 13 23 

C-R1 

C-S2 

C-R2 

RELAY 1 

13 

14 

RELAY 2 

23 

24 

DELAY 

S1 = Primary 

S2 = Secondary / Standby 





electric 

W 

DMK 80 - DMK 80R1 

DMK 00 - DMK 00R1 

L 

L/N 

L 

L/N 

600VAC 

METER 

DMK 81 - DMK 81R1 

DMK 01 - DMK 01R1 

L 

L/N 

S1 

5AAC 

S2 

METER 

DMK 82 

DMK 02 

L 

L/N 

L 

L/N 

600VAC 

S1 

METER 


S2 

DMK 83 - DMK 83R1 

DMK 03 - DMK 03R1 

L 

L/N 

L 

L/N 

600VAC 45/65Hz 

METER 

DMK 84 - DMK 84R1 

DMK 04 - DMK 04R1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

L 

L/N 

600VAC 

S1 

METER 


S2 

A1 A2 14 12 11 

A1 A2 14 12 11 

A1 

A2 

A1 A2 14 12 11 

A1 

A2 

14 12 11 

110...127VAC 

Only for DMK... R1 

110...127VAC 


110...127VAC 

110...127VAC 


110...127VAC 


DMK 70 - DMK 70R1 

DMK 10 - DMK 10R1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

DMK 71 - DMK 71R1 

DMK 11 - DMK 11R1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

DMK 75 - DMK 75R1 

DMK 15 - DMK 15R1 

DMK 16 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

I1 I2 I3 COM 

L1 L2 L3 N 

I1 I2 I3 COM 

600VAC 

METER 

METER 


600VAC 

METER 


A1 

A2 

14 12 11 

A1 

A2 

14 12 11 

A1 

A2 

14 13 

110...127VAC 


110...127VAC 


110...127VAC 


DMK20 - DMK21 - DMK22 - DMK25 - DMK26 

Single phase 

Two phase 

Three phase with or without neutral 

L 

N 

CT1 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L1 

L2 

N 

CT1 

CT2 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

CT1 

CT2 

CT3 

L 

O 

A 

D 

110...127VAC❶ 

110...127VAC❶ 

110...127VAC❶ 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 

C 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 

N 

I1 I2 I3 C 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

Three phase without neutral with ARON connection 

L1 

L2 

L3 

CT1 

CT2 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L1 

L2 

L3 

CT1 

CT3 

L 

O 

A 

D 

110...127VAC❶ 

110...127VAC❶ 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N I1 I2 I3 C 

L 

N 

L1 L2 

L3 

N 

I1 

I2 

I3 C 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

❶ 12-24VDC battery power supply for DMK25 or DMK26 (L = “-” and N = “+”). 

DMK50 - DMK51 - DMK52 

Single phase 

Two phase 


L 

N 

CT1 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L1 

L2 

N 

CT1 

CT2 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L1 

L2 

L3 

N 

CT1 

CT2 

CT3 

L 

O 

A 

D 

110...1274VAC 

110...1274VAC 

110...1274VAC 

10 

12 

30 32 34 36 14 15 16 

17 

18 

10 

12 

30 32 34 36 14 15 16 

17 

18 

10 

12 

30 32 34 36 14 15 16 

17 

18 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N 

C C I1 

I2 

I3 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N 

C C I1 I2 I3 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N 

C C I1 

I2 

I3 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 


L1 

L2 

L3 

CT1 

CT2 

L 

O 

A 

D 

L1 

L2 

L3 

CT1 

CT3 

L 

O 

A 

D 

110...1274VAC 

110...1274VAC 

10 12 

30 

34 32 36 15 14 16 

17 18 

10 

12 

30 32 34 36 14 15 16 

17 

18 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N 

C C I1 

I2 

I3 

L 

N 

L1 L2 L3 N 

C C I1 

I2 

I3 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

CURRENT 



electric 



W-19 

DMK30 - DMK31 - DMK32 - DMK40 - DMK60 - DMK61 - DMK62 

Single phase 

Two phase 


CT1 

L 

O 

A 

D 

CT1 

CT2 

L 

O 

A 

D 

CT1 

CT2 

CT3 

L 

O 

A 

D 

W 

100...240VAC 

100...240VAC 

100...240VAC 

GND 

L1 L2 L3 N S1S2 S1 S2 S1S2 

GND 

L1 L2 L3 N S1S2 S1S2 S1S2 

GND 

L1 L2 L3 N S1S2 S1S2 S1S2 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

INPUT 

CURRENT 

INPUT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

INPUT 

CURRENT 

INPUT 

AUX SUPPLY 

VOLTAGE 

INPUT 

CURRENT 

INPUT 


CT1 

CT2 

L 

O 

A 

D 

CT1 

CT3 

L 

O 

A 

D 

100...240VAC 

100...240VAC 

GND 

L1 L2 L3 N S1S2 S1S2 S1S2 

GND 

L1 L2 L3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 

AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT 

AUX SUPPLY VOLTAGE CURRENT 


DCRK with BFK contactors 

DCRJ with BFK contactors 

MAINS 

L1 L2 L3 

DCRK12 

CURRENT 

/5A 

VOLTAGE 

0V 

380-415V 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

MAINS 

L1 L2 L3 

DCRJ12 

CURRENT 

/5A 

AUX 

SUPPLY 

0V 

110-127VAC 

220-240VAC 

INPUT 

VOLTAGE 

100-690VAC 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

RS485 

TEMP. 

SENSOR 

TR 

A 

B 

SG 

18 

19 

NTC01 

S1 S2 15 16 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

S1 S2 15 16 17 L1 L2 L3 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

CT1 

CT1 

FU16 

FU17 

QS1 

FU13 FU14 FU15 

FU1 

FU2 

FU12 

QS1 

FU13 

FU16 

FU14 

FU15 

FU1 

FU2 

FU12 

KM1 

KM2 

KM12 

KM1 

KM2 

KM12 

LOAD 

LOAD 

K1 

K2 

K12 

K1 

K2 

K12 

IMPORTANT! 

a. For three-phase connection, the voltage input must be connected between two phases; the line current 

transformer must be connected on the remaining phase. 

b. The polarity of the current input is irrelevant. 

c. When the auxiliary source is available, the line to be controlled (maximum 240VAC) can supply the 

controller. 

CAUTION! Always cut off the power supply when operating on the terminals. 





electric 

ATL 

W 

LINE 1 

L1 L2 L3 N 

LINE 2 

L1 L2 L3 N 

QF1 

QF2 

8.1 

8.2 

8.3 

8.4 

9.1 

9.2 

9.3 

5.1 5.2 5.3 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 

+ _ _ 

DIGITAL INPUTS 

DC 

SUPPLY 

RS232 

RS485 

SG 6.1 

B 6.2 

A 6.3 

TR 6.4 

9.4 

Q1 

Q2 

7.1 

7.2 

1.1 1.2 1.3 

2.1 2.2 2.3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.5 3.4 3.6 3.7 3.8 

L1 L2 L3 N 

LOAD 


LRD12R D024 

LRD12T D024 

LRD12R A024 

LRD10R A240 

24VDC DIGITAL 

24VDC 24VDC 0...10VDC ANALOG 

24VDC 

24VDC 

24VDC DIGITAL 

0...10VDC ANALOG 

24VAC 

24VAC 

100...240VAC 

100...240VAC 

+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 A1 A2 

DIGITAL INPUT DIGITAL/ANALOG 

INPUT 

+ – 

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 

DIGITAL INPUT 

A1 A2 

DIGITAL/ANALOG 

INPUT 

L N 

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 

DIGITAL INPUT 

L N 

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 

DIGITAL INPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 

TRANSISTOR OUTPUT 

Q2 Q3 Q1 Q4 

+ – + – + – + – 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 

24VDC 

LRD20R D024 

LRD20T D024 

24VDC 

24VDC 

24VDC DIGITAL 


24VDC 

24VDC 

24VDC DIGITAL 


+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 

DIGITAL INPUT 


INPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 

+ – I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 A1 A2 A3 A4 

DIGITAL INPUT 


INPUT 


Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 

+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – 

24VDC 

LRD20R A024 

LRD20R A240 

24VAC 

24VAC 

100...240VAC 

100...240VAC 

L 

N 

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC 

L 

N 

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 IA IB IC 

DIGITAL INPUT 

DIGITAL INPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 



electric 



W-21 

Expansion modules 

LRE08R D024 

LRE08T D024 

LRE8R A024 

LRE8R A240 

24VDC 

24VDC 

24VDC 

24VDC 

24VAC 

24VAC 

100...240VAC 100...240VAC 

+ – 

X1 

X2 X3 

X4 

DIGITAL INPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

+ – 

X1 

X2 X3 

X4 

DIGITAL INPUT 

L N 

X1 X2 X3 X4 

DIGITAL INPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

L N 

X1 X2 X3 X4 

DIGITAL INPUT 

RELAY OUTPUT 

W 

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 


Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 

+ – + – + – + – 

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 

24VDC 

Power supply module 

LRX 1V3 D024 

Communication module 

LRE P00 

100...240VAC 

VOut 

24VDC 

L 

N 

+ – 

OUTPUT 

+ + – – 

OUTPUT 

A B S 

24VDC - 1.3A 

RS485 



Technical charact 



TC 


® 

electric 

teristics 

® 

electric 




TC-2 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 

characteristics 

TYPE 

SM1B SM2A SM3A LMS25 

CONTACT AND RELEASE CHARACTERISTICS 


Rated frequency Hz 50/60 

Rated impulse voltage Uimp kV 6 

Maximum rated current A 32 50 100 25 

Number of adjustment ranges 15 4 4 13 

Power dissipation per phase W 2.2-9.7 7.1-20 10-38 2-15 

Magnetic tripping 12 In 13 In 13 In 12In 

Mechanical life cycles 100,000 25,000 25,000 100,000 

Electrical life (Ie max AC3) cycles 100,000 50,000 50,000 100,000 

Maximum tightening Nm 2.3 4.5 6 2 

torque for terminals lbft 1.7 3.3 4.4 1.5 

Tool PH2 PZ2 Allen 4mm PZ2 

Minimum-maximum conductor section 

connectable 1 or 2 wires 

AWG n° 16-10 18-3 10-1/0 14-8 

Flexible without lug mm 2 1-6 0.75-25 10-50 0.75-4 

AMBIENT CONDITIONS 

Temperature Operating °F -4 to +160 -4 to +160 -4 to +160 -15 to -120❶ 

(-20 to +70°C) (-20 to +70°C) (-20 to +70°C) (-25 to +50°C) 

Storage °F -60 to +175 -60 to +175 -60 to +175 -60 to +160 

(-50 to +80°C) (-50 to +80°C) (-50 to +80°C) (-50 to +70°C) 

Compensation °F -4 to +120 -4 to +120 -4 to +120 -4 to +120 

(-20 to +50°C) (-20 to +50°C) (-20 to +50°C) (-20 to +50°C)❶ 

Maximum altitude ft 9800 (3000m) 


any 

Mounting 35mm DIN rail Screw fixing Screw fixing Screw fixing 

(IEC/EN 60715) or 35mm or DIN rail 35mm or 35mm 

DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) DIN rail 

(IEC/EN 60715) or 75mm (IEC/EN 60715) 

(IEC/EN 60715) 

N.B. PH = Phillips; PZ = Pozidrive; Allen is metric type. 

❶ Value in free air temperature: -4 to -105°F(-20 to +40°C) in enclosure. 

Thermal tripping 

curve 

100 

60 

40 

10 

5 

2 

1 

[min] 

Opening time 

[s] 

10,000 

5,000 

2,000 

1,000 

500 

200 

100 

50 

A 

Tripping times at cold state are an 

indication only. The tripping time at 

hot state is obtained by multiplying the 

value obtained from the characteristic 

curve by 0.75. 

A = Balanced 3-phase operation 

B = 2-phase operation (phase failure) 

Ie = Rated current 

20 

10 

5 

2 

1 

0.5 

0.2 

0.1 

0.05 

B 

0.02 

0.01 

0.005 

0.002 

0.001 

0.6 

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 

0.8 

x I [A] 



® 

electric 



TC-3 

IEC breaking capacity 

Type Thermal trip Rated short-circuit breaking capacity [kA] Protection fuses when I > Icu 

adjustment range 

(gL or gG fuses) ❶ 

230V 400V 500V 690V 230V 400V 500V 690V 

[A] Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics [A] [A] [A] [A] 

SM1B 00 0.1-0.16 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

SM1B 04 0.16-0.25 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

SM1B 08 0.25-0.4 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

SM1B 12 0.4-0.63 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

SM1B 16 0.63-1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

SM1B 20 1-1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

SM1B 24 1.6-2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 ▲ ▲ ▲ 35 

SM1B 28 2.5-4 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 ▲ ▲ ▲ 35 

SM1B 32 4-6.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 ▲ ▲ ▲ 40 

SM1B 36 6.3-10 100 100 100 100 42 21 8 8 ▲ ▲ 63 50 

SM1B 40 9-14 100 100 25 12.5 10 5 2 2 ▲ 80 63 50 

SM1B 44 13-18 100 100 25 12.5 4 2 2 2 ▲ 100 80 63 

SM1B 48 17-23 100 100 25 12.5 4 2 2 2 ▲ 100 80 63 

SM1B 52 20-25 100 100 25 12.5 4 2 2 2 ▲ 100 80 63 

SM1B 56 24-32 100 100 25 12.5 4 2 2 2 ▲ 100 80 63 

TC 

SM2A 64 22-32 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 ▲ 125 100 63 

SM2A 68 28-40 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 ▲ 160 100 63 

SM2A 72 36-45 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 ▲ 160 100 63 

SM2A 76 40-50 100 100 50 25 10 5 4 2 ▲ 160 100 80 

SM3A 84 45-63 100 100 50 25 12 6 6 3 ▲ 160 100 80 

SM3A 88 57-75 100 100 50 25 8 4 5 3 ▲ 160 125 100 

SM3A 92 70-90 100 100 50 25 8 4 5 3 ▲ 160 125 125 

SM3A 96 80-100 100 100 50 25 8 4 5 3 ▲ 160 125 125 

LMS25 016T 0.1-0.16 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

LMS25 025T 0.16-0.25 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

LMS25 04T 0.25-0.4 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

LMS25 063T 0.4-0.63 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

LMS25 1T 0.63-1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

LMS25 1V6T 1-1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ 

LMS25 2V5T 1.6-2.5 100 100 100 100 3 3 2.5 2.5 ▲ ▲ 25 20 

LMS25 4T 2.5-4 100 100 100 100 3 3 2.5 1.9 ▲ ▲ 35 25 

LMS25 6V3T 4-6.3 100 100 100 100 3 2.2 2.5 1.9 ▲ ▲ 50 35 

LMS25 10T 6.3-10 100 100 6 3 3 2.2 2.5 1.9 ▲ 80 50 35 

LMS25 16T 10-16 6 6 4 2 2.5 1.9 2 1.5 80 80 63 35 

LMS25 20T 16-20 6 4.5 4 2 2.5 1.9 2 1.5 80 80 63 50 

LMS25 25T 20-25 6 4.5 4 2 2.5 1.9 2 1.5 80 80 63 50 

❶ Fuses are used only in those cases when the value of short-circuit current at the starter installation point exceeds the breaking capacity of the starter. 

▲ Fuses not required. 

Rating data for control-circuit contacts per UL508 

UL designation Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC at 60Hz) Maximum VA 

continuous 120VAC 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC 

test current 

Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break 

A600 10 60 6 30 3 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720 

C300 2.5 15 1.5 7.5 0.75 –– –– –– –– 1800 180 

C300 2.5 15 1.5 7.5 0.75 3.75 0.375 3 0.3 1800 180 

Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break 

Maximum VA 

Make or Break 

125VDC 250VDC 301-600DC 300V or less 

Q300 2.5 0.55 0.27 –– 69 

Q600 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 69 

R300 1 0.22 0.11 –– 28 



TC-4 



® 

electric 

TC 


of contactors 

ON VERTICAL PLANE 

The performances given in this catalogue have been 

established with contactors mounted on a vertical plane with 

line terminals facing upwards and load terminals facing 

downwards. 

All contactors can be mounted with a ± 30° inclination to the 

vertical axis of the contactor without any derating. 

For contactors up to BF110, this inclination can reach ± 90°, 

that is with the terminals are facing towards left and right. 

For BG mini-contactors: 

– Position A (A1-A2 coil terminals facing downwards or 

upwards) is not recommended. 

– Position with A1-A2 coil terminals facing upwards is not 

recommended for types with NC contacts. 

±30° 

±30° 

A2 

Pos. A 

A1 

ON VERTICAL PLANE WITH 30° INCLINATION 

All contactors can be mounted on a plane which varies in 

respect to the vertical up to ± 30° angle. 

On the average, a 5% increase of the minimum pick-up 

voltage in -30° position can be noted. 

This inclination is greater than the one prescribed by main 

naval registers. 

ON HORIZONTAL PLANE (FOR BF SERIES CONTACTORS) 

Considerable performance variations can be noted. 

It is necessary to check the two possible mounting positions: 

– when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment 

moves upwards. 

– when the contactor is energised, the movable equipment 

moves downwards. 

In the first case, it is difficult to close the contactor while in the 

second, to open it. 

The variables which could influence the contactor performance, 

in addition to the two mounting positions, are: 

– type of contactor 

– type of control 

– contact configuration 

– number and type of add-on blocks 

– permissible tolerance of auxiliary voltage variation 

– ambient temperature. 

NOTE: Position B is not recommendable. 

Sales & Technical Support can provide further information 

concerning operational performances of contactors mounted 

on a horizontal plane. 

DYNAMIC TYPE TESTS 

Our contactors sustained dynamic testing, with contactor mounting position rotated ± 22.5° in respect to the three 

orthogonal axes. 



® 

electric 



TC-5 

Utilization 

category AC3 

POLE CHARACTERISTICS 

Squirrel-cage induction motors; breaking at rated motor current. 

MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL POWER at ambient temperature ≤130°F (55°C). 

Contactor Operational Operational power 

type❶ current 

(Ue ≤440V) 220/230V 380/400V 415V 440V 500V 660/690V 1000V 

[A] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] 

BG06 6 1.5 2.2 2.4 2.5 3 3 -- 

BG09 9 2.2 4.0 4.3 4.5 5 5 -- 

BG12 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 5.5 5 5 -- 

BF09A-BF9C 9 2.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.5 7.5 -- 

BF12A-BF12C 12 3.2 5.7 6.2 6.2 7.5 10 -- 

BF16C 16 4.3 7.7 8.5 8.5 10 10 -- 

BF18A 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 -- 

BF20A-BF20C 20 5.5 9.7 10.6 10.6 13 15 -- 

BF25A-BF25C 25 7.0 12.5 13.4 13.4 15 18 -- 

BF26A 26 7.3 13 14 14 15.6 18.5 -- 

BF32A-BF32C 32 8.8 16 17 17 20 22 -- 

BF38A 38 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 -- 

BF40C 40 11 18.5 18.5 18.5 20 22 -- 

BF50 50 14.3 25 27.2 27.2 33.2 43.5 25 

BF65 65 18.5 33 36 36 45.3 59.7 30 

BF80 80 23 41 46 46 56 74 37 

BF95 95 27.6 50 55 55 56 74 45 

BF110 110 33 61 66 70 59 80 45 

B115 110 33 61 66 70 80 100 63 

B145 150 46 80 88 93 100 120 75 

B180 185 57 100 108 115 123 144 103 

B250 265 83 140 155 164 176 212 156 

B310 320 100 170 188 200 213 256 180 

B400 420 130 225 247 263 271 352 208 

B500 520 156 290 306 328 367 416 312 

B630 630 198 335 368 368 368 440 368 

❶ Contact Sales& Technical Supportfor contactor types not mentioned in the table. 

TC 


Electrical life of definite-purpose contactors 

10 

DPBG12 

DPBF09A 

DPBF12A 

MILLION CYCLES 

DPBF18A 

DPBF26A 

DPBF32A 

1 

0.5 

0.1 

1 10 14 20 25 30 40 50 [A] 



TC-6 



® 

electric 


AC3 ≤440V 

Electrical life of contactors with AC control 

TC 

10 

BF09A 

BF12A 

BF18A 

BF25A 

BF26A 

BF32A 

BF38A 

BF50 

BF65 

BF80 

BF95 

BF110 

B115 

B145 

B180 

B250 

B310 

B400 

B500 

B630 

5 


3 

2 

1 

0.5 

0.3 

0.2 

0.1 

10 

BF9C 

BF12C 

BF16C 

BF20C 

BF25C 

BF32C 

BF40C 

BF50C 

BF65C 

BF80C 

BF95C 

B115 

B145 

B180 

B250 

B310 

B400 

B500 

B630 

5 


3 

2 

1 

0.5 

0.3 

0.2 

BG06 D 

BG09 D 

BG12 D 

0.1 

2 

3 

5 

6 

10 

25 

30 

100 

300 

12 

16 

500 

600 

1000 

20 

40 

50 

200 

400 

[A] 

9 

32 

65 

80 

95 

110 

150 

185 

250 

310 

420 

520 

630 

2 

3 

5 

6 

10 

20 

25 

30 

50 

6 

100 

300 

500 

600 

1000 

12 

40 

50 

BG06 

BG09 

BG12 

200 

400 

[A] 

6 

9 

26 

32 

65 

80 

95 

110 

150 

185 

50 

250 

310 

420 

520 

630 

18 

Electrical life of contactors with DC control 

BF110C 



® 

electric 



TC-7 

Utilisation 

categories DC1, 

DC3 and DC5 

Pole characteristics 

CHOICE CRITERIA 

The elements to be considered for the contactor choice are: 

-- Rated operational current Ie 

-- Rated operational voltage Ue 

-- Utilization category and L/R time constant 

-- Eventual verification of electrical life. 

OPERATING CONDITIONS 

Indicated current is valid for: 

-- Ambient temperature ≤ 130°F (55°C) 

-- Operating cycles: up to 120 cy/h with 60% 

on-load factor 

up to 250 cy/h with 30% 

on-load factor 

POLES IN SERIES 

It is important to use contactors with the indicated number of 

poles in series depending on operating voltage. 

The poles in series can be connected to one single polarity or 

divided between the two polarities of the circuit indifferently. 

NOTE. For voltages lower than 30V, the diagrams, given in 

figures 3 and 4, are not recommendable since voltage drops 

can take place. In these cases, it is better to use poles in 

parallel observing the notes given in the following section. 

TC 

Examples of poles in series: 

1 POLE 2 POLES 3 POLES 4 POLES 

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 

POLES IN PARALLEL 

It is possible to increase the electrical life by placing poles in 

series when using voltages which require 1 or 2 poles in 

parallel. 

Poles in parallel do not increase the maximum operational 

current given in the following pages; that is, if one pole has a 

maximum operational current in DC5 of 8A, two poles in 

parallel, it will always be 8A. 

With poles in parallel, it is possible to increase the rated 

contact capacity (Ith) only if the contactor opens and closes in 

no-load conditions or when used as resistance shunts. 

In this case, the contact capacity can be increased. 

The value can be obtained by multiplying the rated current of 

one pole by the factor K given below; e.g.: if one pole carries 

10A, three poles in parallel can carry 10 x 2.2 = 22A. 

Therefore, the operating current is the one indicated in the 

tables, multiplied by the K coefficient given below which take 

into consideration the unequal current division on the various 

poles. 

2 POLES in parallel K = 1.6 



Examples of poles in parallel: 

1 POLE in series and 1 POLE in series and 

CONFIGURAZIONI POLI CONFIGURAZIONI CORRENTE CONFIGURAZIONI POLI D'IMPIEGO POLI CORRENTE CORRENTE IN POLI D.C. D'IMPIEGO CORRENTE D'IMPIEGO IN D'IMPIEGO D.C. IN D.C. IN D.C. 

1 POLE in series and 

Disegno N? BM344 Disegno Disegno N? BM344 Disegno N? BM344 N? BM344 

2 POLE in series and 

2 POLES in parallel 3 POLES in parallel 4 POLES in parallel 2 POLES in parallel 

Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8 

MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL CURRENT 

See tables on pages TC-8, TC-9 and TC-10. 

OTHER CONDITIONS 

For different operating conditions or voltage not included 

CONFIGURAZIONI POLI CORRENTE 

CONFIGURAZIONI D'IMPIEGO 

POLI POLI CORRENTE 

IN 

POLI 

D.C. 

CORRENTE D'IMPIEGO D'IMPIEGO IN D.C. IN D.C. IN D.C. 

among those indicated in the tables, on pages 

Disegno 

TC-8 

N? BM344 Disegno Disegno Disegno N? BM344 N? N? BM344 BM344 

to TC-10, 

contact Sales & Technical Support. 



TC-8 



® 

electric 

DC utilization 

category 



TC 

Voltage Contactor Maximum current Ie [A] in categories: 

Ue DC1 with L/R ≤ 1ms DC3 - DC5 with L/R ≤ 15ms 

and poles in series 


Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 

≤ 24V BG06 9 12 14 -- 6 7 9 -- 

BG09 12 15 16 16 7 8 10 10 

BG12 12 15 16 -- 7 8 10 -- 

BF09A - BF9C 15 18 20 20 10 13 15 15 

BF12A - BF12C 17 20 22 20❶ 12 15 18 15❶ 

BF18A - BF16C 17 20 22 22 12 15 18 18 

BF25A - BF20C 20 23 23 -- 15 18 22 -- 

BF26A - BF25C 25 28 28 28 18 20 25 30 

BF32A - BF32C 30 32 32 -- 20 25 30 -- 

BF38A - BF40C 35 36 36 36 24 28 32 32 

BF50 45 60 60 60 30 35 50 55 

BF65 50 70 70 70 35 45 55 60 

BF80 70 100 100 100 40 60 80 90 

BF95 70 100 100 -- 40 60 80 -- 

BF110 70 100 100 -- 40 60 80 -- 

48V BG06 8 11 14 -- 5 7 9 -- 

BG09 10 14 16 16 6 8 10 10 

BG12 10 14 16 -- 6 8 10 -- 

BF09A - BF9C 13 18 20 20 9 11 15 15 

BF12A - BF12C 15 20 22 20❶ 11 13 18 15❶ 

BF18A - BF16C 15 20 22 22 11 13 18 18 

BF25A - BF20C 18 23 23 -- 13 18 22 -- 

BF26A - BF25C 21 28 28 28 15 20 25 30 

BF32A - BF32C 26 32 32 -- 17 22 28 -- 

BF38A - BF40C 30 34 34 34 20 25 28 28 

BF50 40 60 60 60 25 35 50 55 

BF65 50 70 70 70 25 40 50 60 

BF80 60 100 100 100 30 50 70 90 

BF95 60 100 100 -- 30 55 75 -- 

BF110 60 100 100 -- 30 55 75 -- 

75V BG06 4 7 8 -- 2 4 5 -- 

BG09 4 9 10 10 2 5 6 6 

BG12 4 9 10 -- 2 5 6 -- 

BF09A - BF9C 12 17 20 20 8 10 13 15 

BF12A - BF12C 13 18 20 20❶ 10 12 15 15❶ 

BF18A - BF16C 15 20 20 20 11 13 16 16 

BF25A - BF20C 18 23 23 -- 13 16 18 -- 

BF26A - BF25C 18 25 25 25 13 18 20 25 

BF32A - BF32C 22 28 32 -- 15 20 28 -- 

BF38A - BF40C 23 29 33 33 17 22 28 28 

BF50 40 60 60 60 22 30 45 55 

BF65 50 70 70 70 25 40 50 60 

BF80 60 100 100 100 30 50 70 90 

BF95 60 100 100 -- 30 50 70 -- 

BF110 60 100 100 -- 30 50 70 -- 

❶ Valid for BF12A only. 



® 

electric 



TC-9 







Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 

110V BG06 3 6 8 -- 1 3 4 -- 

BG09 3 8 10 10 1 4 5 5 

BG12 3 8 10 -- 1 4 5 -- 

BF09A - BF9C 6 12 15 16 2 7 11 12 

BF12A - BF12C 6 13 16 16❶ 2 8 12 12❶ 

BF18A - BF16C 6 13 16 18 2 8 12 13 

BF25A - BF20C 6 16 18 -- 2 10 15 -- 

BF26A - BF25C 6 22 24 24 2 13 18 20 

BF32A - BF32C 8 25 27 -- 2.5 15 20 -- 

BF38A - BF40C 8 32 34 34 2.5 18 23 23 

BF50 8 50 55 60 3 25 30 45 

BF65 8 60 60 70 3 30 35 50 

BF80 8 80 85 100 3 40 60 75 

BF95 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 -- 

BF110 8 80 85 -- 3 40 60 -- 

160V BG06 -- 4 6 -- -- 3 3 -- 

BG09 -- 4 8 8 -- 2 4 4 

BG12 -- 4 8 -- -- 2 4 -- 

220V BF09A - BF9C 4 8 10 12 0.75 1.5 5 7 

BF12A - BF12C 4 8 11 12❶ 0.75 1.5 6 7❶ 

BF18A - BF16C 4 8 11 13 0.75 1.5 6 8 

BF25A - BF20C 4 8 12 -- 0.75 1.5 8 -- 

BF26A - BF25C 5 12 14 14 0.75 1.5 10 15 

BF32A - BF32C 5 14 16 -- 1 3 12 -- 

BF38A - BF40C 5 20 26 26 1 4 15 15 

BF50 6 36 45 50 1 5 20 25 

BF65 6 36 50 60 1 5 25 30 

BF80 6 40 55 70 1 7 35 40 

BF95 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 -- 

BF110 6 40 55 -- 1 7 35 -- 

300V BF09A - BF9C -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 5 

BF12A -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 5 

BF18A - BF16C -- -- -- 11 -- -- -- 5 

BF26A - BF25C -- -- -- 16 -- -- -- 10 

BF38A - BF40C -- -- -- 25 -- -- -- 12 

BF50 -- -- -- 45 -- -- -- 20 

BF65 -- -- -- 60 -- -- -- 25 

BF80 -- -- -- 70 -- -- -- 35 

❶ Valid for BF12A only. 

TC 



TC-10 



® 

electric 

DC utilization 

category 



TC 





Type 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 

75V B115 160 160 160 160 140 140 140 140 

B145 220 220 220 220 160 160 160 160 

B180 260 260 260 260 180 180 180 180 

B250 350 350 350 350 280 280 280 280 

B310 375 375 375 375 310 310 310 310 

B400 400 400 400 400 350 350 350 350 

B500 650 650 650 650 550 550 550 550 

B630 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 

110V B115 100 130 130 130 70 100 120 120 

B145 110 150 150 150 80 120 140 140 

B180 120 170 170 170 90 140 160 160 

B250 160 300 300 300 150 250 280 280 

B310 195 350 350 350 170 290 310 310 

B400 250 400 400 400 200 350 350 350 

B500 320 550 600 600 320 550 550 550 

B630 460 800 800 800 460 800 800 800 

220V B115 -- 100 130 130 -- 80 100 120 

B145 -- 130 150 150 -- 90 120 140 

B180 -- 150 170 170 -- 100 140 160 

B250 -- 250 300 300 -- 200 250 280 

B310 -- 300 350 350 -- 230 290 310 

B400 -- 350 400 400 -- 280 350 350 

B500 -- 450 600 600 -- 450 550 550 

B630 -- 700 800 800 -- 700 800 800 

330V B115 -- -- 100 130 -- -- 80 120 

B145 - - 130 150 -- -- 90 140 

B180 -- -- 150 170 -- -- 100 160 

B250 -- -- 250 300 -- -- 200 280 

B310 -- -- 300 350 -- -- 230 310 

B400 -- -- 350 400 -- -- 280 350 

B500 -- -- 450 600 -- -- 450 550 

B630 -- -- 700 750 -- -- 650 700 

460V B115 -- -- -- 100 -- -- -- 80 

B145 -- -- -- 130 -- -- -- 90 

B180 -- -- -- 150 -- -- -- 100 

B250 -- -- -- 250 -- -- -- 200 

B310 -- -- -- 300 -- -- -- 230 

B400 -- -- -- 350 -- -- -- 280 

B500 -- -- -- 450 -- -- -- 450 

B630 -- -- -- 700 -- -- -- 700 



® 

electric 



TC-11 

Selection guide for 

lighting circuit 

switching 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

The elements which are to be considered for the contactor 

choice are: 

– Type of lamp 

– Power factor (cosϕ) 

– With or without power factor correction 

– Value of current when switching on and in running 

conditions 

Depending on the number and type of lamps, it is also 

important to bear in mind the main discriminating 

characteristics given below for the contactor choice: 

– Incandescent lamps → contactor making capacity 

– Lamps not corrected → rated contactor current in AC1 

– Lamps corrected → rated contactor current in AC3 

The table below summarises the major characteristics 

depending on the more commonly used type of lamps: 

TC 

Type of lamps Switching on Switching off 

Multiple of In❶ cosϕ Multiple of In❶ cosϕ 

Incandescent 15 1 1 1 

Mixed light 1.3 1 1 1 

Fluorescent 1.15 - 1.3 0.2 1 0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected) 

1 (corrected) 

High-pressure mercury vapor 1.5 - 1.75 0.2 1 0.45 - 0.7 (not corrected) 

High-pressure sodium vapor 1.3 - 1.5 0.2 1 0.3 - 0.5 (not corrected) 

Low-pressure sodium vapor 1 0.2 - 0.5 1 0.2 - 0.5 (not corrected) 

Metal halide 1.7 - 2.1 0.2 1 0.4 - 0.5 (not corrected) 

Lamp 

features 

Maximum current [A] per contactor pole 

BF09A 

BF9C 

BF12A 

BF12A BF20C BF26A BF80 

BG09 BF16C BF25A BF32A BF38A BF95 

BG12 BF18A BF25C BF32C BF40C BF50 BF65 BF110 B115 B145 B180 

INCANDESCENT 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

MIXED LIGHT 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

8.1 

9.2 

13 

15 

25 

26 

32 

35 

35 

40 

55 

55 

65 

65 

80 

80 

100 

110 

115 

140 

125 

170 

ELECTRONIC BALLAST FLUORESCENT 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

Single mounting 

Double mounting 

STANDARD FLUORESCENT 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected, single mounting 

Corrected, single mounting 

Duo mounting ❶ 

HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOR 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected 

Corrected 

380-415V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected 

Corrected 

HIGH-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOR 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected 

Corrected 

LOW-PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOR 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected 

Corrected 

METAL HALIDE 

120-240V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected 

Corrected 

380-415V 50/60Hz 

Not corrected 

Corrected 

5 

5 

9 

6 

14 

6.8 

5.6 

–– 

–– 

6 

–– 

7.2 

–– 

–– 

–– 

–– 

–– 

8 

8 

15 

10 

15 

10 

10 

–– 

–– 

9.4 

7.5 

10 

3.6 

10 

8 

–– 

–– 

16 

16 

26 

16 

26 

17 

16 

8 

5.5 

15 

12 

16 

5 

15 

10.5 

–– 

6.6 

22 

22 

35 

23 

40 

22 

22 

16 

11 

22 

16 

22 

7.2 

21 

12 

10 

6.6 

22 

22 

40 

23 

40 

27 

25 

16 

11 

27 

17 

27 

9.6 

27 

15 

10 

6.6 

40 

40 

55 

50 

55 

40 

40 

24 

22 

40 

38 

40 

26 

40 

40 

21 

23 

45 

45 

65 

51 

65 

45 

45 

24 

28 

45 

44 

45 

26 

45 

44 

21 

23 

50 

50 

80 

51 

80 

50 

50 

32 

28 

49 

44 

50 

26 

50 

50 

31 

26 

75 

75 

110 

110 

110 

75 

75 

40 

44 

75 

75 

75 

72 

75 

70 

41 

40 

105 

105 

140 

120 

140 

105 

105 

64 

61 

107 

103 

105 

72 

105 

75 

62 

46 

120 

120 

170 

125 

170 

120 

120 

72 

72 

120 

120 

120 

72 

120 

80 

72 

46 

❶ DUO mounting or circuit with improved power factor (power factor improvement is obtained by matching an inductive circuit to a capacitive circuit); refer to side 

figure. 



0 

TC-12 



® 

electric 

TC 

Power factor 

correction 

capacitors 

CHOICE CRITERIA 

The contactor during the closing transition is influenced by 

electrical currents having high frequencies and high 

amplitudes. 

The frequencies of these currents range between 1 and 

10kHz; the amplitudes must have values lower than the 

maximum permissible current peak of the contactor to be 

used. 

AMBIENT OPERATING CONDITIONS 

Ambient temperature: ≤120°F (50°C). 

For temperatures higher than 50°C up to 160°F/70°C, stated 

maximum operational power ratings are to be reduced by a 

percentage equal to the difference between the ambient 

temperature and 120°F/50°C. 

Operating cycle: ≤ 120 cy/h 

Electrical life: ≥ 100,000 cycles. 

1 

L1 L2 L3 

FU1 

R 

1 3 5 .1 .1 

KM1 

2 4 6 .2 .2 

U V W 

SELECTION GUIDE 

Contactor Rated Maximum Maximum Fuse Maximum operational power 

current permissible operational sc/gG at voltages: 

peak voltage 220V 

current 230V 380V 415V 500V 

240V 400V 440V 660/690V 

Type [A] [A] [V] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] 

BF09A-BF9 12 500 690 16 4.5 7.5 9 10 

BF12A 16 550 690 25 6 11 12 14 

BF12-BF16 

BF18A-BF20 22 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18 

BF25A 22 1000 690 32 9 15 16 18 

BF26A-BF25 30 1400 690 40 11 20 22 22 

BF32A-BF32 38 1700 690 50 14 25 27 30 

BF38A-BF40 42 1900 690 63 16 28 30 34 

BF50 60 2500 690 80 23 40 44 50 

BF65 70 2700 690 100 26 45 50 56 

BF80 90 3000 690 125 34 60 65 70 

BF95 90 3000 690 125 34 60 65 70 

BF110 90 3000 690 125 34 60 65 70 

B115 130 3200 1000 200 50 87 93 115 

B145 150 3400 1000 200 57 100 108 130 

B180 170 3600 1000 250 65 112 122 150 

B250 240 5100 1000 315 91 158 172 210 

B310 265 5900 1000 315 105 184 200 245 

B400 320 7500 1000 400 122 211 230 280 

B500 500 9000 1000 630 190 330 360 430 

B630 610 11000 1000 800 230 400 432 520 

The use of contactors with the above operational powers is 

allowable only when the peak current, in the installation point 

of the power factor correction board, is lower than the values 

stated in the table. 

If this condition is not verified, it is necessary to use limiting 

inductances or specific contactors stated on page 3-8. 

Contact Sales & Technical Support to obtain detailed 

information on the correct use of contactors without limiting 

inductances. 

LIMITING INDUCTANCES 

The use of limiting inductances is imperative when the system 

inductances (line transformer and cables), upstream of the 

power factor correction panel, are not able to maintain the 

maximum connecting current within the limit value of the 

contactor used. 

FAST DISCHARGE RESISTANCES OF CAPACITORS 

The use of the contactor, according to the wiring diagram 

given, allows the fast discharge of the capacitors as well as 

the instantaneous disconnection of the capacitors from the 

mains when the coil is de-energised. 

The resistances, indicated in the following table, guarantee the 

discharge within a maximum time of 2 seconds. 

Capacitor power Voltage 220-230V Voltage 380-500V 

[kvar] [Ω] [W] [Ω] [W] 

2.5-5 3900 12 8200 12 

10-15 1800 25 4300 25 

20-50 1000 50 2200 50 

SCHEMA INSERZIONE RESISTENZE PER LA RAPIDA SCARICA DEI CONDENSATORI 

Disegno N? BM315 



® 

electric 



TC-13 

Special contactors 

for power factor 

correction 

capacitors 

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 

These contactors are equipped with early-make contacts. This 

special type of contact has the purpose of connecting for a 

very brief interval, 2-3ms, during the contactor closing, 

resistors which limit the connecting current of the capacitors. 

These resistors are then excluded when the closing operation 

is complete and the current capacity is conveyed to the main 

contacts. With this type of circuit, it is possible to obtain 

minor wear of all the components of the system especially 

fuses and capacitors ensuring a longer life and better 

reliability. 

The contactors are particularly suitable for use in automatic 

power factor correction panels since there is no need of 

limiting inductances and a source of heat has been eliminated. 

In this way, these modular electric switchboards can be more 

compact. 

The BF..K version, figure 1, is designed for three-phase 

switching. The peculiarity of this type is in the contacts, 

suitable to connect limiting resistors, which close only for the 

time needed to limit any in-rush current peak and them reopen 

to avoid eventual flow of residual currents through the 

resistors. 

OPERATING CONDITIONS 

Ambient temperature: ≤ +120°F (+50°C) 

For ambient temperature higher than +120°F/+50°C up to 

+160°F/+70°C, maximum operational power ratings, indicated 

in the table, are to be reduced by a percentage equal to the 

difference between the ambient temperature and 

+120°F/+50°C. 

Operating cycles: ≤ 120 cy/h 

Electrical life: ≥ 200,000 cycles 

TC 

L1 L2 L3 

1 3 5 

A1 

A2 

2 4 6 

T1 T2 T3 

Figure 1 

CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BFK 

Contactor Built-in Rated Fuse Maximum operational power 

auxiliary current sc/gG at voltages❶ 

contacts 

220V 

NO 230V 380V 415V 500V 

240V 400V 440V 690V 

Type n° [A] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] 

BFK09A 1 12 16 4.5 7.5 9 10 

BFK12A 1 18 25 7 12.5 14 16 

BFK18A 1 23 40 9 15 17 20 

BFK26A –– 30 40 11 20 22 22 

BFK32A –– 36 63 14 25 27.5 30 

BFK38A –– 43 63 17 30 33 36 

BF50K –– 58 80 22 38 41 46 

BF65K –– 70 100 26 45 50 56 

BF70K –– 75 125 30 50 56 65 

BF80K –– 90 125 34 60 65 70 

NOTE: See page 3-8 for catalog numbers. 

❶ Consult Sales & Technical Support for the use of contactors to switch within delta connection. 

CHOICE OF CONTACTORS TYPE BF...K ACCORDING TO UL LISTING 

Contactor Built-in Rated Fuse Maximum operational power 

auxiliary current at voltages❶ 

contacts NO SC/gG 240V 480V 600V 

Type n° [A] [A] [kvar] [kvar] [kvar] 

BFK09A 1 12 16 4.5 9 10 

BFK12A 1 16 25 7 14 16 

BFK18A 1 22 40 9 17 20 

BFK26A –– 26.5 40 11 22 27.6 

BFK32A –– 36 63 15 27.5 32 

BFK38 –– 40 63 17 33 36 

BF50K –– 58 80 22 41 46 

BF65K –– 68 100 26 50 56 

BF70K –– 72 125 30 60 65 

BF80K –– 78 125 34 65 70 

NOTE: See page 3-8 for catalog numbers. 

❶ Consult Sales & Technical Support for the use of contactors to switch 

within delta connection. 



TC-14 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 

characheristics 

BG00 and BF00 

TYPE 


Poles n° 

Conventional free air 

thermal current Ith (≤105°F/40°C) 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 

Frequency limit 

Designation of auxiliary contacts 

per UL/CSA, IEC/EN 60947-5-1 ❸ 

Terminals in. (mm) 

quick-connect 

Min-Max tightening torque for contact 

terminals 

Min-Max tightening torque 

for coil terminals 

A 

B 

A 

V 

Hz 

AC 

DC 

A 

B 

screw 

Phillips 

Faston 

Nm 

lbft 

Nm 

lbft 

Phillips 

4 

10 10 

690 

25 - 400 ❶ 

A600 

A600 

Q600 

Q600 

0.3 (7.5) 0.33 (8.3) 

0.16 (4) 0.14 (3.5) 

M3 M3.5 

2 2 

1-0.25 (6.35) or 2-0.11 (2.8) –– 

0.8-1 1.4-1.8 

0.59-0.74 1.03-1.33 

0.8-1 0.8-1 

0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 

2 2 

Maximum conductor section 

connectable with 1 or 2 wires AWG n° 

10 10 

Flexible w/o mm 2 

0.75-2.5 6 

lug (min-max) 

Flexible mm 2 

1-2.5 or 2-1 6 

c/w lug 

Terminal protection per IEC/EN 60529 


Operating temperature °F 

IP20❷ 

-40 to +140 (-40 to +60°C) 

IP20❷ 

-40 to +140 (-40 to +70°C) 

Storage temperature °F -65 to +160 (-55 to +70°C) -65 to +160 (-55 to +80°C) 

Maximum altitude 

ft 

9800 (3000m) 9800 (3000m) 

Operation position 

Normal 

Allowable 

On vertical plane 

±30° 


±30° 

Fixing 

Screw or 35mm DIN rail (IEC/EN 60715) 

❶ Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Contact our Sales & Technical Support. 

❷ IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 18 AWG/0.75mm 2 conductor section for BG00 or 18 AWG/1mm 2 for BF00. 

❸ See details on page TC-25. 

BG00 

BF00 



® 

electric 



TC-15 

TYPE 

A.C. control 

Rated control voltage at 60Hz 

V 

Operating voltage limits pick-up % Us 

drop-out % Us 

Average coil 50Hz in rush/holding VA 

consumption at 

≤70°F/20°C 

60Hz in rush/holding VA 

Dissipation at 70°F/20°C 

W 

DC CONTROL 

Rated control voltage 

V 

Operating voltage pick-up % Us 

limits drop-out % Us 

Average consumption at 

W 

≤70°F/20°C (in-rush/holding) 

OPERATING TIMES 

For control in AC closing NO ms 

opening NO ms 

closing NC ms 

opening NC ms 

DC closing NO ms 

opening NO ms 

closing NC ms 

opening NC ms 

LIFE 

Mechanical (millions) 

cycles 

MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE 

Mechanical operations 

cycles/h 

❶ 2.3W for low-consumption BG00...L version. 

BG00 

BF00 

12 - 575 12 - 600 

75 - 115 80 - 110 

20 - 55 40 - 55 

30/4 65/9 

25/3.0 78/10.8 

0.95 2.5 

6 - 250 -–– 

75 - 115 –– 

10 - 20 –– 

3.2❶ –– 

12 - 21 8 - 24 

9 - 18 10 - 20 

17 - 26 17 - 30 

7 - 17 7 - 18 

18 - 25 –– 

2 - 3 –– 

3 - 5 –– 

11 - 17 –– 

20 20 

3600 3600 

TC 



TC-16 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


BG06, BG09 and 

BG12 

TYPE 


Power poles n° 


Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 

Operational frequency 

Hz 

Operational Conventional free air A 

current thermal Ith (≤105°F/40°C) 

AC3 (≤440V ≤130°F/55°C) A 

AC4 (400V) ❸ 

A 

Short-time allowable current 

A 

for 10s (IEC/EN 60947-1) 

Max fuse size 

Type 1 or 2 SC/gG A 

aM 

A 

Making capacity (RMS value) 

A 

Breaking capacity ≤ 440V A 

at voltage 

500V A 

690V A 

Consumption per 

mΩ 

pole and resistance 

Ith 

W 

(average values) 

AC3 W 


A 

B 

screw 

A 

Phillips 

quick-connect Faston 

solder 

Maximum tightening torque 

for contact and coil terminals 

V 

Nm 

lbft 

Phillips 

Maximum conductor section connectable 

with 1 or 2 wires 

AWG n° 

Flexible w/o mm 2 

lug (min-max) 

Flexible mm 2 

c/w lug 

Terminal protection per IEC/EN60529 



Storage temperature °F 


ft 

Operating 

Normal 

position 

Allowable 

Fixing 

❶ Rated voltage Ui for BGP and BGS are 500V only; BGP is UL rated at 300V while BGS at 600V. 

❷ Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❸ Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 50,000 cycles. 

❹ Dimensions and drilling distances are given on page D-4. 

❺ IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 18 AWG / 0.75mm 2 conductor section. 

B 

BG06 BG09 BG12 - DPBG12 

3 3-4 3 

690 ❶ 

6 

25 - 400 ❷ 

16 20 20 

6 9 12 

3.3 4.0 4.8 

96 

16 20 20 

6 10 16 

92 92 120 

72 72 96 

72 72 72 

72 72 72 

10 10 10 

2.6 4 4 

0.36 0.81 1.44 

0.3 (7.5) 0.3 (7.5) 0.3 (7.5) 

0.16 (4) 0.16 (4) 0.16 (4) 

M3 M3 M3 

2 2 2 

–– 1-0.25 (6.35) –– 

or 2-0.11 (2.8) 

–– PCB pin❹ PCB pin❹ 

0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 

0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 

2 

10 

0.75-2.5 

2 - 1 or 1 - 2.5 

IP20❺ 

-40 to +140 (-40 to +60°C) 

-65 to +160 (-55 to +70°C) 

9800 (3000m) 


± 30° 




® 

electric 



TC-17 

TYPE 

AC CONTROL 

Rated control voltage from V 

at 60Hz 

to V 

Operating 

from % Us 

voltage limits pick-up 

to % Us 

drop-out 

from % Us 

to % Us 

Coil consumption 

in-rush VA 

at ≤70°F/20°C 60Hz 

holding VA 

Dissipation at ≤70°F/20°C 

W 

DC CONTROL 

Rated control from V 

voltage 

to V 

Operating 

from % Us 


to % Us 

drop-out 

from % Us 

to % Us 

Average consumption 

W 


With closing NO ms 

control 

opening NO ms 

AC 

closing NC ms 

opening NC ms 

closing NO ms 

DC 

opening NO ms 

closing NC ms 

opening NC ms 

LIFE (millions) 

Mechanical AC control cycles 

DC control 

cycles 

Electrical (Ie at 400V AC3) 

cycles 

MAXIMUM OPERATING CYCLE 

Mechanical 

cy/h 

❶ 2.3W for low-consumption type BG...L 

BG06 BG09 BG12 - DPBG12 

12 12 12 

575 575 575 

75 75 75 

115 115 115 

20 20 20 

55 55 55 

25 25 25 

3.0 3.0 3.0 

0.95 0.95 0.95 

6 6 6 

250 250 250 

75 75 75 

115 115 115 

10 10 10 

25 25 25 

32 3.2❶ 3.2 

12 - 21 12 - 21 12 - 21 

9 - 18 9 - 18 9 - 18 

17 - 26 17 - 26 17 - 26 

7 - 17 7 - 17 7 - 12 

18 - 25 18 - 25 18 - 25 

2 - 3 2 - 3 2 - 3 

3 - 5 3 - 5 3 - 5 

11 - 17 11 - 17 11 - 17 

20 20 20 

20 20 20 

0.5 0.5 0.5 

3600 3600 3600 

TC 



TC-18 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


BF09A-BF38A with 

AC control circuit 

TYPE 

BF09A BF12A BF18A BF25A BF26A BF32A BF38A 

DPBF09A DPBF12A DPBF18A –– DPBF26A DPBF32A –– 


Power poles n° 3-4 3-4 3-4 3 3-4 3 3-4 


V 

690 

Rated impulse withstand votage Uimp kV 

8 


Hz 

25-400❶ 

Operational Conventional free air A 25 28 32 32 45 56 56 

current thermal Ith (≤105°F/40°C) 

AC3 (≤440V ≤130°F/55°C) A 9 12 18 25 26 32 38 

AC4 (400V)❷ 

A 4.9 7.9 8.5 10 11.5 13.5 15.5 

Short-time allowable current for 10s 

(IEC/EN 60947-1) 

A 110 110 130 160 200 320 320 

Max fuse size SC/gG A 32 40 40 50 50 63 80 

Type 1 or 2 aM A 10 12 16 25 32 32 40 

Making capacity (RMS value) A 

250 250 250 250 480 480 480 

Breaking capacity 

at voltage ≤440V A 250 250 250 250 480 480 480 

Consumption and 

mΩ 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 

resistance per pole 

Ith W 1.6 2.0 2.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 6.0 


AC3 W 0.2 0.4 0.8 1.6 1.4 2.0 2.9 


Type 

Clamp-screw 

A 

0.37 (9.5) 0.51 (13) 

B 

0.17 (4) 0.22 (5.5) 

A 

Screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M4 

Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 


Nm 1.5-1.8 1.5-1.8 1.5-1.8 1.5-1.8 2.5-3 2.5-3 2.5-3 

for contact terminal 

Ibft 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.1-1.5 1.8-2.2 1.8-2.2 1.8-2.2 


Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 


lbft 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 

Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 


connectable with 1 or 2 wires 

AWG n° 16-10 16-10 16-10 16-10 14-6 14-6 14-6 

Flexible w/o lug 

(min-max) mm 2 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 2.5-16 2.5-16 2.5-16 

Flexible c/w lug mm 2 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-10 1-10 1-10 

Power terminal protection 

per IEC/EN 60529 

IP20❸ IP20❸ IP20❸ IP20❸ IP20❹ IP20❹ IP20❹ 



-60 to +160 (-50 to +70°C) 


-75 to +175 (-60 to +80°C) 


ft 

9800 (3000m) 

Operating 

Normal 


position 

Allowable 

± 30° 

Fixing 


B 

❶ Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❷ Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles. 

❸ IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 18 AWG / 1mm 2 conductor section. 

❹ IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 6 AWG / 16mm 2 conductor section. 



® 

electric 



TC-19 

TYPE 

AC CONTROL 


at 60Hz 

to V 

Operating limits 

from % Us 

pick-up 

to % Us 

drop-out 

from % Us 

to % Us 

Average coil cosumption in-rush VA 

at ≤70°F/20°C holding VA 


W 


With control closing NO ms 

in AC 

opening NO ms 

closing NC ms 

opening NC ms 



Electrical (Ie at 400V AC3) 

cycles 

MAXIMUM OPERATING RATE 


cy/h 

BF09A BF12A BF18A BF25A BF26A BF32A BF38A 

DPBF09A DPBF12A DPBF18A –– DPBF26A DPBF32A –– 

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 

600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

80 80 80 80 80 80 80 

110 110 110 110 110 110 110 

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 

55 55 55 55 55 55 55 

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 

6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 

2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.5 

8-24 8-24 8-24 8-24 8-24 8-24 14-27 

10-20 10-20 10-20 15-20 15-20 15-20 8-18 

17-30 17-30 17-30 16-22 -- -- -- 

7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18 -- -- -- 

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 

2.0 2.0 1.6 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.4 

3600 

TC 



TC-20 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


BF9-BF40 with AC 

or DC control 

circuit 

TYPE 




V 



Hz 

Operational Conventional free air 

current thermal Ith (≤105°F/≤40°C) A 

AC3 (≤440V ≤130°F/≤55°C) A 

AC4 (400V)❹ 

A 


(IEC/EN 60947-1) 

A 

BF9C BF12C BF16C BF20C BF25C BF32C BF40C❶ BF40C 40❷ 

3-4 3 3-4 3 3-4 3 3 4 

690 

8 

25-400❸ 

25 25 25 40 40 55 60 60 

9 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 

5.3 7.2 7.5 10 11.7 16 20 20 

110 110 130 160 200 320 320 320 

Max fuse size SC/gG A 32 40 40 50 50 63 80 80 

Type 1 or 2 aM A 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 


210 210 210 350 350 480 480 480 

Breaking capacity ≤440V A 210 210 210 350 350 480 480 480 

at voltage 

500V A 160 160 160 290 290 320 320 320 

690V A 120 120 120 220 220 270 270 270 


mΩ 5 5 5 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.8 


Ith W 3.1 3.1 3.1 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.5 6.5 


AC3 W 0.40 0.72 1.3 1.0 1.6 2.0 2.6 2.6 


Type 

Clamp-screw 

A 

0.32 (8.3) 0.4 (10.1) 0.52 (13.2) 

B 

0.14 (3.5) 0.23 (5.9) 0.22 (5.5) 

A 

Screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M5 M5 M5 

Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 


Nm 1.4-1.8 1.4-1.8 1.4-1.8 1.8-2.3 1.8-2.3 3.1-3.9 3.1-3.9 3.1-3.9 


Ibft 1.03-1.33 1.03-1.33 1.03-1.33 1.32-1.70 1.32-1.70 2.24-2.88 2.24-2.88 2.24-2.88 


Nm 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 0.8-1 


lbft 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 0.59-0.74 

Phillips 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 



AWG n° 10 10 10 8 8 4 4 4 


(min-max) mm 2 1-6 1-6 1-6 1.5-10 1.5-10 2.5-16 2.5-16 2.5-16 

Flexible c/w lug mm 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 


according to EN 60529 

IP20❺ IP20❺ IP20❺ IP20❻ IP20❻ IP20❼ IP20❼ –– 


Operating temperature 

Storage temperature 


°F 

°F 

ft 

-60 to +160 (-50 to +70°C) 

-75 to +175 (-60 to +80°C) 

9800 (3000m) 

Operating 

position 

Fixing 

Normal 

Allowable 


± 30° 


❶ Three-pole version. 

❷ Four-pole version, 4NO type (main poles). For data of the 2NO+2NC type, contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❸ Derating for use at 61-400Hz. Contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❹ Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles. 

❺ IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 18 AWG / 1mm 2 conductor section. 

❻ 14 AWG / 2.5mm 2 conductor section for 3-pole type or 10 AWG / 6mm 2 for 4-pole type 

❼ IP20 protection warranted by wired equipment; minimum 6 AWG / 16mm 2 conductor section. 

B 



® 

electric 



TC-21 

TYPE 

DC CONTROL 


voltage 

to V 

Operating 

from % Us 


to % Us 

drop-out 

from % Us 

to % Us 

Average coil consumption 

W 


With control closing NO ms 

in DC 

opening NO ms 

AC 

closing NC ms 

opening NC ms 


Mechanical DC control cycles 

Electrical (Ie at 400V AC3) cycles 



cy/h 

BF9C BF12C BF16C BF20C BF25C BF32C BF40C❶ BF40C 40❷ 

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 

600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 

120 120 120 120 120 120 120 110 

15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 15 

42-58 42-58 42-58 42-58 42-58 42-58 42-58 58-80 

7-13 7-13 7-13 7-13 7-13 5-10 5-10 11-16 

11-17 11-17 11-17 11-17 11-17 -- -- -- 

32-42 32-42 32-42 28-38 28-38 -- -- -- 

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 

2.0 2.0 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.6 

3600 

❶ Three-poloe version. 

❷ Four-pole version, 4NO type (power poles). For data of the 2NO+2NC type, contact Sales & Technical Support. 

TC 



TC-22 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


BF50-BF110 

TYPE 




V 



Hz 


current thermal Ith (≤105°F/40°C) A 

AC3 (≤440V ≤130°F/55°C) A 

AC4 (400V)❸ 

A 


(IEC/EN 60947-1) 

A 

Max fuse size SC/gG A 

Type 1 or 2 aM A 


Breaking capacity ≤440V A 

at voltage 

500V A 

690V A 


mΩ 


Ith W 


AC3 W 


Type 

A 

B 

Screw 

A 

Metric 

Allen 


Nm 


Ibft 


Nm 


lbft 

Phillips 



AWG n° 


(min-max) mm 2 

Flexible c/w lug mm 2 


according to IEC/EN 60529 





ft 

Operating 

Normal 

position 

Allowable 

Fixing 

B 

BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110 

3-4 3-4 3-4 3 3 

1000❶ 

8 

25 - 400❷ 

90 110 125 125 125 

50 65 80 95 110 

28 31 38 43 43 

390 390 480 760 880 

100 125 160 160 160 

50 80 80 100 125 

800 1090 1200 1200 1200 

800 1090 1200 1200 1200 

660 830 1050 1050 1050 

500 630 800 800 800 

0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 

6.5 9.7 9.4 9.4 9.4 

2.0 3.4 3.8 5.4 7.3 

Lug clamp❹ 

0.48 (12.3) 

0.47 (12) 

M6 

4 

4-5 

2.95-3.69 

0.8-1 

0.59-0.74 

1 

2/0 

4-50 4-50 6-50 6-50 6-50 

4-50 4-50 6-50 6-50 6-50 

IP20❺ 

-60 to +160 (-50 to +70°C) 

-75 to +175 (-60 to +80°C) 

9800 (3000m) 


± 30° 

Screw or DIN rail 35mm ❻ and 75mm (IEC/EN 60715) 

❶ Rated insulation voltage Ui for 4-pole types is 690V. 

❷ Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❸ Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles. 

❹ In addition the main terminal, the following dimensions refer to the second entry of flexible busbars: 0.48x0.15in (12.3x3.8mm). 

❺ IP20 protection warranted to three-pole contactors only by mounting the G265 protection. 

❻ Only three-pole versions can be mounted on 35mm DIN rail. 



® 

electric 



TC-23 

TYPE 

AC CONTROL 


at 60Hz 

to V 

Operating voltage 

from % Us 

limits 

pick-up 

to % Us 

at ≤70°F/20°C 

from % Us 

drop-out 

to % Us 

Average coil in-rush VA 

consumption holding VA 


W 

DC CONTROL 


voltage 

to V 

Operating 

from % Us 


to % Us 

drop-up 

from % Us 

to % Us 

Average coil consumption ≤70°F/20°C W 

(in-rush - holding) 


With closing NO ms 

control AC 

opening NO ms 

DC 

closing NO ms 

opening NO ms 



DC control cycles 

Elettrica (Ie at 400V in AC3) cycles 



cy/h 

BF50 BF65 BF80 BF95 BF110 

12 12 12 12 12 

660 660 660 660 660 

80 80 80 80 80 

110 110 110 110 110 

20 20 20 20 20 

55 55 55 55 55 

252 252 252 252 252 

21.6 21.6 21.6 21.6 21.6 

6 6 6 6 6 

12 12 12 12 12 

660 660 660 660 660 

80 80 80 80 80 

110 110 110 110 110 

10 10 10 10 10 

25 25 25 25 25 

15 15 15 15 15 

13-25 13-25 13-25 13-25 13-25 

8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 

60-90 60-90 60-90 60-90 60-90 

7-12 7-12 7-12 7-12 7-12 

15 15 15 15 15 

15 15 15 15 15 

1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 0.8 

3600 

TC 



B 

TC-24 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


B115-B1600 

TYPE 




V 



Hz 


current thermal Ith (≤70°F/40°C) A 

AC3 (≤440V ≤130°F/55°C) A 

AC4 (400V)❷ 

A 


(IEC/EN 60947-1) 

A 

Max fuse size SC/gG A 

Type 1 or 2 aM A 


Breaking capacity ≤440V A 

at voltage 

500V A 

690V A 

1000V A 


mΩ 


Ith W 


AC3 W 


A 

A 

B 

B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 

3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 

1000 

8 

25-400❶ 

160 250 275 350 450 550 700 800 1000 1250 1600 

110 150 185 265 320 420 520 630 – – – 

47 57 65 92 110 133 175 210 – – – 

1100 1300 1500 2200 2900 3600 4050 5040 5600 6500 8300 

200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 ❸ ❸ ❸ 

125 160 200 250 400 400 500 630 – – – 

1100 1500 1850 2750 3150 4200 5000 6300 ❸ ❸ ❸ 

1300 1500 1850 2500 3000 4000 5000 6300 ❸ ❸ ❸ 

1100 1400 1600 2250 2700 3400 4500 5600 ❸ ❸ ❸ 

880 1200 1480 2200 2520 3360 4000 5000 ❸ ❸ ❸ 

600 800 1000 1500 1700 2300 2700 3400 ❸ ❸ ❸ 

0.30 0.30 0.30 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.07 0.07 

7.7 14.5 20.3 24.5 40.5 52.0 68.6 90 140 110 180 

4.0 6.8 9.7 12.5 20 32 35.0 56 – – – 

0.6 0.8 0.8 1 1 1 1.4 1.6 2.4 3.1 3.1 

(15) (20) (20) (25) (25) (25) (35) (40) (60) (80) (80) 

0.16 0.16 0.16 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.4 0.4 

(4) (4) (4) (5) (5) (5) (6) (6) (6) (10) (10) 

Screw 

+ hex 

nut M6 M8 M8 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12 2-M12 2-M12 2-M12 


in 0.8x0.1 1x0.1 1x0.1 1.2x0.2 1.2x0.2 1.2x0.2 2x0.2 2.4x0.2 2.4x0.2 4x0.2 4x0.2 

connectable 1 or 2 bars mm 20x3 25x3 25x3 30x4 30x5 30x5 50x5 60x5 60x5 100x5 100x5 

N° 1 wire 

with lug mm 2 70 120 150 240 -- -- -- -- – – – 

N° 2 wire 

with lug mm 2 -- -- -- -- 150 150 240 240 – – – 





°F 

°F 

ft 

-60 to +160 (-50 to +70°C) 

-75 to +175 (-60 to +80°C) 

9800 (3000m) 

Operating 

position 

Fixing 

Normal 

Allowable 


± 30° 

Screw 

❶ Derating for use at 61-400 Hz. Contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❷ Current values guarantee an electrical life of about 200,000 cycles. 

❸ Consult Sales & Technical Support. 

B630 

1000 

B1250 

B1600 



® 

electric 



TC-25 

Operational 


B115-B1600 

TYPE 

B630 

B115 B145 B180 B250 B310 B400 B500 B630 

1000 

B1250 B1600 

AC CONTROL 


The electromagnet can operate either in AC or DC 

AC only 

Rated control voltage 

V 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 24-480 48-480 48-480 48-480 110-480 110-480 

Operating pick-up % Us 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 80-110 

voltage limits 

drop-out % Us 20-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 30-60 

Consumption in-rush VA/W 300 300 300 300 300 300 400 400 400 800 800 

at ≤70°F/20°C holding VA/W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 40 40 


W 10 10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 40 40 


Making 

ms 60-100 60-100 60-100 80-120 80-120 80-120 110-180 110-180 110-180 120-210 120-210 

Breaking 

ms 25-60 25-60 25-60 30-75 30-75 30-75 60-100 60-100 60-110 70-130 70-130 


Mechanical 

cycles 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 

Electrical (Ie at 400V in AC3) cycles 1.1 1.1 1.0 1 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 – – – 



cy/h 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 2400 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 

PARTICULAR CHARACTERISTICS 

Indicator 

Safety feature 

Contactor open or closed 

Closing operations are prevented without arc chutes 

CONTROL CIRCUIT UTILISATION 

The input electronic circuit of the contactor coil B115-B1600 is designed and tested according to IEEEC 62.41 and can withstand a 

10 kV impulse voltage (1.2/50µs) with 50 Joule energy. 

For higher values, the use of an auxiliary reduced voltage transformer is recommended. 

TC 

Operational 

characteristics of 

incorporated 


of types BG00, 

BG06, BG09, BG12, 

BF09A-BF25A, 

BF9C-BF25C, DPBG, 

DPBF...A 

TYPE 

CHARACTERISTICS 

Thermal current Ith 


Terminals 

Screw 

Width 

Faston❸ 

A 

V 

in 

in 



Flexible w/o lug (min-max) mm 2 

Flexible c/w lug (min-max) mm 2 

AWG n° 

UL/CSA 

AC 

designation 

DC 

BG00-BG06-BG09-BG12 BF00A-BF09A-BF25A❶ BF20C-BF25C❷ 

DPBG12❶ DPBF09A-DPBF12A-DPBF18A❶ 

BF9C-BF12C-BF16C❷ 

10 10 10 

690 690 690 

M3 M3.5 M4 

0.3 (7.5mm) 0.33 (8.3mm) 0.4 (10.1mm) 

1-0.25 (6.35mm) –– –– 

2-0.11 (2.8mm) 

0.75-2.5 1-6 1.5-10 

2-1 or 1-2.5 6 6 

10 10 8 

A600 A600 A600 

Q600 P600❹ P600 

❶ The NO and NC auxiliary contacts of BG mini-contactors and BF...A or DPBF...A contactors are highly conductive. 

❷ The NC auxiliary contacts of BF9C, BF12C and BF16C contactors are highly conductive. 

❸ For BG00 and BG09 types only. 

❹ Q600 for BF9C-BF12C-BF16C types. 

Rating data for control-circuit contacts per UL508 

UL designation Thermal Maximum Amperes (AC at 60Hz) Maximum VA 

continuous 120VAC 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC 

test current 

Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break Make Break 

A600 10 60 6 30 3 15 1.5 12 1.2 7200 720 

Maximum Amperes (DC) Make or Break 

Maximum VA 

Make or Break 

125VDC 250VDC 301-600DC 300V or less 

P600 5 1.1 0.55 0.2 138 

Q600 2.5 0.55 0.27 0.1 69 



TC-26 



® 

electric 

TC 


contacts for types 

with incorporated 


Positively guided contacts are a requirement in safety circuits 

to correctly monitor the status of normally open contacts. 

Guided contacts imply that Normally Open (NO) and Normally 

Closed (NC) will operate together reciprocally but can never be 

simultaneously closed, even in case of NO contacts weld. This 

requirement is obtained by particular constructional details, 

such as reduced gap tolerance through which the mobile 

contact travels and the points of actuation are closer to the 

actual contact position. 

Positively Guided Contacts are also called positively safety 

contacts, forced contacts, linked contacts, force or positive 

guided or positively driven contacts. 

The positively guided contacts assume different meanings and 

terminologies in compliance with the product standards which 

are given below. 

IEC 60947-4-1/A1 ed. 2 - Annex F 

In this case, positively guided contacts are called auxiliary 

contacts linked with power contacts (mirror contact). 

The requirement is that when power poles weld, the auxiliary 

NC contacts remain open. 

This requirement is standard supplied on all our contactors 

having an integrated NC auxiliary contacts: 

BG...01, BF09 01A, BF12 01A, BF18 01A, BF25 01A, 

BF9C...01, BF12C...01, BF16C...01, BF20C...01, BF25C...01, 

DPBG12, DPBF09A, DPBF12A, DPBF18A types. 

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MIRROR CONTACT 

DE-ENERGIZED 

MIRROR CONTACT 

CONVENTIONAL 

NC CONTACT 

NC 


NO 


NC NO 


(monitoring) 

ENERGIZED 

NC 


(monitoring) 

NO 


NC NO 


(monitoring) 

DE-ENERGIZED 

WELD 

WELD 

NC 


(monitoring) 

WILL 

REMAIN 

OPEN 

NO 


NC 

contact 

(monitoring) 

WILL 

CLOSE 

NO 


IEC 60947-5-1/A2 ed. 2 - Annex L 










Lovato control relays, such as BG00 and BF00, which have at 

least one NO and one NC contact, fall into this category. 

(See Physical properties of mechanically linked contacts on 

page TC-27). 

Note: 

Control circuit devices, operated externally (e.g. push-button or limit-switches) can not have mechanically linked contact elements. 

Such devices, in safety applications, generally have contacts with Direct Opening Actuation. 



® 

electric 



TC-27 


contacts for add-on 

auxiliary contact 

blocks 

IEC 60947-5-1/A2 ed. 2 - Annex L 










Several auxiliary contact blocks, which have at least one NO 

and one NC contact, fall into this category. These blocks 

include: 

BGX10 11, BGX10 31, BGX10 22, BGX10 13, BGX11 11, 

BGX11 12, BGXF10 11, BGXF10 13, BGXF10 22, BGXF10 31, 

BFX10 11, BFX10 13, BFX10 22, BFX10 31, G350, G354, 

G481 11, G484 12 and G484 21. 

TC 

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MECHANICAL LINKED CONTACTS 

MECHANICALLY 

LINKED CONTACT 

CONVENTIONAL CONTACT 

DE-ENERGIZED 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

ENERGIZED 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

NO 

contacts 

DE-ENERGIZED 

WELD 

WELD 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

WILL 

REMAIN 

OPEN 

NC 

contacts 

(monitoring) 

WILL 

CLOSE 

NO 

contacts 



TC-28 


IEC style contactors: add-on blocks and accessories 

® 

electric 

TC 

Maximum 

combination 

BF types 

POSITION AND MAXIMUM QUANTITY OF ADD-ON BLOCKS 

AND ACCESSORIES 

For application at maximum composition, at temperatures 

>104°F/40°C and DC control, contact Sales Technical 

Support. 

CONTACTORS 

CONTACTORS 

BF00A-BF09A-BF12A-BF18A-BF25A-BF26A-BF32A-BF38A BF40C 40-BF40C 22 

DPBF09A-DPBF12A-DPBF18A-DPBF26A-DPBF32A 

BF50-BF65-BF80-BF95-BF110 3/4 POLES 

BF9C-BF12C-BF16C-BF20C-BF25C-BF32C-BF40C 

Area A Area B/C❶ Area B1/C1❸ Area A Area B/C❼ Area B1/C1❼ 

B1 

B 

A 

C1 

C 

N° 1 BFX10 N° 1 G218 N° 1 G218+G280 N° 1 BFX10 N° 1 G218 N° 1 G218+G280 

or or or or or or 

N° 1 G484 N° 1 G318 N° 1 G428... N°1 G484 N° 1 G318 N° 1 G428 


N° 1 G485 N° 1 G319 N° 1 G481+G483 N° 1 G485 N° 1 G319 N° 1 G481+G483 





or or or 

N° 1 G481 N° 1 BFX50 00❹ N° 1 G481 

or 

or 

N° 1 G482 N° 1 G482 

or 

or 

N° 1 G223❷ N° 1 G269 2 

or 

N° 1 G269 1❷ 

or 

N° 1 BFX50 02❹ 

or 

N° 1 BFX50 03❹ 

CONTACTS WITH MECHANICAL LATCH 

CONTACTORS 

BF00A-BF09A-BF12A-BF18A-BF25A-BF26A-BF32A-BF38A 

BF9C-BF12C-BF16C-BF20C-BF25C-BF32C-BF40C 

Area A Area B/C Area B1/C1❸ 

B1 

G222 

C1 

A 

N° 1 BFX10 N° 1 BFX50 02❹ N° 1 G218+G280❻ 

or or or 

N° 1 G484 N° 1 G223❷ N° 1 G428❻ 

or 

or 

N° 1 G485 N° 1 G481+G483❻ 

or 

or 

N° 1 G486 N° 1 G482+G483❻ 

or 

or 

N° 1 G487 N° 1 G418+G419❻ 

or 

N° 1 BFX50 00❹ 

or 

N° 1 BFX50 01❹ 

or 

N° 1 BFX50 02❹ 

or 

N° 1 G223❷ 

CONTACTORS 

BF40C 40 - BF40C 22 

BF50-BF65-BF80-BF95-BF110 3/4 POLES 

Area A Area B/C❼ Area B1/C1❺ 

B1 

B 

G272 

C1 

C 

A 

N° 1 BFX10 N° 1 G218 N° 1 G218+G280 

or or or 

N° 1 G484 N° 1 G318 N° 1 G428 

or or or 

N° 1 G485 N° 1 G319 N° 1 G481+G483 

or or or 

N° 1 G486 N° 1 G322 N° 1 G482+G483 

or or or 

N° 1 G487 N° 1 G418 N° 1 G418+G419 

or 

N° 1 G481 

or 

N° 1 G482 

or 

N° 1 G269 2 

❶ No contact block can be mounted in area B1 or C1 if add on blocks are 

mounted in area B or C. 

If BFX10... add-on block with 4 contacts is mounted in area A, no other 

add-on can be mounted in area B or C except for BFX50 02 on BF...A 

types or 11 G223 on BF...C types. 

❷ For old BF or DC type only. 

❸ When the fourth pole BFX42 is mounted or for 4-pole types BF26T, 

DPBF26T4 and BF38T, no add-on block can be mounted in area C1. 

❹ For BF...A and DPBF...A types only. 

❺ No side-mount blocks can be mounted on BF40 22 contactor. 

❻ For BF20C, BF25C, BF32C, BF40C, types only. 

❼ No contact block can be mounted in area B1 or C1 if add on blocks are 

mounted in area B or C. 



F 

E 

G 

D 

C 

A 

B 

® 

electric 



TC-29 

Maximum 

combination 

B115-B630 1000 

AUXILIARY CONTACTS 

The add-on auxiliary contact blocks G350 and G354 can be 

applied to contactors B115-B630 1000 only up to a maximum 

of four pieces, for a total of 12 contacts. The 

contact block G350 provides a 2NO+1NC or 1NO+2NC 

combination depending on its mounting position; see the 

drawing delow. The G354 block consists of 1NO+1NC. 

G354 

G350 

G350 

G354 

TC 

53 

113 

54 

114 

61 

121 

62 

122 

22 

82 

21 

81 

14 

74 

13 

73 

or or 

41 

01 

42 

02 

53 

113 

54 

114 

61 

121 

62 

122 

94 

33 

93 

22 

82 

21 

81 

14 

74 

13 

73 

34 

73 

13 

74 

14 

81 

21 

82 

22 

93 

33 

94 

34 

122 

62 

121 

61 

114 

54 

113 

53 

02 

42 

01 

41 

or or 

73 

13 

74 

14 

81 

21 

82 

22 

122 

62 

121 

61 

114 

54 

113 

53 

G354 

G350 

G350 

G354 

Contact blocks, BFX10 with 2 contacts, G484, G485, G486 and 

G487 types, can be mounted using the G358 adapter, refer to 

page 3-14 for exact types and catalog numbers of the blocks. 

A maximum of four adapters can be possibly used per 

contactor and each adapter can hold one BFX10, G484, G485, 

G486 and G487. 

BFX10 20 

53 63 

BFX10 11 

93 01 

BFX10 02 

51 61 

54 64 

G484 30 

94 02 

G484 21 

52 62 

G484 12 

BFX10... 

53 63 73 

53 61 73 

53 61 71 

54 64 74 

54 62 74 

54 62 72 

G484... 

G484 03 

51 61 71 

G485... 

G486... 

G487... 

52 62 72 

G485 ... 

G486 ... - G487 

57 

65 

67 

55 

G371 

G358 

58 

66 

68 

56 

G358 

G358 

G358 



TC-30 



® 

electric 

TC 

Fig.1 

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS SIDE BY 

SIDE B115-B630 1000 

The G355 type can interlock contactors of the same size or of 

a different one (e.g.: B115 interlocked to B630). 

This interlock cannot be used with B1250 or B1600 contactor. 

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK BETWEEN CONTACTORS ONE ON 

TOP OF THE OTHER B115-B1600 

It is G356... which is provided in six types to allow different 

fixing interaxis of contactors. Contactors of the same size can 

be interlocked as well as different sizes. 

Consult Sales & Technical Support to interlock B630 1000 

three-pole contactors. 

The tables below indicate the interaxis which can be 

obtained with the various interlock types; with terminal 

protections (INTERAXIS A) and without terminal protection 

(INTERAXIS B). 

INTERAXIS A [mm] (in) - For contactors with terminal protection 

KM1 

KM1 B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630 

KM2 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 

B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 

B180 B400 B180 B400 B180 B400 

G356 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 

A 

G356.. 

G356 2 

G356 3 

286-305 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 

(11.26-12) 

305-345 330-345 --- 330-345 --- --- --- --- --- 

(12-13.6) (13-13.6) (13-13.6) 

G356 4 

345-385 345-385 375-385 345-385 375-385 --- 375-385 --- --- 

(13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (14.8-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (14.8-15.15) (14.8-15.15) 

KM2 

G356 5 

G356 6 

390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 420-425 390-425 420-425 --- 

(15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (16.5-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) 

470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 

(18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) 

INTERAXIS B [mm] (in) - For contactors without terminal protection 

KM1 

Fig.2 

KM1 B115-B145-B180 B250-B310-B400 B500-B630 

KM2 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 B115 B250 B500 

B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 B145 B310 B630 

B180 B400 B180 B400 B180 B400 

225-265 

G356 1 

(8.85-10.4) 

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 

B 

KM2 

G356.. 

Fig.3 

G356 2 

G356 3 

G356 4 

G356 5 

G356 6 

265-305 265-305 --- 265-305 265-305 

(10.4-12) (10.4-12) (10.4-12) (10.4-12) 

--- --- --- --- 

305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 305-345 

(12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) (12-13.6) 

--- 

345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 345-385 

(13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) (13.6-15.15) 

390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 390-425 

(15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) (15.35-16.75) 

470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 470-500 

(18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) (18.5-19.7) 

To interlock two contactors B630 1000, use type G356 6 only; interaxis B is 470-500mm (18.5-19.7in), refer to fig. 4. To interlock 

two contactors B1250 or B1600, it is imperative to use two pieces of type G356 6, one fixed on the left side and the other on the 

right; interaxis B is 470-500mm (18.5-19.7in). The B1250 or B1600 cannot be interlocked with the other types of the B series. 

B 

BG356.. 

Fig.4 



® 

electric 



TC-31 

CONTACT BLOCKS APPLIABLE TO CONTACTORS WITH 

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK 

Auxiliary contact blocks G350 or G354 can be mounted 

according to the combinations below when the mechanical 

interlock is used (see parts in blue in figure 1) or the G358 

adapter with the auxiliary blocks as per the combinations 

given in figure 2. 

TC 

Fig. 1 

B115-B630 

B115-B180 

B250-B400 

B500-B630 1000 

Fig. 2 

B115-B630 

B115-B180 

B250-B400 

B500-B630 1000 



TC-32 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


thermal overload 

relays RF 

Phase failure sensitive hand reset RF9 RF38❶ RF25 RF95 RF200❶ RF420❶ 

Phase failure sensitive automatic reset RFA9 RFS38❶ RFA25 RFA95 

Non phase failure sensitive hand reset RFS25 RFS95 

Non phase failure sensitive automatic reset 

POWER CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS 

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690 690 690 1000 1000 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8 

Frequency limit Hz 0 - 400 0 - 400 0 - 400 0 - 400 50 - 60 50 - 60 

Operational range from A 0.09 0.1 0.09 14 60 150 

to A 15 38 26 95 200 420 ❷ 

Connection Direct With current transformers ❸ 

Terminals 

Yoke 

Type Screw & washer clamp Screw & flat washer 

Screw M 4 M 4 M 4 M 5 M 8 (hex) M 10 (hex) 

Terminal width in 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.35 0.8 1 

(mm) (9.8) (12.6) (9.8) (9) (20) (25) 

Phillips n° 2 2 2 2 13mm❹ 18mm❹ 

Tightening torque Nm 2.3 2...2.5 2.3 3.9 18 35 

for power terminals lbft 1.7 1.5...1.8 1.7 2.88 13.3 25.9 


AWG n° 10 8 10 2 -- -- 

flexible w/o lug mm 2 6 10 6 35 -- -- 

flexible c/w lug mm 2 10 6 10 -- 150 2 - 150 

Bar 

in 

(mm) -- -- -- -- (25 x 3) (30 x 5) 

Dissipation per phase W 0.7 - 2.4 0.7 - 2.40 0.7 - 2.4 2 - 4.2 0.7 - 2.4 0.7 - 2.4 

AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS 

Available NO n° 1 

contacts NC n° 1 

Rated insulation voltage V 690 

Conventional free air thermal current A 10 

Terminals with Screw M3.5 

screw and washer Terminal width 0.3 in (8mm) 

Phillips n° 1 


Flexible w/o lug mm 2 2.5 

Flexible c/w lug mm 2 2.5 

Tightening torque Nm 1 1...1.5 1 1 1...1.5 1...1.5 

for auxiliary terminals lbft 0.74 0.74...1.1 0.74 0.74 0.74...1.1 0.74...1.1 

UL designation (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) AC-DC B600 - P600 B600-R300 B600-P600 B600-P600 B600-R300 B600-R300 

❺ ❺ ❺ 

Operational current AC (220-230V) A 2.5 

DC (110V) A 1.1 


Operating temperature °F -4 to +130 -13 to +140 -4 to +130 -4 to +130 -13 to +140 -13 to +140 

°C (-20 to +55) (-25 to +60) (-20 to +55) (-20 to +55) (-25 to +60) (-25 to +60) 

Storage temperature °F -65 to +160 -60 to +160 -65 to +160 -65 to +160 -60 to +160 -60 to +160 

°C (-55 to +70) (-50 to +70) (-55 to +70) (-55 to +70) (-50 to +70) (-50 to +70) 

Compensation temperature °F +5 to +160 -4 to +140 +5 to +160 +5 to +160 -4 to +140 -4 to +140 

°C (-15 to +55) (-20 to +60) (-15 to +55) (-15 to +55) (-20 to +60) (-20 tp +60) 

Maximum altitude ft 9800 (3000m) 

Operation position Normal On vertical plane 

Allowable ±30° 

Mounting 

On contactor or separately 

Tripping class 

10A 

Particular characteristics 

Test button - Trip indicator 

❶ With manual and automatic resetting. 

❷ For currents higher than 420A, contact Sales & Technical Support. 

❸ Standard supplied. 

❹ Metric wrench/spanner. 

❺ C600-R300 for automatic reset type. 



® 

electric 



TC-33 

Trip characteristic 

curves 

RF thermal 

overload relays 

(average times) 

Three-phase balanced operation 

RF9 RF25 RF38 RF95 

RFA9 RFA25 RFA95 

4 

10 

8 

6 

4 

[s] 

Two-phase operation (phase failure) 

RF9 RF25 RF38 RF95 

RFA9 RFA25 RFS38 RFA95 

RFS9 RFS25 RFS95 

4 

[s] 

4 

10 

8 

6 

TC 

2 

2 

3 

10 

8 

6 

4 

3 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

2 

10 

8 

6 

4 

COLD 

2 

2 

10 

8 

6 

4 

COLD 

2 

2 

1 

10 

8 

6 

4 

HOT 

1 

10 

8 

6 

4 

HOT 

2 

2 

0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x le 

0.7 0.9 1.05 

0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x le 

0.7 0.9 1.05 

RF200 

RF420 

RF200 

RF420 

4 

10 

8 

6 

4 

[s] 

4 

[s] 

4 

10 

8 

6 

2 

2 

3 

10 

8 

6 

4 

3 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

2 

2 

10 

8 

6 

4 

COLD 

2 

10 

8 

6 

4 

COLD 

2 

2 

1 

10 

8 

6 

4 

HOT 

1 

10 

8 

6 

4 

HOT 

2 

2 

0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x le 

0.7 0.9 1.05 

0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x le 

0.7 0.9 1.05 



TC-34 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 



The choice of a rotary cam switch and the relative type are 

based on the functional diagram and the type of application as 

well. 

IEC standards provide a comprehensible and quick 

classification of the most frequent utilization categories: 

AC1: Connection and disconnection of non-inductive or 

slightly inductive loads (cosϕ ≥0.95) 

AC21: Resistance furnaces 

AC3: Starting and switching off motors during running 

AC23: Switching of motor loads or other highly inductive 

loads 

AC15: Control of electromagnetic loads 

For DC applications, the rotary cam switches are used for the 

switching of minor loads or in control circuits, such as: 

DC13: Control of electromagnets 

DC21A: Switching of resistive loads 

DC23: Switching of highly inductive loads 

Other prescriptions and recommendations concerning the use 

of cam switches as auxiliary equipment of electrical machines 

are given in IEC/EN 60204-1 standards and specifically as 

given under utilization. 

Utilization 

MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH WITH EMERGENCY- 

STOP OPERATION: 

– Red operating handle with yellow background 

– Lockable in open position (OFF). 

EMERGENCY-STOP SWITCH 

– Red operating handle with yellow background 

– Independent operation and the breaking of the load circuit 

of switching devices before the opening of its main 

contacts 

– Rated capacity is to sufficient in order to break the sum of 

the rated operating currents of all the connected equipment 

– Breaking capacity equal to the current of the largest motor 

when stalled (locked rotor) together with the total of the 

normal running currents of the other motors or loads. 

MAIN SUPPLY DISCONNECTING SWITCH 

– Used to disconnect all live electrical equipment from the 

power supply circuit 

– Contact clearance distance is to comply with 

IEC/EN 60947-3 standards 

– Provided with a means in order to be locked in the OFF 

position 

– Selection of current breaking according to AC1 and AC21 

utilization categories. 

TYPE 

Rated insulation voltage Ui❶ 

IEC/EN 

UL/CSA 

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp ❶ 

IEC/EN 60947-3 

Conventional free air thermal 

current Ith IEC/EN 

General purpose UL/CSA 

Rated operational voltage 

(disconnecting switch) ❶ 

Operational impulse voltage 

IEC/EN 60947-1 

Maximum fuse size for 

10kA 

short-circuit protection In (gG) 25kA 

50kA 

63kA 

Short-time 

withstand current Icw 

1sec 

Rated operational current Ie 

AC1/AC21A (IEC/EN) 

110V 

AC15 (IEC/EN) 220-230V 

380-400V 

660-690V 

AC switching capacity 

AC3 (IEC/EN) 220-230V 

3 phases 380-440V 

500-690V 

1 phase (2 poles) 110V 

220-230V 

380-440V 

AC23A (IEC/EN) 220-230V 

3 phases 380-440V 

500-690V 


220-230V 

380-440V 

V 

V 

kV 

A 

A 

V 

kV 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125 

690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 

600 600 600 600 300 300 600 600 600 600 600 

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 

16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125 

12 15 32 40 10 15 20 32 35 55 100 

440 440 440 440 480 480 480 480 480 480 690 

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 

16 20 35 40 16 20 25 32 40 63 125 

16 16 35 35 10 16 25 32 40 63 100 

– – 32 35 – – – 32 40 63 100 

– – – 35 – – – – 40 63 100 

250 250 800 800 200 250 400 800 1000 1600 2100 

16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125 

10 10 25 25 10 10 16 25 25 32 40 

8 4 20 22 8 8 12 20 22 25 28 

4 6 10 12 4 6 8 10 12 15 15 

3 3.7 5.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 4 5 

kW 3.5 3.7 7.5 7.5 2.5 3 5.5 7.5 8 11 18.5 

kW 4.5 5.5 11 15 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 37 

kW 5.5 5.5 11 15 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 33 

kW 0.55 0.75 1.8 2.2 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5 

kW 1.5 1.8 3.5 4.4 1.5 2.2 3 4 6.5 6.5 11 

kW 2.2 3 5.5 7 2.2 3 5.5 6.5 8 11.5 15 

kW 3.7 4 8 9 3 5 6.5 8 8 12.5 30 

kW 6.5 7.5 15 18.5 6 7.5 11 15 18.5 30 45 

kW 6.5 7.5 15 15 7.5 7.5 11 18.5 22 30 37 

kW 

0.75 0.75 2.2 3 0.8 0.8 1.5 2.2 3 3.7 5 

kW 

1.8 2.2 3.5 5.2 1.7 2.5 3.7 5 6 7.5 11 

kW 

3 3.5 6 7.5 3 3.7 5.5 8 11 12.5 15 

❶ Valid for systems with grounded neutral, overvoltage category III, pollution degree 3. 



® 

electric 



TC-35 

Operational 


TYPE 

UL/CSA HP ratimgs 

Full voltage-across the line 120V 

240V 

HP 

HP 

3 phases 

480V 

600V 

HP 

HP 


230V 

HP 

HP 

DC switching capacity 

Rated current Ie for 1 contact 

DC21A T=1ms 48V 

60V 

110V 

220V 

440V 

A 

A 

A 

A 

A 

DC23A T=15ms (notor cluty) 24V 

48V 

60V 

A 

A 

A 

No. of contacts connected in 110V A 

series are indicated in brackets 

220V A 

DC switching capacity 

24V A 

Rated current Ie for 1 contact 48V A 

DC13A T=50ms 60V 

110V 

220V 

440V 

A 

A 

A 

A 

Mechanical life 

Terminal screw 

cycles 

M 

Maximum tightening torque 

Nm 

Conductor cross section max. r/f 

lbft 

2 mm 2 

r: rigido 

min. r/f 

2 AWG 

2 mm 2 

f: flexible 


2 AWG 

Ambient operating temperature 

Ambient storage temperature 

°F 

°F 

GX16 GX20 GX32 GX40 GN12 GN20 GN25 GN32 GN40 GN63 GN125 

1.5 1.5 3 5 1.5 1.5 3 5 5 7.5 15 

3 3 7.5 10 3 3 5 10 10 15 25 

5 5 15 15 – – 10 15 20 25 50 

5 5 15 15 – – 10 15 20 25 40 

0.75 0.75 1.5 2 0.75 0.75 1.5 2 2 5 7.5 

1 1.5 3 5 1 2 3 5 5 10 15 

16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125 

16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 50 80 

4 4 5 6 4 4 4 6 6 8 10 

0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 - - - 

0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 - - - - - 

16(1) 20(1) 32(1) 40(1) 10(1) 20(1) 25(1) 32(1) 40(1) 50(1) 125(1) 

16(2) 20(2) 32(2) 40(1) 10(2) 20(2) 25(2) 32(2) 40(2) 50(2) 125(2) 

16(3) 20(3) 32(3) 40(3) 10(3) 20(3) 25(3) 32(3) 40(3) 50(3) 125(3) 

10(3) 10(3) 15(3) 20(3) 5(3) 10(3) 12(3) 15(3) 20(3) 25(3) 50(3) 

7(4) 8(4) 12(4) 12(4) 5(4) 8(4) 10(4) 12(4) 12(4) 15(4) 20(4) 

16 20 32 40 12 20 25 32 40 63 125 

14 16 25 32 10 16 20 25 32 40 100 

12 12 16 16 8 12 16 16 16 28 50 

0.8 1 3 3 1 1 1.5 3 3 3.3 4 

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - 

0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 - - - - - 

5x10 6 5x10 6 5x10 6 5x10 6 3x10 6 5x10 6 5x10 6 5x10 6 5x10 6 5x10 6 1x10 6 

3 3 4 4 3 3 3.5 4 4 5 2 x 5 

0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.2 2 2 

0.37 0.59 0.88 0.88 0.37 0.37 0.59 0.88 0.88 1.47 1.47 

2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/6 10/6 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 6/4 6/4 10/6 16/10 70/50 

14/14 14/14 8/10 8/10 16/16 14/14 10/12 10/12 8/10 6/8 2/0 / 1/0 

0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 0.5/0.5 1.5/1.5 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 

20/20 20/20 16/16 16/60 20/20 20/20 20/20 16/16 16/16 14/14 14/14 

-15 to +130 (-25...+55°C) 

-40 to +160 (-40...+70°C) 

TC 



TC-36 


Timers 

® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


TYPE AT1P AT1CP ATD AT1DP 

DESCRIPTION 

On delay On delay Off delay Off delay, auxiliary 

supply 

Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale 

Multivoltage Multivoltage Single voltage Single voltage 

CONTROl CIRCUIT 

Rated control power 24VAC / 100-240VAC❶ 12-24VAC/DC❶ 24VAC/DC❶ 24VAC/DC❶ 

24VAC / 220-440VAC❶ 48-60 / 110-125VAC/DC❶ 48VAC/DC❶ 48VAC/DC❶ 

110-127VAC❶ 110-127VAC❶ 

220-240VAC❶ 220-240VAC❶ 

Rated frequency 

50-60Hz 

Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us 0.85-1.1 Us in AC 0.8-1.1 Us 

0.6-1.3 Us in DC 

Power consumption (maximum) 24V=1VA; 12-24V=1.5W 2.7VA AC 8.7VA AC 

100-240V=10VA 48-60/110-125V=2.5W 0.3W DC 1.6W DC 

(110V=1.4VA) 

220-440V=15.6VA 

(220V=3.2VA) 

TIMING CIRCUIT 

Time setting range Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale 

0.3-3s 0.3-3s 0.3-3s 0.3-3s 

1.2-12s 1.2-12s 1.2-12s 1.2-12s 

9.6-96s 9.6-96s 9.6-96s 9.6-96s 

76.8-768s 76.8-768s 76.8-768s 76.8-768s 

NOTE: 

del. = delayed 

inst. = instantaneous 

DT = Double-Throw 

❶ Other voltages on request; contact Sales & 


Setting accuracy ±9% 

Repeat accuracy ≤ ±0.5% 

Influence of voltage variation ±0.3% –0.3% ±0.3% 

+0.74% 

Average variation of set delays 

related to +70°F/20°C at -5°F/–20°C +2% 

condition 

at +140°F+60°C –3% 

Minimum ON time –– 25ms 

Resetting during operation ≥ 80ms ≥ 60ms 200ms ≥ 55ms 

time elasped time ≥ 55ms ≥ 50ms –– ≥ 80ms 

Immunity time for microbreakings ≤ 30ms ≤ 30ms ≤ 7ms ≤ 7ms 

OUTPUT CONTACTS 

Contact arrangement 

1 delayed double-throw 

Maximum switching voltage 440VAC (rated 250V) 250VAC 250VAC 

Conventional free air 

8A 

thermal current Ith 

UL designation (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) 

B300 (AC1 8A 250VAC) 

Electrical life (with rated load) 

10 5 cycles 


30x10 6 cycles 

Tightening torque (maximum) 

9lbin / 1.2Nm 

Conductor section (min-max) 2x18 - 14 AWG (except combination 18-14) 1.5-5mm 2 

INSULATION (input-output) 

Rated insulation voltage 

250V 

Rated impulse withstand voltage 

4kV 

Power frequency withstand voltage 2.5kV (50Hz - 60s) 



+15...+140°F (–10...+60°C) 


-20...+175°F (–30...+80°C) 

Housing 

Self-extinguishing polyamide 



® 

electric 


Timers 

TC-37 

BTPM1 BTPM DRPL BT2N L48TP L48TPB L48M 

Programmable Programmable Asymmetrical For starting On delay On delay Programmable 

multifunction multifunction recycle multifunction 

Multiscale Single scale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale 

Multivoltage Dual voltage Multivoltage Single voltage Multivoltage 

TC 

24VAC/DC❶ 24/48VAC/DC❶ 24VAC/DC❶ 24VAC/DC❶ 24-240VAC/DC❶ 

110-127VAC❶ 24VAC/DC 110VAC❶ 110VAC❶ 

220-240VAC❶ 110-127VAC❶ 220-240VAC❶ 220-240VAC❶ 

50-60Hz 

24VAC/DC 

220-240VAC❶ 

24VAC/DC 

380-415VAC❶ 

24VAC/DC 

415-440VAC❶ 

50/60Hz 

0.8-1.1 Us 0.85-1.1 Us 

9.2VA AC 12.8VA AC 8.7VA AC 6VA 

2.9W DC 1W DC 1.5W DC 

Multiscale Multiscale Single scale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale 

0.3-3s 0.3-3s/min start time: 0.3-3s 0.05-1s 0.05-1s 

1.2-12s 0.6-6s/min 0.6-6s 0.12-12s 0.10-10s 0.1-10s 

9.6-96s 1.2-12s/min 1.2-12s 10-100s 0.6s-1min 0.6s-1min 

76.8-768s 3-30s/min 3-30s 78-780s 6s-10min 6s-10min 

0.3-3min 6-60s/min 6-60s 18s-3min 0.05-1min 

1.2-12min 12-120s/min 72s-12min 0.1-10min 

9.6-96min Transition time: 10-100min 0.6min-1h 

76.8-768min 20-300ms 78-780min 1min-10h 

±9% ±5% 

≤±0.5% ±0.5% 

±0.3% ±0.5% 

+2% +2% 

–3% –3% 

–– –– 

≥75ms ≥ 75ms ≥ 85ms ≥75ms ≥ 0.1s ≥ 0.1m ≥ 0.1s 

≥ 45ms ≥ 45ms ≥ 75ms ≥ 70ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms ≥ 65ms 

≤ 7ms ≤ 7ms ≤ 7ms ≤ 7ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms ≤ 40ms 

1 delayed DT 2 del or 1 inst + 1 del DT 2 delayed DT 2 delayed DT 1 delayed DT 2 del or 1 inst + 1 del DT 2 delayed DT 

250VAC 380VAC 250V 

8A 

5A 

B300 (AC1 8A 250VAC) 

10 5 cycles 


9 lbin / 1.2Nm –– 

2 18-14 AWG (except combination 18-14) / 1.5-5mm 2 –– 

250V 500V 250V 

4kV –– 

2.5kV (50Hz - 60s) 2kV (50Hz - 60s) 

+14...+140°F (-10...+60°C) 

-20...+175°F (-30...+80°C) 


+14...+140°F (-10...+60°C) 

-20...+175°F (-30...+80°C) 




TC-38 


Timers 

® 

electric 

TC 

TYPE TM P TM M1 TM M2 TM PL TM D TM ST TM LS 

DESCRIPTION 

On delay Programmable Programmable Asymmetrical True off For starting Staircase 

multifunction multifunction timing recycle delay illumination 

Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Single scale 

Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Multivoltage Single voltage 

CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Rated control 24-48VDC 12-240VAC/DC 24-240VAC/DC 24-48VDC 220-240VAC 

power Us 24-240VAC 24-240VAC 

380-440VAC 

Rated frequecy 

50/60Hz 

Operating voltage range 

0.85-1.1 Us 

Power consumption/dissipation 1.2VA/0.8W (24-48VDC) 0.6VA/0.3W (12-48VDC) 1.1VA/0.8W (12-48VDC) 0.15VA/0.15W (12-48VDC) 0.1VA/0.1W (24-48V) 1.2VA/0.8W (24-48VDC) 12VA /0,8W (energized) 

(maximum) 

16VA/0.9W (110-240VAC) 1.6VA/1.2W (110-240VAC) 1.8VA/1.2W (110-240VAC) 0.9VA/0.8W (110-240VAC) 1.1VA/0.8W (110-240VAC) 16VA/0.9W (110-240VAC) 5VA/0.5W (de-energized) 

TIMING CIRCUIT 

Time setting range Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale Multiscale 

0.1-1s 0.1-1s 0.1-1s 0.1-1s 0.06-0.6s 0.1-1s 0.5-20min 

1-10s 1-10s 1-10s 1-10s 0.6-6s 1-10s 

6s-1min 6s-1min 6s-1min 6s-1min 6s-1min 6s-1min 

1-10min 1-10min 1-10min 1-10min 12s-2min 1-10min 

6min-1h 6min-1h 6min-1h 6min-1h 

1-10h 1-10h 1h-10h 1h-10h 

0.1-1day 0.1-1day 0.1-1day 0.1-1day 

1-10days 1-10days 1-10days 1-10days 

ON only ON only ON only 3-30days 

OFF only OFF only OFF only 10-100days 

Setting accuracy

® 

electric 



TC-39 

TYPE PMA20 PMA21 PMA30 PMA40 PMA50 PMF20 

DESCRIPTION 

Single-phase Single-phase Single-phase Phase shift control Phase shift control Frequency 

minimum current maximum current minimum or maximum for pump dry for miminum and monitoring 

monitoring monitoring current monitoring running maximum 

AC/DC multiscale AC/DC multiscale AC/DC multiscale (minimum cosϕ) cosϕ 


Rated valve to be monitored Ie 0.02 - 1 - 5 - 16A Ie 16A Ie 16A 40-70Hz 


50/60 Hz 

Overload capacity 

❹ 

Connection Direct or by current tramsformer Direct 

Adjustment Tripping value 5-100% full scale of current 0...1 cosϕ 0...1 cosϕ 101-110% for max Hz 

90-99% for min Hz 

Tripping time 0.1-20s 0.1-20ms 0.1-20ms 0.1-20s 

Inhibition time 0.1-20s 0.1-20s 0.1-20s –– 

Resetting hysteresis 5-30% –– 5-30% 0.5% 

Resetting Automatic Automatic 

Manual using external N/C contact 

Repeat accuracy 1% ±1.5% ±1.5% –– 

AUXILIARY SUPPLY 

Auxiliary supply voltage Us 24-240VAC/DC 220-240VAC 220-240VAC 220-240VAC 

380-415VAC 380-415VAC 380-415VAC 

Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us 0.80-1.1 Us 0.8-1.1 Us 0.85-1.1 Us 


50/60Hz 

Power consumption (maximum) ❶ 4VA 3.5VA 3.5VA –– 

Power dissipation (maximum) 1.2W 1.8W 1.8W 1.5W 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

Number of relays 1 

Relay state 

Normally de-energized; 

energizes at tripping 

Contact arrangement 

1 double-throw 

Rated operational voltage 

250VAC 

Maximum switching voltage 

400VAC 

Conventional free air thermal current Ith 

8A 

UL (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) designation 

B300 (AC1 8A 250VAC) 


10 5 cycles 



Indications 

❹ 

CONNECTIONS 


7lbin / 0.8Nm 

Conductor section (min-max) 24-12 AWG / 0.2-4.0mm 2 

INSULATION (input-output) 

Rated insulation voltage 

575V 

Rated impulse withstand voltage 

6kV 

Power frequency withstand voltage 4kV (50Hz - 60s) 



-5...+140°F (-20...+60°C) 


-20...+175°F (-30...+80°C) 

Housing 


TC 

❶ Value referred to 110VAC 

❹ Contact Sales & Technical Support. 



TC-40 



® 

electric 

TC 

TYPE Single phase PMV55 — — — — — — — 

Three phase — PMV10 PMV20 PMV30 PMV40 PMV50 PMV60 PMV70 

DESCRIPTION 

Minimum and Phase sequence Phase sequence Phase sequence, Phase sequence, Phase sequence, Phase sequence, Phase sequence, 

maximum voltage and phase loss and phase loss phase loss and phase loss and phase loss, voltage phase loss, voltage phase loss, voltage 

voltage too low asymmetry too high and too low and too high and too 

too high too low asymmetry low and asymmetry 

too high too high 


Rated voltage to be 208V-240VAC 208-440VAC 100-240VAC 208V-240VAC 

monitored Ue 380V-440VAC 208-575VAC 380V-575VAC 

380-600VAC 

600VAC 

Maximum voltage set-point 105-115% Ue –– — — — 105-115% Ue — 105-115% Ue 

Minimum voltage set-point 80-95% Ue –– — 80-95% Ue — 80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue 80-95% Ue 

Asymmetry set-point — –– — — 5-15%Ue 5-15%Ue — — 

Tripping delay time 0.1-20s 60ms 60ms 0.1-20s 60ms for phase loss only 

Resetting time 0.1-20s 0.5s 0.5s 0.1-20s 0.5s 

0.5s at power up 0.5s at power up 

Resetting hysteresis 3% 5% 5% 3% 

Instantaneous tripping for Ue

® 

electric 



TC-41 

TYPE LVM20 LVM25 LVM30 LVM40 LVMP05 LVMP10 

DESCRIPTON 

Modular 

Automatic resetting –– –– 

Single voltage Dual voltage Dual voltage Single voltage Dual voltage Single voltage 

Application (examples) Empting function Emptying or filling Emptying or filling Multiple functions Starting control Starting control 

functions functions of 2 motors of 2 motors 

Operating principle 

Electrical conductivity of liquids 

POWER SUPPLY 

Supply voltage Ue 24VAC 24-48VAC/DC 24VAC/ 24VAC 24-48VDC 24VAC 

110-127VAC 110-240VAC/DC 220-240VAC 110-127VAC 24-240VAC 220-240VAC 

220-240VAC 110-127/ 220-240VAC 380-415VAC 

380-415VAC 380-415VAC 380-415VAC 

Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Ue 50/60Hz ±5% 

Power consumption (maximum) 3.5VA 4VA 5.5VA 4.5VA 1.6VA 4.8VA 

Power dissipation (maximum) 1.8W 1.2W 2.8W 2.8W 0.9W 3W 

OUTPUTS 

Number of connectable electrodes 3 3 3 5 –– –– 

Type of electrode 

Electrodes: SN1 / SCM / CGL / PS31 / PS35 or similar 

Electrode voltage 7.5VAC 5Vpp 7.5VAC 5Vpp –– –– 

Sensitivity 2.5-50kohm 2.5-100kohm 2.5-50kohm 2.5-200kohm –– –– 

TIME DELAYS 

Tripping time (minimum) ≤600ms ≤1s ≤1s 1s –– –– 

Resetting time (minimum) ≤750ms ≤1s ≤1s 1s –– –– 

Probe tripping delay –– –– OFF-10s 1-10s –– –– 

Relay energising delay –– –– OFF-300s 0-30min 10ms 20ms 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

Number of relays 1 relay with SPDT 1 relay with SPDT 1 relay with DPDT 2 relays; one with SPDT 2 relays; each 2 relays; each 

and one with 1 N/O contact with 1N/O contact with 1N/O contact 

Rated utilization voltage 

250VAC 

Conventional free air thermal 

8A 

current Ith 

UL (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) 

B300 (AC1 8A 250VAC) 

designation 

Maximum switching voltage 

400VAC 


10 5 cycles 



Indications 

Green LED for power on Green LED for power on Green LED for power on Green LED for power on Green LED for power on Green LED for power on 

Red LED for relay state Red LED for relay state Red LED for relay state 2 red LEDs for relay state Red LED for relay state Red LED for relay state 

2 red LEDs for probe state 

CONNECTIONS 


7lbin / 0.8Nm 

Conductor section (min-max) 24/12 AWG / 0.2-4mm 2 

INSULATION 

Rated impulse wihstand 6kV 4kV 6kV 6kV 4kV 4kV 

voltage Uimp 

Power frequency withstand 4kV 2kV 4kV 4kV 2kV 2.5kV 

voltage 

Rated insulation voltage Ui 415VAC 240VAC 415VAC 415VAC 250VAC 400VAC 

Double insulation ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC ≤250VAC –– –– 

Supply/relay/electrode 



-5...+140°F (-20...+60°C) 


-20...+175°F (-30...+80°C) 

HOUSING 

Housing material 


Typical configuration LVM20 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM25 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes 

(examples) LVM30 + n° 3 SN1 electrodes LVM40 + n° 5 SN1 electrodes 

Maximum cable length 

Contact Sales & Technical Support for details 

NOTE: 

SPDT = Single-pole double-throw 

DPDT = Double-pole double-throw 

N/O = normally open 

TC 



TC-42 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


❶ Other voltages on request. Contact Sales & 


❷ ±0.5% f.s. ±digit only for DMK71 R1. 

❸ 25-660VAC for DMK84 R1. 

TYPE WITHOUT OUTPUT DMK70 - DMK10 DMK71 - DMK11 DMK75 - DMK15 - DMK16 

TYPE WITH OUTPUT DMK70 R1 - DMK10 R1 DMK71 R1 - DMK11 R1 DMK75 R1 - DMK15 R1 

TYPE OF CONTROL 


TYPE OF INSTRUMENT Voltmeter Ammeter Combined voltmeterammeter-wattmeter 

(multimeter - DMK16) 


Rated control power Us 

110-127VAC ❶ 

Operating voltage range 0.85-1.1 Us 50-60Hz ±10% 

Power consumption (maximum) 3.2VA 3.2VA 3.2VA DMK75 

(3.5VA for DMK... R1) (3.5VA for DMK... R1) (3.5VA for DMK... R1) 

Power dissipation (maximum) 1.5W 1.5W 1.5W DMK75 

(1.8W for DMK... R1) (1.8W for DMK... R1) (1.8W for DMK... R1) 

VOLTAGE INPUTS 

Maximum rated voltage 600VAC phase-phase - 600VAC phase-phase 

347VAC phase-neutral - 347VAC phase-neutral 

Operating voltage range 15-660VAC phase-phase - 35-660VAC phase-phase 

10-382VAC phase-neutral - 20-382VAC phase-neutral 

Frequency range 50-60Hz ±10% - 50-60Hz ±10% 

Method of measuring True RMS value - True RMS value 

Measuring input impedance >1.1Mohm phase-phase - >1.1Mohm phase-phase 

>0.55Mohm phase-neutral - >0.55Mohm phase-neutral 

Acquisition time 80ms DMK...R1 only - 80ms DMK...R1 only 

CURRENT INPUTS 

Rated current Ie - 5A - 

Measuring range - 0.05-5.75A - 

Type of input - Shunt - 

Type of measuring - True RMS value - 

Overload capacity - +20% Ie - 

Overload peak - 50A for 1 second - 

Dynamic limit - 125A for 10ms - 

Power consumption -

® 

electric 



TC-43 

DMK80- DMK00 DMK81 - DMK01 DMK82 - DMK02 DMK83 - DMK03 DMK84 - DMK04 

DMK80 R1 - DMK00 R1 DMK81 R1 - DMK01 R1 - DMK83 R1 - DMK03 R1 DMK84 R1 - DMK04 R1 

Single phase 

Voltmeter Ammeter Voltmeter or Frequency meter Cosphi meter 

ammeter 

TC 

110-127VAC ❶ 

0.85-1.1 Us 50-60Hz ±10% 

3.2VA 3.2VA 3.2VA 3.2VA 3.2VA 

(3.5VA for DMK... R1) (3.5VA for DMK... R1) (3.5VA for DMK... R1) (3.5VA for DMK... R1) 

1.5W DMK80 1.5W DMK81 1.5W 1.5W DMK83 1.5W DMK84 

(1.8W for DMK... R1) (1.8W for DMK... R1) - (1.8W for DMK... R1) (1.8W for DMK... R1) 

600VAC - 600VAC - 600VAC 

- - - 

15-660VAC - 15-660VAC - 25-660VAC ❸ 

- - - 

50-60Hz ±10% - 50-60Hz ±10% - 50-60Hz ±10% 

True RMS value - True RMS value - True RMS value 

>1.1Mohm - >1.1Mohm - >1.1Mohm 

- - - 

25ms DMK::: R1 only - - 25ms DMK... R1 only 60ms DMK... R1 only 

- 5A 5A - 5A 

- 0.05-5.75A 0.05-5.75A - 0.05-5.75A 

- Shunt Shunt - Shunt 

- True RMS value True RMS value - - 

- +20% Ie +20% Ie - +20% Ie 

- 50A for 1 second 50A for 1 second - 50A for 1 second 

- 125A for 10ms 125A for 10ms - 125A for 10ms 

-

TC-44 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


TYPE DMK 20 - DMK 21 - DMK 22 DMK 25 - DMK 26 


Rated control power Us 208-240VAC 12-24VDC from battery 

Operating voltage range 154-288VAC for DMK 20 9-32VDC 

177-264VAC for DMK 21 - DMK 22 

Frequency 45-65Hz — 

Power consumption 5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 20 1.1W maximum 

4.5VA (Us=240) for DMK 21 - DMK 22 

Power dissipation 2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 20 1.1W maximum 

2.6W (Us=240) for DMK 21 - DMK 22 

Immunity tme of microbreakings 20ms 500ms 


Maximum rated voltage 

690VAC L-L 

(400VAC L-N) 


60-830V L-L 

(30-480VAC L-N) 

Frequency range 

45-65Hz 

Method of measuring 

True RMS value 

Measuring input impedance 

>1.1MΩ L-L and >570kΩ L-N 

Method of connection 

Single phase, three-phase 

or balanced three-phase system 

Measuring error 

Class 0.5 ±0.25% full scale ±1digit 


Rated currrent Ie 

standard 5A (1A on request) 

Measuring range 

0.05-6A 



Overload capacity 

+20% Ie via external CT with 5A secondary 

Overload peak 

50A for 1 second 

Dymanic peak 

125A for 10ms 


® 

electric 



TC-45 

DMK 30 - DMK 31 - DMK 32 DMK 40 DMK 50 - DMK 51 - DMK 52 DMK 60 - DMK 61 - DMK 62 

100-240VAC/110-250VDC 100-240VAC/110-250VDC 208-240VAC 100-240VAC/110-250VDC 

85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC 85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC 154-288VAC for DMK 50 85-265VAC/93.5-300VDC 

177-264VAC for DMK 51 - DMK 52 

45-450Hz 45-450Hz 45-65Hz 45-450Hz 

10VA/4W 10VA/4W 5.5VA (Us=240V) for DMK 50 - DMK 51 10VA/4W 

6VA (Us=240) for DMK 52 

3W (DMK 30) 4W 2.5W (Us=240V) for DMK 50 - DMK 51 3W for DMK 60 

4W (DMK 31 - DMK 32) 2.8W (Us=240) for DMK 52 4W for DMK 61 - DMK 62 

20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms 

TC 

690VAC L-L 

(400VAC L-N) 

20-830V L-L 20-830V L-L 60-830V L-L 20-830V L-L 

(10-480VAC L-N) (10-480VAC L-N) (30-480VAC L-N) (10-480VAC L-N) 

45-65Hz 


>1.1MΩ L-L and >570kΩ L-N 

Single-phase or three-phase Single-phase or three-phase Single-phase, three-phase Single-phase or three-phase 

system with or without neutral system with or without neutral or balanced three-phase system system with or without neutral 

Class 0.5 ±0.25% full scale ±1digit 

5A (1A on request) 

0.02-6A 0.02-6A 0.05-6A 0.02-6A 


+20% Ie via external CT with 5A secondary 

50A for 1 second 

125A for 10ms 

TC-46 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


TYPE DCRK5 - DCRK7 DCRK8 - DCRK12 DCRJ8 - DCRJ12 DCRJ12F 

AUXILIARY SUPPLY CIRCUIT 

Control power ❶ ❶ 110-127 / 110-127 / 

220-240VAC ❷ 220-240VAC ❷ 

(dual voltage) (dual voltage) 

Operational limit –– –– -15 to +10% -15 to +10% 

Operating frequency –– –– 50Hz or 60Hz ±5% 50Hz or 60Hz ±5% 

Power consumption (maximum) –– –– 9.7VA 9.2VA 

Maximum dissipation –– –– 5.5W 5.5W 

(output contacts excluded) 

VOLTAGE CIRCUIT 

Control voltage 440-480VAC ❷ (powered by monitored voltage) 100-690VAC 

Operational limit -15 to +10% -15 to +10% 85 to +760VAC 85 to +760VAC 

Operating frequency 50 or 60Hz ±1% (self configurable) 50 or 60Hz ±5% (self configurable) 

Power consumption 6.2VA 5VA 0.03VA 0.03VA 

Maximum dissipation 2.7W 3W –– –– 

(output contacts excluded) 

Maximum dissipation of each 0.5W 0.5W 0.5W 0.5W 

output contact (5A 250VAC load) 

Immunity time for microbreaking ≤65ms ≤65ms ≤45ms ≤45ms 

No-voltage release ≥8ms ≥8ms ≥8ms ≥8ms 

CURRENT CIRCUIT 

Rated current Ie 5A (1A on request) 5A (1A on request) 5A (1A on request) 5A (1A on request) 

Operating limit 0.125-6A 0.125-6A 0.125-6A 0.125-6A 

Constant overload 1.2 Ie 1.2 Ie 1.2 Ie 1.2 Ie 

Short time withstand current 10 Ie for 1s 10 Ie for 1s 10 Ie for 1s 10 Ie for 1s 

Power consumption 0.65W 0.65W 0.27VA 0.27VA 

DETECTION DATA 

Type of voltage and current detection RMS RMS RMS RMS 

Power factor adjustment 0.8 ind.-0,8 cap. 0.8 ind.-0.8 cap. 0.8 ind.-0.8 cap. 0.8 ind.-0.8 cap. 

Type of temperature sensor Semiconductor (internal) NTC01 (external) 

Temperature measurement ranhe -20...+185°F (-30...+85°C) -40...+185°F (-40...+85°C) external 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

Number of outputs 5 or 7 8 or 12 8 or 12 1 

Contact arrangement 1 each w/1 NO contact 7 or 11 contacts each with 1 NO + 1 SPDT 1 SPDT 

Rated capacity Ith 5A - 250V (AC1) 5A - 250V (AC1) 5A - 250V (AC1) 5A - 250V (AC1) 

Maximum capacity of 12A 12A 12A 12A 

contact common 

Maximum switching voltage 440VAC 440VAC 440VAC 440VAC 

UL (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) C250, B400 C250, B400 C250, B400 C250, B400 

designation (AC, DC) 

Electrical life 10 5 cycles 10 5 cycles 10 5 cycles 10 5 cycles 

(at rated load) 

Mechanical life 30x10 6 30x10 6 30x10 6 30x10 6 

STATIC OUTPUTS 

Number of outputs –– –– –– 11 

Type of output –– –– –– Opto-isolated bidirectional 

(Opto-Mosfet) 

Rated operational voltage –– –– –– 40VDC - 30VAC 

Rated operational current –– –– –– 55mA at 60°C 

CONNECTIONS 

Type of termination Removable/plug-in Removable/plug-in Removable/plug-in Removable/plug-in 

Conductor cross section (min-max) 24/12 AWG / 0.2-2.5mm 2 


Operating tempareture 

-5...-140°F (-20...+60°C) 


-20...+175°F (-30...+80°C) 

HOUSING 

Material Self-extinguishing thermoplastic Noryl Self-extinguishing thermoplastic LEXAN 

Version Flush mount 96x96mm Flush mount 144x144mm Flush mount 144x144mm Flush mount 144x144mm 

❶ Refer to data given under voltage circuit below. 

❷ Other voltages available on request. 

SPDT = Single-pole double throw. 

96x96mm = 3.78x3.78in; 144x144mm = 5.67x5.67in 



® 

electric 



TC-47 

Operational 


TYPE ATL20 ATL30 


Rated voltage 

12-24-48VDC; 110-120VAC 


9-70VDC; 93.5-132VAC 


690V 

Frequency 

45-65Hz 

Power consumption (maximum) 

9VA (120VAC) 

Power dissipation (maximum) 

4.1W (48VDC); 6.3W (120VAC) 

Current consumption (maximum) 

300mA at 12VDC; 180mA at 24VDC; 90mA at 48VDC 

Immunity time for microbreakings 

50ms 


Maximum rated voltage 

690VAC L-L (400VAC L-N); UL rated 600VAC L-L (340VAC L-N) 

Measure range 

80-800VAC L-L 

Frequency range 

45-65Hz 



Measuring input impedance 

>1.1MΩ L-L and >0.5MΩ L-N 

Method of connection 

Single-phase or three-phase system 

Measuring error 

Class 0.5 ±0.25% full scale ±1 digit 


Type of input 

Negative 

Input current 

≤10mA 

Input signal - “0” logic state 

≤1.5V (2.9V typical) 

Input signal - “1” logic state 

≥5.3V (4.3V typical) 

Input signal delay 

≥50ms 

RELAY OUTPUTS 

Number of outputs 7 

Contact configuration 

– 2 relays, each with 1 N/O contact - B300 (16A - 250VAC AC1) 

– 3 relays, each with 1 N/O contact - B300 (5A - 250VAC AC1) 

(30VDC 1A pilot duty) 

– 2 relays, each with 1 SPDT - B300 (8A - 250VAC AC1) 

(30VDC 1A pilot duty) 

REAL TME CLOCK (ATL30 only) 

Energy storage 

Back-up capacitors 

Operating time without power supply 

12-15 days 

COMMUNICATION LINES 

Serial interface 

RS232 with programmable baud rate 1200-38400bps 

connection by RJ6/6 jack 

–– RS485 opto-isolated with 

programmable baud rate 1200-38400 bps 

Connection by removable/plug-in 

terminals 

CONNECTIONS 

Type of terminals 

Removable / Plug-in 

Conduction section (min-max) 24/12 AWG / 0.2-2.5mm 2 


4.5lbin / 0.5Nm 



-5...+140°F (-20...+60°C) 


-20...+175°F (-30...+80°C) 

Relative humidity

TC-48 



® 

electric 

TC 

Operational 


TYPE LRD...D024 LRD...A024 LRD...A240 

CONTROL POWER SUPPLY 

Rated utilization voltage Ue (Frequency range) 24VDC 24VAC 110-240VAC (47-63Hz) 

Operating limits 21.6-26.4VDC –– 85-264VAC 

DIGITAL INPUTS 

Rated voltage 24VDC 24VAC 110-220VAC 

Input voltage State 0

Electrical 

controls for 

industrial 

automation 

Complete the form 

and return to the 

the local office in 

your country: 

In the U.S.A. 

Fax (757) 575-2900 

Email: sales@LovatoUsa.com 


In Canada 

Fax (450) 681-9884 

Email: info@Lovato.ca 

www.Lovato.ca 

12 

11 1 

10 

2 

D A 

9 3 

C B 

8 

4 

7 5 

6 

Plate 

pos. 

indication 

1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 29 32 33 36 37 40 41 44 45 48 

2 3 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 22 23 26 27 30 31 34 35 38 39 42 43 46 47 

C 

7 

8 

9 

D 

10 

11 

12 

A 

1 

2 

3 

B 

4 

5 

6 

Front plate 1 

X 

X 

X 

X 

2 

X 

X 

X 

Overlapping Closed contact Open/ Closed Spring 

contacts in 2 or more passing contact return 

positions contact 

Body shape: ■ Square - GX ❶ ■ Round - GN _____________ Amp rating 

Version: ■ Front mount ■ Rear mount ■ Enclosed ■ Other __________________ 

Finish: ■ Standard ❷ ■ Red/yellow padlockable ■ Special ________________ 

Fixing: ■ 2 screw ■ 4 screw 

Qty: ________ Company name and contact details: ________________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________________________________________ 

❶ Maximum 40A ratings for GX series. 

❷ Standard finish is grey front plate, 0-12 indication and a blacke handle; any other is considered special. 



® 

electric 

Notes 



® 

electric 

Notes 



® 

electric 

Index in alphanumeric order 

I-I 

A014 9-16 

9-17 

A0191 9-17 

A0192 9-17 

A114 9-16 

9-17 

A119U 9-17 

A119O 9-17 

A124 9-16 

9-17 

A1691 9-17 

A1692 9-17 

A1693 9-17 

A180 9-17 

A181 9-17 

A20746 8-20 

A20747 8-20 

A20748 8-20 

A441 9-17 

A442 9-17 

A443 9-17 

ADXM 14-2 

14-3 

APRBP 9-16 

9-17 

AR114 9-16 

9-17 

AR124 9-16 

9-17 

AR214 9-16 

9-17 

AR224 9-16 

9-17 

ASTA 12-3 

AT!CP 10-4 

AT1DP 10-5 

AT1CP 10-4 

AT1P 10-4 

ATD 10-5 

ATL 16-2 

16-3 

B115 00 3-4 

3-5 

B115 4 3-6 

3-7 

B1250 3-4 

B1250 4 3-6 

B145 00 3-4 

3-5 

B145 4 3-6 

3-7 

B1600 3-4 

B1600 4 3-6 

B180 00 3-4 

3-5 

B180 4 3-6 

3-7 

B250 00 3-4 

3-5 

B250 4 3-6 

3-7 

B310 00 3-4 

3-5 

B310 4 3-6 

3-7 

B400 00 3-4 

3-5 

B400 4 3-6 

3-7 

B500 00 3-4 

3-5 

B500 4 3-6 

3-7 

B630 00 3-4 

3-5 

B630 1000 3-4 

3-5 

B630 1000 4 3-6 

3-7 

B630 4 3-6 

3-7 

BA126 2 3-17 

3-22 

BA135 3-22 

BA1546 3-29 

BA1553 3-29 

BA1575 1 3-29 

BA1588 3-31 

BA1589 3-31 

BA1594 3-22 

BA1595 3-22 

BA1671 3-29 

BA1678 3-29 

BA1700 1 3-29 

BA1713 3-31 

BA1714 3-31 

BA1720 3-24 

BA1721 3-24 

BA1796 3-29 

BA1799 3-29 

BA1803 3-29 

BA1838 3-31 

BA1839 3-31 

BA1845 3-24 

BA1846 3-24 

BA235 3-22 

BA435 3-22 

BA705 3-27 

BA904 3-28 

BA911 3-28 

BF00A 3-11 

BF09A 3-4 

BF09 T2A 3-11 

BF09 T4A 3-6 

BF110 00 

BF110C 00 3-5 

BF12A 3-4 

BF12C 3-5 

BF12 T4A 3-6 

BF16C 3-5 

BF16C 04 3-11 

BF16C 22 3-11 

BF16C 40 3-7 

BF18A 3-4 

BF18 T0A 3-11 

BF18 T2A 3-11 

BF18 T4A 3-6 

BF20C 3-5 

BF25A 3-4 

BF25C 3-5 

BF25C 04 3-11 

BF25C 22 3-11 

BF25C 40 3-7 

BF26 00A 3-4 

BF26 T2A 3-11 

BF26 T4A 3-7 

BF32 00A 3-4 

BF32C 3-5 

BF38 00A 3-4 

BF38 T2A 3-11 

BF38 T4A 3-6 

BF40C 00 3-5 

BF40C 22 3-11 

BF40C 40 3-7 

BF50 00 3-4 

BF50 40 3-6 

BF50C 00 3-5 

BF50K 00 3-8 

BF65 00 3-4 

BF65 40 3-6 

BF65C 00 3-5 

BF65C 40 3-7 

BF65K 00 3-8 

BF70K 00 3-8 

BF80 00 3-4 

BF80 40 3-6 

BF80C 00 3-5 

BF80C 40 3-7 

BF80K 00 3-8 

BF95 00 3-4 

BF95 C 00 3-4 

BF9C 3-5 

BF9C 40 3-7 

BFA42 6-8 

BFK09 3-8 

BFK12 3-8 

BFK18 3-8 

BFK26 3-8 

BFK32 3-8 

BFK38 3-8 

BFT 6-9 

BFU 6-8 

6-9 

BFX10 3-12 

4-5 

BFX11 3-12 

BFX30 5-5 

3-16 

4-5 

BFX31 3-16 

BFX32 3-16 

BFX42 3-15 

4-5 

BFX50 3-15 

4-5 

BFX79 3-14 

4-5 

BFX80 3-16 

4-5 

BFX89 1-5 

3-16 

4-5 

BFX95A 3-26 

BFX99 3-30 

BG00... 3-10 

BG00... D 3-11 

BG06... A 3-4 

BG06... D 3-5 

BG09... A 3-4 

BG09... D 3-5 

BG09 T2 3-11 

BG09 T4 A 3-5 

BG09 T4 D 3-7 

BG12... A 3-4 

BG12... D 3-7 

BGF00 3-10 

BGF09... A 3-7 

BGF09... D 3-7 

BGF09... L 3-7 

BGF09 T4 A 3-6 

BGF09 T4 D 3-7 

BGP09... A 3-4 

BGP09... D 3-5 

BGP09 T4 A 3-6 

BGP09 T4 D 3-7 

BGR 6-8 

6-9 

BGU 6-8 

6-9 

BGX 3-12 

4-3 

BT2N 10-7 

BTPM1220 10-5 

BTPM220 10-6 

C11 15-2 

C2 13-8 

15-3 

16-2 

16-3 

C4 13-7 

13-8 

15-3 

16-3 

C5 13-8 

15-3 

16-3 

C6 16-3 

C9 13-8 

15-3 

16-3 

CE106 10-7 

CE107 10-7 

CGL 12-3 

DCRJ 15-3 

DCRK 15-2 

DM1T 13-9 

DM2T 13-9 

DM3T 13-9 

DMK0 13-2 

DMK1 13-3 

13-4 

DMK2 13-7 

DMK3 13-8 

DMK40 13-8 

DMK5 13-7 

DMK6 13-8 

DMK7 13-4 

DMK8 13-2 

DMKSW 13-8 

DP 4-2 

4-3 

DRPL 10-6 

G218 3-14 

4-4 

G222 3-15 

G223 3-15 

G228 5-9 

G230 5-9 

G231 3-17 

G232 3-17 

G233 5-9 

G234 3-30 

G234 4 3-30 

G235 3-30 

G236 3-30 

G236 4 3-30 

G237 3-30 

G237 4 3-30 

G244 5-9 

G258 5-9 

G260 5-9 

G261 5-9 

G262 5-9 

G265 3-17 

G269 3-17 

G270 5-9 

G271 3-17 

G272 3-17 

G273 3-30 

G274 3-30 

G274 4 3-30 

G275 3-30 

G275 4 3-30 

G276 3-30 

G276 4 3-30 

G279 3-30 

G279 4 3-30 



I-II 


® 

electric 

G280 3-14 

4-4 

G281 3-17 

G285 3-17 

G291 5-9 

G318 3-15 

G319 225 3-15 

G322 3-15 

G350 3-22 

G354 3-22 

G355 3-22 

G356 3-22 

G358 3-22 

G360 3-22 

G361 3-22 

G362 3-22 

5-9 

G363 3-22 

5-9 

G370 3-22 

G371 3-22 

G372 5-9 

G373 5-9 

G375 5-9 

G376 5-9 

G380 3-31 

G380 4 3-31 

G381 3-31 

G381 4 3-31 

G382 3-31 

G382 4 3-31 

G383 3-31 

G383 4 3-31 

G384 3-31 

G384 4 3-31 

G385 3-31 

G385 4 3-31 

G418 3-14 

G430 5-9 

G460 3-8 

G464 3-8 

G470 3-30 

G470 4 3-30 

G475 3-30 

G476 3-30 

G481 3-14 

4-4 

G482 3-14 

4-4 

G483 3-14 

4-4 

G484 3-14 

4-4 

G485 3-14 

4-4 

G486 3-14 

4-4 

G487 3-14 

4-4 

G525 3-30 

G525 4 3-30 

G526 3-30 

G526 4 3-30 

G527 3-22 

G528 3-22 

G529 3-22 

G530 3-22 

G611 8-21 

9-17 

G612 8-21 

9-17 

G613 8-21 

9-17 

G614 8-21 

9-17 

G616 1-5 

9-16 

9-17 

G617 1-5 

9-16 

9-17 

G621 9-16 

9-17 

G622 9-16 

9-17 

GN...O68 9-13 

GN...O78 9-13 

GN...O79 9-13 

GN...O88 9-13 

GN...O98 9-13 

GN...O99 9-13 

GN...P 9-14 

9-15 

GN...P25 9-15 

GN...U 9-8 

8-9 

9-10 

9-11 

GN...U11 9-12 

GN...U12 9-12 

GN...U25 9-12 

GN...U65 9-12 

GUS...A 2-2 

GUS...C 2-3 

GUSH 2-3 

GUSS 2-3 

GXM 9-16 

9-17 

GX... U 9-2 

9-3 

9-4 

GX...U11 9-5 

GX...U12 9-5 

GX...U25 9-5 

GX...O68 9-6 

GX...O78 9-6 

GX...O88 9-6 

GX...O98 9-6 

GX...P 9-7 

GX...P25 9-7 

GXA01 9-16 

9-17 

GXA01H 9-16 

9-17 

GXA11 9-16 

9-17 

GXM1 9-16 

9-17 

GXM2 9-16 

9-17 

GXM5 9-16 

9-17 

GXM6 9-16 

K... A 8-2 

K... B 8-3 

K... C 8-4 

K... D 8-5 

K... E 8-6 

8-7 

K... F 8-8 

8-9 

K... H 8-10 

K... L 8-11 

K... M 8-12 

K... N 8-15 

K... P 8-13 

K... Q 8-14 

KG 8-24 

8-25 

KP 8-18 

KR 8-24 

8-25 

KS 8-23 

KXA 8-17 

KXB 8-17 

KXC 8-16 

KXP 8-17 

8-25 

L2PP1A5 7-16 

L2PP1A8 7-16 

L2PP2A8 7-16 

L2PP3A8 7-16 

L2PP4A8 7-16 

L2PP5A8 7-16 

L2PP100 7-16 

L2PP110 7-16 

L2PP115 7-16 

L2PP120 7-16 

L2PP130 7-16 

L2PP150 7-16 

L2PP160 7-16 

L2PP165 7-16 

L2PP170 7-16 

L2PP180 7-16 

L48AP 10-9 

L48M 10-8 

L48 P11 10-9 

L48 P8 10-9 

L48TP 10-8 

L48TPB 10-8 

LM2TA12 7-21 

LM2TA130 7-21 

LM2TA140 7-21 

LM2TA150 7-20 

LM2TA160 7-20 

LM2TA170 7-20 

LM2TA170G 7-20 

LM2TA180 7-21 

LM2TA185 7-20 

LM2TA190 7-20 

LM2TA200 7-21 

LM2TAGB21 7-19 

LM2TAGB2 7-19 

LM2TAGB23. 7-19 

LM2TAGB24 7-19 

LM2TAI23 7-19 

LM2TALA0 7-20 

LM2TALB0 7-20 

LM2TALB048 7-20 

LM2TALB130 7-20 

LM2TALL006 7-20 

LM2TALL024 7-20 

LM2TALL048 7-20 

LM2TALN 7-20 

LM2TALP 7-20 

LM2TAT 7-21 

LM2TAU10 7-20 

LM2TAU101 7-9 

LM2TAU106 7-20 

LM2TAU107 7-21 

LM2TAU108 7-20 

LM2TAU11 7-19 

LM2TAU120 7-17 

LM2TAU13 7-20 

LM2TAU14 7-22 

LM2TAU157 7-21 

LM2TAU167 7-20 

LM2TAU170 7-20 

LM2TAU20 7-19 

LM2TB1 7-2 

LM2TB2 7-2 

LM2TB3 7-3 

LM2TB6 7-3 

LM2TBL10 7-6 

LM2TBL20 7-6 

LM2TBL614 7-6 

LM2TBL624 7-6 

LM2TC 7-17 

LM2TDL400 7-18 

LM2TE 7-17 

LM2TEL400 7-18 

LM2TFL 7-18 

LM2TGL 7-18 

LM2TJ 7-9 

LM2TIL1 7-7 

LM2TL 7-18 

LM2TM 7-18 

LM2TP100 7-8 

LM2TP110 7-8 

LM2TR100 7-4 

LM2TR1196 7-4 

LM2TR2004 7-4 

LM2TS1 7-4 

LM2TS2 7-4 

LM2TS3 7-4 

LM2TS3...G 7-4 

LM2TSL12 7-7 

LM2TSL13 7-7 

LM2TT100 7-18 

LM2TVL230 7-18 

LM2TXL 7-18 

LM2TYL 7-18 

LM2TZL230 7-18 

LMA 1-11 

LMH 1-11 

LMM 1-11 

LMN 1-11 

LMS25 1-10 

LMU 1-11 

LMZ 1-11 

LP2TAU120 6-21 

LP2TB1 6-10 

LP2TB2 6-10 

L2PTB3 6-10 

L2PTB6 6-11 

LP2TB71 6-12 

LP2TB72 6-12 

LP2TB7233 6-12 

LP2TB73 6-12 

LP2TBL10 6-14 

LP2TBL20 6-14 

LP2TBL614 6-14 

LP2TBL71 6-15 

LP2TBL7133 6-15 

LP2TBL72 6-15 

LP2TBL7233 6-15 

LP2TIL2 6-15 

LP2TR100 6-11 

LP2TR1196 6-11 

LP2TR2004 6-11 

LP2TS1 6-13 

LP2TS2 6-13 

LP2TS3 6-13 

LP2TS3G 6-13 

LP2TSL12 6-14 

LP2TSL13 6-14 

LRD 17-2 

LRE 17-2 

LVM20 12-2 

LVM25 12-2 

LVM30 12-2 

LVM40 12-3 

LVMP 12-5 

M...BRF P 6-2 

M...BRF R 6-2 

M...N 6-4 

M...PA 6-4 

M...RA 6-4 

M0P 6-2 

M0R 6-2 



® 

electric 


I-III 

M1P 6-2 

M1R 6-2 

M2 6-4 

M2P 6-2 

M2R 6-2 

M3 6-4 

M3P 6-4 

M3R 6-4 

MX 6-4 

NEONV 1-5 

1-11 

NEONR 1-5 

1-11 

NTC01 15-3 

P330 8-22 

PA96X96 13-7 

13-8 

15-2 

PACR 15-2 

15-3 

16-2 

16-3 

PMA 11-4 

11-5 

PMF 11-5 

PMV10 11-2 

PMV20 11-2 

PMV30 11-2 

PMV40 11-3 

PMV50 11-3 

PMV55 11-2 

PMV60 11-3 

PMV70 11-3 

PS31 12-4 

PS35 12-4 

PX1 13-8 

15-3 

16-3 

RB6 5-9 

RE213 12-4 

RE244 3-15 

RF200 5-8 

RF25 5-4 

RF420 5-8 

RF9 5-2 

RF95 5-4 

RFA 5-2 

5-4 

5-5 

RFS 5-3 

5-6 

RFSA 5-7 

RS1 8-21 

RS2 8-21 

RS3 8-21 

RS13 8-22 

S11 10-9 

S8 10-9 

SCM 12-4 

SM1B 1-2 

SM2A 1-3 

SM3A 1-3 

SMX1 1-4 

1-5 

SMX2 1-8 

SMX9003 1-5 

SMX9010 1-5 

SMX9012 1-5 

SMX9014 1-5 

SMX9018 1-5 

SMX9019 1-5 

SN1 12-3 

TL... C1 8-19 

TL...01 8-19 

TL...05 8-20 

TL...09 8-20 

TL...10 8-20 

8-21 

TL...11 8-20 

TL...12 8-23 

TL...13 8-21 

8-22 

TMD 10-3 

TM LS 10-4 

TM M 10-2 

TM P 10-2 

TM PL 10-3 

TM ST 10-3 

TS...01 8-19 

TS...05 8-19 

TS...09 8-20 

TS13 8-21 

8-22 



LOVATO ELECTRIC CORP. 

Terms and Conditions of Sale in Canada 

The following terms and conditions of sale are subject to change. 

1. GENERAL: These terms and conditions of sale apply to all sales of 

Lovato Electric Corp. (Seller), unless modified in writing by Seller. 

Seller expressly rejects any other terms and conditions as may be 

proposed by the Purchaser. A contract upon the conditions and 

terms herein (including terms of identification of products, 

quantity, shipping and billing) shall be deemed to have been 

entered into when, on receipt of an order, Seller acknowledges 

acceptance in writing. All terms and conditions are printed on 

invoices. All sales are governed by and subject to the laws of the 

Province of Quebec without regard to its conflicts of laws 

provisions. 

Contact Seller for all other details in English or French. 

2. TECHNICAL INFORMATION: Documents such as catalogs, 

drawings, and specifications related to products sold by the Seller 

are to be used only as an approximate guide and may not reflect 

latest designs or accurate technical details of products. Seller 

reserves the right to make any changes in its products that it 

considers necessary in its sole discretion. 

® 



electric

LOVATO ELECTRIC INC. 

Terms and Conditions of Sale in the U.S.A. 

The following terms and conditions of sale are subject to change. 

1. GENERAL: These terms and conditions of sale apply to all sales of 

Lovato Electric, Inc (Seller), unless modified in writing by Seller. 

Seller expressly rejects any other terms and conditions as may be 

proposed by the Purchaser. A contract upon the conditions and 

terms herein (including terms of identification of products, 

quantity, shipping and billing) shall be deemed to have been 

entered into when, on receipt of an order, Seller acknowledges 

acceptance in writing. All sales are governed by and subject to 

the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia without regard to its 

conflicts of laws provisions. 

2. TECHNICAL INFORMATION: Documents such as catalogs, 

drawings, and specifications related to products sold by the Seller 

are to be used only as an approximate guide and may not reflect 

latest designs or accurate technical details of products. Seller 

reserves the right to make any changes in its products that it 

considers necessary in its sole discretion. 

3. PRICES AND QUOTATIONS: Prices are subject to change without 

notice. Written or verbal quotations are valid for 30 days. 

4. TERMS OF PAYMENT: Terms of payment are Net thirty (30) days 

from date of invoice with approved credit as determined by Seller. 

Seller retains exclusive right to determine credit worthiness of 

Purchaser. Payments shall be made in U.S. currency to address of 

Seller without any deductions of any kind. Unpaid accounts may 

result in interruption of supply. In addition, interest may accrue at 

the rate of 1 1/2% per month on unpaid balances but not to 

exceed the maximum permitted by law. 

5. DELIVERY: Delivery terms are FCA, Free Carrier (INCOTERMS 

2000) Seller’s facility, Chesapeake, Virginia with respect to 

shipping costs, risk of loss and title transfer. Seller will not be 

liable for any loss, damage or delay arising out of its failure to 

perform hereunder due to causes beyond its reasonable control, 

including without limitation, acts of God or the Purchaser, acts of 

civil or military authority, fires, strikes, floods, epidemics, 

quarantine restrictions, war, riots, raw materials shortages, delays 

in transportation, or transportation embargoes. In the event of any 

such delay, Seller’s performance date(s) will be extended for that 

length of time as may be reasonably necessary to compensate for 

the delay. 

6. SHIPPING TIMES: Acknowledged dates of delivery in accordance 

with Paragraph 5 are approximate and are based on receipt of all 

necessary information, required materials to complete the order, 

are dependent on prevailing conditions at the time of quotation, 

and are not guaranteed. 

7. LIMITED WARRANTY: Seller warrants for a period of one (1) 

year from delivery in accordance with Paragraph 5, that product 

manufactured by it will be free from defects solely due to 

material, workmanship and design. This warranty does not cover 

defects caused by wear and tear, accident, misuse, improper 

installation,or neglect, as determined solely by Seller. Warranty 

shall be limited to Seller’s option of repair or replacement at 

Seller’s facility. With respect to equipment sold but not 

manufactured by Seller, the warranty obligations of Seller shall in 

all respects conform and be limited to the warranty actually 

extended to Seller by the manufacturer. The foregoing warranties 

do not cover reimbursement for labor, transportation, removal, 

installation or other expenses which may be incurred in 

connection with repair or replacement. 

THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF 

ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR 

STATUTORY, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 

MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR 

PURPOSE, OR PERFORMANCE OR APPLICATION WARRANTIES. 

8. EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES: IN NO EVENT WILL SELLER BE 

LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, 

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY OTHER 

PECUNIARY OR OTHER LOSS WHATSOEVER OF ANY KIND 

ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH 

PRODUCTS SOLD BY IT. SELLER’S MAXIMUM CUMULATIVE 

LIABILITY IS PURSUANT ONLY TO PARAGRAPH 7 AND WILL 

NOT EXCEED THE COST OF THE PRODUCTS SUBJECT TO 

WARRANTY. THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS 

REGARDING DAMAGES APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS. 

9. RETURNS: All returns of Products must be approved in writing 

by Seller prior to return. Non-warranty returns of unused and 

salable Products for credit will be subject to Seller’s return 

policies in effect at the time, including applicable restocking 

charges and other conditions of return. Products returned 

under warranty must be properly packed and shipped to 

Seller-specified locations. 

10. CANCELLATIONS: Any order or partial order cancelled or 

suspended by Purchaser is subject to express written consent 

of Seller. Seller may impose and Purchaser hereby agrees to 

pay reasonable cancellation charges which reflect costs up to 

the time of cancellation or suspension. 

11. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS: No government contract 

regulations or clauses will apply to the Products or this 

agreement or act to bind Seller unless specifically agreed to by 

Seller in writing. Products sold hereunder are not intended to be 

used, nor should they be used, in any nuclear-related application 

either as a “Basic Component” under 10 CFR 21 (United States 

NRC) or otherwise under similar nuclear laws and regulations of 

this or any other country. 

® 



electric

GENERAL INFORMATION 

Typical Full Load Currents 

For Single and Three Phase Electric Motors 

The information in the chart below was obtained from the National 

Electric Code Table 430-148 and 430-150 and from U.L. Industrial 

Control Standard 508. The voltages shown are standard rated motor 

voltages. The currents listed are permitted for system voltage ranges 

of 110-120, 220-240, 440-480, and 550-600 volts. 

The full load current values listed are for motors running at standard 

speeds with normal torque characteristics. Motors which are 

non-standard, such as low speed, high torque or other special 

applications may have higher full load currents. 

Caution: For accurate and reliable motor protection, motor nameplate 

current should be used to obtain actual motor full load amps for all 

motors. 

Inductive Motor - 60Hz 3 Phase [A] 

Horsepower Single Phase Three Phase 

120V 240V 200V 240V 480V 600V 

1 

/10 3.0 1.5 

1 

/8 3.8 1.9 

1 

/6 4.4 2.2 

1 

/4 5.8 2.9 

1 

/3 7.2 3.6 

1 

/2 9.8 4.9 2.5 2.2 1.1 0.9 

3 /4 13.8 6.9 3.2 2.8 1.4 1.1 

1 16 8 4.8 4.2 2.1 1.7 

1 1 /2 20 10 6.9 6 3 2.4 

2 24 12 7.8 6.8 3.4 2.7 

3 34 17 11 9.6 4.8 3.9 

5 56 28 17.5 15.2 7.6 6.1 

7 1 /2 80 40 25.3 22 11 9 

10 100 50 32.2 28 14 11 

15 135 68 48.3 42 21 17 

20 62.1 54 27 22 

25 78.2 68 34 27 

30 92 80 40 32 

40 120 104 52 41 

50 150 130 65 52 

60 177 154 77 62 

75 221 192 96 77 

100 285 248 124 99 

125 359 312 156 125 

150 414 360 180 144 

200 552 480 240 192 

250 604 302 242 

300 722 361 289 

350 828 414 336 

400 954 477 382 

® 



electric

USA 

® 

CAN 

claro@cyberg.it 

® 

electric 


LOVATO ELECTRIC INC. 

124 Robert Hall Court 109 

CHESAPEAKE, VA 23324 

USA 

tel: (757) 545.4700 

fax: (757) 545.2900 

e-mail: info@LovatoUsa.com 


LOVATO ELECTRIC CORP. 

3200 Avenue Jacques Bureau 

LAVAL, QC H7P 0A9 

Canada 

tel: (450) 681.9200 

fax: (450) 681.9884 

e-mail: info@Lovato.ca 

www.Lovato.ca 

PC01 US/CD 09 06 

2007-2008

2 - AA Electric

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?